Lucent Technologies MERLIN LEGEND Release 5.0 System Programming Manual

MERLIN LEGEND®
Communications System
Release 5.0
System Programming
555-650-111
Issue 1
June 1997
Copyright © 1997, Lucent Technologies
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Document 555-650-111
Issue 1
June 1997
Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this book was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is
subject to change. See Appendix A, “Customer Support Information,” for important information.
Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security
Toll fraud is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party, for example, persons other than your company’s
employees, agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf. Note that there may be a risk of toll fraud associated with your
telecommunications system, and if toll fraud occurs, it can result in substantial additional charges for your telecommunications services.
You and your System Manager are responsible for the security of your system, such as programming and configuring your equipment to prevent
unauthorized use. The System Manager is also responsible for reading all installation, instruction, and system programming documents provided
with this product in order to fully understand the features that can introduce risk of toll fraud and the steps that can be taken to reduce that risk.
Lucent Technologies does not warrant that this product is immune from or will prevent unauthorized use of common-carrier telecommunication
services or facilities accessed through or connected to it. Lucent Technologies will not be responsible for any charges that result from such unauthorized use. For important information regarding your system and toll fraud, see Appendix A, “Customer Support Information.”
Federal Communications Commission Statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. For further FCC information, see Appendix A, “Customer
Support Information.”
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference Information
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions set out in the radio interference regulations of the Canadian
Department of Communications.
Le Présent Appareil Numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la classe A
préscrites dans le règlement sur le brouillage radioélectrique édicté par le ministère des Communications du Canada.
Trademarks
5ESS, AUDIX, DEFINITY, HackerTracker, CONVERSANT, Lucent Technologies Attendant, Fax Attendant System, MERLIN, MERLIN
LEGEND, MERLIN MAIL, MERLIN PFC, MLX-10, MLX-10D, MLX-10DP, MLX-16DP, MLX-20L, MLX-28D, PassageWay, PARTNER,
and Voice Power are registered trademarks and 4ESS, ACCULINK, Intuity, Lucent Technologies, MLX-5, MLX-5D, and ExpressRoute 1000 are
trademarks of Lucent Technologies in the U.S. and other countries. NetPROTECT is a service mark of Lucent Technologies in the U.S. and other
countries.
AT&T, MEGACOM, ACCUNET, Magic on Hold, and MultiQuest are registered trademarks of AT&T.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation.
NORTEL is a registered trademark and DMS a trademark of Northern Telecom.
MCI, Prism, and Vnet are registered trademarks of MCI Communications, Inc.
Pipeline is a trademark of Ascend Communications, Inc.
UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Macintosh and Apple are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Ordering Information
Call:
Lucent Technologies Fulfillment Center
Voice 1 800 457-1235 International Voice 765 361-5353
Fax 1 800 457-1764 International Fax 765 361-5355
Write:
Lucent Technologies Fulfillment Center
P.O. Box 4100
Crawfordsville, IN 47933
Order:
Document No. Lucent Technologies 555-650-111, Issue 1, June 1997
For more information about Lucent Technologies documents, refer to the section entitled ‘‘Related Documents’’ on page xii.
Support Telephone Number
In the continental U.S., Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer helpline 24 hours a day. Call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at
1 800 628-2888 or your Lucent Technologies authorized dealer if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using your system.
Consultation charges may apply. Outside the continental U.S., contact your local Lucent Technologies authorized representative.
Lucent Technologies Fraud Intervention
If you suspect you are being victimized by toll fraud and you need technical support or assistance, call BCS National Service Assistance Center at
1 800 628-2888.
Warranty
Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to “Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability” in Appendix A,
“Customer Support Information.”
Heritage Statement
Lucent Technologies—formed as a result of AT&T’s planned restructuring—designs, builds and delivers a wide range of public and private
networks, communications systems and software, consumer and business telephone systems, and microelectronic components. The
world-renowned Bell Laboratories is the research and development arm for the company.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Contents
Page iii
Contents
Contents
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
About This Book
1
2
3
iii
vii
ix
■
Intended Audience
ix
■
How to Use This Book
ix
■
Terms and Conventions Used
x
■
Security
xii
■
Related Documents
xii
■
How to Comment on This Book
xiv
Programming Basics
1-1
■
Introduction to System Programming
1-1
■
System Programming Console
1-3
■
Programming Procedures
1-9
■
Access to System Programming
from the MLX-20 Console
1-41
■
Idle States
1-44
■
Product Enhancements
1-47
Programming with SPM
2-1
■
System Requirements
2-2
■
Installing the SPM Software
2-3
■
Connecting the PC
2-12
■
Accessing SPM
2-15
■
Using SPM
2-19
■
System Programming
2-47
■
Upgrading the System
2-53
■
Surrogate Mode Programming
2-69
Common Administrative Procedures
3-1
■
Introduction
3-1
■
Basic System Operating Conditions
3-3
■
System Renumbering
3-11
■
System Operator Positions
3-19
■
Optional Operator Features
3-25
■
QCC Optional Features
3-28
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Contents
Page iv
4
5
■
Telephones
3-54
■
Fax Machines
3-75
■
Optional Telephone Features
3-80
■
Optional Group Features
3-114
■
Optional Group Calling Features
3-129
■
System Features
3-159
■
Night Service
3-206
■
Labeling
3-219
■
Print Reports
3-233
■
Memory Card
3-240
Programming Procedures
4-1
■
Introduction
4-1
■
Basic System Operating Conditions
4-1
■
System Renumbering
4-13
■
System Operator Positions
4-24
■
Lines and Trunks
4-26
■
DS1 Facilities
4-73
■
Tie Trunks
4-105
■
DID Trunks
4-123
■
PRI Facilities
4-143
■
BRI Facilities
4-210
■
Telephones
4-217
■
Optional Operator Features
4-253
■
QCC Optional Features
4-254
■
Optional Group Features
4-263
■
System Features
4-275
■
Automatic Route Selection
4-315
■
Night Service
4-346
■
Labeling
4-351
■
Print Reports
4-354
■
Data Features
4-359
■
Integrated Administration
4-364
■
Memory Card
4-367
Centralized Telephone Programming
■
Introduction
5-1
5-1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Contents
Page v
A
■
Access to Centralized Telephone Programming
5-2
■
Program Extension
5-3
■
Copy Extension
5-9
■
Feature Quick Reference
5-14
Customer Support Information
A-1
■
Support Telephone Number
A-1
■
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Electromagnetic Interference Information
A-1
Canadian Department of Communications (DOC)
Interference Information
A-2
■
FCC Notification and Repair Information
A-2
■
Installation and Operational Procedures
A-3
■
DOC Notification and Repair Information
A-5
■
Renseignements sur la notification du ministère des
Communications du Canada et la réparation
A-6
■
Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud
A-8
■
Toll Fraud Prevention
A-9
■
Other Security Hints
A-15
■
Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability
A-19
■
Remote Administration and Maintenance
A-20
■
B
Menu Hierarchy
B-1
C
LED Displays
C-1
LED Status
C-1
■
D
General Feature Use and Telephone Programming
D-1
■
General Feature Use Information
D-1
■
Feature Table
D-3
■
Telephone Programming
D-12
E
Button Diagrams
E-1
F
Sample Reports
F-1
■
System Information Report
F-6
■
Dial Plan Report
F-9
■
Label Information Report
F-12
■
Tie Trunk Information Report
F-13
■
DID Trunk Information Report
F-13
■
GS/LS Trunk Information Report
F-14
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Contents
Page vi
G
■
General Trunk Information Report
F-15
■
DS1 Information Report
F-15
■
PRI Information Report
F-16
■
Remote Access (DISA) Information Report
F-18
■
Operator Information Report
F-19
■
Allowed Lists Report
F-21
■
Access to Allowed Lists Report
F-21
■
Disallowed Lists Report
F-22
■
Access to Disallowed Lists Report
F-22
■
Automatic Route Selection Report
F-23
■
Extension Directory Report
F-24
■
System Directory Report
F-25
■
Group Paging Report
F-25
■
Extension Information Report
F-26
■
Group Coverage Information Report
F-28
■
Direct Group Calling Information Report
F-29
■
Night Service Information Report
F-30
■
Group Call Pickup Report
F-31
■
Error Log Report
F-32
■
Authorization Code Information Report
F-32
■
BRI Information Report
F-33
■
Switch 56 Data Information Report
F-33
General System Programming Sequence
System Programming Sequence
G-1
Programming Special Characters
H-1
■
H
G-1
■
Single-Line Telephones
H-1
■
Analog Multiline Telephones
H-2
■
MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephones
H-3
■
MLX Display Telephones
H-4
Glossary
GL-1
Index
IN1
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Issue 1
June 1997
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Page vii
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The exclamation point in an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
When installing telephone equipment, always follow basic safety precautions to reduce the risk of fire, electrical shock, and injury to persons, including:
■
Read and understand all instructions.
■
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on or packed with the product.
■
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
■
Never install a telephone jack in a wet location unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
■
Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone
wiring has been disconnected at the network interface.
■
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
■
Use only Lucent Technologies-manufactured MERLIN LEGEND® Communications System circuit modules, carrier assemblies, and power units in the
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit.
■
Use only Lucent Technologies-recommended/approved MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System accessories.
■
If equipment connected to the analog extension modules (008, 408, 408
GS/LS) or to the MLX telephone modules (008 MLX, 408 GS/LS-MLX) is to
be used for in-range out-of-building (IROB) applications, IROB protectors
are required.
■
Do not install this product near water, for example, in a wet basement location.
■
Do not overload wall outlets, as this can result in the risk of fire or electrical
shock.
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System is equipped with a 3-wire
grounding-type plug with a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only into a
grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace the obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding plug.
■
The MERLIN LEGEND Communications System requires a supplementary
ground.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Issue 1
June 1997
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Page viii
■
Do not attach the power supply cord to building surfaces. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord
will be abused by persons walking on it.
■
Slots and openings in the module housings are provided for ventilation. To
protect this equipment from overheating, do not block these openings.
■
Never push objects of any kind into this product through module openings
or expansion slots, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts, which could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock. Never spill liquid
of any kind on this product.
■
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Use a damp cloth
for cleaning. Do not use cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
■
Auxiliary equipment includes answering machines, alerts, modems, and fax
machines. To connect one of these devices, you must first have a
Multi-Function Module (MFM).
■
Do not operate telephones if chemical gas leakage is suspected in the area.
Use telephones located in some other safe area to report the trouble.
!
WARNING:
■
For your personal safety, DO NOT install an MFM yourself.
■
ONLY an authorized technician or dealer representative shall install, set options, or repair an MFM.
■
To eliminate the risk of personal injury due to electrical shock, DO NOT attempt to install or remove an MFM from your MLX telephone. Opening or removing the module cover of your telephone may expose you to dangerous
voltages.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
Intended Audience
Issue 1
June 1997
Page ix
About This Book
The power and versatility of the MERLIN LEGEND Communication System is
due in part to its many options and features. These options and features have
been recorded on system planning forms and initially programmed at the time of
installation. Changes in use patterns, additional equipment, or a change in
operating mode may necessitate additional system programming.
Intended Audience
This book is intended for system managers–people who plan, program, maintain,
and manage the communication system. It is also intended for qualified support
personnel who are responsible for installation and initial system programming.
How to Use This Book
This book contains all the programming procedures you need to enable your
system to function at peak efficiency. Refer to the following documents for
additional information:
■
Feature Reference describes features in detail and any possible feature
interaction.
■
System Planning describes the System Planning Forms and how to use
them.
‘‘Related Documents’’, later in this section, provides a complete list of system
documentation together with ordering information.
In the USA only, Lucent Technologies provides a toll-free customer Helpline
(1 800 628-2888) 24 hours a day. Call the Helpline, or your Lucent Technologies
representative, if you need assistance when installing, programming, or using
your system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
Terms and Conventions Used
Page x
Terms and Conventions Used
The terms described here are used in preference to other, equally acceptable
terms for describing communications systems.
Lines, Trunks, and Facilities
Facility is a general term that designates a communications path between a
telephone system and the telephone company central office. Technically a trunk
connects a switch to a switch, for example the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System to the central office. Technically, a line is a loop-start
facility or a communications path that does not connect two switches, for example,
an intercom line or a Centrex line. However, in actual usage, the terms line and
trunk are often applied interchangeably. In this book, we use line/trunk and
lines/trunks to refer to facilities in general. Specifically, we refer to digital facilities.
We also use terms such as personal line, ground-start trunk, Direct Inward Dialing
trunk, and so on. When you talk to your local telephone company central office,
ask them what terms they use for the specific facilities they connect to your
system.
Some older terms have been replaced with newer terms. The following list shows
the old term on the left and the new term on the right.
trunk module
trunk jack
station
station jack
analog data station
digital data station
7500B data station
analog voice and analog data station
digital voice and analog data station
analog data-only station
digital data-only station
digital data-only station
digital voice and digital data station
digital voice and 7500B data station
line/trunk module
line/trunk jack
extension
extension jack
modem data station
Terminal Adapter data station
Terminal Adapter data station
analog voice and modem data
MLX voice and modem data
modem data-only station
Terminal Adapter data-only station
Terminal Adapter data-only station
MLX voice and Terminal Adapter
data station
MLX voice and Terminal Adapter
data station
Typographical Conventions
Certain type fonts and styles act as visual cues to help you rapidly understand the
information presented:
Example
Purpose
It is very important that you follow these
steps. You must attach the wristband before touching the connection.
Italics indicate emphasis.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
Terms and Conventions Used
Page xi
The part of the headset that fits over one
or both ears is called a headpiece.
Italics also set off special terms.
If you press the Feature button on an MLX
display telephone, the display lists telephone features you can select. A programmed Auto Dial button gives you
instant access to an inside or outside
number.
The names of fixed-feature, factory-imprinted buttons appear in bold. The names
of programmed buttons are printed as regular text.
Choose Ext Prog from the display
screen.
Plain constant-width type indicates text
that appears on the telephone display or
PC screen.
To activate Call Waiting, dial *11.
Constant-width type in italics indicates
characters you dial at the telephone or
type at the PC.
Product Safety Labels
Throughout these documents, hazardous situations are indicated by an
exclamation point inside a triangle and the word caution or warning.
!
WARNING:
Warning indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause death or severe personal injury if the hazard is not avoided.
!
CAUTION:
Caution indicates the presence of a hazard that could cause minor personal
injury or property damage if the hazard is not avoided.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
Security
Page xii
Security
Certain features of the system can be protected by passwords to prevent
unauthorized users from abusing the system. You should assign passwords
wherever you can and limit knowledge of such passwords to three or fewer
people.
Nondisplaying authorization codes and telephone numbers provide another layer
of security. For more information, see Appendix A, ‘‘Customer Support
Information’’, following Maintenance and Troubleshooting.
Throughout this document, toll fraud security hazards are indicated by an
exclamation point inside a triangle and the words Security Alert.
!
Security Alert:
Security Alert indicates the presence of toll fraud security hazard. Toll fraud
is the unauthorized use of your telecommunications system by an unauthorized party (for example, persons other than your company’s employees,
agents, subcontractors, or persons working on your company’s behalf). Be
sure to read ‘‘Your Responsibility for Your System’s Security’’ on the inside
front cover of this book and ‘‘Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud’’
in Appendix A, ‘‘Customer Support Information’’.
Related Documents
0
In addition to this book, the documents listed below are part of the documentation
set. Within the continental United States, these can be ordered from the Lucent
Technologies BCS Publications Fulfillment Center by calling 1 800 457-1235.
Document No.
555-650-110
555-650-111
555-650-112
555-650-113
555-650-116
555-650-122
555-630-150
555-630-155
555-630-152
Document No.
555-650-124
Title
System Documents
Feature Reference
System Programming
System Planning
System Planning Forms
Pocket Reference
Telephone User Support
MLX-5D™, MLX-10D®, MLX-10DP®, MLX-16DP®,
MLX-28D®, and MLX-20L® Display Telephones User’s Guide
MLX-10D Display Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
MLX-16DP Display Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
MLX-28D and MLX-20L Telephone Tray Cards (5 cards)
Title
MLX-10® and MLX-5™ Nondisplay Telephone User’s Guide
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
Related Documents
555-630-151
555-650-120
555-650-126
555-650-138
555-650-134
555-650-132
555-650-136
555-650-130
555-640-105
555-025-600
555-650-140
Issue 1
June 1997
Page xiii
MLX-10 and MLX-5 Nondisplay Telephone Tray Cards
(6 cards)
Analog Multiline Telephones User’s Guide
Single-Line Telephones User’s Guide
MDC 9000 and MDW 9000 Telephones User’s Guide
System Operator Support
MLX Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
Analog Direct-Line Consoles Operator’s Guide
MLX Queued Call Console Operator’s Guide
Miscellaneous User Support
Calling Group Supervisor’s Guide
Data/Video Reference
BCS Products Security Handbook
Documentation for Qualified Technicians
Installation, Programming, & Maintenance (IP&M) Binder
Includes: Installation, System Programming & Maintenance
(SPM), and Maintenance & Troubleshooting
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
About This Book
How to Comment on This Book
How to Comment on This Book
Page xiv
0
We welcome your comments, both positive and negative. Please use the
feedback form on the next page to let us know how we can continue to serve you.
If the feedback form is missing, write directly to:
Documentation Manager
Lucent Technologies
211 Mount Airy Road, Room 2W226
Basking Ridge, NJ 07920
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
0
Programming Basics
Introduction to System Programming
Programming Basics
Page 1-1
1
This chapter covers the information you need to know before you begin the
programming procedures covered in Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative
Procedures’’ or Chapter 4, ‘‘Programming Procedures’’, and includes the
following:
■
An introduction to system programming basics
■
How to use the system programming console
■
How the programming screens and keys work
■
How to interpret and use the programming procedures
■
How to enter and exit system programming
■
Which system components require idle states for programming
■
New programming features introduced in Release 2.0 and higher
Introduction to System Programming 1
The communications system offers easy-to-use, menu-driven software for system
programming. After your system is installed, you use this software to
accommodate your company’s changing needs for such enhancements and
modifications as upgraded lines, additional modules, and new telephone
programming.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Introduction to System Programming
Planning Forms
Page 1-2
1
Before you begin to program or modify your communications system, you should
familiarize yourself with the system planning forms. Initially, system planning
forms are used to plan your communications system and program your system
during installation. After installation, they remain a source for all programming
information on your communications system database. The information ranges
from the system time and date to specific equipment configurations and feature
programming.
Each planning form is either required or optional:
■
Required forms are necessary to program the system.
■
Optional forms are needed only if the system manager included the
features or options on the forms.
Before you begin to program or modify your system, review the Control Unit
Diagram on system planning Form 1 to identify the module types installed in the
system’s control unit. Use this information to program or modify lines and trunks
and assign or reassign lines to telephones. Check the physical control unit to
verify that the modules are placed in the slots identified on the diagram. Correct
the diagram on Form 1 if there are any discrepancies.
Before you make any changes to your system, be sure to do the following:
■
Mark any system modifications or changes on the appropriate planning
form. Keep your planning forms up to date.
■
Check the Feature Reference for possible feature interactions.
■
Program the system or the system component during the appropriate idle
state. See ‘‘Idle States’’.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
Types of Programming
Page 1-3
1
Listed below are the three types of programming available for the communications
system.
■
System Programming. This type of programming enables the system
manager to program features that affect all or most system users, and
requires one of the following:
— An MLX-20L telephone connected to one of the first five jacks of
the first MLX module in the control unit.
— A PC with System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software.
SPM emulates a system programming console on your PC. The PC
should be connected to the lower port (labeled ADMIN) on the
processor module. A PC with a modem can perform system
programming remotely through the public network or by connecting
to a tip/ring extension jack (012, 016 or 008 OPT module) on the
communications system. A built-in modem in the processor allows
the PC and the communications system to communicate.
■
Extension Programming. This type of programming enables individual
telephone users and system operators (except for QCC operators) to
change their telephone features to meet individual needs. For details about
extension programming, see the appropriate user and operator guides.
■
Centralized Telephone Programming. This type of programming enables
the system manager to program any feature that can be programmed by
individual telephone users or system operators. Some features can be
programmed only in centralized telephone programming. Centralized
telephone programming can be done on the programming console or on a
PC with the SPM software. See Chapter 5, ‘‘Centralized Telephone
Programming’’.
NOTE:
If your system has the Integrated Solution II or Integrated Solution III (IS
II/III) UNIX application, see Chapter 2, ‘‘Programming with SPM’’ for a list
of the appropriate documentation.
System Programming Console
1
The system programming console is an MLX-20L telephone connected to the
system programming jack. When you begin system programming on a new
system for the first time, the console must be connected to the first jack on the first
008 MLX module or 408 GS/LS-MLX module (Release 2.0 and later versions).
This jack is factory set as the system programming jack and as an operator
position. When you program for the first time, you can change the system
programming jack to any one of the first five jacks on the first 008 MLX module or
408 GS/LS-MLX module (Release 2.0 and later versions). This allows you to
program without interfering with the operator’s call handling.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
Page 1-4
You can also have one or two Direct Station Selectors (DSSs) connected to the
system programming console. Each DSS adds 50 extension buttons to the
console, which facilitates assigning features to telephones.
An MLX-20L telephone with a DSS is shown in Figure 1-1
.
Call and Fixed-Feature Buttons
Button Labeling Card
Display Buttons
Handset
Direct
Station Selector
(DSS)
Display Screen
Home
More
Menu
Inspct
00
MLX-20L
Volume
v
v
Feature
Transfer
ABC
DEF
GHI
JKL
MNO
5
6
PQRS
TUV
WXYZ
OPER
#
1
4
HFAI
2
3
Conf
Mute
Drop
Speaker
Hold
7
*
8
0
9
Message Light
Volume Control
Dialpad
Fixed-Feature Buttons (8)
User Cards and Tray
Figure 1-1.
Console Components
MLX-20L Telephone with Direct Station Selector (DSS)
1
Refer to Figure 1-1 for the location of the components described below.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
MLX-20L Console Components
Page 1-5
1
Desk Stand
(not shown)
An adjustable stand on the console and the DSS, allows a 20- or 30degree viewing angle.
Button Labeling
Cards
Cards labeled with the number or feature assigned to each line button.
Contrast Control
(not shown)
A sliding control at the top of the console, used to brighten or dim the
display screen.
Fixed Feature
Buttons
Eight fixed display buttons for most-used features.
Feature for viewing the Feature screen and selecting features.
HFAI (Hands Free Answer on Intercom) for answering voice-announced
calls without the handset.
Mute for turning the speakerphone’s microphone on and off.
Speaker for talking on a call through the speakerphone without lifting the
handset.
Transfer for sending a call to another telephone.
Conf for adding a line or extension to a conference call.
Drop for disconnecting an extension or line from a conference call.
Hold for putting a call on hold.
Dialpad
Number pad for dialing telephone numbers.
Direct Station
Selector
A device that adds extension buttons and other buttons to the console.
Display Buttons
Four fixed display buttons and 10 unlabeled buttons used to view the
different screens and select names, features, and options from the display
screen. See ‘‘Console Buttons’’.
Display Screen
Screen with a 7-line by 24-character display area that shows call
information, features, prompts, date, and time.
Handset
The hand-held part of the console you pick up, talk into, and listen from.
LEDs
(Light-Emitting Diodes) The lights on the console that assist in checking
feature status.
Line Buttons
Twenty buttons to make and receive calls; unlabeled buttons are
programmable for one-step feature use.
Message Light
A red light that signals a waiting message.
User Cards
and Tray
A slide-out drawer with erasable cards for noting telephone numbers and
feature codes.
Volume Control
A button for adjusting the volume of the speaker, handset, headset, and
ringer.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
Page 1-6
1
DSS Components
Covers
Removable plastic covers to protect the designation cards. The top
cover protects the 50 DSS button labels. The lower cover fits over
the fixed buttons.
DSS Designation
Cards
Cards for labeling the extension or feature assigned to each button.
DSS Buttons
Fifty buttons used for one-touch dialing of co-workers’ extensions
to make or transfer calls. DSS buttons are also used to page
co-workers over speakerphones, to park calls, and to handle
outside calls.
Fixed Buttons
Ten additional buttons, including Message Status, Direct Voice
Mail and three Page buttons. The five remaining buttons on the
first DSS are not used. If a second DSS is connected to the
console, the 10 buttons at the bottom of the second DSS are not
used.
Fixed Message Status button used with fixed Page buttons to see
which telephones have Message Lights on.
Fixed Page Buttons are three buttons used to select the pages of
extensions that the 50 DSS buttons represent.
LEDs
(Light-Emitting Diodes) The lights that assist in checking feature
status.
1
Console Buttons
Use the 14 buttons located on either side of the console display area for system
programming. These buttons are arranged in two columns of seven buttons, as
shown in Figure 1-2.
Directory
Messages
Posted Msg
Alarm Clock
Timer
Figure 1-2.
Sys Program
Maintenance
Ext Program
Display Buttons and Main Menu
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
Fixed Display Buttons
Page 1-7
1
The top two buttons in each column have the same labels and functions
regardless of the screen display. This type of button is called a fixed display
button. Table 1-1 describes the functions of the fixed display buttons.
Table 1-1.
Fixed Display Buttons
Button
Function
Home
Return to normal call-handling mode after you finish programming.
Menu
Display the main menu shown in Figure 1-2.
More
Display more items when a menu is continued on more than one
screen, indicated by an angle bracket (>) on the upper right of the
screen.
Inspct
(Inspect) View a list of lines or extensions on which a feature is
programmed or the settings for a feature.
Unlabeled Display Buttons
1
Use the five unlabeled display buttons on each side of the screen to select
commands, options, or items on the screen. The functions of these buttons vary,
based on the option you select.
If you are using SPM for system programming, the simulated MLX-20L console
screen on your PC screen shows the function keys that correspond to the console
screen selections. This book shows function keys in a box: . For example, to
save an entry, you select Enter on the console or press on your PC. See
Chapter 2, ‘‘Programming with SPM’’, for details about using function keys and
additional information about SPM.
Console Overlay
1
The programmable line buttons are on the main part of the console. There are
actually 20 line buttons on the console, but you can use the console overlay to
program up to 34 line buttons on any extension through centralized telephone
programming. Select Page 1 to access line buttons 1 through 20 and Page 2 to
access line buttons 21 to 34. The top line of numbers next to each line button on
the console overlay represents line buttons. See Figure 1-3 below.
Appendix E shows the button diagrams for the telephones used in the
communications system. Refer to this appendix when programming buttons for
other telephones.
When labels or filenames are entered, the letters A through F are displayed on
the MLX-20L console screen. Additional letters can be entered by using line
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
System Programming Console
Page 1-8
buttons 1 to 20 to represent letters G through Z. These letters are also displayed
on the top line of the console overlay.
Line 1
Line 21
Line 14
Line 34
G 5 / 25
5 25 45 65
10 / 30 H
1O 30 50 70
I 15 /
15 35 55 75
20 / J
20 40 60 80
K 4 / 24
4 24 44 64
9 / 29 L
9 29 49 69
M 14 / 34
14 34 54 74
19 / N
19 39 59 79
O 3 / 23
3 23 43 63
8 / 28 P
8 28 48 68
Q 13 / 33
13 33 53 73
18 / R
18 38 58 78
S 2 / 22
2 22 42 62
7 / 27 T
7 27 47 67
U 12 / 32
12 32 52 72
17 / V
17 37 57 77
Y 11 / 31
11 31 51 71
16 / Z
16 36 56 76
W 1 / 21
1 21 41 61
6 / 26 X
6 26 46 66
Top Sys Prog
Switchhook Flash
Stop/Drop Entry
Pause
Figure 1-3.
Console Overlay
When programming lines/trunks, you can select a block of 20 lines/trunks as
shown on the screen below, and toggle the green or red LED associated with
each line button on the console to program each line/trunk. The bottom line of
numbers next to each line button on the console overlay represents the twenty
lines/trunks associated with each line button. See Figure 1-3 above.
OutTrunk Dial:
Enter Trunks w/TouchTone
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
For a single line, go to
l Single Line Procedure.
Entry Mode
For a block of lines, go to
u Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
Figure 1-4.
Selecting a Block of Lines/Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Console and DSS Lights
Page 1-9
1
The red and green lights (LEDs) next to each of the 20 line buttons show the
status of the line/trunk options. LEDs on the DSS show the status of features
programmed on extensions. See Appendix C, ‘‘LED Displays’’, for more
information.
Console Lights
1
The green and red LEDs next to each button on the console display the status of
the line/trunk option that is being programmed. For example when you select
Pools from the Lines Trunks menu, the red LED is off if the selected line is not in a
pool and on if the line is in a pool. Appendix C, ‘‘LED Displays’’, provides a table
that shows the default LED status for line/trunk options.
DSS Lights
1
The lights on the DSS (if one is attached to the console) show the status of
features being programmed on the extensions. When you select a feature from a
menu, the red LED next to the DSS button is on, off, or flashing, depending on
whether the feature is programmed on the corresponding extension. For example,
when you select Toll Restrict from the Restrictions menu, the red LED next to
the DSS button lights for each toll-restricted extension. Appendix C, ‘‘LED
Displays’’, provides a table that shows the default DSS status of LEDs for system
features.
Programming Procedures
1
The programming procedures provide step-by-step instructions for programming
the communications system. This section details how to make the best use of the
programming procedures.
Procedure Organization
1
The programming procedures in Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative
Procedures’’, and Chapter 4, ‘‘Programming Procedures’’ are organized into
logical groups. The programming procedures associated with a specific aspect of
the system are grouped together under one heading. For example, to assign
network services for PRI, you would go to the section titled ‘‘Primary Rate
Interface (PRI)’’ and then locate the network services procedure. For quick
reference, see “System Programming Hierarchy” for a list of procedures, based
on the menu hierarchy in Appendix B, that traces the menu path for a specific
function.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Procedure Contents
Page 1-10
1
Each procedure begins with a general description of the feature, followed by a
summary of programming information that includes the items listed below.
Programmable by
Indicates who has permission to use the procedure.
Mode
Specifies which system mode supports the procedure: Key,
Hybrid/PBX, Behind Switch, or a combination.
Idle condition
Specifies the idle state required before the procedure can
be performed.
Planning form
Indicates the planning forms that provide information for the
procedure.
Factory setting
Shows the default settings, if any, for equipment or features
affected by the procedure.
Valid entries
Specifies the characters, numbers, or values accepted
during data entry.
Inspect
Specifies whether or not the feature status can be verified
using the Inspect feature.
Copy option
Indicates whether or not the feature programmed with the
procedure can be copied to another system component.
Console Procedure
Provides a summary of the procedure steps using the
system console.
PC Procedure
Provides a summary of the procedure steps using SPM.
This list is followed by the step-by-step programming procedure for the feature.
See ‘‘Using the Programming Procedures’’ for complete information about how to
use the programming procedures.
Programming Screens
1
There are three types of system programming screens:
■
Information screens, to view what is currently programmed on the system.
■
Menu selection screens, to select options from a menu.
■
Data entry screens, to enter values or to identify a specific extension or
line/trunk you want to program.
Figure 1-5 shows a sample information screen. When you select Sys Program
from the main menu screen (shown in Figure 1-2), the screen shown in
Figure 1-5 appears with system setup information
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-11
Your system information appears in
place of the x’s.
System Set-up
Review and Exit
Size: xxxx
Type: xxxx
Operator: xxxx xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx xxxx
Exit
Figure 1-5.
Information Screen
You cannot make changes on an information screen. Select Exit ( on the PC)
to continue to the next screen in the procedure.
Figure 1-6 shows a sample menu selection screen.
System Programming:
>
Make a Selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Figure 1-6.
Screen title and More indicator (>)
Prompt
Options
Menu Selection Screen
A menu selection screen prompts you to select one of the available options. The
screen title is the first line on all screens. The second line contains a system
prompt or instruction. The remaining lines of text vary, based on the selected
option.
An angle bracket (>) appears in the upper right corner of menu selection screens
that have additional option screens. Press More (or U on the PC) to see the
additional screens. Continue to press More to move through the screens and
return to the original screen.
Figure 1-7 shows a sample data entry screen.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Assign Lines/Trunks:
Enter extension
Page 1-12
Option Selected
Prompt
Data Entry Area
Backspace
Exit
Figure 1-7.
Enter
Data Entry Screen
A data entry screen prompts you to enter specific data or to make specific
choices. Data to be entered will be displayed with ns in the text. When ns appear
on the data entry screen they indicate data currently programmed for the feature.
An exception is the slot/port number which is displayed as sspp to distinguish the
2-digit slot number from the 2-digit port number.
Many screens show data entered on a previous screen, such as an extension or
trunk number. Within the programming procedures, this type of variable
information is shown with x’s.
When information to be entered varies in the number of digits required (for
example, a telephone number that can range from 7 to 20 digits), the data may be
displayed as an uppercase X or N.
Data entry screens may also contain menu selections. Instead of entering data
from the dialpad, you select options on the screen, such as Yes or No, to enable or
disable a feature. To select this type of option, press either the unlabeled display
button next to the option name, or the function key that corresponds to the option
name. Then your selection is highlighted. To program or save the highlighted
selection, you press the unlabeled display button next to Enter ( on the PC).
Verifying Data Entry
1
You can use the Inspect feature to view the entries you save. An example of how
to use the Inspect feature begins with Figure 1-8. The figure shows a data entry
screen with the first of two required extension numbers needed to assign analog
voice and data.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-13
Enter voice/data pair
Selected Option
Prompt
7108
Extension entered
Data Voice/Data
>
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Figure 1-8.
Enter
Inspect Example
After you enter and save 7108, the system automatically assigns the next
sequential extension jack number. This extension jack pair does not appear on
the data entry screen; however, if you press Inspct (D on the PC), the pair
appears, as shown on the sample Inspect screen in Figure 1-9.
Voice/Data Pairs:
7108
>
7109
Inspect data displayed
Exit
Figure 1-9.
Sample Inspect Screen
Whenever you want to return to the previous screen, select Exit ( on the PC).
The Inspect feature also allows you to check a value currently programmed for a
feature. This is helpful when you are changing or modifying features. You can also
use it when you program sequential extensions or lines to verify the last number
programmed. See the Feature Reference for details about the Inspect feature.
Using the Programming Procedures
1
This section contains specific information about how to make the best use of the
programming procedures. Make certain that you read and understand the
information presented here before you begin any system programming
procedures.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-14
1
Format
The programming procedures are presented as numbered steps in the format
shown below.
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
The step instruction is shown here.
Console Display
Press here
On the PC, press the function key that
appears in the PC column.
Ð
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 69).
Enter B-Channel Groups:x
x = B-channel entered in Step 1
Enter the group number:
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
The Step Line
1
The step line contains the step number and instructions. The step may also
contain symbols that direct you to a branch procedure. (See ‘‘Branching’’.)
Sometimes, the step contains data entry information, which follows the step
instruction and is shown in parentheses. You use the (nn = ) value in the gray bar
to replace the variable [nn] in the instruction. For example, in sample Step 2, the
parenthetical statement (nn = 1 to 69) indicates that 1 through 69 are acceptable
entries for the group number that you dial or type.
Console/Display Instructions Header
In most cases, the screen shown in the console display area contains the results
of the previous step. A step with no screen indicates that you should look at the
preceding step. The console key that corresponds to the option you are to select
is highlighted in black, as shown in sample Step 1 above. The function key that
corresponds to the highlighted console option is shown in the right column under
the PC header.
When more than one but fewer than six options may be selected from the screen,
each console key for each option is highlighted in gray, as shown in sample Step
3 below. To prevent clutter, when six or more options may be selected, no
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-15
highlighting is shown. See ‘‘Additional Information and PC Headers’’ for more
information about how more than five options are presented.
1
Additional Information and PC Headers
The information displayed under the Additional Information header may contain
notes, a value entered in a previous step, branching instructions, general
information, or specific instructions.
Sample Step 2 shows a typical display of a value entered in a previous step. The
x corresponds to the x shown on the console screen. Variable screen information
is always shown as xs or ns in italics.
Variable input information is always shown in brackets ([]), as xs or ns in italics.
In data entry steps, the area under the Additional Information header contains
instructions that apply to both the console and the PC. In such cases, the PC
column contains the symbol Ã. When you see this symbol, follow the instructions
under the Additional Information header, for example:
Dial or type [nn].
On the console, dial the entry; on the PC, type the entry.
You also see the à symbol when six or more options can be selected from a
screen. Rather than highlighting all of the options and showing all of the PC keys,
the Additional Information header contains instructions for both, for example:
Press the button or function key next to your selection.
On the console, press the key next to your selection; on the PC press the function
key next to your selection.
Branching
1
Many of the procedures contain features that have multiple programming options,
while other procedures show more than one way to program a particular feature.
To accommodate both of these programming methods, the procedures use
branching. Branching separates the options from the main procedure and places
them in subprocedures (branch procedures).
The screen shown in sample Step 3 displays three menu selections for the
Network Services feature. The procedure is broken into three branches (or branch
procedures) to accommodate the three menu options.
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-16
lun
Specify a network service.
Network Services:
Make a selection
If you select AT&T Toll, go to
l AT&T Toll Procedure.
AT&T Toll
If you select Local, go to
u Local Procedure.
Local
Misc
If you select Misc, go to
n Miscellaneous Procedure.
Exit
If necessary, continue with this step when you complete the branch procedure.
In the step line, the symbols (l u n ▲ ✚ ‹ ✱) alert you to a step that contains
branching. The number of symbols in the gray bar indicates the number of
available options/branches for that step and make it easy to locate the branch
procedure that you want. All branch procedures follow the main procedure from
which they are branched.
The first branch procedure from sample Step 3 is shown below.
l AT&T Toll Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify a service.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
MegacomWATS
MULTIQUEST
ACCUNET SDS
LongDistnce
SoftDefNetw
Megacom 800
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 of the main procedure for each toll group number.
For additional toll services, go to Step 1; then continue with Step 5.
Return to Step 4 of the main procedure.
Each branch procedure is self-contained and begins with Step 1. Be sure to
complete all of the steps in a branch procedure before you return to the main
procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-17
The examples in the following text refer to Steps 1 through 5 of the l AT&T Toll
Procedure (above), which is a branch of the Network Services procedure.
When you are to repeat a step within the branch procedure, you are instructed to
go to that step. For example, at Step 4 of the branch procedure you would go
back to Step 1 of the branch procedure and repeat branch Steps 1 through 4 for
additional toll services. If you did not need to enter any other toll services, you
would continue with Step 5 of the branch procedure.
When a branch step instructs you to return to the main procedure, the branch
procedure is complete. At Step 5 of the branch procedure you would return to
Step 4 of the Network Services procedure to continue. In some cases, you can
select Exit ( on the PC) to return to the menu where the branch begins; these
are noted in specific programming procedures. In cases where completing the
branch procedure also completes the main procedure you are instructed to select
Exit ( on the PC) one or more times to return to the system programming
menu.
1
Single or Block Items
Branching is also used when you can select between programming a single item
or a block of items, such as a single line or a block of lines, as shown in sample
Step 5.
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
lu
Specify the line(s).
B-Channel Group xx:
PC
xx = number entered in Step 2
Assign lines
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
To select a single line, go to
l Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Exit
To select a block of lines, go to
u Block of Lines Procedure.
Continue with this step when you complete the branch procedure.
l Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
And so on ...
Return to Step 6 of the main procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-18
u Block of Lines Procedure
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons
on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
And so on ...
Return to Step 6 of the main procedure.
Saving Entries and Moving Among Screens
1
At the bottom of each screen are one or more screen keys with functions that
allow you to change your entry, save your entry, or return to a previous screen.
Various combinations of these screen keys appear on each programming screen.
Figure 1-10 shows the QCC Priority screen with a typical display of screen keys.
x = QCC Priority entered in earlier Step
QCC Priority x:
Enter line/trunk number
xxx = line/trunk number (801–880)
xxx
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Figure 1-10. Screen Keys
The PC keys that correspond to the screen key selections are shown here for
quick reference. These PC keys do not appear on the console display screen.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-19
Table 1-2 contains details on the use of the screen keys.
Table 1-2.
Screen Keys
Display
Key
BackSpace
Function
or
"
Enter
or
2
Delete
Next
Exit
Change your entry. Select Backspace ( or
" on the PC) to correct your entry. Each time
you press the key, the screen cursor moves
backward to erase one character at a time.
Save your entry. Typically, you select Enter ( or
2 on the PC) to complete a procedure and
save the information. Occasionally, you must select
Exit ( on the PC) and return to a previous
screen after you use Enter. If the entry is not valid,
the system may beep and/or display an error
message and does not save the entry.
Delete a current entry. Select Delete ( on the
PC) to delete (or remove) a current entry.
Program sequentially numbered items. If you are
programming a group of sequentially numbered
extensions, lines, or trunks, you may have the option
to select Next ( on the PC). This saves your entry
and automatically provides the number of the next
extension or trunk in the sequence. Typically, you
remain at the same screen until you select Next. In
a few cases, you may return to an earlier screen in
the procedure.
Return to the previous screen. Select Exit (
on the PC) when you complete a procedure, to move
up one screen in the menu hierarchy. (Appendix B
provides a reference to the entire System
Programming menu hierarchy.)
Exit a screen without changes. In most cases, you
select Exit ( on the PC) to exit from a screen
without making any changes. Exceptions are noted
as part of a procedure.
Complete a procedure. In a few cases, you return
to the System Programming menu when you select
Exit. In most cases, you return to an intermediate
step within the procedure. You can then select one
of the options shown on the screen and continue
programming, or you can continue to use Exit until
you return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-20
1
Using Enter
Pressing Enter to save your entry has one of the following results:
■
The next screen in the procedure appears. See Steps 4 and 5 in the
sample procedure below.
■
The screen does not change and you can enter another extension or
line/trunk. In most of these cases, Delete is also an option. Enter is used
either to assign the extension to a group or to assign a feature to the
extension. Delete is used to remove the extension from a group or to
remove the feature from the extension. See Steps 5 and 6 in the sample
procedure below for an example of this type of screen.
■
The procedure is complete and you return to a previous screen.
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
BIS/HFAI Extensions:
Enter extensions
xxxx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Assign or remove BIS/HFAI capability.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or
remove BIS/HFAI capability to additional
extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Page 1-21
1
Using Next
When you are programming a feature that can apply to a sequence of extensions,
lines/trunks, or groups, the screen key Next appears on the console display. Next
( on the PC) permits you to save your current entry and display the next
number in the sequence. You can continue to press Next until you finish
programming the entire sequence. When the last number in the sequence
displays on the screen, press Enter ( or 2 on the PC) to save the final
entry and move to the next step of the procedure. Procedures that allow the use of
Next direct you to the correct screen to continue programming as shown in Step 6
in the example below below.
NOTE:
If you plan to take advantage of this key, remember to enter the lowest
number in the sequence at the first prompt.
Specify whether the operator receives the alert.
QCC Operator xxxx:
xxxx = operator entered in Step 1
Select one
InQue Alert Enable
InQue Alert Disable
Next
Exit
Enter
Select InQue Alert Enable or
InQue Alert Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next
Use Next to program the next QCC position. Go
to Step 5.The next QCC operator will be displayed on Line 1. After programming the last
QCC operator position, select enter and go to
Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
System Programming Hierarchy
1
The following table shows all of the options that are available under each of the
System Programming main menu options displayed on the system programming
console. Following the option name is a brief description of the option and the
page number where detailed instructions can be found.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-22
Main menu options are shown in a separate box. First-level options are bold,
second-level options are preceded by an asterisk (*). The remaining levels are
shown with increasing degrees of indentation.
Description
Page
Restart the system (cold start)
Extension used for system programming
Sets the system mode. See Equipment
and Operations
4-2
3-3
4-7
Renumber boards that have already been installed
Enable Automatic Maintenance Busy
4-5
4-9
Disable Automatic Maintenance Busy
System date
System time
3-7
3-9
System
Restart
SProg Port
Mode
* Key
* Hybrid/PBX
* BehindSwitch
Board Renum
MaintenBusy
* Enable
- Auto Busy
Tie Trunks
- Enable
- Disable
* Disable
Date
Time
Back/Restore
* Backup
* Restore
* Auto Backup
- Off
- Daily
- Weekly
Back up system programming to a memory card
Restore system programming from a memory card
Automatic backup
Turn off automatic backups
Daily backups of system programming
Weekly backups of system programming
3-241
4-377
3-245
Description
Page
Default extension numbering plans
4-19
SysRenumber
Default Numbering
* 2-Digit
* 3-Digit
* SetUp Space
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
SysRenumber
Single
* Lines
* Extensions
* Pools
* Group Page
* GrpCalling
* Adjuncts
* Park
* ARS DialOut
* RemoteAccs
* DSS Buttons
* ListDirctNo
Block
* Lines
* Extensions
* Adjuncts
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-23
Page
Continued
Single extension renumbering
Lines/Trunks
Extensions
Pools (Hybrid/PBX only)
Paging Group
Calling Group
Adjuncts
Park
Automatic Route Selection dial out (Hybrid/PBX only)
Remote Access
Page buttons on the DSS
Listed directory number
Block extension renumbering
3-13
Description
Page
System operator positions
Direct-Line Console (DLC)
Queued Call Console (QCC)
QCC optional features (Hybrid/PBX mode only)
Hold Return
3-18
3-22
3-20
3-28
3-28
Automatic hold or release
3-30
Queue over threshold
Elevate priority
Calls-In-Queue Alert
3-32
3-33
3-35
3-16
Operator
Positions
* Direct Line*
* Queued Call*
Queued Call
* Hold Rtrn
- Return to Queue
- Remain on Hold
* HoldRelease
- Auto Hold
- Auto Release
* Threshold
* ElvatePrior
* InQue Alert*
- InQue Alert Enable
- InQue Alert Disable
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
Operator
* Call Types
- Dial 0
- Priority
- Operator
- Follow/Frwd
- Unassign DID
- Priority
- Operator*
- ListedNumber
- Priority
- Operator
- QCC Ext
- Returning
- Priority
- Operator
- GrpCoverage
- Priority
- Operator*
* Msg Center*
* ExtndComplt
- Automatic Complete
- Manual Complete
* Return Ring
* QCC Backup
* Voice Annc
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
* Auto Hold Enable
* Auto Hold Disable
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-24
Page
Continued
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
Dial 0 Calls
3-37
Forward/Follow Me Calls
DID call to invalid destinations
Calls to the Listed Directory Number
QCC Extension calls
Returning calls
Group Coverage calls
Message center operation
Extended call completion
3-46
3-48
Return Ring
Position Busy Backup
Voice Announce for QCC
Systemwide hold timer for QCCs and DLCs
DLC Operator Automatic Hold
3-49
3-51
3-53
3-25
3-26
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
LS/GS/DS1
* (DS1)
- Type
- T1
- GroundStart
- Loop Start
- TIE
- TIE-PBX
- Toll
- S56
- Unequipped
- All Ground
- All Loop
- All TIE
- TIE-PBX
- Toll
- S56
- All Unequip
- DID
- All DID
- S56 Data
- Direction
- Intype
- Outtype
- AnsSupv
- Disconnect
- Inmode
- Outmode
- All S56Data
- Direction
- Intype
- Outtype
- AnsSupv
- Disconnect
- Inmode
- Outmode
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-25
Page
Lines/Trunks options
Loop-start, ground-start or DS1 options
DS1 options
Type of DS1 facility
Ground-start emulation on selected channels
Loop-start emulation on selected channels
Tie Trunk emulation on selected channels
Tie-PBX transmit/receive loss parameter
Toll transmit/receive loss parameter
Switched 56 Data
Unused channels
Ground-start emulation on all channels
Loop-start emulation on all channels
Tie Trunk emulation on all channels
Tie-PBX transmit/receive loss parameter
Toll transmit/receive loss parameter
Switched 56 Data
All channels unequipped
DID emulation on selected channels
DID emulation on all channels
Switched 56 Data
All Switched 56 Data
4-73
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
-PRI
- Frame Format
- D4 Compatible
- Extended Super
Frame
-Suppression
- AMI ZCS
- B8ZS
- Signaling
- Robbed Bit
- Common
Channel
- Line Comp
- ChannelUnit
- Foreign
Exchange
- Special Access
* (4xx GS/LS)
- GroundStart
- LoopStart
- All Ground
- All Loop
* (8xx GS/LS)
- GroundStart
- LoopStart
- All Ground
- All Loop
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-26
Page
Continued
Primary Rate Interface
4-94
Type of zero code suppression
4-96
Signaling mode
4-98
Line Compensation
Type of equipment provided by local telephone company
Line/Trunk type for 4xx GS/LS module
Line/Trunk type for 8xx GS/LS module
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
LinesTrunks
Tie Lines
* Direction
- Two Way
- OutGoing
- Incoming
* Intype
- Wink
- Delay
- Immed
- Auto
* Outtype
- Wink
- Delay
- Immed
- Auto
* E&M Signal
- Type 1S
- Type 1C
- Type 5
* Inmode
* Outmode
* Dialtone
* AnsSupvr
* Disconnect
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-27
Continued
Tie trunks direction
4-105
Signaling type: incoming tie trunk.
4-107
Signaling type: outgoing tie trunk
4-107
Type of tie trunk signal
4-110
Set incoming tie trunk to touch tone or rotary
Set outgoing tie trunk to touch tone or rotary
Tie trunk dial tone
Tie trunk answer supervision time
Tie trunk disconnect time
4-112
4-112
4-115
4-118
4-120
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
TT/LS Disc
* OutMode
* LS Disconnect
- Yes
- No
DID
* Block
* Type
- Immed
- Wink
* Disconnect
* ExpectDigit
* DeleteDigit
* Add Digits
* Signaling
- Rotary
- Touch Tone
* InvalDstn
- Send To Backup
Extension
- Return Fast Busy
PRI
* PhoneNumber
* B-ChannelGRP
- Lines
- Network Serv
- AT&T Toll
- MegacomWATS
- ACCUNET SDS
- SoftDefNetw
- Megacom 800
- MULTIQUEST
- LongDistnce
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-28
Page
Continued
Outmode Signaling for loop- or ground-start trunks
Disconnect signaling reliability
4-29
4-38
DID Trunk Options
DID trunk type
4-123
4-127
DID trunk disconnect time
Expected digits
Delete digits
Add digits
Type of dialing signal
4-129
4-132
4-134
4-136
4-139
Directing outside calls on invalid extension
4-141
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) trunk options
Telephone number to each PRI channel
Assign B-channel groups.
Assign lines to B-channel groups
Network service
AT&T toll service
4-143
4-147
4-153
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
- Local
- OUTWATS
- 56/64 Digit
- VirtPrivNet
- INWATS
- Misc
- Other
- CallByCall
- Copy Number
- Copy PhnNum
to NumToSend
- Do Not Copy
Phone Number
- IncomingRtg
- Routing by Dial
Plan
- Route by Line
Appearance
* NumberToSend
- Extension Only
- Base Number with
Ext.
- Line Telephone
Number
* Test TelNum
* Protocol
- Timers
- T200 Timer
- T203 Timer
- N200Counter
- N201Counter
- K Counter
- T303 Timer
- T305 Timer
- T308 Timer
- T309 Timer
- T310 Timer
- T313 Timer
- T316 Timer
- TEI
Page 1-29
Page
Continued
Local service
Miscellaneous network service
Copy telephone number to send
4-157
Incoming Routing
4-160
Telephone number to send to the network
4-162
Line/trunk test telephone number
4-166
Timers and counters
4-169
Terminal equipment identifier
4-173
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
*DialPlanRtg
- Service
- AT&T Toll
- Megacom 800
- ACCUNET SDS
- SoftDefNetw
- MULTI QUEST
- MegacomWATS
- LongDistnce
- Local
- INWATS
- 56/64 Digit
- VirtPrivNet
- OUTWATS
- Misc
- Other
- Any Service
- No Service
- Patterns
- TotalDigits
- DeleteDigit
- Add Digits
* OutgoingTbl
- NetwkSelect
- SpecialServ
- Pattern
- Operator
- Local Operator
- Presubscribed
Carrier
- No Operator
- Typeof
Number
- National
- International
- DeleteDigit
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-30
Page
Continued
Dial Plan Routing
Service
AT&T toll service
4-176
Local service
Miscellaneous service
Outgoing tables
Network selection
Special services
4-189
4-192
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
- CBC Service
- Patterns
- Voice Data
- Voice Only
- Data Only
- Voice/Data
- NetworkServ
- AT&T Toll
- Megacom WATS
- ACCUNET SDS
- SoftDefNetw
- LongDistnce
- Local
- OUTWATS
- 56/64 Digit
- VirtPrivNet
- Misc
- Other
- No Service
- Delete Digit
Copy
* Single
* Block
Remote Access
* LinesTrunks
- Dedicated
- Shared
- No Remote
* Non-TIE
- BarrierCode
- Barrier Code
Required
- BarrierCode Not
Required
- Restriction
- Unrestricted
- Outward Restrict
- Toll Restrict
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-31
Page
Continued
Call by Call service
4-199
Network service
AT&T toll service
Local service
Miscellaneous service
Number of digits to delete
Copy options for lines/trunks
4-68
Remote Access options
Remote Access trunk assignment
4-296
Non-Tie Lines: Remote Access options
Barrier code requirements
Non-Tie trunk restriction
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
- ARS Restrict
- Allow List
- DisallowLst
* TIE Lines
- BarrierCode
- Barrier Code
Required
- BarrierCode Not
Required
- Restriction
- Unrestricted
- Outward Restrict
- Toll Restrict
- ARS Restrict
- Allow List
- Disallow List
* BarrierCode
- SProg/Maint
- Code Info
- Code Length
- Code Entry
- Restriction
- Unrestricted
- Outward Restrict
- Toll Restrict
- ARS Restrict
- Allow List
- DisallowLst
* AutoQueuing
- Enable
- Disable
Pools
Toll Type
HoldDiscnct
PrncipalUsr
QCC Prior
QCC Oper
LS-ID Delay
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-32
Page
Continued
Non-Tie trunk ARS Facility Restriction Level
Non-Tie trunk Allowed Lists assignment
Non-Tie trunk Disallowed Lists assignment
Tie lines: Remote Access options
Barrier code requirements
4-305
Tie trunk restriction
Tie and DID trunk ARS Facility Restriction Level
Tie and DID trunk Allowed Lists assignment
Tie and DID trunk Disallowed Lists assignment
Barrier code options
Not currently available
Barrier code information
Barrier code length
Barrier code assignment
Remote Access with barrier code: restrictions
4-311
Remote Access with barrier code: ARS Restriction
Remote Access with barrier code: Allowed Lists
Remote Access with barrier code: Disallowed Lists
Automatic Callback on busy pools or extensions
4-298
Trunk to Pools assignment
Toll prefix (1 or 0) requirement
Hold disconnect interval
Principal user for personal line
QCC queue priority level
QCC operator to receive calls
LS-ID delay for 800 LS-ID module
4-65
4-40
4-43
4-46
4-49
4-52
4-56
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
LinesTrunks
Clock Sync
* Primary
- Loop
- Local
* Secondary
- Loop
- Local
* Tertiary
- Loop
- Local
BRI
* SPID/DN
* Timers
- T200 Timer
- T203 Timer
- T303 Timer
- T305 Timer
- T308 Timer
T1 Data NW
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-33
Page
Continued
Clock Synchronization (100D or 800 CO-BRI modules)
Primary Clock
4-59
Secondary Clock
Tertiary Clock
Basic Rate Interface
Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN)
BRI Timers
4-210
4-213
Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing
4-90
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-34
Description
Page
Lines or trunks (buttons on a telephone)
Copy outside line/trunk options
3-54
3-59
Pool dial-out code restrictions
Outward/toll restrictions
3-84
3-86
Copy calling restrictions, Allowed Lists, and Disallowed
Lists
3-89
Account code entry
Built in Speakerphone/Hands Free Answer on Intercom
Call pickup group
Assign voice pair to provide Voice Announce to Busy
Extension status: hotel or Group Calling/CMS
Paging group members
Coverage group members
3-95
3-71
3-113
3-73
3-173
3-115
3-118
Extensions
LinesTrunks
Line Copy
* Single
* Block
Dial OutCd
Restriction
* Unrestricted
* Outward Restrict
* Toll Restrict
RestrctCopy
* Single
* Block
Account
BIS/HFAI
Call PickUp
VoiceSign1
Ext Status
Group Page
Group Cover
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-35
Description
Page
Calling group members and options
Hunt Type
3-123
3-129
Group Calling delay announcement
3-131
Group Coverage receiver
Group Calling message waiting indicator
Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm threshold
3-139
3-147
3-149
Group Calling external alert for Calls-In-Queue Alarms
Group Calling overflow and thresholds
3-149
3-142
Calling group members
Group Calling line/trunk or pool assignment
Group type
3-123
3-126
3-155
Assign facility restriction level (Hybrid/PBX only)
Limit the use of speakerphone on an MLX telephone
Allow or disallow call forwarding to outside number
Authorization codes
Delayed Call Forwarding
Enable/disable trunk-to-trunk transfer
Enable/disable HotLine
3-93
3-97
3-101
3-99
3-104
3-106
3-108
Extensions
Grp Calling
* Hunt Type
- Circular
- Linear
- Most Idle
* Delay Announce
- Primary
Announcement
- Secondary
Announcement
- Announcement
Interval
- Repeat
Announcement
* GrpCoverage
* Message
* Queue Alarm
- Alarm Threshold 1
- Alarm Threshold 2
- Alarm Threshold 3
* Xtnl Alert
* Overflow
- Number Based
- Time Based
* Members
* Line/Pool
* Group Type
- Auto Login
- Auto Logout
- Integ VMI
- Generic VMI
ARS Restrict
Mic Disable
Remote Frwd
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
TrkTransfer
HotLine
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-36
Page
Options
Transfer
* Return Time
* One Touch
- Transfer
- Manual
- Automatic
- Hold
*Audible
- Music On Hold
- Ringback
* Type
- Voice Announce
- Ring
CampOn
CallParkTrn
Delay Ring
Callback
Ext Status
* Hotel
* GrpCall/CMS
SMDR
* Format
- Basic SMDR
- ISDN SMDR
* Call Length
* Call Report
- In/Out
- Out Only
* New Page
* Auth Code
Inside Dial
* Inside
* Outside
Reminder Srv
Unassigned
* QCC Queue
* Extension
* Grp Calling
BehndSwitch
* Transfer
* Conference
* Drop
Transfer options
Transfer return time (number of rings)
One Touch Transfer/One Touch Hold
3-159
3-161
Transfer audible
3-164
Type of transfer
3-166
Camp-On return time
Call Park return time
Number of rings for the Delay Ring interval
Callback request number of rings
Extension status mode
3-167
3-169
3-170
3-172
3-173
SMDR options
SMDR format
3-176
Minimum length of time before a call is recorded
SMDR call report type
Incoming and outgoing calls
Outgoing calls only
3-178
3-180
System dial tone
3-184
Time of day reminder service calls are canceled
Extension number to receive redirected calls made
to an unassigned extension
3-186
3-188
Host system (Behind Switch mode) dial codes
for Transfer, Conference, or Drop
3-192
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
Options
Recall Timer
* 350 ms
* 450 ms
* 650 ms
* 1 sec
Rotary
* Delay
* No Delay
Cover Delay
Inter-Digit
Ringing Freq
SecDT Timer
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-37
Page
Continued
Length of timed flash sent when Recall is used
3-194
Dialed digits on rotary dial trunks
4-32
Number of rings before a call is sent to group coverage
This option is not yet implemented. See “Interdigit Timers.”
Ringing Frequency for 016 Module
Second Dial Tone Timer
3-121
3-196
4-34
4-36
Establish Allowed Lists
Assign an Allowed List to a given extension
Establish a Disallowed List
Assign a Disallowed List to a given extension
Program Features for Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements
3-196
3-198
3-200
3-202
Create/Change ARS Tables
4-319
Subpattern A pool routing
Subpattern A Facility Restriction Level (FRL)
Subpattern A digit absorption
Subpattern A other digits
Subpattern B start time
Subpattern B stop time
Subpattern B pool routing
Subpattern B Facility Restriction Level (FRL)
Subpattern B digit absorption
Subpattern B other digits
N11 Special Numbers Table
4-326
4-330
4-333
4-337
Tables
Allow List
Allow To
Disallow
Disallow To
ARS
* ARS1+7Dial
- Within Area Code
- Not Within
Area Code
* ARS Input
- 6-Digit
- Area Code
- Exchange
- 1+7
* Sub A Pools
* Sub A FRL
* SubA Absorb
* Sub A Digit
* Sub B Start
* Sub B Stop
* Sub B Pool
* Sub B FRL
* SubB Absorb
* Sub B Digit
* SpeclNumber
- ARS FRL
- ARS Digit
4-317
4-326
4-330
4-333
4-337
4-340
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
Tables
* Dial 0
- ARS Pool
- ARS FRL
- ARS Digits
* Sub A Data
- Voice Only
- Data Only
- Voice/Data
* Sub B Data
- Voice Only
- Data Only
- Voice/Data
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-38
Page
Continued
Dial 0 Table
4-343
Voice and/or data routing for Subpattern A
4-347
Voice and/or data routing for Subpattern B
4-347
Description
Page
Line/trunk jack for a music source
Loudspeaker Paging equipment
4-227
4-229
3-75
AuxEquip
MusicOnHold
Ldspkr Pg
Fax
* Extensions
* Msg Waiting
* Threshold
MaintAlarms
VMS/AA
* TransferRtn
* TT Duration
* TT Interval
CTI Link
Extension jack to be used for a fax machine
Message waiting indication
Fax threshold duration
Maintenance alarms
Voice Messaging System and Automated Attendant
Tranfer Return (number of rings)
Touch-tone duration
Touch-tone interval
Computer Telephony Integration Link port
4-232
4-233
4-238
Description
Page
Night Service group assignment
3-205
Password for use with out of hours calls
Emergency numbers free from password requirement
Extensions exempt from Night Service restrictions
Time of day Night Service is activated
Time of day Night Service is de-activated
Turn Night Service Time Control on or off
3-209
NightSrvce
GroupAssign
* Extensions
* Calling Grp
OutRestrict
Emergency
ExcludeList
Start
Stop
Time Control
* On
* Off
Cover Control
3-213
3-213
3-213
3-216
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Description
Labeling
Directory
* System
* Extension
* Personal
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Voice/Data
2B Data
Page 1-39
Page
Labeling Options
System directory and internal speed dial numbers
Extensions to identify internal callers
Personal Directory listings
Label used to identify line or trunk
Change posted messages
Calling groups
Description
Data
Issue 1
June 1997
3-218
3-228
3-218
3-221
3-224
3-226
Page
Data Options
Analog Multiline Telephones with voice and data
Enable 2B Data at MLX port
4-362
4-365
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Programming Procedures
Print
All
SysSet-up
Dial Plan
Labels
Trunk Info
* TIE
* DID
* Loop/Ground
* General
* S56 Data
T1 Info
PRI Info
RmoteAccess
Oper Info
AllowList
AllowListTo
DisallowList
DisllowListTo
ARS
Ext Direct
Sys Direct
Group Page
Ext Info
GrpCoverage
Grp Calling
Night Service
Call Pickup
Error Log
Auth Code
BRI
Program Ext
Copy Ext
Page 1-40
Description
Page
Print system reports
3-232
Print all reports
System Information report
Dial Plan report
Label Information report
Trunk Information report
Tie Trunk Information report
DID Trunk Information report
GS/LS Trunk Information report
General Trunk Information report
Switched 56 Data Report
DS1 Information report
PRI (Primary Rate Interface) Information report
Remote Access (DISA) report
Operator Information report
Allowed Lists report
Access To Allowed Lists report
Disallowed Lists report
Access To Disallowed Lists report
Automatic Route Selection report
Extension Directory report
System Directory report
Group Paging report
Extension Information report
Group Coverage Information report
Direct Group Calling Information report
Night Service Information report
Group Call Pickup report
Error Log report
Authorization report
BRI Information report
Description
Cntr-Prg
Issue 1
June 1997
Page
Centralized telephone programming
Extension programming
Copy extension programming
5-3
5-9
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Access to System Programming from the MLX-20 Console
Page 1-41
Description
Language
SystemLang
* English
* French
* Spanish
Extensions
* Single
- English
- French
- Spanish
* Block
- English
- French
- Spanish
SMDR
* English
* French
* Spanish
Printer
* English
* French
* Spanish
Page
Language options
System language
3-5
Language for a single extension or block of
extensions
3-80
SMDR language
3-175
Language for printed reports
3-232
Access to System Programming
from the MLX-20 Console
1
Follow the steps below to begin system programming. All of the procedures in
Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ and Chapter 4, ‘‘Programming
Procedures’’, begin at the System Programming menu shown in Step 4 of the
following procedure.
For information about accessing system programming through a PC with SPM,
see Chapter 2, ‘‘Programming with SPM’’.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Access to System Programming from the MLX-20 Console
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-42
Additional Information
PC
Display the Menu Mode (main menu) screen.
12/24 11:30
Anne
Kim
Andre
Jorge
Jose
Sarah
Show Number
Next Page
Press Menu.
Select System Programming.
MENU MODE: Select Feature
Ext Program does not appear on this
Press HOME to Exit
screen if the programming console is
a QCC.
Directory
Messages
Posted Msg
Sys Program
Alarm Clock
Maintenance
Timer
Ext Program
Display the System Programming menu.
On the System Set-up screen, system
information appears in place of the xs.
System Set-up:
Review and Exit
Type: xxxx
Type = Voice/Data
Mode: xxxx
Operator:
xxxx xxxx
Mode = Key, Hybrid/PBX, or Behind Switch
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
Operator = Position extension numbers
Exit
Select Exit.
Make a selection.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press the button next to
your selection.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Access to System Programming from the MLX-20 Console
Page 1-43
1
System Programming Menu
Figure 1-11 shows the two screens that make up the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
System Programming:
Make a Selection
Make a Selection
System
Extensions
Labeling
SysRenumber
Options
Data
Operator
Tables
Print
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Cntr-Prg
Exit
NightSrvce
Exit
>
Language
Figure 1-11. System Programming Menu Screens
Table 1-3 lists the System Programming menu options and provides a description
of each.
Option
System
SysRenumber
Operator
LinesTrunks
Extensions
Options
Tables
AuxEquip
NightSrvce
Labeling
Data
Print
Cntrl-Prog
Language
Description
Set system operating conditions.
Select the system numbering plan and/or reassign extension
numbers with one- to four-digit numbers that are more
appropriate or convenient for your company.
Assign or remove operator positions and program operator
features (such as Operator Hold Timer or QCC options).
Program line/trunk options.
Program features for extensions (such as restrictions and
line assignments).
Program systemwide features (such as Transfer Return and
Delay Ring).
Program features that require entering information in a table
(such as Allowed Lists and Disallowed Lists).
Program auxiliary equipment connected to the system (such
as loudspeaker paging and fax).
Program Night Service features.
Program the labels shown on display telephones (such as
entries in the System Directory and Posted Messages).
Specify extensions that need voice and data capability.
Print system programming reports (such as system
configuration and extension assignments).
Perform centralized telephone programming (assign features
to specific buttons on telephones).
Select the language of the system, MLX display telephones,
SMDR reports, and print reports.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Idle States
Page 1-44
1
Exiting System Programming
Use the information in Table 1-4 to return to the System Programming menu, the
main menu (Menu Mode screen), or the Home screen from within a programming
screen.
Table 1-3.
Exiting System Programming
To return to ...
On the console press:
On the PC press:
Previous menu
Exit
Main Menu
Menu
E
Normal call
handling
Home
H
1
Idle States
Some programming procedures can be started only when the entire system, or
some part of it, such as a trunk or an extension, is idle (not in use). Some
procedures require that a trunk or extension be idle only at the instant of
programming. Lengthy procedures require the system, trunk, or extension to
remain idle until programming is completed. These procedures wait for the
system, trunk, or extension to become idle and then prevent the initiation of any
new calls. This condition is called forced idle.
NOTE:
If a procedure requires an idle condition, do the programming outside of
normal business hours.
If a procedure requires that the system be idle and the system is busy when you
begin, you see the screen shown in Figure 1-12.
System Busy
Dial Code:nnnn
Exit
Pls Wait
S/P:ss/pp
Enter
Figure 1-12. System Busy Screen
nnnn = a previously entered extension
ss/pp = the slot and port number of the
busy extension
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Idle States
Page 1-45
The screen changes to the appropriate programming screen when the system is
no longer busy.
System Forced Idle
1
When the entire system is forced idle, no calls can be made or received. The
following procedures can be performed only when the entire system (every line
and every extension) is idle:
■
Select system mode
■
Identify system operator positions
■
Renumber system
■
Renumber boards
■
Identify telephones with voice signal pairs for the Voice Announce to Busy
feature
■
Identify telephones that need voice and data features
■
Restore system programming information
■
Identify the Music On Hold jack
When the system is forced idle, the following occurs: multiline telephone users
hear a signal, indicating that the telephone cannot be used; display telephone
users see the message Wait: System Busy; single-line telephone users do not
hear a dial tone.
Line or Trunk Idle
1
Because these procedures require the line or trunk to be idle only at the instant of
programming, the line or trunk is not forced idle (as described in the previous
paragraph). The following procedures can be performed only when the line or
trunk being programmed is idle:
■
Identify loudspeaker paging extension jack
■
Assign trunks to pools
■
Specify incoming or outgoing DID or tie trunk type
■
Specify tie trunk direction
■
Specify tie trunk E&M signal
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Idle States
Extension Forced Idle
Page 1-46
1
When a telephone or data terminal is forced idle, no calls can be made or
received on that telephone or data terminal. The following procedures can be
performed only when the telephone or data terminal being programmed is idle:
■
Assign call restrictions
■
Assign pool dial-out restrictions
■
Copy extension assignments
■
Assign lines, trunks, or pools to extensions
■
Assign labels to a personal directory
■
Use centralized telephone programming
When the telephone is forced idle, the following occurs: multiline telephone users
hear a signal, indicating that the telephone cannot be used; display telephone
users see the message Wait: System Busy; single-line telephone users do not
hear a dial tone.
100D Module Idle
1
The following procedures can be performed only when the 100D module is idle:
■
Specify board type
■
Specify frame format
■
Specify board signaling format
■
Specify board suppression format
■
Specify board facility compensation
Forced Idle Reminder Tones
1
The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “doorphone” tone400 ms of
667 Hz tone followed by 400 ms of 571 Hz. The tone is provided under the
following circumstances:
■
At the extension, to remind the user that the system or the extension is in
the forced idle state
■
At the programming console or at a PC running SPM, to remind the system
manager that the system (or at least one extension) is in the forced idle
state because of administrative activity
In Release 1.1 and higher of the communications system, forced idle reminder
tones occur every 20 seconds. You can adjust the volume of these tones with the
volume control.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Product Enhancements
Page 1-47
1
Several enhancements were implemented for Releases 1.1, 2.0, 2.1, 3.0, and 4.0.
This section briefly describes these enhancements and new features. See the
Feature Reference and the Equipment and Operations Reference for details
about each enhancement.
The procedures that cover these enhancements are included in this book. System
planning for the enhancements is included in System Planning.
Release 1.1 Enhancements
1
Refer to Release 1.1 Notes for detailed descriptions of Release 1.1
enhancements. Release 1.1 includes all Release 1.0 functionality plus the
enhancements described in the following sections.
Language Selection
1
This selection allows you to program the system for the display of prompts,
menus, and messages on MLX display telephones in English, French, or Spanish.
You can also program the following options in any of these languages,
independently of the system language:
■
Individual extensions with MLX telephones
■
System Programming and Maintenance (SPM)
■
System programming reports
■
SMDR report headers
MLX-10D, MLX-20L, and MLX-28D display telephones and MLX-10 nondisplay
telephones are available in three separate versions, with factory-set buttons in
English, Spanish, or French. (The MLX-10DP is available in the English version
only.) In addition, user and operator guides and telephone tray cards are available
in all three languages.
Programming and Maintenance
1
Programming and maintenance enhancements include the following:
■
Additional Inspect capability in system programming
■
Editing capability (Backspace selection) in extension programming
■
Improvements to system reports
■
An access log that records the last 20 times maintenance or system
programming has been accessed
■
Longer (20-second) gap between ring cycles for programming mode and
Forced Idle tone
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-48
1
Operational
System operational enhancements include the following:
■
Automatic selection of an SA button when Conference is invoked
(Hybrid/PBX mode)
■
Prompting through Conference feature on MLX display telephones
■
Relocation of the More prompt on the MLX-20L display
■
Display of the number saved on a programmed Last Number Dial or Saved
Number Dial button when the button is inspected
1
SPM
SPM enhancements include operation in English, French, or Spanish, faster
backup and restore, and automatic on-screen display of reports as they are
created, with a Browse capability for reading the reports.
1
Equipment
Additional equipment includes the 8102 and 8110 analog telephones, four
headsets, two headset amplifiers, and a transparent protective cover for the
MLX-10 and MLX-10D telephones. The 8102 and 8110 telephones are also
compatible with Release 1.0.
1
PF Registration
PF registration number AS5USA-65646-PF-E is assigned by the FCC for
operating the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System in Hybrid/PBX mode in
the United States. (The PF registration is also applicable to Release 1.0 systems.)
Release 2.0 Enhancements
1
Refer to Release 2.0 Notes for detailed descriptions of Release 2.0
enhancements. Release 2.0 includes all Release 1.1 functionality plus the
enhancements listed below.
Programming
1
Programming enhancements include the following:
■
Extension Copy is a feature that reduces programming time by allowing the
use of any extension as a template for programming another extension or
block of extensions through centralized telephone programming.
■
Integrated Administration provides a single interface through Integrated
Solution III (IS III) for programming entries common to the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and AUDIX Voice Power.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-49
■
Any SPM Version 2.xx (where xx is replaced by numbers) provides a
Convert function for use in upgrading the system from Release 1.0 or 1.1.
This function converts a backup file from a Release 1.0 or 1.1 system to
Release 2.0 and later format, allowing reuse of existing system
programming on the upgraded system.
■
Forced idle reductions keep system interruptions at a minimum. In general,
the smallest necessary component is forced idle during programming
activities. For example, renumbering a single extension idles only one
extension. Only a few systemwide programming activities, such as setting
the system mode and system renumbering, idle the entire system.
Operational
1
System operational enhancements include the following:
■
Coverage VMS Off is a feature that prevents incoming outside calls from
going to voice mail. (All other coverage remains active as programmed.)
The feature is programmed extension by extension, either through
extension programming or through centralized telephone programming.
■
A Night Service group can be programmed to include either extensions or a
calling group as members. However, you should not program both
individual extensions and a calling group into the Night Service group,
because individuals will not have a chance to answer before calling group
members do.
■
When AUDIX Voice Power sends a Leave Message notification to an
extension, the system identifies the voice mail system as the sender of the
message. When the voice mail subscriber uses the Return Call feature, the
call goes to any available voice mail port, not just to the specific port that
generated the message. This reduces the chance of getting a busy port.
■
Coverage receivers can call coverage senders and have the call receive
coverage treatment. If a receiver calls a sender for whom he or she is
covering, and the sender is busy or unavailable, the call proceeds to other
points of coverage. It does not come back to the receiver who originated
the call.
■
Enhancements to display prompts include automatic posting of a Do Not Disturb
message (for MLX display telephones or other multiline telephones, a
Posted Message button must be programmed for the Do Not Disturb message to
be posted automatically) when a user activates the Do Not Disturb feature,
and confirmation messages when a user activates Hold, Privacy, Saved
Number Dial, and Transfer.
■
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk emulation on a T1 facility provides up to
24 DID channels on a single DS1 interface, instead of requiring 24
separate physical trunks.
■
A telephone user can send a timed flash (switchhook flash) on a loop-start
trunk call on a System Access (SA) button.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Fax Attendant System™
Page 1-50
1
Fax Attendant is an application for sending and receiving fax messages; its
interface is similar to the voice mail interface provided by AUDIX Voice Power.
Fax Attendant System, which co-resides with AUDIX Voice Power on the IS III
platform, provides the following services:
■
Fax Call Coverage. Receives and holds messages for subscribers whose
fax machines are busy or out of paper. This service also allows a
subscriber to have a personal fax number without having a fax machine.
■
Fax Mail. Allows subscribers to create and use fax distribution lists, send
and receive fax messages, and record personal greetings for incoming fax
calls.
■
Fax Response. Prompts callers to select and receive faxes from a
customer-created menu of choices, using touch-tone responses.
408 GS/LS-MLX Module
1
The 408 GS/LS-MLX module (Releases 2.0 and higher only) combines four
line/trunk jacks for ground-start or loop-start trunks and eight extension jacks for
MLX telephones on a single module in the control unit.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)
1
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) enhancements include the following:
■
Connectivity to the 5ESS Generic 6
■
Multiple incoming calls to directory number
■
Call-by-Call Service Selection
■
Password handling for FTS2000
■
Extension ID as Calling Party Number for Automatic Number ID (ANI)
Maintenance
1
Maintenance enhancements include the following:
■
Clear descriptions of module test failures
■
Optional printing of hard copy of error logs
■
Display that correlates extension numbers with slot/port and logical ID
■
Display showing which slots, trunks, and extensions are maintenance busy
■
Internal digital switching element (DSE) loopback test for all modules
■
B-channel loopback test for MLX modules
■
B-channel line or call service states display
■
Error log entries for dual-port RAM errors
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Release 2.1 Enhancements
Page 1-51
1
Refer to Release 2.1 Notes for detailed descriptions of Release 2.1
enhancements. Release 2.1 includes all Release 2.0 functionality plus the
enhancements listed below.
Operational
1
System operational enhancements include the following:
■
When a call is forwarded to a multiline telephone that has an Auto Dial or
DSS button programmed for the forwarding telephone, the green light next
to the Auto Dial or DSS button for the forwarding telephone does not flash.
■
People answering calls received on Cover buttons are allowed to generate
touch tones if their telephones are not outward- or toll-restricted.
■
Calls received on personal lines with Do Not Disturb on go immediately to
coverage instead of waiting for the coverage delay interval.
■
A call put on hold at a Cover button can be added to a conference by
someone who has a personal line for the call.
■
A call put on hold at a Cover button can be picked up by any person who
has a personal line for the call.
■
Calls that have been put on hold at a Cover, SA, Shared SA, or Pool
button can be picked up by a person who has a personal line button for the
call.
■
An inside call on hold at an SA button can be picked up and transferred by
any person with a Shared SA button corresponding to the button with the
held call.
■
Calls that are on hold awaiting transfer can be picked up by any user who
has a personal line for the call.
■
Beginning with Integrated Solution III Version 1.2, the automatic
reconciliation program that was run automatically at 3:00 a.m. is disabled
and can be invoked manually from the User Maintenance menu.
■
If a telephone is programmed for Forced Account Code Entry, account
codes do not have to be entered when using a programmed Loudspeaker
Paging button. In addition, an SMDR record is not generated for calls made
to paging ports.
■
When an MLX telephone, other than an MLX-20L, is plugged into an MLX
port and the Personal Directory does not contain any entries, the allocation
of the Personal Directory resource is released. If there are any entries in
the Personal Directory, the Personal Directory allocation and the entries in
the Personal Directory are saved in the MLX port.
■
SMDR call records for calls made on PRI facilities are more accurate than
SMDR call records for calls made on non-PRI facilities. Outgoing calls
made on PRI facilities receive “answer supervision.” Consequently, SMDR
timing for calls made on PRI facilities begins when the call is answered.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-52
Timing for calls made on non-PRI facilities begins when dialing is
completed. Therefore, an SMDR call record is not generated when a call
made on a PRI facility is not answered at the far end.
■
The Call Type field and the Called Number field on the SMDR report are
changed for both the Basic and ISDN report formats.
■
An 012 port that is programmed as a generic voice messaging interface
(VMI) port can transfer an outside call to an outside number.
■
In a system where the transfer audible option is programmed for Music On
Hold and a music source is provided, outside callers who are transferred to
a calling group and are waiting in the queue or who are parked or
camped-on, hear music while they are waiting. Internal callers never hear
music on hold while waiting in the calling group queue or when they are
parked, camped-on, or being transferred to another extension.
Installation and Hardware
1
Installation and hardware enhancements include the following:
■
The control unit covers for the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
are the same easy-to-use covers as those for the MERLIN II
Communications System.
■
A new 012 (tip/ring) module [apparatus code 517G13 (28) or higher letter]
contains a built-in ring generator. The maximum ring equivalency number
(REN) supported is 2.2, and the module will ring four ports at one time.
Bridging of single-line telephones is not supported because of poor
transmission quality.
■
A new 008 OPT module (labeled “with RING GEN.”) contains a built-in ring
generator. It rings four ports at a time.
■
Ferrite cores for the power supply modules are shipped from the factory to
comply with FCC Part 15 requirements.
■
3129-WTWA (touch tone outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum
housing and armored handset cord with bell ringers)
■
3129-WRWA (rotary dial outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum
housing and armored handset cord with bell ringers)
■
3129-WAWA (auto dial outdoor telephone equipped with cast aluminum
housing and armored handset cord with bell ringers)
■
3129-WNWA (nondial, automatic ringing on dedicated circuit outdoor
telephone equipped with cast aluminum housing and armored handset
cord with bell ringers)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Equipment and Operations
Page 1-53
1
Equipment and operations enhancements include the following:
■
■
■
A new release (Version 2.16) of the System Programming and
Maintenance (SPM) software to support international use.
Support of PRI connection to DEFINITY Communications Systems
MLX-10DP telephone, identical to an MLX-10D, except that it provides a
jack for access to the PassageWay Solution and PassageWay Direct
Connection Solution application.
Additional Application Packages, Telephones,
Adjuncts, and Adapter
1
Additional application packages, adjuncts, and adapter enhancements include the
following:
■
A Digital Announcer Unit, compatible with all call management systems
and tip/ring applications currently available for the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System.
■
The HackerTracker system software enhancement to the Call Accounting
System (CAS) detects abnormal calling activity by allowing monitoring of
facilities or authorization code usage.
■
A new digital Magic on Hold unit is available in three configurations:
— Basic Prerecorded Package
— Personalized Package
— Custom Production Package
■
■
■
The MERLIN Identifier application enables people to receive, store, and
use information provided by the local telephone company, specifically, the
telephone number of a caller in an area where the service is also
supported.
An Off-Premises Range Extender (OPRE) supports off-premises operation
with an off-premises extension capability and extended range operation for
tip/ring devices as well as variable gain to improve voice transmission
levels.
PagePac Plus Loudspeaker Paging Systems do not require system
adapters. The controller provides eight built-in zones (expandable to 56
zones by using up to three 16-zone expansion units), group zones,
talkback, night bell, operator override, tones, door supervision, microphone
input, and system access security codes as standard features.
■
PassageWay Solution (Release 1.0) software consisting of four
applications that run with Microsoft Windows 3.1 or later and provide an
interface between an IBM-compatible personal computer and the
MERLIN LEGEND system.
■
Four single-line telephones with memory buttons: 710, 715, 725, and 730.
■
Four specialty handsets compatible with all MLX telephones and the
3101-series, 3178-NHL, 8102, and 8110 single-line telephones.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Release 3.0 Enhancements
Page 1-54
1
Release 3.0 includes all Release 2.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed
below.
1
Equipment
New hardware includes a variety of components. Additional details are included
elsewhere in this book.
■
CPU modifications include:
— A processor running at 16 MHz with a 32-bit wide data bus
— 1.5 Mbytes of non-volatile (battery-backed) RAM
— 4.0 Mbytes of Flash ROM
— PCMCIA memory card interface
— A full-duplex 1200/2400 bps modem
— Error/Status code display for maintenance support
■
An 800 GS/LS-ID line/trunk module delivers the calling party’s telephone
number to the customer premises (MLX display telephones only) if the
service is subscribed to by the customer and if it is supported by the caller’s
telephone company.
■
Support for:
— MDC 9000 (six-line, cordless)
— MDW 9000 (six-line, cordless, wireless)
— 8101 (single-line telephone, desk or wall-mount, data/fax jack,
selectable positive disconnect)
— 2500YMGL and 2500 MMGL (single-line desk telephones,
selectable positive disconnect)
— Picasso™ Still-Image telephone (for interactive display of still
images)
— Videophone 2500 single-line phone with interactive video display
■
Pre-fabricated and pre-drilled backboard
Installation, Upgrade Administration, and
Maintenance
1
These are the new MERLIN LEGEND Communications System capabilities:
■
SPM (Release 3.18) conversion of translations from Release 1.0, 1.1, 2.0,
and 2.1 to 3.0
■
Remote operation at 1200/2400bps
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-55
■
Advice and feedback administration screens for new Release 3.0
functionality
■
PCMCIA Memory Card Interface (a Release 3.0 processor board required)
allowing:
— System software installation
— System software upgrade
— 800 GS/LS-ID port module firmware upgrade
— Integrated backup and restore of translations
— Automatic and manual options for backup and restore are available
on the system. Automatic backup can be scheduled weekly or daily
to fit the customer’s needs.
■
Inter-digit dialing timer values are administrable
■
Inspection of Lines/Trunks displays only those lines and trunks configured
on system rather than all 80 facilities
■
Stations and facilities in Maintenance Busy (both manual and automatic)
can be identified by the maintenance monitor
User Features
1
Security
1
The Remote Access feature allows people at remote locations to enter the system
by dialing the number of a line or trunk designated for remote access. The system
can be programmed to require the remote user to dial a barrier code (a type of
password) after reaching the system. In earlier versions, the systemwide barrier
code length is fixed at four digits. Release 3.0 allows a systemwide barrier code
length ranging from a minimum of four digits to a maximum of 11 digits, with a
factory setting of seven digits. SMDR records are enhanced to provide
information for remote access calls. If the remote access call is received on a
facility providing Caller ID information (see below), the SMDR report can help
trace the call.
Caller ID
1
Caller information (telephone number) is furnished to MLX display telephones by
an 800 GS/LS-ID module using the LS (loop-start) option. This allows customers
to screen calls before answering the phone, as well as providing calling party
information for use with various applications. This function is available only when
the customer subscribes to caller identification service from the telephone
company, if the telephone company supports that service.
Shared System Access (SSA)
A telephone may have up to 27 Shared SA buttons to expand extension
coverage.
1
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-56
Authorization Codes
1
The Authorization Code feature allows you to make calls using your calling
privileges when you are dialing from an extension other than your own. When you
enter your authorization code (ranging from 2 to 11 characters and unique across
the system), the privileges and restrictions assigned to your home extension
override the current restrictions at the host extension. This includes toll restriction,
outward restriction, Facility Restriction Level (FRL), Allowed Lists, Disallowed
Lists, Night Service Exclusion List, and Dial Access to Pools. All other functions
on the telephone are those of the local telephone, not the home extension.
Authorization codes can also be used for the purpose of call accounting through
the SMDR printout. The SMDR account code field can hold either the
authorization code extension number or the authorization code itself.
Direct Voice Mail
1
If your company has voice mail, this feature allows you to dial a co-worker’s voice
mailbox directly without ringing that person’s extension. Direct Voice Mail is
especially useful for transferring calls when a co-worker is not available.
Additional Features
1
The status of Leave Word Calling (LWC) and Privacy are retained across cold
starts.
Caller ID (CLASSSM ICLID and PRI) are available on primary coverage and return
from transfer.
Additional Application Packages, Adjuncts, and
Adapter Enhancements
1
PassageWay Direct Connection Solution
1
PassageWay Direct Connection Solution (Release 2.0) is a computer telephone
integrated product that links a desktop Windows PC to the MERLIN LEGEND’s
MLX-10DP, MLX-20L, or MLX-28D telephone. The Windows applications are:
AT&T Call (autodial/contact manager), AT&T Buzz (screen-pop applications),
AT&T Set (station programming interface), and Log Viewer (call log application).
PassageWay Direct Connection Solution (Release 2.0) is the version supported
on MERLIN LEGEND 3.0.
PagePal™
PagePal connects several paging systems to the MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System. No other system adapter is necessary for loudspeaker
paging.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-57
1
Fax Attendant 2.1.1
Fax Attendant Release 2.1.1., which co-resides with AUDIX Voice Power on the
IS III Release 1.2 platform, provides the same functionality as earlier versions,
plus the following enhancements:
■
Personal Fax Messaging. Inbound faxes can be stored until the
subscriber asks that they be printed, at any fax machine he or she
specifies, on company premises or off-site (when the subscriber retrieves
fax messages remotely).
■
Fax Mail. Allows subscribers to send fax messages, get fax messages,
record personal greetings, and program outcalling.
■
Fax Broadcast. Provides a simple way to send one fax to as many as
1000 fax numbers.
Call Accounting System (CAS) for Windows
1
This stand-alone version of CAS takes advantage of the easy-to-use graphical
environment offered by Microsoft Windows. Through data communications, it also
allows one CAS system to serve multiple business sites.
1
Group Video Conferencing
Group video conferencing is supported over DS1 (Digital Signal Level 1) facilities
with PRI. (Video conferencing has been available since Release 2.0.)
Release 3.1 Enhancements
1
Release 3.1 includes all Release 3.0 functionality plus the enhancements listed
below.
Security Features
1
New security features include a variety of components. Additional details are
included elsewhere in this book.
Call Restriction checking for star codes
Beginning with Release 3.1, the system manager can add star (*) codes to
Allowed and Disallowed Lists to help prevent toll fraud. Star codes, typically dialed
before an outgoing call, enable telephone users to obtain special services
provided by the central office (CO). For example, in many areas, a telephone user
can dial *67 before a telephone number to disable central office-supplied caller
identification at the receiving party’s telephone. (You must contract with your
telephone service provider to have these codes activated.)
When users dial star codes, the MERLIN LEGEND system’s Calling Restrictions
determine whether the codes are allowed. If allowed, the system’s Calling
Restrictions are reset, and the remaining digits that the users dial are checked
against the Calling Restrictions.
1
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-58
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer on a per-station basis
1
This enhancement to the trunk-to-trunk feature enables the system manager to
allow or disallow trunk-to-trunk transfer on a per-station basis. Beginning with
Release 3.1, the default setting for all stations is restricted.
Programmable Second Dial Tone Timer
1
Beginning with Release 3.1, the system manager can assign a second dial tone
timer to lines and trunks to help prevent toll fraud (for example, when star codes
are used). After receiving certain digits dialed by a user, the CO may provide a
second dial tone, prompting the user to enter more digits. If this second dial tone
is delayed, and the user dials digits before the CO provides the second dial tone,
there is a risk of toll fraud or the call being misrouted. The second dial tone timer
enables the system manager to make sure that the CO is ready to receive more
digits from the caller.
A Disallowed List containing numbers frequently associated with toll
fraud
1
Beginning with Release 3.1, Disallowed List #7 now contains default entries,
which are numbers frequently associated with toll fraud. By default, Disallowed
List #7 is automatically assigned to both generic and integrated VMI ports used by
voice messaging systems. The system manager must manually assign this list to
other ports.
Pool Dial-Out Code restriction for all extensions by default
1
Beginning with Release 3.1, the default setting for the Pool Dial-Out Code
restriction has changed to restricted. No extension or remote access user with a
barrier code has access to pools until the restriction is removed by the system
manager.
Outward restrictions for VMI ports by default
1
Beginning with Release 3.1, ports assigned for use by voice messaging systems
(generic or integrated VMI ports) are now assigned outward restrictions by
default. If a voice messaging system should be allowed to call out (for example, to
send calls to a user’s home office), the system manager must remove these
restrictions.
!
SecurityAlert:
Before removing restrictions, it is strongly recommended that you read
Appendix A, ‘‘Customer Support Information’’.
New default Facility Restriction Level (FRL) for VMI ports
Beginning with Release 3.1, the default FRL for VMI ports has changed to 0,
restricting all outcalling.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-59
New default FRL for the Default Local Route Table
1
Beginning with Release 3.1, the default FRL has changed to 2 for the Default
Local Route Table. Now, system managers can easily change an extension
default of 3 to 2 or lower in order to restrict calling. No adjustment to the route FRL
is required.
New maintenance procedure for testing outgoing trunk problems
1
A password is now required for technicians to perform trunk tests.
!
SecurityAlert:
The enhancements in Release 3.1 help increase the security of the MERLIN
LEGEND System. To fully utilize these security enhancements, be sure to
read and understand the information in these upgrade notes.
Release 4.0 Enhancements
1
Release 4.0 includes all Release 3.1 functionality plus the enhancements listed
below:
Equipment
1
1
New 016 tip/ring module
This new module supports the 200-station dial plan by providing 16 ports for
tip/ring devices. Applications that use a tip/ring interface can connect to this
board. All 16 ports can ring simultaneously. Four touch-tone receivers (TTRs) are
included on the module as well. The module’s ringing frequency (default 20 Hz)
can be changed through programming to 25 Hz for those locations that require it.
1
New 800 NI-BRI module
This new module connects NI-1 BRI trunks to the MERLIN LEGEND system for
high-speed data and video transmission.
System Features
1
Support for up to 200 stations
1
Release 4.0 has an expanded dial plan that supports up to 200 tip/ring devices.
Support for National ISDN BRI Service
This service provides a low-cost alternative to loop-start and ground-start trunks
for voice and digital data connectivity to the Central Office. Each of the two B
(bearer)-channels on a BRI line can carry one voice or one data call at any given
time. The data speeds on a B-channel are up to 14.4 kbps for analog data and up
to 64 kbps for digital data, which is necessary for video conferencing and other
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-60
video applications. Release 4.0 supports the IOC Package “S” (basic call
handling) service configuration and Multi-Line Hunt service configuration on
designated CO switches.
1
Support for 2B Data applications
Release 4.0 has certified group and desktop video applications that use two
B-channels to make video/data calls from endpoints (stations) that are enabled to
use 2B Data. The endpoints that support these applications connect to an
MLX-port on the MERLIN LEGEND system. 2B Data applications can make use
of the NI-1 BRI, PRI, or T1 Switched 56 network interfaces to make outside
connections using one or two data channels at a time.
1
Support for T1 digital data transmission
Release 4.0 expands its T1 functionality by providing access to digital data over
the public switched 56 kbps network in addition to data Tie-Trunk services. Users
who have T1 facilities for voice services can now use them for video calls at data
rates of 56 kbps per channel (112 kbps for video calls using two channels). The
Release 4.0 T1 offering also includes point-to-point connectivity over T1
Tie-trunks, allowing customers to connect two MERLIN LEGEND
Communications Systems or a MERLIN LEGEND Communications System with a
DEFINITY Communications System. The two communications systems can be
co-located or off-premises.
Downloadable Firmware for 016 T/R board and NI-BRI board
1
The Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA)
technology introduced in Release 3.0 continues to support these two new boards
in Release 4.0 for installation and upgrade. A Release 3.0 or later processor is
required for PCMCIA technology.
User Features
1
Delayed Call Forwarding
1
Each user can program a Forwarding Delay setting for the Forward, Remote Call
Forwarding, or Follow Me features. The forwarding delay is the number of times
that a call rings at the forwarding extension before the call is sent to the receiver.
During the delay period, the user can screen calls by checking the displayed
calling number (if it is available). The delay can be set at 0 to 9 rings. The factory
setting for Forwarding Delay is 0 rings (no delay).
Voice Announce on the QCC
The QCC operator can enable the fifth Call Button to announce a call on another
user’s speakerphone if the destination telephone has a Voice Announce capable
SA button available. A QCC cannot receive Voice Announce calls; they are
received as ringing calls. The factory-set status for the fifth Call Button is to have
Voice Announce disabled.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-61
Time-based option for overflow on Calling Group
1
Release 4.0 has added a time limit for calls in queue in addition to the previous
number limit. If the Overflow Threshold Time is set to a valid number between
1–900 seconds, calls that remain in the Calling Group Queue for the set time are
sent to the Overflow Receiver. If the Overflow Threshold Time is set to 0, Overflow
by time is turned off. The factory-set time limit is 0 seconds (Overflow by time off).
1
Single-Line Telephone Enhancements
■
Disable Transfer. Through centralized telephone programming, the
system manager can disable the ability to transfer calls by removing from
the telephone all but one SA or ICOM button.
■
No Transfer Return. When a handset bounce in its cradle, the MERLIN
LEGEND system interprets this as a switchhook flash and attempts to
transfer a call. When the transfer attempt period expires, the user's
telephone rings. Release 4.0 eliminates this unintended ringing by
disconnecting the call in situations where a switchhook flash is followed by
an on-hook state when dial tone is present.
■
Forward Disconnect. All ports on 012 and 016 modules now send forward
disconnect to all devices connected to them when forward disconnect is
received from the CO. This enhancement prevents the trunk/line form
being kept active when one end disconnects from the call. If an answering
machine is connected to the port, it will not record silence, or busy tones, or
other useless messages. This is a non-administrable operation.
Security Features
1
1
7-digit password for SPM
Release 4.0 has increased system security by requiring a seven-digit password
when using SPM to perform remote administration or when performing the Trunk
Test procedure. This password is to be used in addition to the Remote Access
barrier codes.
Release 4.1 Enhancements
1
Release 4.1 includes all Release 4.0 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below. There are no hardware changes in Release 4.1.
Coverage Timers Programmed for
Individual Extensions
1
Beginning with Release 4.1, coverage timers, which control the duration of the
delay before calls are sent to each level of coverage, are changed as follows:
■
The Group Coverage Ring Delay (1–9 rings) is programmed on individual
extensions and replaces the Coverage Delay Interval programmed
systemwide in previous releases.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
■
Page 1-62
The Primary Cover Ring Delay (1–6 rings) and Secondary Cover Ring
Delay (1–6 rings), programmed on individual extensions, replace the Delay
Ring Interval programmed systemwide in previous releases.
These enhancements allow the system manager to customize coverage call
delivery to match individual extensions’ call-handling requirements.
Night Service with Coverage Control
1
Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can enable the Night Service
Coverage Control option to automatically control the status of telephones
programmed with Coverage VMS (voice messaging system) Off buttons,
according to Night Service status.
When Coverage Control is enabled and the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System is put into Night Service, all programmed Coverage VMS Off buttons are
automatically turned off (LED is unlit) and all eligible outside calls are sent to the
assigned voice messaging system calling group with normal ringing delay. When
Night Service is deactivated during the day, all programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons are automatically turned on (LED is lit) and voice mail coverage is
disabled for outside calls.
Users can override the Coverage VMS Off button status at any time by pressing
the programmed Coverage VMS Off button to turn the LED on or off.
Night Service Group Line Assignment
1
Beginning with Release 4.1, a system manager can assign lines to Night Service
groups to control handling of after-hours calls received on individual lines. This
capability replaces the automatic assignment to Night Service groups of only
those lines that ring on the Night Service operator console. An outside line must
be assigned to a Night Service group to receive Night Service treatment.
With this enhancement, Night Service can be activated and deactivated on lines
that do not appear on operator consoles (for example, personal lines), and lines
appearing at operator positions can be excluded from Night Service.
Forward on Busy
1
Beginning with Release 4.1, the Forward, Follow Me, and Remote Call Forward
features are enhanced to remove the requirement that a call be ringing at an
extension before it can be forwarded. With the Forward on Busy enhancement, a
call to an extension with no available SA (System Access) or ICOM (Intercom)
buttons is forwarded immediately to the programmed destination, preventing the
caller from hearing a busy signal from the intended call recipient’s extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Maintenance Testing for BRI Facilities that Are
Part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs)
Page 1-63
1
Beginning with Release 4.1, the NI-1 BRI (National Integrated Services Digital
Network-1 Basic Rate Interface) Provisioning Test Tool is enhanced to include
testing for BRI facilities that are part of Multiline Hunt Groups (MLHGs).
The NI-1 BRI Provisioning Test Tool is used by Lucent Technologies maintenance
personnel on MERLIN LEGEND Communications Systems that include a 800
NI-BRI module. Technicians use the tool during system installation and
maintenance to test the functionality of the BRI lines and to report analyzed
results.
Release 4.2 Enhancements
1
Release 4.2 includes all Release 4.1 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below. There are no hardware changes for Release 4.2.
Additional Network Switch and Services Options
for ISDN PRI
1
Release 4.2 of the system supports connectivity to MCI® or local exchange
carrier (LEC) PRI services and to the following central office switch types (in
addition to the 4ESS and 5ESS switch types that carry for AT&T Switched
Network services):
■
NORTEL® DMS™-100 BCS 36 for local exchange carrier services
■
NORTEL DMS-250 generic MCI07 serving the MCI network
■
Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E generic 500-39.30 serving the MCI
network
Beginning with Release 4.2, the following MCI PRI and PRI local exchange carrier
(LEC) services (along with AT&T Switched Network Services) can be provided to
users of the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System:
■
MCI Toll Services for DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type:
— MCI Prism® service for domestic outgoing long-distance and
international voice calls; for domestic outgoing 56-kbps restricted,
64-kbps unrestricted, and 64-kbps restricted circuit-switched data calls
— MCI VNet® service for incoming and outgoing domestic and voice calls;
for 56-kbps restricted, 64-kbps restricted, and 64-kbps unrestricted
circuit-switched data calls
— MCI 800 for domestic, toll-free, incoming voice calls
— MCI 900 service numbers
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
■
Page 1-64
LEC services for DMS-100 switch types:
— DMS Virtual Private Network service for calls between the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and another communications
system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System)
— DMS INWATS (Inward Wide Area Telephone Service) for domestic
toll-free incoming voice calls
— DMS OUTWATS (Outward Wide Area Telephone Service) for domestic
outgoing long-distance voice calls
— DMS FX (foreign exchange) to provide local call rating for calls from the
local exchange to the area serviced by the foreign exchange.
— DMS tie trunk service to provide private exchange call rating for calls
placed on a dedicated central office facility between the MERLIN
LEGEND Communications System and another communications
system (such as another MERLIN LEGEND Communications System)
Improvements to Station Message Detail
Recording (SMDR) and Support for MERLIN
LEGEND Reporter Application
1
The SMDR feature is enhanced to provide more details about calling group agent
activities and to help system managers assess the effectiveness of call centers in
terms of both agent performance and the adequacy of facilities to handle inbound
calls. These improvements apply to calling groups that are programmed as Auto
Login or Auto Logout type. The SMDR and MERLIN LEGEND Reporter features
listed are administrable:
■
TALK Field. For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups, the TALK field
records the amount of time a calling group agent spends on a call.
■
DUR. (DURATION) Field. For Auto Login and Auto Logout calling groups,
call timing begins when a call arrives at MERLIN LEGEND
Communications System and not after a preset number of seconds. Call
timing ends when the call is disconnected; either the caller or the agent
hangs up. This allows the system manager to determine how long a caller
waited for an agent’s attention.
■
Coding of Calls on Reports. An asterisk (*) appears in the call record
when:
a.
A call is not answered by an Auto Login or Auto Logout calling group
agent and is abandoned while waiting for an agent.
b.
The call is answered by someone not a member of an Auto Login or
Auto Logout calling group.
An exclamation point (!) signals that an Auto Login or Auto Logout agent
handled a call that was answered by someone who was not a member of
that Auto Login or Auto Logout with Overflow group. An ampersand (&) in
the call record indicates that the group’s overflow receiver answered the
call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter
Page 1-65
1
MERLIN LEGEND Reporter provides basic call accounting system reports for all
incoming calls to Auto Login or Auto Logout type calling groups. MERLIN
LEGEND Reporter assists in determining the effectiveness of calling group
agents, assessing the level of service provided to callers, and ascertaining
whether adequate incoming phone lines and agents are available to handle
peak-call load. MERLIN LEGEND Reporter is an administrable option. The default
is Off, in which case the Release 4.0 SMDR reports are available. If the option is
set to On, the following new reports are provided:
■
Organization Detail Report
■
Organization Summary and Trends Report
■
Selection Detail Report
■
Account Code Report
■
Traffic Report
■
Extension Summary Report
■
Data Report
■
Talk and Queue Time Distribution Report
■
Time of Day Report
■
ICLID Call Distribution Report
■
Facility Grade of Service Report
Maintenance Enhancements
1
1
Change to Permanent Error Alarm
Beginning with Release 4.2, the most recent permanent error alarm is not shown
on the System Error Log menu screen but is available as an option from that
screen. For details, refer to the Maintenance section of the technician guide,
Installation, Programming, and Maintenance.
Enhanced Extension Information Report
Beginning with Release 4.2, the Extension Information Report includes the
Extension Status (ESS) and supervisory mode of each extension.
Release 5.0 Enhancements
1
Release 5.0 includes all Release 4.2 functionality, plus the enhancements listed
below.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI)
Page 1-66
1
Beginning with Release 5.0, a PassageWay Telephony Services CTI link from the
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System to a LAN server running Novell®
NetWare® software allows Lucent Technologies-certified telephony applications
to control and monitor MLX and analog multiline telephone (BIS only) operations.
The physical connection for the CTI link is an MLX port on a 008 MLX or 408 MLX
module on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System control unit and ISDN
link interface card plugged into the customer’s server. The feature is available for
Hybrid/PBX mode systems only.
NOTE:
The NetWare server software version must be 3.12, 4.1 or 4.11.
The 008 MLX and 408 MLX modules must have firmware vintage other
than 29. If the module has firmware 29, programming a CTI link on the
module is prevented. An earlier or later vintage firmware is supported.
Basic Call Control
1
A CTI link application on a user’s computer can assume basic call control of the
user’s analog multiline or MLX telephone’s SA buttons. Basic call control includes:
■
Answering calls arriving on an SA button
■
Making calls from an SA button
■
Hanging up calls
■
Hold and retrieving a call on hold at the user’s extension
NOTE:
Transfer and 3-way conference, when handled through a CTI link
application, provide the original caller’s calling number information or
other information to the transfer receiver or new conference
participant, if the user has screen-pop capability.
Screen Pop
Screen pop occurs when the calling number, called number, or other user-defined
identifier (such as account code that a voice-response unit prompts the caller to
dial) is used to display a screen associated with the far-end party. For example,
Caller ID services can be used to support screen pop on a system that includes a
CTI link; using the calling party number as a database key code, information
about a caller automatically appears on the user’s computer screen when the call
arrives at the extension. Depending on the application, screen pop may be
available for calls that arrive on line buttons other than SA buttons and/or calls
that are answered manually at the telephone rather than by the application.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-67
Screen pop can occur on incoming calls from the following sources:
■
Calling group distribution
■
ISDN PRI Routing by Dial Plan
■
An extension on the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
■
Remote access
NOTE:
In the case of remote access calls, the only information that the
application can collect about the caller is the remote telephone
number.
■
A transfer of a call that was answered by a voice response unit
■
A transfer, redirection, or conference of a call that was answered at a DLC
or at a QCC
NOTES:
1. DLCs (Direct-Line Consoles) may use CTI applications. If they do, they
perform the same way as other extensions. A DLC assigned to use a
CTI link application is a monitored DLC. When a DLC is used as a
regular operator console and not using a CTI link extension, it is
non-monitored .
2. Calls to a QCC or non-monitored DLC do not initiate screen pop at the
operator position, but when an operator directs a call to an extension
using a CTI application, caller information does initiate screen pop. If
the DLC is non-monitored, screen pops can occur after the DLC
releases the call.
3. Calls transferred from Cover buttons on non-monitored DLCs do not
initiate screen pop at the destination extension.
HotLine Feature
1
The Release 5.0 HotLine feature is designed for retail sales, catalogue sales, and
other types of businesses and organizations and is available in all three modes of
system operation. It allows a system manager to program a single-line telephone
extension connected to an 008 OPT, 012, or 016 module as a HotLine. When a
user lifts the handset at the HotLine extension, the telephone automatically dials
the inside extension or outside telephone number programmed as the first
Personal Speed Dial number (code #01) for the extension. The system does not
permit calls to be transferred, put on hold, or conferenced. (A user can press the
telephone’s Hold button, if it has one, to put a call on local hold, but the call
cannot be redirected in any way. Switchhook flashes are ignored.)
Personal Speed Dial codes can be programmed from the extension prior to
HotLine assignment (a system programming function). Alternatively, a Personal
Speed Dial code can be programmed from the single-line telephone after HotLine
operation is assigned. However, because of security considerations, this is a
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Page 1-68
one-time opportunity. Once the Personal Speed Dial number is programmed, any
changes to it or any other extension programming must be performed using
centralized telephone programming.
Any type of inside or outside line that is normally available to a single-line
telephone can be assigned to a HotLine extension. Generally, the HotLine
telephone does not receive calls, and its lines should be set to No Ring.
!
SecurityAlert:
If a HotLine extension accesses a loop-start line, that line should provide
reliable disconnect and be programmed for reliable disconnect. Otherwise,
a user at the extension may be able to stay on the line after a call is
completed and then make a toll call.
Group Calling Enhancements
1
Release 5.0 and later systems include Group Calling features that enhance group
calling operations.
Most Idle Hunt Type
1
In addition to the Circular (factory setting) and Linear hunt types supported in
earlier releases, a third hunt type distributes calling group calls in an order based
on which agent has waited the longest since transferring or hanging up on an
incoming calling group call. For some applications, this hunt type is more efficient
than the circular type because it takes into account the varying duration of calls.
The system distributes calls based on when an agent last completed a call, not on
when he or she last received one. This hunting method ignores non-calling group
calls. For example, if an agent transfers a call that arrived on a line not assigned
to the calling group, the calling group member’s most-idle status is unaffected.
Delay Announcement Devices
The system manager can designate as many as ten primary delay announcement
devices per group rather than the single device for each group that is available in
Release 4.2 and earlier systems. Furthermore, an additional secondary delay
announcement device can be specified, for a total of ten primary device
extensions and one secondary device extension per group.
A primary delay announcement device operates in the same fashion as a single
delay announcement device, playing once, as soon as it is available, for the caller
who has waited the longest for a calling group agent and has not heard a primary
delay announcement. If a secondary announcement device is used, it can use the
factory setting, which plays the announcement once, or it can be set to repeat the
announcement after a certain amount of time. The system manager programs the
time (0–900 seconds) between announcements. This setting controls both the
interval between primary and secondary announcements and the interval
between repetitions of the secondary announcement if it is set to repeat. (See
Group Calling Options in Chapter 4 for guidelines on setting the delay.)
1
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 1-69
The primary and secondary announcement options, when used together, allow an
initial message to play for callers, followed by a repeating announcement that, for
example, urges callers to stay on the line and wait for a calling group member.
Two or more groups may share an announcement device.
A primary delay announcement device can be administered as a secondary delay
announcement device.
Enhanced Calls-in-Queue Alarm Thresholds
Three Calls-in-Queue Alarm thresholds can be set to more clearly indicate the
real-time status of the calls waiting in the queue according to the behavior of
programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons. In earlier releases, only one
Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold setting is available to activate the LEDs at
programmed Calls-in-Queue Alarm buttons for a calling group.
Using all three levels, the system manager sets Threshold 3 to the highest value,
Threshold 2 to a middle value, and Threshold 1 to the lowest value. A
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button indicates the severity of the alarm conditions in the
following ways:
■
If the number of waiting calls is less than the value programmed for
Threshold 1 or drops below that level, the LED is unlit.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 1
value but less than the Threshold 2 value, the LED flashes.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the Threshold 2
value but less than the value for Threshold 3, the LED winks.
■
If the number of waiting calls is greater than or equal to the highest value,
Threshold 3, the LED lights steadily.
NOTE:
A DSS (Direct Station Selector) button that is used as a
Calls-in-Queue Alarm button can only indicate two threshold levels,
either by flashing or by lighting steadily. If a calling group must use
this type of Calls-in-Queue Alarm button, only two threshold levels
should be programmed.
If all three thresholds are set to the same value, the result is one threshold only
(steady) with LED state either off or on. If two values are the same, then the result
is two alarm levels (flash, steady). The factory is setting is one call for all three
thresholds with LED states of off, flash, and steady.
An external alert only signals when the number of calls in the queue meets or
exceeds the programmed Threshold 3 value.
1
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
1
Programming Basics
Product Enhancements
MLX-5 and MLX-5D Telephones
Page 1-70
1
The MLX-5 nondisplay and MLX-5D display telephones are compatible with all
system releases. The display telephone includes a 2-line by 24-character display,
and both telephones come with 5 line buttons. In systems prior to Release 5.0, the
MLX-5 and MLX-5D telephones are treated as MLX-10 and MLX-10D telephones
respectively. As of Release 5.0, the system recognizes the MLX-5 and MLX-5D
telephones as 5-button telephones.
If these telephones are connected to communications system releases prior to 5.0
they are recognized by the communications system as 10 button telephones.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Issue 1
June 1997
Programming with SPM
Page 2-1
0
Programming with SPM
2
The System Programming and Maintenance (SPM) software package offers an
alternate method of programming the MERLIN LEGEND Communications System
using a PC. This method frees the system programming console for other uses
and also provides the additional functions listed below:
■
Backing up system programming information
■
Restoring system programming information from a backup
■
Converting system programming information from one release to another
(part of the upgrade procedure)
■
Upgrading the communications system to a newer release
■
Printing, viewing, and storing reports
■
Programming the communications system remotely
■
Programming in surrogate mode
SPM runs on a DOS-based PC as a standalone program or on a UNIX System
platform as part of Intuity, Integrated Solution II, or Integrated Solution III (IS II/III).
It is available on a 3.5-inch diskette for DOS or UNIX, or on a 5.25 inch diskette for
DOS.
NOTE:
SPM software can be used directly from the floppy disks on a DOS
machine; however, if your PC has a hard disk, you should install SPM onto
the hard disk.
This book describes the use of SPM on a PC with a DOS operating system. If your
system has the Intuity or IS II/III application, you have the UNIX System version of
SPM.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Requirements
Page 2-2
For information about accessing SPM from the IS II/III application, refer to the
following books:
■
Integrated Solution III System Manager’s Guide, order no. 555-601-010
■
Integrated Solution III Installation and Maintenance Guide, order
no. 555-601-011
■
Integrated Solution II System Manager’s Guide, order no. 555-600-726
■
Integrated Solution II Installation and Maintenance Guide, order
no. 555-600-720
System Requirements
2
To use SPM for system programming, you need the SPM diskette and an
approved PC with version 3.3 (or later) of MS-DOS. At a minimum, your PC
should support and include the following items:
■
At least 640 kbytes of RAM
■
A floppy disk drive that will accommodate the SPM diskette (3.5-inch or
5.25-inch)
■
A monochrome or color monitor
■
A serial port that can use either a DB-9 or DB-25 connector
■
For a DB-9 connector, use a 9-pin to 25-pin adapter to attach the 25-pin
connector of the RS-232 interface cable.
■
An RS-232 interface cable of appropriate length for your site connection(s)
Depending on how you connect the PC to the control unit, you also need the
following items:
■
Direct local connection, if the PC is within 50 ft. of the control unit.
— Either a 355AF modular adapter (if there is a male connector on the
interface cable) or a 355A modular adapter (if there is a female
connector on the interface cable)
— A four-pair modular cord (D8W)
■
Direct local connection, if the PC is more than 50 ft. from the control unit.
— 355AF adapter
— EIA crossover cable
— Two Z3A2 Asynchronous Data Units (ADUs)
— ADU crossover cable
— 400B2 power adapter
— 2012D transformer
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Page 2-3
— BR1A-4P adapter and either a 102 connecting block or 103
connecting block
— 248B adapter
— eight-position wall jacks
— four-pair plug-ended cable
— D8W cords
— D6AP power cord
— EIA-232-D cables
■
Modem (local or remote) connection
— A modem that supports 1200- or 2400-bps connections
In addition, a parallel printer is useful for reports (the PC needs a parallel port for
the connection).
NOTE:
SPM uses Interrupt 4 and I/O address 3F8 for COM1. It uses Interrupt 3
and I/O address 2F8 for COM2.
Installing the SPM Software
2
Before you install or run SPM, use diskcopy on a DOS PC (see your operating
system guide) to make a backup copy of the SPM diskette and store the original in
a safe place. Use the backup copy to run the installation program.
For installing SPM on a DOS PC, follow the appropriate instructions in the next
section of this book.
NOTE:
If your PC does not have a hard disk, you do not need to run the installation
program. Go to “Initializing the SPM Software.”
DOS Installation
2
Use the following procedure to install SPM on the hard drive of a DOS PC.
NOTE:
If you are updating SPM, you do not need to remove the current SPM files.
The new files will overwrite your current SPM files.
Considerations
Review the following items before you begin the installation procedure.
2
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-4
The installation program automatically performs the following:
■
Checks available space on the hard disk. If space is insufficient, the
installation is terminated and an error message is generated.
■
Checks the autoexec.bat and config.sys files. If either file is
write-protected, the installation is terminated and an error message is
generated. SPM must make changes to these files.
■
Saves a copy of autoexec.bat as autoexec.old.
■
Saves a copy of config.sys as config.old.
■
If autoexec.bat has not already been configured for SPM, performs the
following:
— Adds c:\spm to the path statement
— Adds the line SET AMS_PATH=C:
— Adds the background print command
PRINT /D:PRN /B:4096 /U:3 /M:200 /S:1 >NUL
■
Adds the following line to config.sys if it is not already present
DEVICE=C:\ANSI.SYS.
■
Copies the ansi.sys file from the floppy disk to c:\.
■
Creates the directory c:\spm.
■
Copies the following files from the floppy disk into c:\spm:
— spm.exe
— ams_hlp.eng (English language help file)
— ams_hlp.fre (French language help file)
— ams_hlp.spa (Spanish language help file)
■
Creates the following directories if they do not already exist:
— c:\spm\backup
— c:\spm\reports
— c:\spm\tmp
■
Does one of the following:
— Creates the SPM configuration file c:\spm\ams.cfg, if it does not
already exist. In this case, the ams.cfg file consists of only one line,
in which the language attribute is specified: LANG 1 if you specified
English or did not specify a language with the install command;
— Modifies the ams.cfg file, if it already exists, by adding or changing
the LANG value.
Follow the steps below to install SPM on the PC’s hard disk.
Switch to Drive A, if it is not already the current drive.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Page 2-5
A:> appears on the screen.
Insert the backup copy of the SPM diskette into Drive A.
Type one of the commands shown below and press
■
install
■
install french
■
install spanish
2
.
Because English is the default language, install and install english have
the same result. If you do use the language argument (english, french, or
spanish), you must type it in lowercase letters as shown. The command install
may be uppercase or lowercase.
Wait for the message shown below to appear.
SPM HARD DISK INSTALLATION PROGRAM
Strike a key when ready
Press any key to begin the installation.
When the installation is finished, the following message appears:
SPM HARD DISK INSTALLATION IS NOW COMPLETE
YOU MUST REBOOT YOUR SYSTEM BEFORE USING SPM
Remove the SPM diskette from Drive A and reboot your system.
The installation procedure is complete. Go to “Initializing the SPM Software.”
DOS Installation with Windows 95
2
Using DOS SPM with Windows 95 improves the interaction of SPM with the
operating system as compared to Windows 3.x installation. For example, the
interaction with the print driver is improved. If an online printer is not available
when you try to print while using SPM, you see a message box explaining the
problem. You can correct the problem by bringing the printer on-line and
continuing, or you can cancel the print operation. SPM operation is not affected by
the error message or the action you take to correct the problem.
Use the following procedure to install SPM. You do not need to remove the
current SPM files. The new files automatically overwrite your current SPM files.
Considerations
2
Review the following items before you begin the installation procedure.
The installation program automatically performs the following:
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Page 2-6
■
If you typed install (the command for DOS installation) instead of
instal95, checks if your PC has Windows 95 installed. If Windows 95 is
detected, you see an error message that tells you to run the Instal95
program.
■
Creates the directory c:\spm if it does not already exist.
■
Checks if the print.exe file is present in any directory listed in the PATH
environment variable.
■
Runs the DOS SETVER command to set the version table for print.exe to
6.22. This is required to enable print.exe to run on Windows 95.
■
Creates an spm.bat file in the directory c:\spm. The spm.bat file contains
the ams_path and print statements required to run SPM.
■
Unzips and copies the remaining files into the directory c:\spm.
■
Instructs you to refer to this document for details on using the PIF Editor to
configure an SPM PIF file to work with the spm.exe file.
2
Installation
With Windows 95 running on your PC, follow these steps to install SPM on the
PC’s hard drive:
1.
Insert a backup copy of SPM in any floppy disk drive (usually the A drive).
2.
Choose one of the following two methods to install SPM:
Method 1- Install DOS SPM with French, Spanish, or English
Language:
a.
Open a DOS Window from the Windows Explorer.
b.
At the DOS prompt, switch to the drive with the backup copy of SPM
diskette (usually the A drive).
c.
At the DOS prompt, type one of the commands shown below and
press 2 .
■
instal95 or instal95 english
■
instal95 french
■
instal95 spanish
NOTE:
Because English is the factory-set language, instal95 and
instal95 english have the same result. If you do use the language
argument (english, french or spanish), you must type it in
lowercase letters as shown. The command instal95 may be in
uppercase or lowercase letters.
Method 2- Install DOS SPM with French, Spanish, or English
Language:
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
3.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-7
a.
From the Windows Explorer, select the floppy drive that contains the
backup copy of SPM diskette.
b.
Select and run Instal95 (either by double clicking on the file name or
single clicking on the file name and using the menu choice
File:Open).
After you start DOS SPM installation using either method, the following
message appears:
SPM WINDOWS 95 HARD DISK INSTALLATION PROGRAM
Press any key to continue.
4.
Press any key to begin the installation.
5.
If your PC does not have a copy of PRINT.EXE in any directory listed in
your system’s PATH environment, the following message appears:
Copying print.exe to directory c:\spm
file(s) copied
WARNING - The application you are adding to the Windows
version table may not have been verified by Microsoft
in this version of Windows. Please contact your
software vendor for information on whether this
application will operate properly under this version of
Windows. If you execute this application by instructing
Windows to report a different MS-DOS version number,
you may lose or corrupt data, or cause system
instabilities. In that circumstance, Microsoft is not
responsible for any loss or damage.
Version table successfully updated.
The version change will take effect the next time you
restart your system.
*******************************************************
SPM Note: The warning message seen above was produced
by the SETVER command. This command was used in the SPM
install program to set the proper version of PRINT.EXE
file in the DOS version table. Please note that in
Windows 95, running SETVER always produces the warning
message seen above, even when the command is run
properly.
*******************************************************
Press any Key to continue . . .
6.
Press any key to continue installation. When SPM installation is complete
the following message appears:
Installation of SPM for DOS on your Windows 95 hard
drive is now complete. For easy access to SPM from
Windows 95, configure an SPM.PIF file. See the SPM
Manual for details. Press any key to continue . . .
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
7.
Page 2-8
Press any key
— If you installed DOS SPM using Method 1 in Step 2, close the DOS
Window by typing exit at the DOS prompt and pressing 2 . If
the window does not close, then the Close on Exit option for the
DOS window is not set. In this case, close the window by clicking on
the upper right window icon (the box with an x in it).
— If you installed DOS SPM using Method 2 in Step 2, the DOS
window closes automatically.
8.
If the print.exe file was copied to your PC in Step 5, you must reboot your
PC.
9.
You should now configure a PIF file for SPM. Use the instructions that
follow
Configuring a PIF file for DOS SPM
2
Refer to the Windows 95 help topic on “PIF” for details on using the PIF editor to
implement an SPM PIF file to work with the spm.exe file.
Configure a PIF file for DOS SPM by doing the following:
1.
In the Windows Explorer, select the SPM application file. Then select the
menu item File:Properties. The screen that pops up will have tabs along
the top.
2.
In Program Tab:, put the following line in the Working Directory entry:
C:\SPM
3.
In Program Tab:, put the following line in the Batch File entry:
C:\SPM\SPM.BAT
4.
In Program Tab:, make sure the Close on Exit checkbox is checked.
You can now double click on either the SPM application icon or the SPM “Shortcut
to MS-DOS” icon to run SPM. When you quit SPM (by pressing the Home key),
the window closes automatically.
Hiding the spm.exe and spm.bat Files
2
If you want to hide the spm.exe and spm.bat files, use the following steps:
1.
In the Windows 95 Explorer, select each file.
2.
Click File from the menu bar, then select Properties.
3.
In the Properties dialog box, click on the Hidden checkbox located under
the General Tab in the Attributes section.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Page 2-9
Initializing the SPM Software
2
To run correctly, the DOS version of SPM requires certain information
(transmission speed, type of monitor, and so on). You need to supply this
information only once, the first time you run SPM.
The information you provide during the initialization process is written to the SPM
configuration file (ams.cfg). If you need to change this information at some later
time, you can do so in either of the following ways:
■
Use any of the options in Table 2-1 to change the information in ams.cfg.
■
Edit the ams.cfg file. (If you are unsure about editing the file, you can
remove it. You are prompted to reinitialize the next time you invoke SPM.
The file is created at that time.)
NOTE:
The DEBUG attribute is also specified in ams.cfg as DEBUG=O (off), the
default setting, or DEBUG=1 (on). This attribute is used to enable the
Escape-to-Shell feature of SPM, activated by pressing # + . To turn
DEBUG on, you must edit the ams.cfg file; it is not part of the initialization
process. The DEBUG attribute is for use by qualified service personnel
only.
Table 2-1.
SPM Configuration File (ams.cfg) Options
Option
Use
spm -com1
Specifies COM1 as the serial communications port
used by SPM
spm -com2
Specifies COM2 as the serial communications port
used by SPM
spm -s1200
Specifies modem speed of 1200 bps
spm -s2400
Specifies modem speed of 2400 bps
spm -color
Specifies color monitor
spm -mono
Specifies monochrome monitor
spm -1 english
Specifies English as the PC language
spm -1 french
Specifies French as the PC language
spm -1 spanish
Specifies Spanish as the PC language
Follow the steps below to perform the SPM initialization.
Type spm and press 2 to display the SPM Welcome screen shown in Step 2.
■
Make your entry at the C:> prompt if your PC has a hard disk.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
■
Page 2-10
Make your entry at the A:> prompt if you are using the floppy drive.
Press any key.
Welcome to SPM
X.XX = current version of SPM
The MERLIN LEGEND
System Programming
& Maintenance Utility
Please press any key
to continue
Version X.XX
The screens shown in Steps 3 through 7 appear only if the system has not been
initialized. Otherwise, the screen shown in Step 8 appears.
Select the serial communications port used for SPM and press
COMM PORT:
1.
Comm 1
2.
Comm 2
2
.
Type 1 for serial port 1 (COM1).
Type 2 for serial port 2 (COM2).
Enter selection #
Select the communications port speed and press 2 .
Speed:
1.
1200
2.
2400
Type 1 for 1200 bps.
Type 2 for 2400 bps.
Enter selection #
Respond to the color prompt and press 2 .
COLOR
Enter selection (y/n):
Type y if you have a color monitor.
Type n if you do not have a color monitor.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Installing the SPM Software
Page 2-11
Select a language and press
2
English
2.
French
3.
Spanish
.
Type 1 for English.
Type 2 for French .
Type 3 for Spanish.
Language:
1.
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter selection #:
The language you select here becomes the SPM (PC) language.
Review your selections.
x = the values entered for each
entry in Steps 3 through 6
SPM CONFIGURATION:
Comm Port:
x
Speed: x
Color: x
Desire change (y/n)?
■
To change any of the information shown, type Y and press 2 . The
screen shown in Step 3 appears. Repeat Steps 3 through 6.
■
To save the information shown, type N and press 2 .
— If the PC is connected to the processor, the SPM Main Menu
appears as shown in Step 8.
— If the PC is not connected, go to “Connecting the PC.”
Press the function key that corresponds to the option you want.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
NOTE:
The function keys shown on either side of the display are included here for
quick reference. See ‘‘SPM Screens’’ for details on using the PC keys in
SPM.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Connecting the PC
Page 2-12
2
Connecting the PC
There are three ways to connect the PC to the control unit. Choose the method
below that is most useful for your installation.
■
Direct local connection
■
Local modem connection
■
Remote modem connection
2
Direct Local Connection
For a direct local connection, you must connect the PC to the system
programming jack. This is the lower modular RS-232 jack on the processor
module, as shown in Figure 2-1. (The upper jack is reserved for the SMDR
printer.)
To connect a PC more than fifty feet from the control unit, see Figure 2-2.
For direct local connections, the system supports speeds of 1200 and 2400 bps.
D8W
RS-232
355AF
Adapter
POWER
CAUTION
ON
OFF
Turn
off
power
before
inserting
removingor
modules
AG INPUT
FR
GND
Figure 2-1.
Direct Local Connection
012
408 GS/LS
44GS or LS Outside Lines/
8 Analog Telephones (ATL)
008 MLX
8 MLX (Digital) Telephones
System
Programming
Jack
PROCESSOR
Serial
Communications
Port
408
NOTE:
You must use a direct local connection to program in surrogate mode.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Connecting the PC
Page 2-13
8DW
EIA
Crossover
Cable
012
408 GS/LS
44GS or LS Outside Lines/
8 Analog Telephones (ATL)
008 MLX
8 MLX (Digital) Telephones
PROCESSOR
SMDR
Jack
ADMIN
Jack
408
Processor Module
355AF
Adapter
POWER
CAUTIO
N
ON
OFF
EIA-232-D
Turn
poweoff
inser r befor
remoting or e
mod ving
ules
AG INPUT
FR
GND
Z3A2 ADU
D8W
ADU Crossover Cable
400B2
Power
Adapter
4 Pair Plug
Ended Cable
D6AP
2012D-50M
Transformer
or
Wall
Jack
Control Unit
AC Outlet
Direct Connection
BR1A-4P Adapter
or
102 Connecting Block
or
103 Connecting Block
Building
Wiring
DIW
Wall
Jack
102 or 103
Connecting Block
D8W
D8W
or
EIA-232-D
Z3A2 ADU
Cable Joints
Figure 2-2.
Direct Local Connection, PC More Than 50 ft. Away
Local Modem Connection
2
For a local modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or
built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. Connect the
modem to an 012 or 016 module in the control unit, as shown in Figure 2-3.
The internal modem operates at speeds of 1200 and 2400 bps.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming with SPM
Connecting the PC
012
Port
012
408 GS/LS
44GS or LS Outside Lines/
8 Analog Telephones (ATL)
008 MLX
8 MLX (Digital) Telephones
Serial
Communications
Port
408
Page 2-14
PROCESSOR
2
RS-232
POWER
MODEM
CAUTION
ON
OFF
Turn
poweroff
inserti before
removng or
modul ing
es
AG INPUT
FR
GND
Figure 2-3.
Local Modem Connection
2
Remote Modem Connection
For a remote modem connection, you must use a modem (either connected to, or
built into, the PC) to access the internal modem in the control unit. You must also
use a dial-up connection, as shown in Figure 2-4. See ‘‘Accessing SPM’’ for
details on accessing SPM with a remote modem connection.
The internal modem operates at speeds of 1200 and 2400 bps.
RS-232
MODEM
POWER
CAUTIO
N
ON
OFF
Turn
poweoff
insertr befor
remo ing or e
moduving
les
AG INPUT
FR
GND
Figure 2-4.
Remote Modem Connection
012
008 MLX
8 MLX (Digital) Telephones
408
PROCESSOR
Serial
Communications
Port
408 GS/LS
44GS or LS Outside Lines/
8 Analog Telephones (ATL)
Incoming
trunk line
Public or private
telephone network
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Accessing SPM
Page 2-15
NOTE:
Remote access (modem connection) has priority over local access (direct
connection), unless a backup or restore procedure is in progress through a
direct local connection. If a modem connection is attempted while any other
type of on-site programming is in progress (either at the system or at a
directly-connected PC), the system sends a message to the on-site
programmer. The message indicates that a modem connection is being
established and the on-site programming session is terminated.
2
Accessing SPM
The procedure for accessing SPM depends on whether your PC is connected to
the control unit with a modem (either local or remote) or without a modem (direct).
This section covers both of these access procedures.
2
With a Direct Local Connection
To access SPM when your PC is connected directly to the control unit, follow the
steps below.
Set up the appropriate physical connections between the PC and the control
unit.
See ‘‘Connecting the PC’’.
If you installed SPM on the hard disk of the PC, go to Step 5.
If the PC does not have a hard disk, insert the SPM diskette into Drive A.
Type a: and press 2 .
A:> appears on the screen.
Type spm and press 2 to display the SPM Welcome screen shown below.
Welcome to SPM
The MERLIN LEGEND
System Programming
& Maintenance Utility
Please press any key
to continue
Version X.XX
X.XX current version of SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Accessing SPM
Page 2-16
Press any key to display the SPM Main Menu shown below.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
NOTE:
The function keys shown on either side of the display are included
here for quick reference. See ‘‘SPM Screens’’ for details on using the
PC keys in SPM.
■
If the SPM Main Menu does not appear or if the information on the screen
is garbled, press any key again.
■
If the COM Port (communications port) screen appears instead of the SPM
Main Menu, it indicates that the SPM software has not been initialized. See
‘‘Initializing the SPM Software’’.
To select an option, press the function key that corresponds to the option you
want. For example, to select Language press .
With a Local or Remote Modem Connection
2
The method you use to access SPM by modem depends on whether you are
programming on site (locally) or from a remote location.
■
If you are on site, the modem must be connected to an 012 or 016 module
on the control unit. To establish a connection to the control unit’s internal
modem, dial *10.
■
If you are at a remote location, do one of the following:
— Place a call to the system on a Remote Access line, enter the barrier
code (if required), and dial the code for the internal modem (*10 ).
— Place a voice call to the system using the line to which the modem is
connected and ask the operator to transfer you to the modem (by
pressing Transfer, dialing *10, then hanging up the telephone).
When you hear the modem answer tone, switch to data mode.
Considerations
2
Review the following items before you begin the modem connection procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Accessing SPM
Page 2-17
2
Set the Programming Language
If you prefer to program in a language other than the current SPM language
setting, see ‘‘Language’’.
2
Modem Connections
You must make a data connection to a modem. The following modem dialing
commands are for Hayes  and Hayes-compatible modems. These may not be the
commands your modem usesrefer to the user guide that came with your
modem for specific information.
■
If the PC is in the same location as the control unit, type *10.
■
If the PC is in a remote location and your system has activated the Remote
Access feature, type the following and press 2 :
— Without barrier codes type:
ATDT ; the remote access telephone number; and W*10.
For example: ATDT12015551234 W*10 2 .
— With barrier codes type:
ATDT ; the remote access telephone number; the barrier code
preceded by a “W” and W*10. The barrier code in the example below
is 555555.
For example: ATDT12015551234 W555555 W*10 2 .
■
The password prompt appears on the screen when the connection is
made. (You may have to press 2 more than once to get the password
prompt.)
■
If the PC is in a remote location and your system has not activated the
Remote Access feature, do the following:
— Use the main telephone number to place a voice call to the system
on the line to which the modem is connected.
— Instruct the operator to transfer you to the modem (by pressing
Transfer, dialing *10, then hanging up the telephone).
— To put the modem on line, type ATH1 and press
up the telephone.
2
, then hang
NOTE:
If you enter a telephone number of fewer than 11 digits, you must end it with
a pound sign (#).
To access SPM through a local or remote modem connection, follow the steps
below.
Set up the appropriate physical connections between the PC and the control
unit. See ‘‘Connecting the PC’’.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Accessing SPM
Type spm and press
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-18
2
to display the SPM Welcome screen shown below.
X.XX = current version of SPM
Welcome to SPM
The MERLIN LEGEND
System Programming
& Maintenance Utility
Please press any key
to continue
Version X.XX
If you wish to program in a language other than the current language set for SPM,
see ‘‘Set the Programming Language’’.
Press any key to display a blank screen on which you can enter modem commands. (You may have to press the key several times.)
Make a data connection to the modem of the control unit.
See ‘‘Modem Connections’’. When the connection is made, the password prompt
appears as shown in Step 4.
Type the SPM password to display the SPM Main Menu shown in Step 6.
Enter Password:
The password does not display as you type it.
To select an option, press the function key that corresponds to the option you
want. For example, to select Language press .
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-19
NOTE:
The function keys shown on either side of the display are included here for
quick reference. See ‘‘SPM Screens’’ for details on using the PC keys in
SPM.
2
Using SPM
This section describes how to use the SPM screens, SPM Help, and the SPM
options listed below.
■
Backup
■
Boards
■
Browse
■
Convert
■
Language
■
Maintenance
■
Monitor
■
Pass-Thru
■
Password
■
Print Options
■
Restore
■
System Programming
NOTE:
Some of the procedures described in this section should be performed by
qualified service personnel only.
SPM Screens
2
SPM screens simulate the system programming console. Each SPM screen
includes a 7-line by 24-character console simulation window that corresponds to
the display area of the MLX-20L telephone. To the right and left of this console
simulation window are columns that list the keys corresponding to
similarly-located buttons on the MLX-20L telephone. If you are working with
Version 2.0 or higher, the version number appears in the upper left corner of the
screen (for example, V4). Figure 2-5 illustrates the SPM display screen.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Figure 2-5.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-20
SPM Display
through , and through display on either side of the console
simulation window. They represent the function keys to use when you select
screen options. When a screen contains several choices, press the function key
identified by the label next to your choice. (If you were programming on the
console, you would press the telephone button next to your choice.)
Below the console simulation window are 20 simulated line buttons. The 20 line
buttons can be selected using the arrow keys to position the cursor on the
appropriate button. Using D (the Inspect feature), you can determine the status
of each line and the features programmed on each line according to the letter that
appears next to the line number (see below).
On the PC screen, the letters R and G represent the ON state of the red and green
LEDs, respectively, that are on the console. For example, if a line, trunk, or pool is
assigned to a line button, on the console a green LED lights next to the button. On
the PC screen, the letter G (for green) displays next to the button. Similarly, if a
line, trunk, or pool is not assigned to a line button, neither G nor R display next to
the button on the PC screen. If a trunk is assigned to a pool, an R (for red) displays
on the PC screen.
The labels in the column on the right side of the screen show key combinations
that correspond to buttons on the MLX-20L telephone. Table 2-2 describes the
function of PC keys in SPM.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Table 2-2.
Page 2-21
Function of PC Keys in SPM
PC Key
Console
SPM Function
H
Home
Quit. Exit from SPM and return to the DOS
prompt when you finish with system
programming. If you are using a modem, the
call is disconnected.
E
Menu
Return to the SPM Main Menu.
U
More
Display more menu items (when there is
another screen and the > symbol appears next
to the key).
D
Inspct
Show the current information that has been
programmed for a feature or button.
! 0
Drop
Enter a stop in a speed dialing sequence. This
combination also deletes an entry in a field on
any screen except one in which you are
entering a speed dialing sequence.
! &
Conf
Flash. Enter a switchhook flash in a speed
dialing sequence.
! #
n/a
TopSP. Return to the top of the System
Programming menu.
! (
Hold
Pause. Enter a pause in a speed dialing
sequence.
! 5
n/a
Convert. Convert a backup file from its original
Release format to a different Release format.
! N
n/a
Toggle modem speed between 1200 and
2400 bps.
# n/a
Help. Display a help screen about SPM
operations. To exit from Help, press E.
# n/a
Reset. Reset the communications port. For
example, if the information on the screen is
garbled, try exiting from and then re-entering
the screen. If the screen remains garbled, use
# + to clear the screen and return to the
SPM Welcome screen. Note that using # +
drops the modem connection.
# n/a
Browse. View print reports saved with Print
Opts.
Continued on Next Page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Table 2-2.
Page 2-22
— Continued
Function of PC Keys in SPM
PC Key
Console
SPM Function
# n/a
Escape to shell. To use this key sequence, you
must set DEBUG=1 in the configuration file
ams.cfg. You can then use this key sequence
to execute DOS (or UNIX System) commands.
To return to SPM, type exit.
2
Enter
The 2 key on your PC can be used
instead of when Enter appears as a
choice in the console simulation window.
9
Backspace
The 9 key on your PC can be used instead of
(Backspace ) when it appears as a choice
in the console simulation window.
$
Delete
The $ key on your PC can be used instead of
(Delete ) when it appears as a choice in
the console simulation window.
T
B
n/a
L
R
The up, down, left, and right arrow keys can be
used to highlight selections in a menu and to
select the 20 line buttons below the console
simulation window.
SPM Main Menu Options
2
The SPM Main Menu provides access to system programming and to the SPM
functions listed in Table 2-3.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Table 2-3.
Page 2-23
SPM Main Menu Options
SPM Menu
Option
Function
Sys Program
To program the system
Backup*
To make a backup copy of your system programming and store
it on diskette or on hard disk
Boards*
Shows which modules (port boards) are in each slot of the
control unit and allows you to assign boards to slots
Print Opts*
Directs reports to the printer or to the PC for storage on diskette
or hard disk
Monitor*
Restricted to use by your technical support organization
Maintenance
Restricted to use by your technical support organization and
qualified technicians
Restore*
To restore your system programming from diskette or hard disk
Pass-Thru
1
(IS II/III only) To make a remote connection, through the control
unit, to an IS II/III PC to administer applications on the IS II/III
PC.
Password*
To change the password for remote entry into the system.
Language
To select a language (English, French, or Spanish) for the
console simulation window on the PC. (There is also a
Language option available on the System Programming menu
that allows you to set the system language.)
1. SPM option only. Not available on the MLX-20L system programming console. To be
used only by qualified service personnel.
2
SPM Help
To access the SPM help screens, press # + .
To review the help screens press, U and
D
To return to the first help screen, press
.
To exit from SPM help, press
H
.
E
A typical help screen is shown in Figure 2-6.
.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Figure 2-6.
Page 2-24
SPM Help
2
Backup
The Backup procedure is used by qualified service personnel to create a file of
system programming information either in the \spm\backup directory (on the hard
drive of the PC) or in the root directory of a diskette (on the floppy disk drive of the
PC).
NOTE:
Back up your system programming information on a regular basis. A current
backup file allows you to quickly and easily restore your system, if the need
arises.
Determining the Release Number
of a Backup File
2
If you have a backup diskette but do not know its release number, you may be
able to find this information in the backup header. Beginning with later versions of
Release 1.1, the backup file contains a backup header 128 bytes long.
Approximately 59 of these bytes are currently used. Bytes 55 through 59 of the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-25
header contain the MERLIN Legend Communication System Release number, as
shown in Table 2-4. (Release 1.0 and early versions of Release 1.1 do not contain
this information in readable form.)
Table 2-4.
Backup Header: Release Number
Release No.
Build No.
System Size
Mode
Size
2 bytes
12 bytes
1 byte
1 byte
Examples
03 00
32
01
01 - Key
02 01
02 - Behind Switch
03 - Hybrid/PBX
The release number is found in the first two bytes (four characters) of the
identification number. For example, 0300 = 3.0, 0201 = 2.1.
If the backup file is compressed, you can read the header but you cannot read the
data area following the header. Use type [backup filename] to read the header on
a DOS system or cat [backup filename] to read the header on a UNIX System.
Note that the communication system release number, not the version number of
SPM, reflects whether the backup file is compressed or uncompressed. Release
1.0 backups are uncompressed and Release 1.1 and later backups are
compressed. Uncompressed files take longer to restore.
Considerations
Review the following items before you begin the backup procedure:
■
The communications system does not have to be idle during backup;
however, extension programming is blocked.
■
Any objects that are in a maintenance-busy state are stored in that state.
When you restore system programming, these objects are busied out, even
if they have since been released from the maintenance-busy state.
■
If you plan to store your backup file on a diskette, format a DOS diskette.
(DOS formatting can be done on either a UNIX System PC or a DOS PC).
■
Uncompressed backup files are 100,000 to 210,000 bytes in size;
compressed files are about 70,000 to 85,000 bytes.
■
Maintenance data (error logs and other data used by qualified service
technicians) is not saved in the backup file.
Follow the steps below to perform the backup procedure.
2
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-26
At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Backup.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk.
A second window appears which displays the GOTO FLOPPY and MAKE NEW FILE
options and a directory listing for the C:\spm\backup directory.
■
If you are saving the backup file to a floppy disk, go to Step 3.
■
If you are saving the backup file to the hard disk, go to Step 4.
Remove the SPM diskette and insert a formatted diskette. Use the arrow keys to
highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press 2 .
Make a selection for
the BACKUP file.
MAKE NEW FILE will
GOTO FLOPPY
MAKE NEW FILE
backup.ams
create a new file
file.1
on selected device.
file.2
Press ESC to abort.
2 , the GOTO FLOPPY statement shown above changes to
GOTO HARD DISK and the directory listing for A:\ is displayed. Continue with
After you press
Step 4.
The screen displays the default name for the backup file (backup.ams).
Specify a backup filename.
■
To select the default filename, use the arrow keys to highlight backup.ams
and press 2 . Go to Step 6.
■
To enter a different filename, use the arrow keys to select MAKE NEW FILE
and press 2 . Go to Step 5.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-27
Type the new filename and press 2 .
Press ESC to Abort.
If you are working from the floppy drive,
A:\ appears on the screen.
Enter filename:
(default is backup.ams)
You can specify a drive letter with the filename but no path information.
Verify that the filename chosen does not already exist.
The following screen appears only if the filename chosen already exists. Continue
with Step 7 if this screen does not appear.
The file already exists.
If you continue, the old
version will be deleted.
Press % to abort the backup. Go to
Step 1 to create a different backup file.
Press ESC to abort.
or c to continue.
Press C to continue. Go to Step 7.
Observe the backup status screen.
Press ESC to Abort.
Est. Blocks: xxx - xxxx
filename = the backup filename specified
in Step 5
filename
BACKUP IN PROGRESS
Received Block xx
SPM indicates the status of the backup by displaying the number of the last block
received (xx ). Line 2 of the display screen shows the estimated number of blocks
to be sent from the control unit (xxx-xxxx ). This line is blank if you are backing
up from Release 1.0.
If you abort the backup, the partial backup file is deleted to prevent restoration
from a corrupted file and you see the screen shown in Step 8.
When the backup is complete, you see the screen shown in Step 9.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-28
To abort the backup press % to return to the SPM Main Menu.
Press ESC to Abort.
Est. Blocks: xxx - xxxx
filename
BACKUP IN PROGRESS
XMODEM ABORT - User
When the backup is complete, press 2 to return to the SPM Main Menu.
Backup successful.
xxx = total number of blocks received
Please press Enter
to see the Main Menu
Received xxx Blocks
Boards
2
The Boards option allows qualified service personnel to add a board to the next
available slot. The system must be idle to use this option. This option is not
available from the system programming console.
The Boards option is also available in surrogate mode. In surrogate mode, you
can assign trunk and extension modules (boards) to slots, even though the boards
have not actually been installed. This type of board is referred to as a “phantom”
or “null” board.
You cannot use the Boards option to change an actual board type. All boards
assigned with the Boards option, including phantom boards, are cleared
(unassigned) if you perform a board renumber ( System→Board Renum).
NOTE:
You must assign phantom boards to higher slot numbers than those you
assign to any real boards. If you assign a phantom board to a lower slot
number than a real board, the control unit does not recognize the real
board(s) that follow the phantom board.
NOTE:
If you remove a board but do not replace it, and then perform a board
renumber, the control unit will not recognize any boards that follow the
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-29
empty slot. You must reseat all of the boards to fill the empty slot before you
perform the board renumber.
The Inspect function (D) lets you see which modules have been assigned to
slots on the control unit. Note that both phantom boards and real boards display if
you use the Inspect function. To see only real board assignments, you must print
the System Information report:
System→More→ Print→SysSet-up.
Table 2-5 shows the type of boards that you can select.
Table 2-5.
Board Types
Board Type
Description
400LSR
4 loop-start line jacks with 4 touch-tone receivers
400GLR
4 ground-start/loop-start line jacks with 4 touch-tone receivers
800LS
8 loop-start line jacks
800GLID
8 ground-start/loop-start line jacks with Caller ID capability
available on the loop-start lines and 2 touch-tone receivers
800GLS
8 ground-start/loop-start line jacks
408LSA
4 loop-start line jacks and 8 ATL analog extension jacks
408GLA
4 ground-start/loop-start line jacks and 8 ATL analog extension
jacks
408GLM
4 ground-start/loop-start line jacks and 8 MLX extension jacks
(16 endpoints)
008ATL
8 analog extension jacks
008MLX
8 MLX-20L extension jacks (16 endpoints)
012TR/OPT
12 tip/ring extension jacks with 2 touch-tone receivers or 008
OPT jacks
016TR
16 tip/ring extension jacks with 4 touch-tone receivers
800DID
8 DID trunk jacks with 2 touch-tone receivers
400E&M
4 E&M tie trunk jacks
100D
1 DS1 jack (24 channels)
800BRI
8 BRI trunk jacks (16 channels)
Follow the steps below to assign modules.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-30
At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Boards.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Press the function key that corresponds to the module you want to select.
Boards:
>
Boards:
Make a selection
Make a selection
408LSA
800LS
400E&M016TRR
012TR/OPT
008ATL
408GLA800GLID
800DID
008MLX
100D800BRI
800GLS
400GLR
408GLM
Exit
400LSR
Exit
If the module you want to assign is not shown on the first screen of the Boards
menu, press U to display the next menu screen.
Type the control unit slot number (01 through 17) in which the module is to be
installed.
module name = option selected in Step 2
module name
Enter slot numbers
(01-17)
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Assign or remove the module from the slot entered in Step 3.
module name = option selected in Step 2
nn = slot entered in Step 3
module name
Enter slot numbers
(01-17)
nn
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
To remove the module type from the specified slot number, press (Delete).
The Boards menu reappears.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-31
To assign the module type to the specified slot number and assign that same
module type to another slot, press (Next).
To assign the module type to the specified slot number and assign a different
module type to another slot, press (Enter).
To terminate the procedure and assign a different module, press
(Exit ) and repeat Steps 2 through 4.
To view types of modules assigned to all slots, press D (Inspect).
Save your entry.
Select Exit.
The programming session terminates and the system restarts.
2
Browse
The Browse option allows you to browse through reports saved in the Reports
directory (\spm\reports) on the hard disk of the PC or on a floppy.
At the SPM Main Menu press
#
+ .
GOTO FLOPPY
Please enter file name
FILENAME.XXX
FILENAME.YYY
Press ESC to Abort.
FILENAME.XXX and FILENAME.YYY from the \spm\reports directory
Use the arrow keys to highlight the source (hard disk or floppy) from which you
want to view the reports and press .
A list of the current reports appears.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-32
Use the arrow keys to highlight the report you want to view and press
.
The report appears.
■
To view the next page of a report, press D .
■
To view the previous page of a report, press U.
■
To return to the beginning of a report, press
■
To exit from the Browse option and return to the SPM Main Menu, press
%.
H
.
2
Convert
The Convert option (which can be used remotely) simplifies upgrading from an
earlier release to a later release of the communications system. (See ‘‘Upgrading
the System’’.) This procedure should be done only by qualified service personnel.
Convert uses two files: the existing backup file (the “convert from” file) and the
converted file (the “convert to” file), which is created when you run the Convert
option. The converted file contains system programming information in an
uncompressed form. The “convert from” file is unchanged. Because
uncompressed files take longer to process than compressed files, you may want
to restore this uncompressed backup to the old control unit and then create a new
backup. This new backup is in compressed form and does not have to be
converted. For more information about compressed and uncompressed files see
‘‘Backup’’.
To convert system programming to Release 4.0 format, Version 4.15 of SPM is
required. This version can be easily identified by the version number, V4, in the
upper left corner of the screen.
Help screens are available to guide you through the Convert procedure. See
‘‘SPM Help’’.
Before you use the Convert option, you must complete the following tasks:
■
If your PC has a hard disk, install the appropriate version of the SPM
software. See ‘‘Upgrading the System’’.
■
Back up system programming. See ‘‘Backup’’.
■
Make sure you know the name of the backup file that you have created.
NOTE:
Once the actual file conversion begins, you cannot stop the process;
pressing % has no effect.
Follow the steps below to perform the conversion.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-33
At the SPM Main Menu, press ! + 5 to begin the conversion.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk.
A second window appears which displays the GOTO FLOPPY option and a directory
listing for the C:\spm\backup directory.
■
If the backup file is stored on a floppy disk, go to Step 3.
■
If the backup file is stored on a hard disk, go to Step 4.
Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press
2
.
GOTO FLOPPY
Please select file name
to convert from,
FILENAME.XXX
FILENAME.YYY
then press Enter
Press ESC to abort.
FILENAME.XXX and FILENAME.YYY are from the \spm\backup directory.
After you press 2 , the GOTO FLOPPY statement shown above changes to
GOTO HARD DISK and a directory listing from the root directory of the floppy disk
appears. Go to Step 4.
GOTO HARD DISK
Please select file name
to convert from,
FILENAME.XXX
FILENAME.YYY
then press Enter
Press ESC to abort.
FILENAME.XXX and FILENAME.YYY are from the root directory of the disk in
Drive A.
Use the arrow keys to highlight the name of the backup file to be converted and
press 2 .
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
■
Page 2-34
If the backup file you select is a 4.0 backup, it can not be converted and the
following message appears:
File has already been converted.
Press Enter to continue.
Press 2 to select another filename, or press
procedure.
■
%
to abort the convert
If the backup file you select can be converted, go to Step 6.
Observe the updated file selection screen and press
Please select file name
to convert from,
2
.
FILENAME.XXX =the backup filename
selected in Step 4
N = drive
then press Enter
N: FILENAME.XXX
Press ESC to abort.
If converting from Release 1.0 or 1.1, select the CONVERT TO release. To convert from Release 1.2, 2.0, or 2.1 go to Step 7.
Please enter your
CONVERT TO release
and press ENTER.
1.2i
1.4i
2.0
2.1
3.0
4.0/5.0
All characters must be entered as they
appear on the screen, including the
decimal point.
Enter number:x.x
The screen below appears when converting from Release 1.0 or 1.1.
Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk.
■
If the CONVERT TO file will be saved to a floppy disk, go to Step 8.
■
If the CONVERT TO file will be saved to the hard disk, go to Step 9.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-35
Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press
Please select file name
GOTO FLOPPY
to convert to, or select
MAKE NEW FILE
NEW FILE to create a new
FILENAME.XXX
file on selected drive.
FILENAME.YYY
2
.
Enter Filename:
2 , the GOTO FLOPPY statement shown above changes to
GOTO HARD DISK and the directory listing from the root directory of the disk in
After you press
Drive A appears. Continue with Step 9.
Please select file name
GOTO HARD DISK
to convert to, or select
MAKE NEW FILE
NEW FILE to create a new
FILENAME.XXX
file on selected drive.
FILENAME.YYY
Enter Filename:
Press ESC to abort.
Specify a filename for the converted file.
■
Highlight the name of the file you want to convert to, press 2 , and go
to Step 11.
■
To enter a different filename, use the arrow keys to select MAKE NEW FILE
and press 2 .
Enter the new filename and press
Please select file name
to convert to, or select
NEW FILE to create a new
file on selected drive.
Enter Filename:
A:\filename.new
(default is RESTORE.NEW )
2
.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-36
The converted file cannot have the same name as the file from whch you
converted. If you specify the same filename, the following screen appears:
The file selected to
convert to is the same
as the file selected to
convert from.
Please
choose a different file.
Press Enter to continue
Press 2 and repeat this step.
Check the updated file screen and press 2 .
Please select file name
to convert to, or select
NEW FILE to create a new
FILENAME.NEW = name entered in
Step 10
N = drive
file on selected drive.
Enter Filename:
N: FILENAME.NEW
(default is RESTORE.NEW)
Observe the conversion progress screen.
CONVERSION IN PROGRESS
Converting From:
N: FILENAME.XXX
FILENAME.XXX = name entered at Step 4
FILENAME.NEW = name entered at
Step 10
N = drive
Converting To:
N: FILENAME.NEW
When the conversion completes, the screen shown in Step 13 appears.
Press any key to return to the SPM Main Menu.
Language
2
A language attribute in the SPM configuration file \spm\ams.cfg (DOS version) or
/usr/ams/ams.cfg (UNIX System version) specifies whether SPM menus, pop-up
windows, and other messages are presented in English, French, or Spanish. A
second language selection option affects messages from the control unit to SPM
and controls the display on the console simulation window for the duration of the
session. These two language options operate independently of each other.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-37
The following discussion refers to the language specified in the SPM configuration
file as the PC language and the language used by the control unit as the console
window language.
2
PC Language
During SPM installation, you select a language that is recorded in the SPM
configuration file. Any time thereafter, SPM can be started with the -l option to
specify a different language, using one of the following command lines:
■
spm -l english
■
spm -l french
■
spm -l spanish
Note that the option is a lowercase letter L and not the number 1.
Use of the -l option changes the language attribute in the ams.cfg file. The
language specified becomes the new PC language, used whenever SPM is
started without the -l option.
2
Console Window Language
By default, the language used in the console simulation window is the language
specified in the ams.cfg file; however, you can select a different language for this
window for the duration of the current session.
To select a different language, follow the steps below.
At the SPM Main Menu press
to select Language.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-38
Press the function key that corresponds to your language selection.
Display Language
Make a Selection:
English
French
Spanish
Exit
The Display Language screen reappears, with the language you selected.
Press to return to the SPM Main Menu or select another language.
2
Maintenance
!
CAUTION:
This option is for use by qualified technicians only. Maintenance
procedures are provided in the documentation for qualified
technicians. See “Related Documents.”
2
Monitor
!
CAUTION:
This is a password-protected option and is for use by your technical
support organization only.
Pass-Thru
2
The Pass-Thru option allows qualified service personnel to administer IS II/III
applications on a remote PC. It permits you to establish a remote connection with
the control unit to which the IS II/III PC is directly connected. Figure 2-7 illustrates
the relationship of the SPM PC, the communications system control unit, and the
IS II/III PC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Direct
Connection
012
408 GS/LS
44GS or LS Outside Lines/
8 Analog Telephones (ATL)
008 MLX
8 MLX (Digital) Telephones
408
Page 2-39
PROCESSOR
2
Remote
Connection
POWER
CAUTION
ON
OFF
Turn
off
power
before
inserting
removingor
modules
AG INPUT
FR
GND
Control Unit
IS II/III PC
Figure 2-7.
SPM PC
Pass-Thru
A Pass-Thru request must be initiated at a DOS PC; it is not available from a
UNIX System PC; that is, Pass-Thru cannot be established between two IS II/III
PCs. The local admin PC must be in an idle state.
A Pass-Thru request to a locally-connected IS II/III system causes the modem to
fall back to 1200 bps if the speed is set to 2400 bps and the modem call to the
control unit is at 1200 bps. If necessary, the communications system adjusts its
speed to that of the local SPM PC.
Once the Pass-Thru connection is established, you can program in any of the
following IS II/III applications from your SPM PC:
■
AUDIX Voice Power™
■
Call Accounting System
■
Fax Attendant System (IS III only)
■
CONVERSANT Intro (IS III only)
NOTE:
You cannot program the SPM application on the IS II/III PC because the
remote call (from your SPM PC) uses the IS II/III PC’s COM1 port;
therefore, the system programming jack cannot be used for system
programming. For the same reason, a user at the IS II/III PC end of the
connection cannot use SPM while your Pass-Thru is in effect. If use of SPM
is attempted, the user at the IS II/III end sees the following message:
PRE-EMPT IN PROGRESS
Please try again.
To initiate Pass-Thru, establish a modem connection between the SPM PC and
the control unit.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-40
If the IS II/III PC does not respond to the Pass-Thru request from the control unit
(for example, because the PC is turned off), you see the following message:
Pass-thru failed.
Please try again.
If the connection between the control unit and the IS II/III PC fails, the connection
between the control unit and the SPM PC is dropped. You see the following
message:
Pass-through Session
unexpectedly terminated.
Please press Enter
to continue.
When you press
2
you return to the SPM Main Menu.
Follow the steps below to initiate the Pass-Thru.
At the SPM Main Menu press
to select Pass-Thru.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
The display area changes to 24-lines by 80-characters, which is much larger than
the display area on the console simulation window (7-lines by 24-characters).
Type your login name and press 2 .
Welcome to
IS-II/III
login:
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Type the IS II/III password and press
Page 2-41
2
.
Password:
Type ams for the terminal emulation type and press
2
.
Unix disk usage
information
Term=
■
If you are working with IS II, the IS II main menu appears.
■
If you are working with IS III, the system prompts you for your login
registration. After you enter your login and press 2 , the IS III main
menu appears.
To exit from IS II/III programming, press (Exit).
The system prompts you for confirmation that you want to exit. After confirmation
the following message appears.
Returning to SPM
Password
2
The Password option is used by qualified service personnel to change the modem
connection password. A password is always required to establish a connection
with the built-in modem. The password always consists of seven characters. You
can perform remote system programming only if you enter the password correctly.
A default password is set at the factory. You must obtain this password from your
system consultant (SC).
Follow the steps below to change the modem connection password.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-42
At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Password.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Type the old (current) password. Do not press 2 .
Password:
Enter Old Password
If you type the old password incorrectly, the bottom of the screen displays the
message Not Equal. Repeat Step 2. If you fail to enter the password correctly
after three attempts, the bottom of the screen displays the message Old
Password in Use and the procedure terminates. Press 2 to return to the
SPM Main Menu.
Type the new password (any five characters). Do not press 2 .
Password
Enter New Password
The password does not appear on the screen as you type it.
!
SecurityAlert:
Always use the longest length password allowed on the system.
Passwords should consist of a random, non-repetitive, hard-to-guess
sequence of digits.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-43
Type the new password again. Do not press 2 .
Password
Enter New Password again
New Password in use
Press to return to the SPM Main Menu.
2
Print Options
The Print Opts option allows qualified service personnel to direct the output of
system programming reports either to the PC (where you can save them, browse
through them, or print them with the system programming Print option) or to the
SMDR printer.
Follow the procedure below to direct the output of the system programming
reports.
At the SPM Main Menu press
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
to select Print Opts.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-44
Select the target device for the reports.
Printer Options
Make a selection
SMDR Port
PC Port
Exit
Press to return to the SPM Main Menu.
SMDR Port Output
2
See ‘‘Printing System Reports’’ in Chapter 3 for more information about the print
procedure using the system console and the SMDR port.
2
PC Port Output
See ‘‘Printing Reports’’ for more information about the print procedure using SPM
and the PC port.
2
Restore
The Restore option allows qualified service personnel to load system
programming from either a diskette or from the hard disk into the processor
module memory.
This procedure is used either to program a new system if a disk was created
through surrogate mode programming, or to restore information (using a backup
disk) lost through system failure. It is also part of the upgrade procedure.
Considerations
Review the following items before you begin the restore procedure.
■
The system will be forced idle during a restore procedure.
■
You must have a backup file containing system programming before you
use this procedure. See ‘‘Backup’’.
■
Features that were not programmed when the backup file was created are
reset to factory defaults.
■
The data restored reflects the number of extensions and lines available on
the system at the time the backup was created. The remaining extensions
and lines are set to the default values that are initialized during a Restart
(cold start).
2
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-45
Restore is terminated under the following conditions:
If fewer boards are listed on the disk than on the control unit
If any real board is out of sequence with the boards listed on the disk
If phantom boards are not listed last
If the operating mode of the system being restored is Hybrid/PBX, but the
control unit processor module has been modified to operate only in Key
mode
■
A successful restore is followed automatically by a Restart (cold start)
!
WARNING:
An unsuccessful or terminated restore results in a System Erase
(frigid start). All calls are dropped. The system configuration is
erased. All system programming is lost and the system returns to the
factory settings. If the restore is being done remotely, the connection
is dropped immediately. If this happens, attempt to reconnect to the
control unit and immediately perform another restore. If this is not
successful, programming must be restored on site.
Follow the steps below to perform a restore.
At the SPM Main Menu, press to select Restore.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Follow the instructions for a floppy or a hard disk.
A second window appears which displays the GOTO FLOPPY option and a directory
listing for C:\spm\backup.
■
If you are performing a Restore with a file saved on a floppy disk, go to
Step 3.
■
If you are performing a Restore with a file saved on the hard disk, go to
Step 4.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Using SPM
Page 2-46
Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY and press
Make a selection for
GOTO FLOPPY
the RESTORE file.
backup.ams
If upgrading, convert
file.2
2
.
file.1
files before restoring.
Press ESC to Abort.
2 , the GOTO FLOPPY statement shown above changes to
GOTO HARD DISK. Go to Step 5.
After you press
Specify the filename to restore from.
■
To select the default backup filename, use the arrow keys to highlight
backup.ams and press 2 .
■
If you used a different backup filename, use the arrow keys to select one of
the other filenames and press 2 .
If the file you select is not in the same format as the communications
system, the screen below appears. Press 2 to return to the SPM
Main Menu. See ‘‘Convert’’ for details about converting a backup file.
File must be converted
before restoring.
Please press Enter
to see the main menu:
Observe the restore progress screen.
xx = approximate number of minutes
filename = name entered in Step 5
xxxx = number of blocks
Press CTRL-F5 to Abort
Est. total time: xx min
filename
RESTORE IN PROGRESS
Blocks Sent
Remaining
xxxx
xxxx
To abort the restore press
+. You return to the SPM Main Menu.
#
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-47
When the restore completes, press
Restore successful.
2
to return to the SPM Main Menu.
xxxx = number of blocks sent
Please press Enter
to see the Main Menu
Sent xxxx Blocks
System Programming
2
A primary function of SPM is to provide a method for programming the
communications system. The Sys Program option gives you access to all of the
system programming features available from the system programming console.
Basic Programming Information
2
To begin programming, you must perform one of the following to display the
System Programming menu on the console or PC:
On the console:
Menu→ Sys Program →Exit
On the PC:
Type spm→2 →Press any key→→
In most cases, you can press Exit or 5 to exit from a screen without making any
changes. Exceptions to this are noted as part of a procedure. When you complete
a procedure and press Exit (), you usually move up one screen in the menu
hierarchy. Occasionally, when you press Exit (), you return to the previous
screen. In a few cases, pressing Exit brings you back to the System
Programming menu where you can select another option to program or exit from
system programming.
To complete a procedure and save the information you have programmed, press
Enter ().
If you are programming a group of sequentially numbered extensions or trunks,
you may have the option of pressing Next (). This saves your entry and
automatically provides the number of the next extension or trunk in the sequence,
thus saving you a couple of steps. If Next displays on the screen, you can use it
with the current option.
In most cases, you will be at an intermediate step in the procedure you have just
completed. At that point, you can select one of the options shown on the screen
and continue programming, or you can press Exit () again. This usually takes
you back to the System Programming menu. If not, you again can continue
programming on the current screen or press Exit () again.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-48
2
Idle States
A few of the programming procedures can be started only when the entire system
or some part of it, such as a trunk or an extension, is idle (not in use). Some
procedures require that the trunk or extension be idle only at the instant of
programming. Other procedures, which take longer, require the system, trunk, or
extension to be forced into remaining idle until programming is completed. These
procedures wait for the system, trunk, or extension to become idle and then
prevent the initiation of any new calls. This condition is called forced idle.
NOTE:
If a procedure requires an idle condition, perform the programming outside
of normal business hours.
If a procedure requires that the system be in an idle state and the system is busy
when you begin, you see the screen shown below.
System Busy
Pls Wait
Dial Code:
nnnn
Slot/Port:
ss/pp
Exit
The screen changes to the appropriate programming screen when the system is
no longer busy.
System Forced Idle
2
When the entire system is forced idle, no calls can be made or received. The
procedures listed below can be performed only when the entire system (every line
and every extension) is idle:
■
Select system mode
■
Identify system operator positions
■
Renumber boards
■
Renumber system
■
Identify telephones with voice signal pairs for the Voice Announce to Busy
feature
■
Identify telephones that need the Simultaneous Voice and Data feature
■
Restore system programming information
■
Identify the Music On Hold jack
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-49
When the system is forced idle, the following occurs: multiline telephone users
hear a reminder tone that indicates the telephone cannot be used; display
telephone users see the message Wait: System Busy; single-line telephone
users do not hear a dial tone.
Line or Trunk Idle
2
Since these procedures require the line or trunk to be idle only at the instant of
programming, the line or trunk is not forced idle. The following procedures can be
performed only when the line or trunk being programmed is idle:
■
Identify loudspeaker paging line jack
■
Assign trunks to pools
■
Specify incoming or outgoing DID- or tie-trunk type
■
Specify tie-trunk direction
■
Specify tie-trunk E&M signal
Extension Forced Idle
2
When an extension or data terminal is forced idle, no calls can be made or
received on that extension or data terminal. The following procedures can be
performed only when the extension or data terminal being programmed is idle:
■
Assign call restrictions
■
Assign pool dial-out restrictions
■
Copy extension assignments
■
Assign lines, trunks, or pools to extensions
■
Assign labels to a personal directory
■
Use centralized telephone programming
When the extension is forced idle, the following occurs: multiline telephone users
hear a reminder tone that indicates the telephone cannot be used; display
telephone users see the message Wait: System Busy; single-line telephone
users do not hear a dial tone.
Forced Idle Reminder Tone
2
The forced idle reminder tone is a high-low “door-phone” tone400 ms of 667 Hz
tone followed by 400 ms of 571 Hz tone. The tone is provided under the following
circumstances:
■
At the extension, to remind the user that the system or the extension is in
the forced idle state
■
At the programming console or at a PC running SPM, to remind the system
manager that the system (or at least one extension) is in the forced idle
state because of administrative activity
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-50
In Release 1.1 and higher of the communications system, forced idle reminder
tones occur every 20 seconds. You can adjust the volume of these tones with the
volume control on the system console.
2
Accessing System Programming
Follow the steps below to access system programming.
At the SPM Main Menu press
to select Sys Program.
SPM Main Menu
Menu: Select Function
Sys Program
Maintenance
Backup
Restore
Boards
Pass-Thru
Print Opts
Password
Monitor
Language
Press the function key next to the option you want.
System Programming:
>
System Programming:
Make a selection
Make a selection
System
Extensions
Labeling
SysRenumber
Options
Data
Operator
Tables
Print
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Cntr-Prg
Exit
NightSrvce
Exit
Language
If the option you want does not appear on the first screen of the System
Programming menu, press U to display the second screen of the menu.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-51
2
Printing Reports
Use the following procedure to print system reports using SPM at the PC. The
SPM Print Opts must be set to PC Port. See ‘‘Print Options’’ for details about
setting the printer output port.
At the second page of the System Programming menu, press
Print.
System Programming:
to select
>
Make a selection
Labeling
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Press the function key that corresponds to the report to be printed.
Print (English
):
>
Make a selection
All
Trunk Info
SysSet-up
T1 Info
Dial Plan
Pri Info
Labels
RmoteAccess
Exit
Oper Info
Use one of the methods shown after this procedure to print the report(s).
LPT1:
Please enter file name
to store print
(default is print.ams)
Press Esc to Abort.
GOTO FLOPPY
MAKE NEW FILE
PRINT.AMS
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
System Programming
Page 2-52
Observe the print status screen.
Print in Progress ...
5
Exit
You can press
to interrupt printing and return to the SPM Main Menu.
2
Print Hard Copy
To print a hard copy of the report, use the arrow keys to highlight LPT1: and press
2.
Print to Hard Disk
2
To print the reports to the hard disk if the print file does not exist, use the arrow
keys to highlight MAKE NEW FILE and press 2 .
■
To save to the default print filename (print.ams), press 2 .
■
To save to the filename of your choice, type [filename] and press
2
.
To print the reports to the hard disk if the print file already exists, use the arrow
keys to highlight the [filename] and press 2 .
Print to Floppy Disk
2
Use the arrow keys to highlight GOTO FLOPPY: and press
methods shown below.
■
2
. Use one of the
To print the reports to a floppy disk if the print file does not exist, use the
arrow keys to highlight MAKE NEW FILE and press 2 .
— To save to the default print filename (print.ams), press 2 .
— To save to the filename of your choice, type [filename] and press
2.
■
To print the reports to a floppy disk if the print file already exists, use the
arrow keys to highlight the [ filename] and press 2 .
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Upgrading the System
!
Page 2-53
2
WARNING:
The following procedures are to be used by qualified technicians or service
personnel only. Installation or maintenance of this product by anyone other
than qualified personnel may damage or impair the product; your limited
warranty does not cover such damage. For details, see your limited
warranty in the Customer Support Information in the back of this book.
Hazardous electrical voltages are present inside this product.
This section describes upgrading your communications system to Release 5.0.
You can use this procedure to perform the following upgrades:
■
From Release 1.0 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 1.1 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 2.0 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 2.1 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 3.0 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 3.1 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 4.0 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 4.1 to Release 5.0
■
From Release 4.2 to Release 5.0
NOTE:
You must have a version later than SPM 4.15 to upgrade from Release 3.1
to Release 4.0.
MERLIN II Communications System programming cannot be upgraded to this
communications system. The new communications system must be completely
reprogrammed.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Page 2-54
2
Before You Begin
Before you begin the upgrade to Release 5.0, you will need the items listed below.
■
SPM Version 5.15 or later to back up and convert system programming
information and to restore system programming information after the
processor module with PCMCIA memory card slot has been installed.
■
One or both of the following:
— Processor module with PCMCIA memory card slot (when converting
from Release 2.1 or earlier).
— A forced installation PCMCIA memory card with Release 5.0 system
software (when converting from any release).
■
DOS-formatted diskette
NOTE:
If SPM is already installed, the Welcome to SPM screen that appears when
you start SPM identifies the version on both the last line of the console
simulation window and in the upper left corner of the screen. If you are
working with Version 5.15, V5 appears in the upper left-hand corner of the
screen and Version 5.15 appears on the last line of the console
simulation window.
Inter-Release Compatibility
2
It is important to understand compatibility between files created on each of the
different versions of SPM, not only for upgrading but also for programming.
Table 2-6 summarizes programming compatibility. (It is assumed that the majority
of the programming is done in surrogate mode and backed up on disk).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Table 2-6.
Page 2-55
Programming Compatibility
SPM
Program
Restore on
Version
Backup on 1.0
1.1
2.0/2.1
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1/4.2
5.0
1.13
1.0
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
1.16
1.0
yes
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
1
no
no
no
no
no
2.09
1.0
yes
yes
yes
2.16
1.0
yes
yes
yes*
no
no
no
no
no
3.18
1.0
yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
no
4.15
1.0
yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
4.25
1.0
yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
1.0
yes
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
1.16
1.1
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
no
2.09
1.1
no
yes
yes*
no
no
no
no
no
2.16
1.1
no
yes
yes*
no
no
no
no
no
3.18
1.1
no
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
no
4.15
1.1
no
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
4.25
1.1
no
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
1.1
no
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
2.09
2.0
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
2.16
2.0
no
no
yes
no
no
no
no
no
3.18
2.0
no
no
yes
yes*
yes*
no
no
no
4.15
2.0
no
no
yes
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
4.25
2.0
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
2.0
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
2.16
2.1
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
3.18
2.1
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
no
no
no
4.15
2.1
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
no
4.25
2.1
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
2.1
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
1. The backup file must be converted before it is restored.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Table 2-6.
Page 2-56
Programming Compatibility
– Continued
SPM
Program
Restore on
Version
Backup on 1.0
1.1
2.0/2.1
3.0
3.1
4.0
4.1/4.2
5.0
3.18
3.0
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
4.15
3.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
no
no
4.25
3.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
3.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
3.18
3.1
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
1
4.15
3.1
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
4.25
3.1
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
3.1
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
yes*
4.15
4.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes
no
no
4.25
4.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
no
5.15
4.0
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
yes*
4.25
4.1/4.2
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
no
5.15
4.1/4.2
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
yes*
5.15
5.0
no
no
no
no
no
no
no
yes*
1. The backup file must be converted before it is restored.
NOTE:
The default barrier code and any programmed barrier codes from Release
2.1 and earlier are carried over to Release 3.0 and later with no change and
the barrier code length is four (4). It is the responsibility of the system
manager to change the barrier code length and the barrier codes if so
desired.
Upgrade Procedure
2
NOTE:
The system upgrade procedure must follow the order of the steps shown
below.
Install SPM.
To upgrade the system to Release 5.0, you need to install (or upgrade to) Version
5.15 of SPM. See ‘‘Initializing the SPM Software’’.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-57
Back up your system programming.
This step creates a file containing system programming information. See
‘‘Backup’’.
Turn off AC power switches on the control unit in the following order:
(1) Basic carrier
(2) Expansion carrier 1, if present
(3) Expansion carrier 2, if present
Replace the processor module (when upgrading from Release 2.1 and earlier).
a.
Unplug the interface cords from the SPM and SMDR printer ports on
the processor module.
b.
Remove the processor module from Slot 0.
c.
Install the Release 4.0 processor module in Slot 0.
d.
Plug the interface cords into the SPM and SMDR printer ports on the
processor module.
Insert the forced installation memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the
processor module.
Turn on the AC power switches on the control unit in the following order:
(1) Expansion carrier 2, if present
(2) Expansion carrier 1, if present
(3) Basic carrier
Convert your backup file to Release 4.0 format.
This procedure converts the backup file created in Step 2. See ‘‘Convert’’.
Restore your system programming.
The system is forced idle and cannot be used during this procedure. See
‘‘Restore’’.
Program new features.
If you wish to use the factory defaults for the new features available with Release
4.0, skip this step.
NOTE:
After upgrading to Release 3.0 or 4.0 from Release 1.0, 1.1, 2.0, or 2.1
some programming will be lost. You must reprogram the following:
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
■
Authorization Codes
Extensions→More →AuthCode
■
SMDR Account Code Format
■
Inter-digit Timers
Options→More→Interdigit
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-58
Options→SMDR→AuthCode
See Tables 2-7 through 2-14 which follow this procedure.
■
Table 2-7. Lists the features added with Release 1.1 of the
communications system.
■
Table 2-8. Lists the features added with Release 2.0 or 2.1 of the
communications system.
■
Table 2-9. Lists the features added with Release 3.0 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 3.0, you
must program these features as the last step of the upgrade
procedure.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 3.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 3.0, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then the features listed in
Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9.
■
Table 2-10. Lists the features added with Release 3.1 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 3.1, you must
program these features as the last step of the upgrade procedure.
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 3.1, you
must program the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 3.1, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9, then the features listed in Table 2-10.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 3.1, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then the features listed in
Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10.
■
Table 2-11. Lists the features added with Release 4.0 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.1 to Release 4.0, you must
program these features as the last step of the upgrade procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-59
— When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 4.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11.
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 4.0, you
must program the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in Table 2-11.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 4.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9, then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features
listed in Table 2-11.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 4.0, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then the features listed in
Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in Table 2-11.
■
Table 2-12. Lists the features added with Release 4.1 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 4.0 to Release 4.1, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-12.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.1 to Release 4.1, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in
Table 2-12.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 4.1, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12.
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 4.1, you
must program the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in Table 2-11, then the
features listed in Table 2-12.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 4.1, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9, then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features
listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 4.1, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then you must program the
features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9,
then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12.
■
Table 2-13. Lists the features added with Release 4.2 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 4.1 to Release 4.2, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-13.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-60
— When you upgrade from Release 4.0 to Release 4.2, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features listed in
Table 2-13, then the features listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.1 to Release 4.2, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in
Table 2-12, then the features listed in Table 2-13.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 4.2, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features
listed in Table 2-13.
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 4.2, you
must program the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in Table 2-11, then the
features listed in Table 2-12, then the features listed in Table 2-13.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 4.2, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9, then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features
listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the
features listed in Table 2-13.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 4.2, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then you must program the
features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9,
then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features
listed in Table 2-13.
■
Table 2-14. Lists the features added with Release 5.0 of the
communications system.
— When you upgrade from Release 4.2 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 4.1 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-13, then the features listed in
Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 4.0 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features listed in
Table 2-13, then the features listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.1 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in
Table 2-12, then the features listed in Table 2-13, then the features
listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 3.0 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features
listed in Table 2-13, then the features listed in Table 2-14.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-61
— When you upgrade from Release 2.0 or 2.1 to Release 5.0, you
must program the features listed in Table 2-9, then the features
listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in Table 2-11, then the
features listed in Table 2-12, then the features listed in Table 2-13,
then the features listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.1 to Release 5.0, you must
program the features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in
Table 2-9, then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features
listed in Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the
features listed in Table 2-13, then the features listed in Table 2-14.
— When you upgrade from Release 1.0 to Release 5.0, you must first
program the features listed in Table 2-7, then you must program the
features listed in Table 2-8, then the features listed in Table 2-9,
then the features listed in Table 2-10, then the features listed in
Table 2-11, then the features listed in Table 2-12, then the features
listed in Table 2-13, then the features listed in Table 2-14.
Table 2-7.
Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 1.1
Feature
Sequence
System language
SysProgram→More→Language→SystemLang
Extension language
SysProgram→More→Language→Extensions
SMDR language
SysProgram→More→Language→SMDR
Printer language
SysProgram→More→Language→Printer
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Table 2-8.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-62
Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 2.0
Feature
Sequence
Primary Rate
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Type→PRI
Interface (PRI)
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→LS
/GS/DS1→FrameFormat
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Suppressio
n
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→PhoneNumber
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→NumbrToSend
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→Test TelNum
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→Protocol
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl
SysProgram→Tables→ARS
DID Emulation
on T1
SysProgram→LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Type→More
→DID/All DID
Night Service
Calling Group
SysProgram→NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Calling
Group
Coverage VMS Off
SysProgram→More→Cntr-Prg→Program Ext
Data Status
SysProgram→More→Cntr-Prg→Program Ext
Extension Copy
SysProgram→More→Cntr-Prg→Copy Ext
Posted Message
button on analog
multiline and
MLX-10 non-display
telephones (for use
with Do Not Disturb)
SysProgram→More→Cntr-Prg→Program Ext
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Table 2-9.
Page 2-63
Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.0
Feature
Sequence
Automatic Backup
SysProgram→System→Back/Restore→Auto Backup
Incoming Call Line
Identification Delay
LinesTrunks→More→LS-ID Delay→Drop→Dial
trunk no.→Enter
Remote Access
Barrier Codes
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Code
Info→Code Length
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Code
Info→Code Entry
Authorization Codes
Extensions→More→Auth Code
Table 2-10. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 3.1
Feature
Sequence
Trunk-to-Trunk
Transfer
Extensions→More→More→TrkTransfer→Toggle
LED On/Off or Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
Second Dial Tone
Timer
Options→More→SecDT→dial second dial tone timer
value→Enter
Table 2-11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0
Feature
Sequence
Delayed Call
Forwarding
Extensions→More→Delay Frwd→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Dial no. of delay rings→Enter
Group Calling
Overflow and
Thresholds
Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Overflow→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Number Based Overflow→Drop→Dial
no. of calls→
Enter→Time Based Overflow→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter
Voice Announce on a
QCC
Operator→Queued Call→More→Voice
Annc→Enabled or Disabled→Enter
2B Data
Data→2B Data→Dial adjunct ext. no.→Enter
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Page 2-64
Table 2-11. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.0 – Continued
Basic Rate Interface
(BRI)
LinesTrunks→More→BRI→SPID/DN.→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial SPID→Enter→Drop→Dial
DN→Enter
LinesTrunks→More→BRI→Timers→Select
timer→Drop→Dial no. of seconds or ms→Enter
Clock Synchronization LinesTrunks→More→ClockSync→Primary→Drop→
Dial slot no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter→Secondary→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter→Tertiary→dial slot
no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter
Ringing Frequency
(016 module)
Options→More→Ringing Freq→dial slot no.→Select
20Hz or 25Hz→Enter
Table 2-12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1
Feature
Sequence
Group Coverage Ring
Delay
SysProgram→Extensions→More→More→Cover
Delay→ Group Cover→sender’s extension →number of
rings→Enter
Primary Cover Ring
Delay
SysProgram→Extensions→More→More→Cover
Delay→ Primary→sender’s extension→number of
rings→Enter
Secondary Cover Ring
Delay
SysProgram→Extensions→More→More→Cover
Delay→Secondry→sender’s extension→number of
rings→Enter
Night Service Group
Line Assignment
SysProgram→NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Lines→
Night Service attendant position number→Enter→line
number→Enter
Night Service
Coverage Control
SysProgram→NightSrvce→CoverContrl→Enable or
Disable→Enter
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Page 2-65
Table 2-12. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 – Continued
Feature
Sequence
Board Renumber
System→Board Renum→Yes
(When an 012 module
is replaced by an 016
module)
Switched 56 Data
To select T1- All Tie: Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→All
TIE→Enter→S56→Enter→Dial channel
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1- Tie: Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→TIE→Enter→S56→
Enter→Dial channel
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1-All :Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→ALL S56
Data→Enter→Select Direction, Intype, Outtype,
AnsSupv, Disconnect, Inmode, or Outmode→Program
options→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1:Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→S56
Data→Enter→Dial channel no.→Enter→Select
Direction, Intype, Outtype, AnsSupv, Disconnect,
Inmode, or Outmode→Program
options→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Table 2-12.
Page 2-66
Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.1 – Continued
Switched 56 Data
Network Dial Plan
Routing
To specify Expected Digits:
LinesTrunks→MORE→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Expected Digits→Drop→Dial expected
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Delete Digits:
LinesTrunks→MORE→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Delete Digits→Drop→Dial delete
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Add Digits:
LinesTrunks→MORE→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Add Digits→Drop→Dial add
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Table 2-13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2
Feature
Sequence
SMDR Talk Time
Options→SMDR→Talk Time→Enable or Disable
→Enter→Exit→Exit
PRI Switch Types
To select the Nortel DMS-250 for MCI services:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→SwitchType
→Slot Number→Enter→DMS-250→Enter
To select the Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E for MCI
services:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→SwitchType
→Slot Number→Enter→DEX600E→Enter
To select the Nortel DMS-100 for local exchange carrier
services:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→SwitchType
→Slot Number→Enter→DMS-100→Enter
Continued on next page
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-67
Table 2-13. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 4.2 – Continued
PRI Network Service
To select MCI Toll services for a DMS-250 or DEX600E
switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGr
p→NetworkServ→B-Channel group
number→Enter→MCI Toll→MCI PRISM or MCI VNET
or MCI 800 or MCI 900→Enter
To select local exchange carrier services for a DMS-100
switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGr
p→NetworkServ→B-Channel group
number→Enter→DMS-100Local→DMS-Private or
DMS-INWATS or DMS-OUTWATS or DMS-FX or
DMS-TieTrk→Enter
PRI Dial Plan Routing
To specify MCI Toll Dial Plan Routing services for a
DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRt
g→Service→Entry number→Enter→MCI Toll→MCI
PRISM or MCI VNET or MCI 800 or MCI 900→Enter
To specify local exchange carrier Dial Plan Routing
services for a DMS-100 switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRt
g→Service→Entry
number→Enter→DMS-100Local→DMS-Private or
DMS-INWATS or DMS-OUTWATS or DMS-FX or
DMS-TieTrk→Enter
PRI Call-by-Call
Services Table
To select MCI Toll Call-by-Call Services for a
DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTb
l→CBC Service→NetworkServ→List
number→Enter→MCI Toll→MCI PRISM or MCI
VNET→Enter
To specify local exchange carrier Dial Plan Routing
services for a DMS-100 switch type:
SysProgram→Exit→LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTb
l→CBC Service→NetworkServ→List
number→Enter→
DMS-100Local→DMS-Private or DMS-OUTWATS or
DMS-FX or DMS-TieTrk→Enter
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Upgrading the System
Page 2-68
Table 2-14. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 5.0
Feature
Sequence
CTI Link
Busy out the board first:*
Menu→Maintenance→Slot→Dial the slot
no.→Enter→Busy-Out→Yes
* This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the
main menu, not the System Programming screen.
Program the CTI Link (Note: The switch must be in
Hybrid/PBX mode):
AuxEquip→CTI Link→Dial extension
number→Enter→Exit→Exit
Restore the slot:*
Menu→Maintenance→Slot→Dial the slot
no.→Enter→Restore→Yes
* This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the
main menu, not the System Programming screen.
NOTE:
If the MLX module containing the CTI Link is the first module, use
the SPM program to busy-out the slot.
Calling Group Alarm
Thresholds
Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Queue
Alarm→Dial calling group ext. no.→Enter→Alarm
Threshold 1 or Alarm Threshold 2 or Alarm
Threshold 3→Drop→Dial no. of
calls→Enter→Exit→Exit
HotLine
Extensions→More→More→HotLine→Enter HotLine
extension→Enter→Exit→Exit
Calling Group Hunt
Type
Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Hunt Type→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Circular, Linear, or
Most Idle→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Group Calling Delay
Primary
Announcement
Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Primary Announcement→ Enter
Exstenion number of Announcent device→Enter (to
program another Announcement device) or Exit (to end
procedure)→Exit
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Surrogate Mode Programming
Page 2-69
Table 2-14. Programming Needed after Upgrade to Release 5.0 –
Feature
Group Calling Delay
Secondary
Announcement
Group Calling
Announcement
Interval
Group Calling Repeat
Announcement
Continued
Sequence
Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Secondary Announcement →Enter
Exstenion number of Announcent device→Enter
→Exit→Exit
Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Announcement Interval→Enter
Announcent Interval in seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit
Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Repeat Announcement→Yes or
No→Enter→Exit→Exit
Surrogate Mode Programming
2
Surrogate mode allows qualified service personnel to perform system
programming at an off-site service location. The actual communications system
hardware does not have to be installed—the programmer needs only a direct
connection from the PC to the processor module. By following a customer’s set of
completed planning forms, the system can be programmed as if the appropriate
modules, trunks, and telephones have been installed. When system programming
is completed, a system backup is performed to save the information on disk. This
backup disk is then taken to the new installation site and used with the Restore
option to provide complete system programming for a new communications
system.
You do not “select” surrogate mode programmingyou enter it automatically
under the following conditions:
■
The PC is connected to the lower RS-232 port on a control unit (direct local
connection).
■
Only the processor and power modules are connected.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
2
Programming with SPM
Surrogate Mode Programming
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 2-70
Once you enter surrogate mode programming, you must follow the sequence of
procedures shown below.
■
■
At the service location, perform the following:
1.
System Erase
2.
Program the Boards
3.
System Programming
4.
Backup
At the installation site, perform a Restore.
While you are in surrogate mode, the Pass-Thru and Password options are not
available.
NOTE:
Surrogate mode is available only through the local programming port. You
cannot access surrogate features through the system programming
console.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
0
Common Administrative Procedures
Introduction
Page 3-1
Common Administrative Procedures
3
3
Introduction
This chapter contains procedures for all of the common administrative tasks
performed by the system manager in response to changes in business
requirements. The procedures described in this chapter are defined briefly below:
■
Change Basic System Operating Conditions
These procedures apply to the system rather than to the operation of
telephones, lines/trunks, and operator positions. The procedures covered
are:
— Reassign the extension jack used for system programming
— Change the system language
— Set the system date and time
■
Renumber extensions
Use this procedure to assign a new extension number to a telephone,
accessory, line/trunk, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), or group. The extension
number to be assigned must currently be unassigned.
■
Add or change operator positions
Add or delete a system operator position for either the Queued Call
Console (QCC) or the Direct-Line Console (DLC). A maximum of eight
operator positions can be assigned: a maximum of four of these could be
QCCs.
■
Change telephone line button assignments and optional telephone
features
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Introduction
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-2
Use these procedures to assign outside lines/trunks to the buttons on a
telephone, to copy these line/trunk assignments to additional telephones,
and to Assign System Access or Intercom buttons. These procedures can
also be used to assign additional telephone features including:
— Identifying analog multiline telephones that do not have built-in
speakerphone or Hands Free Answer on Intercom
— Identifying analog multiline telephones that require pairing of station
jacks to provide Voice Announce to Busy
— Calling Restrictions
■
Assign Pickup Groups, Group Paging, Group Coverage, Calling Groups,
and lines/trunks assigned to calling groups and change group options
■
Assign or change system features such as:
— Transfer options
— Camp-On and Call Park return times
— Extension status
— SMDR options
— Allowed and Disallowed Lists and the telephones to which they are
assigned.
■
Create or change labels assigned to lines/trunks, extensions and calling
groups and create or change Posted Messages or the System Speed Dial
Directory
■
Assign Night Service groups and options
Night Service provides after-hours coverage to extensions and calling
groups
■
Install a FAX machine and set options for message waiting indication
The programming procedures needed to perform these tasks are described in
detail in the remainder of the chapter. More advanced programming procedures
such as adding lines/trunks, are described in detail in Chapter 4, ‘‘Programming
Procedures’’.
Each of the procedures begins on the System Programming menu. Use one of the
methods shown below to display the System Programming menu.
■
At the console: Menu→Sys Program→Exit
■
At the PC or with SPM: Type spm→Press any key→→
Before you begin any of the procedures in this chapter, you should read and
understand all of the information presented in Chapter 1, ‘‘Programming Basics’’ .
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 3-3
3
The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the
operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks.
NOTE:
You must reset the system time when Daylight Savings Time begins and
ends.
This section contains the following programming procedures:
■
System Programming Position Assignment
■
System Language
■
System Date
■
System Time
System Programming Position Assignment
3
Use this procedure to reassign the extension used for system programming. This
extension should not be the same extension as that used for the operator position.
The system programming position can be reassigned only to one of the first five
extension jacks on the first MLX module. Only one system programming console
is allowed per system.
If you are programming on the console, be aware of the following:
■
The console must be connected to the extension currently assigned for
system programming.
■
As soon as you change the system programming extension, the system
programming session is terminated. To proceed with system programming,
you must connect the system programming console to the newly assigned
extension and enter system programming again.
NOTE:
The telephone used for system programming must be an MLX-20L.
Summary: System Programming Position
Assignment
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 3-4
Factory Setting
First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an
operator position)
Valid Entries
Extension number of one of the first five extension jacks on
the first MLX module
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→SProg Port→Drop→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type ext. no.→→
Procedure: System Programming Position
Assignment
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select System Programming Port.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/
Restore
Exit
Erase the current extension (xxxx).
System Programming Port:
Enter extension
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
0
+
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 3-5
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Enter the new extension.
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
3
System Language
Your communications system offers you a choice of three languages (English,
French, and Spanish) for the following options:
■
System language.
■
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) reports. See “System
Features.”
■
Print reports. See “Printing Reports.”
■
Extensions. See “Optional Telephone Features.”
Use this procedure to set the system language. See the sections listed above to
set a different language for an MLX display telephone, SMDR reports and printer
reports.
NOTE:
MERLIN LEGEND Communication System Release 1.0 does not offer a
choice of languages.
3
Summary: System Language
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→SystemLang→Yes→Select a
language→Enter
PC Procedure
U
→→→→Select a language→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
3
Procedure: System Language
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-6
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press More.
U
Select Language.
System Programming
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Select System Language.
Language:
Make a selection
SystemLang
Extensions
SMDR
Printer
Exit
Respond to the prompt.
System Language:
To set the system language select Yes.
To terminate the procedure and return to
the previous screen select No, then
select Exit.
All stations, SMDR, and
printer will be affected
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-7
Additional Information
PC
Select a system language. (The default is English.)
Select English,
French, or
Spanish.
System Language:
Select one
English
French
Spanish
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
For programming a single or block of
extensions, see the ‘‘Extension
Language’’ procedure under ‘‘Optional
Telephone Features’’.
3
Set System Date
The System Date feature allows you to set the month, day, and year that appear
on MLX display telephones and on Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
reports.
NOTE:
If you are planning to use the SMDR feature, make sure the current date is
set.
3
Summary: Set System Date
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
01-01-00
Valid Entries
Month: 01 to 12
Day: 01 to 31
Year: 00 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Date→Drop→Dial current date→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type current date→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 3-8
3
Procedure: Set System Date
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Date.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restor
e
Exit
Erase the current system date (xxxxxx).
Date:
Enter month (01-12),
Date (01-31)
Year (00-99)
xxxxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter six digits for the current date.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Ã
Dial or type [mmddyy].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Set System Time
3
The System Time feature allows you to set the time that appears on MLX display
telephones and on SMDR reports.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 3-9
NOTE:
If you are planning to use the SMDR feature, make sure the system time is
set accurately. If you change the system time while the system is in Night
Service mode, Night Service is deactivated and must be manually
reactivated. If you have installed applications such as Call Management
System (CMS) or AUDIX Voice Power, you may need to set the time in the
applications software whenever you reset the system time.
3
Summary: Set System Time
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not Required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
0000
Valid Entries
0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Time→Drop→Dial current time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type current time→→
3
Procedure: Set System Time
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-10
Additional Information
PC
Select Time.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restor
e
Exit
Erase the current system time (xxxx).
Date:
Enter hour (00-23) and
minutes (00-59)
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter four digits for the current time.
Dial or type [hhmm].
!
+0
Ã
Use 24-hour (military) notation (for
example, enter 11:30 p.m. as 2330).
Use leading zeros if necessary (for
example, enter 4 a.m. as 0400).
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
System Renumbering
Page 3-11
3
The procedures in this section are used to reassign extension numbers for either
the 2-digit, 3-digit, and Set Up Space numbering plans.
NOTE:
System Renumbering is called Flexible Numbering in the MERLIN II
Communications System. This is not the same as Board Renumbering, an
option used when modules in the control unit are changed.
This section contains the following programming procedures:
■
Single Renumbering
■
Block Renumbering
To reassign the system numbering plan or DSS Page buttons see Chapter 4,
‘‘Programming Procedures’’.
Use the single renumbering procedure any time the extension numbers you are
changing from or to are not sequential.
Block renumbering is quicker, but you can use block renumbering only when the
extension numbers you are changing from and to are sequential.
When trunk or extension modules are removed from the control unit, the
remaining modules must be rearranged so that no empty slots remain. The
system does not acknowledge any modules installed after an empty slot;
therefore, if the system is renumbered, extensions are not assigned to extension
jacks after the empty slots.
NOTE:
Figures 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3 show the default settings in the gray spaces.
Extensions can be renumbered to any number shown in the white spaces.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Page 3-12
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
Extensions 10−19
Extensions 20−29
Extensions 30−39
Extensions 40−49
Extensions 50−59
Extensions 60−66
Extra
6843− Extra MFMs/
6993−
Extensions
Terminal Adapters 6999
6849
6700−6842
6850−6992
Main Pool
MFMs/
767− Calling Groups
Paging
70
Terminal Adapters 769
770–791,7920−7929
Groups
710−766
793−799
800*
Trunks 801−880
Park
889†
Pools
881−888
890−899
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX Mode) / Idle Line Access 9
7
8
9
*
Issue 1
June 1997
Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
† Remote Access
NOTE: “0” and “10” are the same station.
Figure 3-1.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2-Digit Numbering
Main Pool
70
800*
8
9
*
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
Extensions 100−199
Extensions 200−299
MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399
MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400−499
500−599
600−699
Calling Groups
71−76
770−791, 7920−7929
Trunks
Park
889†
801−880
881−888
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX mode)/Idle Line Access
Listed Directory Number (QCC)
† Remote Access
NOTE: “0” and “100” are the same station.
Figure 3-2.
3-Digit Numbering
Paging
Groups
793−799
Pools
890−899
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Page 3-13
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
100−
−199
200−
−299
300−
−399
400−
−499
500−
−599
600−
−699
Main Pool Extensions MFMs/Terminal 7500−
−7699 Calling Group
70
Adapters
7100−
−7299
770−
−791,
7300−
−7499
7920−
−7929
800*
Trunks
Park
889†
801−
−880
881−
−888
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX mode)/Idle Line Access 9
Paging
Groups
793−
−799
Pools
890−
−899
* Listed Directory Number (QCC).
† Remote Access
NOTE: “ 0” and “7001” are the same station.
Figure 3-3.
Set Up Space Numbering
Single Renumbering
3
Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone,
accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed
Directory Number. Single renumbering is also used for Remote Access, Park, Idle
Line Access (Key and Behind Switch only), and Automatic Route Selection
(Hybrid/PBX only).
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC after renumbering
extensions. If you press Home, extensions may remain in the forced
idle condition (indicated when the LED next to each DSS button is
on). To restore extensions to their normal operating state, restart the
system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 3-14
3
Summary: Single Renumbering
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts
Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Old and new extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Single→Select item→Dial old ext.
no.→Enter→Dial new ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Select item →Type old ext. no.→ →Type
new ext. no.→→→
3
Procedure: Single Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the System Renumbering menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Single renumbering.
System:
Make a selection
Default Numbering
If you get the System Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit
system programming and try again later.
Single
Block
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-15
Additional Information
PC
Review the menu options.
System Renumber:
>
Make a selection
Lines
Grp Calling
Extensions
Adjuncts
Pools
Park
Group Page
ARS DialOut
Exit
RemoteAccs
If the item you want to renumber is not
displayed, go to the second screen
of the System Renumber menu.
Press More.
U
System Renumber:
Make a selection
DSS Buttons
ListDirctNo
Exit
Select an item for renumbering.
Press the button or function key next to your selection.
Ã
Enter the old extension for the item selected (****) in Step 4.
****:
Enter old **** number
If you get the Station Busy message, wait
for an idle connection or exit system
programming and try again later.
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the new extension.
**** xxxx :
Enter new **** number
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
**** = item selected in Step 4
xxxx = extension entered in Step 5
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-16
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
If you use Next to renumber the next
item (****) displayed on Line 1, return
to Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Block Renumbering
Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions,
accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being
changed to must be sequentially numbered.
When required, this procedure should be performed immediately following the
selection of a system numbering plan.
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC when you have finished
renumbering extensions. If you press Home, extensions may remain
in the forced idle condition (indicated when the LED next to each DSS
button is on). To restore extensions to their normal operating state,
restart the system.
Summary: Block Renumbering
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts
Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Old and new extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 3-17
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Block→Select type of group →Dial no. of
first group member→Enter→Dial no. of last group
member→Enter→Dial new beginning
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Select type of group→ Type no. of first group
member→→Type no. of last group
member→→Type new beginning
no.→→→→
3
Procedure: Block Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the System Renumber menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Block renumbering.
System Renumber:
Make a selection
Default Numbering
If you get the System Busy message, wait
for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Single
Block
Exit
Select the type of group to renumber.
Block Renumber:
Make a selection
Lines
Extensions
Adjuncts
Exit
Select Lines,
Extensions, or
Adjuncts.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-18
Additional Information
PC
Enter the currently assigned number for the first member of the group.
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Number ****:
Enter starting ****
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the currently assigned number for the last member of the group.
Start at nnnn :
Enter ending ****
nnnn = number entered in Step 4
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the new extension number.
Start At nnnn
Enter new **** number
nnnn = number entered in Step 6
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
System Operator Positions
Page 3-19
3
Use the following procedures either to add an operator position or to change an
existing operator position.
The Queued Call Console (QCC) operator position is available only for
Hybrid/PBX systems. The Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator position is
available in any mode and must be programmed if you have Call Management
Systems connected to any operator extension jacks.
Table 3-1 shows the maximum number of operator positions allowed for any one
system.
Table 3-1.
Table Maximum Number of Operator Positions
Position Type
QCC
DLC
Type of Telephone
MLX-20L
MLX-20L
MLX-28D
Analog multiline telephones
MERLIN II Display
Consoles
Total QCC + DLC
Maximum
Positions
4
8
8
Any combination of operator positions can be assigned as long as no more than
four operator positions are QCCs and the total number of operator positions does
not exceed eight.
If you want to designate a new operator position and the system already has the
maximum number of operator positions, you must change an existing operator
position to a nonoperator position before you designate a new operator position.
NOTE:
When you change an extension to an operator position, or vice versa, the
system returns the port (extension jack) type of that extension to the factory
setting. You must reprogram lines and any features for that telephone or
console. You may also need to change any attached accessory equipment
and optional features.
Primary Operator Positions
3
The primary operator position is the extension to which your call is directed when
0 is dialed on a System Access button. The first extension jack on the first MLX
module in your system is assigned as the primary operator position. If your
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
Page 3-20
system has QCC operator positions, this position must be changed from the
factory setting (DLC) to a QCC operator position. (The primary operator extension
cannot be changed from the first extension on the first MLX module.)
QCC System Operator Positions
3
This procedure applies to Hybrid/PBX systems only. Note that both QCC and DLC
operator positions can be assigned with this procedure, although its primary
purpose is to assign QCC operator positions.
QCC operators serve as central answering positions for all incoming calls.
Incoming calls are held in the QCC queue and are directed to each QCC operator
in a prioritized sequence. The calls are received one at a time, regardless of the
number of incoming calls to the system.
Additional QCC operator positions can be assigned only to the first and fifth
extension jacks of the MLX modules. A maximum of four QCC operator positions
can be assigned. Use this procedure to specify QCC operator positions that serve
as central answering positions for all incoming calls.
!
CAUTION:
If you want to add or remove QCC operator positions, the following
conditions apply:
■
If other QCC positions remain in your system, the primary QCC
operator position cannot be removed.
■
When QCC operator positions are added, the primary QCC operator
position should be the first one added.
■
If QCC operator positions are being removed, the primary QCC
operator position must be the last one removed.
Summary: QCC Operator Positions
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Type: DLC
Valid Entries
First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two
per module; four QCCs per system)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
Page 3-21
Console Procedure Operator→Positions→Queued Call→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Store All
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→
Procedure: QCC Operator Positions
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Positions.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Queued Call (QCC).
System Operator:
Make a selection
Direct Line
If you get the System Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit
system programming and try again later.
Queued Call
Exit
Specify the QCC extension as a QCC position.
QCC Operator Positions:
Enter extension
Store All
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = extension is currently assigned
Flashing = extension can be assigned as
a QCC position.
Off = extension cannot be assigned as a
QCC position.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-22
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the QCC operator extension.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
QCC operator positions by repeating
Steps 4 and 5.
Indicate that you have finished entering all positions.
Select Store All.
The session is terminated and the system restarts. You must enter system programming again to continue.
3
DLC Operator Positions
DLC operator positions can be assigned to the first and fifth extension jacks on
the first modules with either digital or analog multiline extension jacks. A
maximum of eight DLC operator positions can be assigned. Any combination of
operator positions can be assigned as long as there are no more than four QCC
operator positions and no more than a total of eight operator positions.
Use this procedure to specify extensions that serve as central answering positions
for all incoming calls,either for Call Management Systems (CMSs) connected to
operator extension jacks, or as calling group supervisor extensions. (You do not
need to use this procedure in a Key or Behind Switch system unless you have
more than one DLC position.) For a new system, remove the factory-set DLC
operator position assignment for any telephone not used as an operator position.
Lines and trunks are assigned to individual buttons.
The system programming console can have several incoming calls ringing
simultaneously.
Each CMS requires two DLC operator positions to connect the equipment and
one position to serve as CMS supervisor.
Summary: Identify or Remove DLC Operator
Positions
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Type: DLC
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
Page 3-23
Valid Entries
First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two
per module; maximum: eight DLCs per system)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Positions→Direct Line→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Store All
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no. →
Procedure: Identify or Remove DLC Operator
Positions
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Positions.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Direct-Line Console (DLC).
System Operator:
Make a selection
Direct Line
If you get the System Busy message, wait
for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Queued Call
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Operator Positions
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-24
Additional Information
PC
Specify the DLC extension as a DLC position.
DLC Operator Positions:
Enter extension
Store All
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = extension is currently assigned
Flashing = extension can be assigned as
a DLC position.
Off = extension cannot be assigned as a
DLC position.
Assign or remove the DLC operator extension.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
DLC operator positions by repeating
Steps 4 and 5.
Indicate that you have finished entering all positions.
Select Store All.
The session is terminated, and the
system restarts. You must enter system
programming again to continue.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Operator Features
Page 3-25
3
Optional Operator Features
The procedures in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC
operator positions and include the following:
■
Operator Hold Timer
■
DLC Operator Automatic Hold
QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
3
Operator Hold Timer
Use this procedure to set the length of the operator hold timer for all DLCs and
QCCs. If the system operator does not pick up the call within the time
programmed, an abbreviated ring reminds the operator that a call is being held.
This option cannot be programmed for individual operator positions.
3
Summary: Operator Hold Timer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
60 seconds
Valid Entries
10 to 255 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Hold Timer→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
Procedure: Operator Hold Timer
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Operator Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-26
Additional Information
PC
Select Hold Timer.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Erase the current hold timer setting (xxx).
Operator Hold Timer:
Enter length of hold
timer (10 to 255 sec)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the number of seconds to hold the call (nnn = 10 to 255).
Dial or type [nnn].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
DLC Operator Automatic Hold
3
Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature
for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental
call disconnection.
Summary: DLC Operator Automatic Hold
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Disabled, Enabled
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Operator Features
Copy Option
Page 3-27
No
Console Procedure Operator→DLC Hold→Automatic Hold Enable or
Automatic Hold Disable→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
Procedure: DLC Operator Automatic Hold
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DLC Hold.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Specify whether to enable or disable automatic hold.
DLC Auto Hold:
Select one
Auto Hold Enable
Auto Hold Disable
Exit
Enter
Select Auto Hold Enable or
Auto Hold Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-28
3
This section covers how to program the following options for QCC operator
positions:
■
Hold Return
■
Automatic Hold or Release
■
Queue over Threshold
■
Elevate Priority
■
Calls-in-Queue Alert
■
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
■
Call Type Queue Priority Level
■
Message Center Operation
■
Automatic or Manual Extended (Directed) Call Completion
■
Return Ring
■
Position Busy Backup
NOTE:
These options are available in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
3
Hold Return
Use this procedure to determine whether calls on hold are returned to the QCC
queue or remain on hold, on the QCC operator console, after the hold timer has
expired twice. After the hold timer expires the first time, the operator hears an
abbreviated ring as a call-on-hold reminder. If another call is received at the same
time that the hold timer expires, 10 seconds are added to the programmed
operator hold timer interval for the first call. If the QCC operator does not pick up a
call by the time the hold timer expires twice, the call can be programmed either to
remain on hold or return to the QCC queue.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
single setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
3
Summary: Hold Return
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Calls remain on hold
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-29
Valid Entries
Remain on hold, Return to QCC queue
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Hold Rtrn→Return to Queue
or Remain on Hold→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
3
Procedure: Hold Return
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Hold Return.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-30
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether calls on hold return to the QCC queue or remain on hold when
the hold timer expires twice.
Queued Call Hold Return:
Select one
Return to Queue
Remain on Hold
Exit
Select Return to Queue or
Remain on Hold.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Automatic Hold or Release
Use this procedure to specify whether a call in progress (on a call button) is
automatically put on hold (Automatic Hold) or disconnected (Automatic Release)
when the operator presses another button.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
single setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
Summary: Automatic Hold or Release
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Automatic Release
Valid Entries
Auto Hold, Auto Release
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→HoldRelease→Auto Hold or
Auto Release→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-31
3
Procedure: Automatic Hold or Release
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Hold Release.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Specify whether in-progress calls are automatically put on hold or
disconnected when another call button is pressed.
Queued Call HoldRelease:
Select one
Auto Hold
Auto
Release
Exit
Enter
Select Auto Hold or
Auto Release.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-32
3
Queue over Threshold
Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the
QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold
has been reached or exceeded. If the threshold is set to 0, operators are not
notified.
3
Summary: Queue over Threshold
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
0 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Threshold→Drop→Dial no. of
calls→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no.
of calls→→→
Procedure: Queue over Threshold
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-33
Select Threshold.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Erase the current threshold (xx).
Queued Over Threshold:
Enter maximum number for
Queue (0 to 99)
xx
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
!
0
Enter the maximum number of calls allowed in QCC queue
before operators are notified (nn = 0 to 99).
Ã
Use 0 to specify that operators are not notified.
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Elevate Priority
Use this procedure to specify the length of time before calls waiting in the QCC
queue are automatically reprioritized to a higher level. If priority is set to 0, calls
are not prioritized.
3
Summary: Elevate Priority
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
0 seconds
Valid Entries
0 and 5 to 30 seconds
+
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Page 3-34
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→ElvatePrior→Drop→Dial no.
of seconds→ Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
seconds→→→
3
Procedure: Elevate Priority
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-35
Additional Information
PC
Select Elevate Priority.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Erase the current call priority (xx).
Priority Elevated:
Enter times (5-30, 0=no)
call priority elevated
xx
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
!
+0
Enter the number of seconds calls will wait in the queue
before being reprioritized (nn = 5 to 30).
Use 0 to specify that calls are not reprioritized.
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Calls-In-Queue Alert
Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single
beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue.
Summary: Calls-In-Queue Alert
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Disable
Valid Entries
Enable, Disable
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Page 3-36
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→InQue Alert→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→InQue Alert Enable or InQue Alert
Disable→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→ or
→→→
Procedure: Calls-In-Queue Alert
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select In-Queue Alert.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-37
Additional Information
PC
Enter the QCC extension to receive the calls-in-queue alert.
In Queue Alert:
Enter QCC Operator
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
extension number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Console Display/Instructions
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 7.
On = operator receives
calls-in-queue alert.
Flashing = operator does not
receive calls-in-queue alert.
Off = not an operator position.
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether the operator receives the alert.
QCC Operator xxxx :
xxxx = operator entered in Step 1
Select one
InQue Alert Enable
InQue Alert Disable
Next
Exit
Enter
Select InQue Alert Enable or
InQue Alert Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
Use Next to program the next QCC position. The next QCC operator will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
3
Use this procedure to specify which QCC operators receive the following types of
calls:
■
Dial 0 calls (internal calls to the system operator)
■
DID calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension numbers)
■
Calls to the Listed Directory Number (extension for the QCC queue)
■
Calls programmed to return to the QCC queue (returning from directing,
camped-on, held calls, and operator parked calls)
■
Group Coverage calls
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-38
Forward/Follow Me calls
■
The QCC queue can be a receiver for the maximum number of coverage
groups (30).
NOTE:
If you want a QCC operator position to operate as a message center
(receiving returning parked and directed calls, Group Coverage calls, and
calls to unassigned DID numbers), program the Message Center option
before you assign the operator to receive call types.
NOTES:
1. This procedure does not include use of the menu options Follow/Frwd
or QCC Ext. These two options are used to assign queue priorities and
are not associated with individual QCC operators. See ‘‘Call Type Queue
Priority Level’’.
2. This procedure does not include programming the operator position to
receive calls on individual lines or trunks. See ‘‘QCC Operator to Receive
Call Types’’.
3. Programming an operator position to receive DID calls to invalid
destinations does not cause the calls to ring into the QCC queue unless
you program such calls to be sent to a backup extension. See “Invalid
Destination.” When no operator is assigned to receive the call types, the
call does not ring into the QCC queue, and the caller hears an error tone.
4. If a trunk assigned to ring into the QCC queue is to be assigned shared
remote access, assign that trunk remote access before performing this
procedure. See “Remote Access Trunk Assignment.”
Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
QCC operator receives the following calls:
Dial 0
Unassigned DID
Listed Directory Number
Returning
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Copy Option
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-39
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→Select a call
type→Operator→Dial coverage group no.→Enter→Dial
ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Select a call type → →Type coverage
group no.→→Type ext.
no.→→→→→→
Procedure: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-40
Additional Information
PC
Select Call Types.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
lu
Select a call type.
Call Type:
Make a selection
Dial 0
QCC Ext
Follow/Frwd
Returning
UnassignDID
GrpCoverage
To use Follow/Frwd or QCC Ext, see
‘‘Call Type Queue Priority Level’’.
If you select GrpCoverage, go to
l Group Coverage Procedure.
ListedNumbr
If you select Dial0, UnassignDID,
ListedNumbr, or Returning, go to
u Call Type Procedure.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Exit
Ã
l Group Coverage Procedure
Select Operator.
**** = option name selected in Step 4
****
Make a selection
Priority
Operator
Exit
Enter the group coverage number (nn = 1 to 30).
Group Coverage Calls:
Enter grp coverage
number (1-30)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-41
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the operator position.
Operator GrpCoverage xx :
xx = number entered in Step 6
Enter QCC operator
extension number
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = operator receives Group Coverage
calls.
Flashing = operator does not receive
Group Coverage calls.
Off = extension is not an operator
position.
Assign or remove the operator from Group Coverage calls.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
QCC operators from Group Coverage
calls by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Assign operators to the receive calls from the next Group Coverage number or
go to Step 7.
Select Next.
Return to Step 4. The next Group Coverage number will display on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit five times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-42
u Call Type Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select Operator.
**** = option name selected in Step 4
****
Make a selection
Priority
Operator
Exit
Specify the operator position.
**** = option name selected in Step 4
**** Operator:
Enter QCC operator
extension number (0=init)
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required.
On = operator receives call type.
Flashing = operator does not receive call
type.
Off = extension is not an operator
position.
Assign or remove the operator from the call type specified
in Step 4 of the main procedure.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
QCC operators from the call type by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit five times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Call Type Queue Priority Level
Page 3-43
3
Use this procedure to assign a priority value (1 to 7) that determines the order in
which calls programmed to ring into the QCC queue are sent to QCC system
operator positions. A value of 1 is the highest priority. The QCC queue priority
level is assigned for the following types of calls:
■
Dial 0 calls (internal calls to the system operator)
■
DID calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension numbers)
■
Calls to the Listed Directory Number (extension for the QCC queue)
■
Calls programmed to return to the QCC queue (returning from extending,
camped-on, held calls, and operator parked calls)
■
Group Coverage calls
■
Calls signed in (Follow) or forwarded to the system operator
■
Calls to a system operator extension number
This procedure does not include programming the QCC queue priority level for
individual lines or trunks to ring into the queue. See “QCC Queue Priority Level.”
Summary: Call Type Queue Priority Level
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
4
Valid Entries
1 to 7
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→Select call
type→Priority→Drop→Dial priority
level→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Select call type→ →! + 0 →Type
priority level→→→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-44
Procedure: Call Type Queue Priority Level
Console/Display Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
_
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
LinesTrunks
Tables
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
_
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Call Types.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Select a call type.
Call Type:
Make a selection
Dial 0
QCC Ext
Follow/Frwd
Returning
UnassignDID
GrpCoverage
ListedNumbr
Exit
If you select Follow/Frwd or QCC Ext,
go to Step 8.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-45
Additional Information
PC
Select Priority.
**** = option name selected in Step 4
**** Calls:
Make a selection
If you did not select Group Coverage, go
to Step 8.
Priority
_
Operator
Exit
Enter a coverage group number (nn = 1 to 30).
Group Coverage Calls:
Enter coverage group
(1-30) queue is receiver
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current priority level (x).
**** = option name selected in Step 4
**** Priority:
Enter queue priority
(1-7)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter a queue priority level (n = 1 to 7).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
!0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-46
3
Message Center Operation
Use this procedure to designate one or more QCC operator positions to operate
as a message center. The following options are automatically set for the message
center position:
■
Incoming calls are not directed to this position.
■
Returning calls are directed to this position (return from extending and
operator parked calls).
■
All group coverage calls are directed to this position.
■
All DID calls to invalid destinations are directed to this position.
Designating message center operation does not change any call type option
programming, except that the call types mentioned above are added to the calls
received at the QCC Message Center.
Summary: Message Center Operation
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
QCC extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Msg Center→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Message Center Operation
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
_
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
LinesTrunks
Tables
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-47
Additional Information
PC
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
_
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Message Center.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Specify the QCC operator extension.
Operator Message Center:
Enter QCC operator
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
extension number
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required.
On = extension is message center position.
Flashing = extension is not message
center position.
Off = extension is not an operator position.
Assign or remove the extension as a message center.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
extensions as a message center by
repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-48
Extended (Directed) Call Completion
3
Use this procedure to specify one of the two basic options shown below for QCC
operator positions with a DSS only:
■
Automatic Completion. Allows one-touch call transfer; that is, calls are
transferred by touching only an extension button on the DSS. The operator
does not have to press the Release button.
■
Manual Completion. QCC operators must press the Release button to
direct a call using a DSS.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
Summary: Extended (Directed) Call Completion 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Automatic Extended Completion
Valid Entries
Automatic, Manual
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→ExtndComplt→Automatic
Complete or Manual Complete→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Procedure: Extended (Directed) Call Completion 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
_
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
LinesTrunks
Tables
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-49
Additional Information
PC
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
_
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Select Extended Completion.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Specify automatic call extension or require the operator
to extend calls manually.
QCC Extend Completion:
Select one
Automatic Complete
Manual Complete
Exit
Enter
Select Automatic Complete
or Manual Complete.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Return Ring
3
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before an unanswered directed
call is returned to the QCC queue or QCC Message Center position.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
NOTE:
If you want unanswered calls to proceed to voice mail, lengthen the return
ring setting.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-50
3
Summary: Return Ring
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
4 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 15 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Return Ring→Drop→Dial no.
of rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
rings→→→
PC Procedure
3
Procedure: Return Ring
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
_
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
LinesTrunks
Tables
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
_
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-51
Additional Information
PC
Select Return Ring.
Queued Call Operator:
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Erase the current number of rings (xx).
Queued Call Return Ring:
Enter number rings
before return (1-15)
xx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!0
Enter the number of rings before the directed call returns
to the QCC queue (nn = 1 to 15).
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Position Busy Backup
3
Use this procedure to designate or remove the calling group to provide the backup
position for the QCC queue. The specified calling group receives incoming calls
when all QCC operator positions are in position-busy mode.
Position Busy Backup is programmed for the QCC queue rather than for individual
QCC operator positions. The calling group designated as the QCC queue backup
serves as the backup for the Remote Access feature and as backup when the
QCC is being used as the system programming console.
Only one Position Busy Backup can be programmed per system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 3-52
3
Summary: Position Busy Backup
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
No backup
Valid Entries
Calling group number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→More→QCC
Backup→Drop→Dial ext. number→Enter or
Delete→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
or
→→U→→! + 0→Type ext. number→
→→
Procedure: Position Busy Backup
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Operator menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
_
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
LinesTrunks
Tables
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Queued Call.
System Operator:
Make a selection
Positions
Queued Call
_
Hold Timer
DLC Hold
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-53
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Queued Call Operator menu.
Queued Call Operator:
>
Make a selection
Hold Rtrn
InQue Alert
HoldRelease
Call Types
Threshold
Msg Center
ElvatePrior
ExtndComplt
Exit
Return Ring
Press More.
U
Select QCC Backup.
Queued Call Operator:
Make a selection
_
QCC Backup
Voice Annc
Exit
Erase the current QCC operator backup number (xxxx).
QCC Operator Backup:
Enter QCC operator
of Calling Group
xxxx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!0
Specify the calling group that will provide QCC operator backup.
QCC Operator Backup:
Enter QCC operator
of Calling Group
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Assign or remove the group as QCC operator backup.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
calling groups as QCC operator backups
by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-54
3
Telephones
This section contains the following procedures:
■
Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including
lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging)
■
Copying line button assignments from one telephone to an individual
telephone or block of telephones
■
Assigning the following buttons on telephones (for Hybrid/PBX systems
only):
— System Access or Intercom Voice
— System Access or Intercom Ring
— System Access or Intercom Originate Only
— Shared System or Intercom Access
■
Identifying analog multiline telephones that do not have built-in
speakerphones (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) capability
■
Identifying analog multiline telephones that require pairing of extension
jacks to provide either the Voice Announce to Busy or voice and data
features
Assign Trunks or Pools to Telephones
3
Use this procedure to assign outside lines/trunks (connected to the control unit) to
specific buttons on each telephone. The lines/trunks assigned to a button on a
telephone are called personal lines.
This procedure is used only to change or add personal lines, Loudspeaker
Paging, or Pool buttons (Hybrid/PBX only) to telephones. See “Assign Intercom
or System Access Button” procedures to add or change Intercom (Icom) or
System Access (SA) buttons.
Individual lines/trunks can be assigned to a maximum of 64 telephones. Individual
pools can be assigned as a Pool button on a maximum of 64 telephones.
The following lines/trunks cannot be assigned to a button on a telephone:
■
Lines/trunks used for Music On Hold
■
Lines/trunks used for maintenance alarms
NOTE:
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay
license fees to a third party (such as the American Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold 
requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-55
Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool
has trunks assigned. If all trunks are to be removed from a pool, all Pool button
assignments must first be removed from telephones. Another way of handling this
situation is to program another trunk into the pool and then remove the Pool
button assignments from the extensions.
■
Hybrid/PBX only. Individual lines/trunks assigned to a pool can be
assigned to a button only on a DLC operator position. If one of the
lines/trunks in a pool is assigned to a button on a non-DLC telephone, the
result is a Pool button assignment.
■
Key only. The system assigns the first eight line numbers to buttons on
multiline telephones whether or not an outside line is physically connected.
If a line is not connected, the button assignment must be removed so the
user can assign a feature to the button.
■
For the MDC 9000 and MLC 5 cordless multiline telephones and the MDW
9000 wireless multiline telephone, the system assigns the first eight lines
connected to the control unit even though the telephone has fewer than
eight buttons available. Remove the extra lines in system programming so
that the appropriate number of lines are assigned to buttons on these
telephones.
Lines and trunks are assigned to buttons in the order in which you press each line
button on the system programming console or keyboard. Existing line
assignments can be rearranged by removing all current assignments and then
pressing the line buttons on the console or keyboard in the order in which they
should appear on the buttons. For information on the order of the programmed
buttons, refer to the button numbers on the applicable planning form for each
telephone.
If you want to reserve some blank buttons for features between line buttons, you
must assign a line as a placeholder for each blank button. After all lines are
assigned, remove the lines used as placeholders for the buttons reserved for
features.
Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Telephones 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but note differences in factory settings.
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Factory Setting
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-56
Key Mode. An Intercom Ring (ICOM Ring) button, an
Intercom Voice (ICOM Voice) button, and the first eight lines
connected to the control unit are assigned to all analog
multiline telephones, MLX telephones (excluding operator
positions), and MFMs connected to MLX telephones. Two
Intercom Ring buttons are assigned to single-line telephones;
no outside lines are assigned.
Behind Switch Mode. Intercom Ring, Intercom Voice, and
prime line buttons are assigned to all analog multiline
telephones, MLX telephones (excluding operator positions),
and MFMs connected to MLX telephones. Two Intercom Ring
buttons are assigned to single-line telephones; no outside
lines are assigned. When prime lines are assigned to MLX
extensions, lines are not assigned to MFMs used to connect
adjuncts. Lines for MFMs must be assigned separately.
Hybrid/PBX Mode. System Access Ring (SA Ring), System
Access Voice (SA Voice), and System Access Originate
Only (SA Orig Only) buttons are assigned to all analog
multiline telephones and MLX telephones (excluding operator
positions). Five Call buttons are assigned to QCC operator
positions. Two System Access Ring buttons and one System
Access Originate Only button are assigned to single-line
telephones. No personal line or Pool buttons are assigned.
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
Extensions→Lines/Trunks→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Entry Mode→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
Extensions→Lines/Trunks→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select trunk range→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →Type ext. no.→ →→ Type line/trunk
no.→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Select trunk
range →Toggle letter G On/Off→→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-57
Procedure: Assign Trunks or Pools to Telephones 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions Menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Lines and Trunks.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
_
LinesTrunks
Line Copy
Restrct Copy
Account
Dial Outcd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Specify the extension.
Assign Lines/Trunks:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 5.
On = extension is assigned to
trunk or pool.
Off = extension is not assigned
to trunk or pool.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-58
Additional Information
PC
●◆
Assign the extension.
xxxx = extension number entered in Step 3
Extension xxxx :
Assign lines/trunks
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
_
_
Lines 21-40
_
For a single line/trunk, go to
● Single Line/Trunk Procedure.
Lines 41-60
_
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
_
Exit
l Single Line/Trunk Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the line or trunk number.
Extension xxxx :
Enter line/trunk numbers
xxxx = extension number entered
in Step 3
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove the specified line/trunk number.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Assign a single line/trunk to the next extension or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 2 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-59
◆ Block Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons
on the system programming console.
Select
Lines
Lines
Lines
Lines
01-20
21-40
41-60
61-80.
Assign or remove the line/trunk to or from the line button.
Toggle the green LEDs next to each
line button on or off as required.
On = line/trunk or pool assigned to
extension
Off = line/trunk or pool not assigned to
extension
For Hybrid/PBX only:
The red LED indicates:
On = trunk assigned to pool
Off = trunk not assigned to pool
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Copy Line/Trunk Assignments
3
Use this procedure to copy outside line/trunk button assignments, pool dial-out
code restrictions (Hybrid/PBX only), and (for operator positions only) Night
Service information from one extension to another extension or block of
extensions with identical requirements.
If you are copying assignments to a block of extensions and one of the extensions
in the block is in use, the display shows the Station Busy - Pls Wait message.
Copying for the rest of the extensions in the block is delayed until the busy
extension becomes idle. The number of the busy extension is not shown. If a
DSS is attached, the LED associated with the busy extension is on. If you exit
instead of waiting for the busy extension to become idle, copying for the rest of the
extensions is canceled; however, the assignments that have already been copied
are not canceled.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-60
If you are copying assignments from an operator position to a block of extensions
that includes both operator and nonoperator extensions, the information is copied
only to the operator positions; the nonoperator positions are not affected.
Similarly, if you are copying assignments from a nonoperator position to a block of
extensions that includes both operator and nonoperator extensions, the
information is copied only to the nonoperator positions; the operator positions are
not affected. The system does not provide an error tone to signal that the copy did
not work for all of the extensions in the block.
Summary: Copy Line/Trunk Assignments
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
4a, Extension Copy: Analog Multiline Telephone Template
4c, Extension Copy: MLX Telephone Template
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes: lines/pools assigned to an extension.
Copy Option
Not applicable
Console Procedure To copy to a single extension:
Extensions→Line Copy→Single→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To copy to a block of extensions:
Extensions→Line Copy→Block→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no of first telephone in
block→Enter→Dial ext. no of last telephone in
block→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To copy to a single extension:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext. no.→→→
To copy to a block of extensions:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type ext.
no. of first telephone in block→→Type ext. no. of last
telephone in block→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-61
Procedure: Copy Line and Trunk Assignments
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Line Copy.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
Restrct Copy
Line Copy
Dial Outcd
Account
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Copy the line assignments to individual
extensions or to a block of extensions.
Copy Lines:
Make a selection
Single
Block
●◆
To copy to a block of extensions, they
must be connected to sequentially
numbered extension jacks (for example,
logical IDs 11, 12, 13 and so on).
To copy line assignments to a
single extension, select Single and go to
● Single Extension Procedure.
Exit
To copy line assignments to a block of
extensions, select Block and go to
◆ Block Procedure.
●Single Extension Procedure
Specify the extension you want to copy from.
Copy Lines:
Enter extension to copy
from
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-62
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension to copy assignments to.
Copy extension xxxx to:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 1.
Enter extension
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry. Continue to copy line assignments or go to Step 5.
Select Enter OR
Select Next.
After selecting Enter, you may continue
to copy line assignments from the extension currently displayed on Line 1 to
additional extensions.
After selecting Next, you may copy line
assignments from the next sequential
extension. Select Enter () after completing programming.
Return to Step 3 to continue programming. The extension to be copied from
will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the extension you want to copy from.
Copy Lines:
Enter extension to copy
from
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-63
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Enter the logical ID of the first extension number in the block to be copied to.
xxxx
Copy extension
Enter starting extension
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4 of the
main procedure
logical id (#1 - #200)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type #[nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter the logical ID of the last extension number in the block
to be copied to.
Start at extension xxxx
Enter ending extension
xxxx = extension number of logical id
entered in Step 1
logical id (#1 - #200)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type #[nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons
3
Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM)
buttons used to make and receive inside calls. This includes the following types of
Intercom buttons:
■
Ring
■
Voice
■
Originate Only (Ring or Voice)
In Hybrid/PBX mode only, use this procedure to assign or change assignments for
System Access (SA) buttons used to make or receive inside and outside calls.
This procedure includes the following types of System Access buttons:
■
Ring
■
Voice
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
■
Originate Only (Ring or Voice)
■
Shared (Ring or Voice)
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-64
NOTE:
You cannot change the factory setting for Call buttons assigned to QCC
operator positions, and you cannot assign Ring, Voice, Originate Only, or
Shared buttons to QCC operator positions. In Release 4.0 and later, the
Call 5 (Ring/Voice) button on a QCC can be programmed for Voice
Announce.
System Access or Intercom buttons can be assigned only to the first 10
buttons on a telephone.
You can assign a combination of up to 10 System Access or Intercom
buttons to each telephone (excluding QCC operator positions).
You can remove System Access or Intercom buttons, but at least one must
remain on the telephone.
NOTE:
When single-line sets are programmed with only one System Access
or Intercom button, the Transfer, Conference and Drop features are
disabled. Other features that require a second dial tone, such as
Account Code/Number Entry, After Call Work States, Call Pickup,
Call Waiting, and Privacy, are also affected. For more information,
see the Feature Reference manual.
Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be
assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 16 other
telephones.
Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned to single-line telephones or other
tip/ring equipment connected to an 016, 012, or 008 OPT module. Shared
SA buttons can be assigned to a tip/ring or external alert device connected
to an MFM in an MLX telephone or a GPA connect to an analog multiline
telephone. Shared SA buttons cannot be assigned when the corresponding
SA button is on a single-line set.
Release 3.0 and later
Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be
assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 27 other
telephones.
System Access and Intercom buttons are centrally programmed and cannot
be programmed by individual telephone users.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Summary: Assign Intercom or System Access
Buttons
Page 3-65
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but note differences in factory settings.
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjuncts: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct (DLC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Key Mode. An Intercom Ring (ICOM Ring), an Intercom
Voice (ICOM Voice), and the first eight lines connected to the
system are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX
telephones, excluding operator positions. Two Intercom Ring
buttons are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected on an
012 or 016 module. An Intercom Ring and an Intercom
Originate Only (ICOM Orig Only) button are assigned to
tip/ring equipment connected by an MFM. No outside lines
are assigned.
Behind Switch Mode. An Intercom Ring, an Intercom Voice,
and a prime line button are assigned to all analog multiline
and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions. Two
Intercom Ring buttons and a prime line button are assigned
to tip/ring equipment connected to an 012 module. An
Intercom Ring and an Intercom Originate Only Ring button
are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected by an MFM. No
outside lines are assigned.
Hybrid/PBX Mode. System Access Ring (SA Ring), System
Access Voice (SA Voice), and System Access Originate
Only Ring (SA Orig Only) buttons are assigned to all analog
multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions.
Two System Access Ring buttons and a System Access
Originate Only Ring button are assigned to tip/ring equipment
(for example, single-line telephones or fax machines
connected to an 012 module). No personal line or pool
buttons are assigned.
All Modes. System Access Ring (Hybrid/PBX mode) or
Intercom Ring (Key and Behind Switch modes), System
Access Voice (Hybrid/PBX mode) or Intercom Voice (Key
and Behind Switch modes), and the first 18 through 29 lines
connected to the control unit are assigned to all DLC operator
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-66
positions. The number of lines assigned depends on the type
of telephone used as a DLC operator position. Refer to the
appropriate telephone planning form for details.
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes: specific button options.
Copy Option
Yes (You can copy additional SA buttons to another
extension, but you cannot overwrite SA buttons that are
already assigned.)
Console Procedure To program extension:
More→Cntr-Prg→Program Ext.→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Start→Program
extension→Enter→Exit→Exit
To copy extension programming:
More→Cntr-Prg→Copy ext.→Dial copy from
ext. no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext. no.
→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program extension:
U → → →Type ext. no.→ →Program
extension→→→
To copy extension programming:
U → → →Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext no.→→→
Procedure: Assign Intercom or System Access
Buttons
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press More.
U
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-67
Additional Information
PC
Select Centralized Telephone Programming.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
_
Exit
Select an extension option.
Centralized Programming:
Make a selection
●◆
Select Program Ext and go to
● Program Extensions Procedure.
Program Ext
_
Select Copy Ext and go to
◆ Copy Extension Procedure.
Copy Ext
_
Exit
● Program Extensions Procedure
Although you can make selections from the screen (with the ListFeature option)
to assign Ring and Voice buttons, the following procedure provides the
programming codes to perform these functions. Using the codes speeds the
button assignment process.
When you enter the programming code for assigning a Ring button, the screen in
Step 6 of the following procedure changes to the first List Feature screen, then
returns to the screen shown in Step 6.
Table 3-2 provides the programming codes for assigning Ring and Voice buttons.
You can handle errors in data entry as follows:
■
If you enter a feature code incorrectly while programming, the display
shows the Programming Error message and the red LED next to the
button flashes. If this happens, press the button again and repeat the
procedure.
■
If you make a mistake and program the wrong feature on a button, press
the button, select Delete ( on the PC), and press the button again
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-68
.
Table 3-2.
Programming Codes for Assigning SA/ICOM Ring and Voice Buttons
Use
On the Console
On the PC
To assign System Access
or Intercom Ring button
Dial *16
Type *16
To assign System Access
or Intercom Voice button
Dial *16, press button
being programmed
again, and dial *19
Type *16, press
To assign System Access
or Intercom Originate Only
- Ring button
Dial *18
Type *18
To assign System Access
or Intercom Originate Only
- Voice button
Dial *18, press button
being programmed
again, and dial *19
Type *18, press 6 +
function key for button
being programmed
again, and type *19
To assign Shared System
Access button
Dial *17, press the
extension number of
principal telephone
[nnnn] then press the
button number being
shared [nn]
Type *17, press the
extension number of
principal telephone
[nnnn] then press the
button number of
specific button being
shared [nn]
To change current
assignment for System
Access or Intercom Voice,
Originate Only or Shared
System Access buttons
from Voice to Ring
Dial **19
Type **19
Console Display/Instructions
6 +
function key for button
being programmed
again, and type *19
Additional Information
PC
Specify an extension.
Centralized Programming:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-69
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Start.
Extension Program
xx
xx = extension entered in Step 1
Press HOME to exit
Sys Program
Start
Select the line buttons associated with the 20 line buttons
on the system programming console or PC.
xx = number entered in Step 1
Select Button:
Extension Program
xx
Page 1
Page 2
Sys Program
To select buttons 1 to 20, select Page 1.
To select buttons 21 to 34, select Page 2.
Select the button you want to program.
Ã
Press the button or function key
next to your selection.
Enter the programming code for voice or ring button.
**** =contents of button selected in
****
Press HOME to Exit
Delete
Page 2
Sys Program
Step 5 (Voice, Ring, or blank)
Page 1
See Table 3-4.
ListFeature
Assign a voice or ring attribute.
To assign the voice attribute to the Ring
button, select the same button and enter
the programming code for voice
(see Table 3-4).
To assign Voice buttons, first assign the
button as a Ring button, then program
the button with the voice attribute (see
Table 3-4).
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-70
Repeat Step 6 to program another button for the extension entered in Step 1 or
go to Step 9.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
◆ Copy Extension Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the extension to copy from.
Extension Program Copy
Enter extension to copy
from
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the extension to copy to.
Copy Extension xxxx to:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 1
Enter extension
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-71
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry. Then, continue to copy button assignments
or go to Step 5.
Select Enter or
Select Next.
After selecting Enter, you may continue
to copy button assignments from the
extension displayed on Line 1 to additional extensions.
After selecting Next, you may copy button assignments from the next sequential extension.
Return to Step 3 to continue programming. The extension to be copied from
will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Analog Multiline Telephone Without Built-in
Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer
Intercom (HFAI) Capability
3
Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane
buttons that do not have BIS or HFAI capability. The models that must be
identified are 5-Button, 10-Button, 34-Button, and 34-Button Deluxe analog
multiline models with flat membrane buttons.
Keep the factory setting for analog multiline models with raised plastic buttons,
including the following models: 10-Button HFAI, 34-Button with speakerphone
(SP-34), 34-Button with speakerphone and display (SP-34D), BIS-10, BIS-22,
BIS-34, BIS-22D, and BIS-34D.
This procedure is not necessary for MLX or single-line telephones.
Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones Without
BIS or HFAI Capability
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-72
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Stations
Factory Setting
All models of analog multiline telephones (except the
analog multiline display console) have BIS/HFAI capability.
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→BIS/HFAI→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones Without
BIS or HFAI Capability
3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select BIS/HFAI.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial Outcd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
BIS/HFAI Extensions:
Enter extensions
Backspace
Exit
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 5.
On = telephone has BIS/HFAI capability.
Off = telephone does not have BIS/HFAI
capability.
Delete
Page 3-73
Enter
Assign or remove BIS/HFAI capability.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
BIS/HFAI capability to additions extensions by repeating Steps 3 and 4.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice
Announce to Busy
3
Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to be used to provide the
Voice Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone.
The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in
the pair is the telephone’s extension number. The extension number for the
second (even-numbered) extension jack is dedicated to the Voice Announce to
Busy feature. Calls cannot be placed to the extension jack reserved for the Voice
Announce to Busy feature.
Voice Announce to Busy must be disabled at data stations.
NOTE:
This procedure does not apply to MLX telephones (Voice Announce to
Busy is automatically provided) and cannot be programmed for single-line
telephones.
Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones with
Voice Announce to Busy
Programmable
System Manager
Mode
All
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Telephones
Page 3-74
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Extensions→VoiceSignl→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones with
Voice Announce to Busy
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Voice Signal.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial Outcd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Fax Machines
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-75
Additional Information
PC
Specify the first extension (odd numbered) of the pair.
If DSS is attached:
Voice Signal Pair:
Enter voice signal pairs
Delete
Backspace
Exit
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
The other extension in the pair is
automatically assigned: Press the Inspct
button to view the pair.
Enter
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 5.
On = assigns pairing for Voice Announce to
busy.
Off = removes pairing for Voice Announce to
busy.
The red LED goes on automatically for the
other extension in the pair.
Specify whether or not the telephone is paired for
Voice Announce to Busy.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
the Voice Announce to Busy feature to
additional extensions by repeating
Steps 3 and 4.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Analog Multiline Telephones in Data Stations
3
See “Data Features.”
Fax Machines
3
Use this procedure to add a fax machine by assigning the extension jack used to
connect the fax machine. To remove a fax machine and free the extension jack for
another use, you must remove the extension jack assignment.
In addition, you can specify the extensions to receive a message-waiting
indication (MWI) when a fax transmission is received, and specify the length of
time before the system registers that a fax has arrived and sends the
message-waiting indication.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Fax Machines
Page 3-76
NOTE:
Do not use this procedure for fax machines connected to analog multiline
telephones with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA). In a GPA configuration
features cannot be assigned to the fax independently of the telephone.
A maximum of 16 fax machines can have the Fax Message Waiting feature.
Additional fax machines (more than 16) can be installed, but these machines
cannot have this feature.
You can specify up to four telephones to receive the message-waiting indication
when a fax transmission is received. Note that fax machines can only send and
not receive message-waiting indications.
3
Summary: Fax
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
10 seconds
Valid Entries
0 to 30 seconds
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→Fax→Extension→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Msg Waiting→Dial fax machine ext.
no.→Enter→Dial MWI ext.
no.→Enter→Threshold→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type ext. no.→→ → → Type
fax machine ext. no.→→Type MWI ext.
no.→→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds
→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Fax Machines
Page 3-77
3
Procedure: Fax
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Fax.
Auxiliary Equipment:
>
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
Fax
_
MaintAlarms
Exit
Select Extension.
Fax:
Make a selection
Extension
_
Msg Waiting
Threshold
Exit
Specify the extension to be used for the fax machine.
Fax Extension:
Enter fax extension
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = jack connects to fax machine
Off = jack provides another purpose
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Fax Machines
Page 3-78
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the extension.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
fax machines to additional extensions by
repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the Fax menu.
Select Exit.
Select Message Waiting.
Fax:
Make a selection
Extension
Msg Waiting
_
Threshold
Exit
Enter the extension for the fax machine that will send
the message-waiting indication.
Fax Msg. Waiting
Enter the fax extension
number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension to receive the message-waiting indication.
xxxx = number entered in Step 8
Fax xxxx :
Enter message waiting
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
extension
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 13.
On = assign message-waiting indication to
extension
Off = remove message-waiting indication
from extension
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Fax Machines
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-79
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the extension to receive the
message-waiting indication.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
message-waiting indication to additional
extensions by repeating Steps 10 and
11.
Continue to assign the message-waiting indication
to another fax extension or go to Step 13.
Select Next.
Return to Step 10 to continue programming. The next fax extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the Fax menu.
Select Exit.
Select Threshold.
Fax:
Make a selection
Extension
Msg Waiting
Threshold
_
Exit
Erase the current number of seconds (xx).
FAX Threshold Duration:
Enter duration (0-30sec)
xx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Enter the number of seconds to wait before the system
is notified that a fax message has arrived (nn = 0 to 30).
Dial or type [nn].
Press Drop.
!0
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-80
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Optional Telephone Features
3
The procedures in this section detail the steps in programming the following
optional features:
■
Extension Language
■
Pool Dial-Out Code
■
Call Restrictions
■
Copy Call Restrictions
■
ARS Restriction Level for Extensions
■
Forced Account Code Entry
■
Microphone Operation
■
Remote Call Forwarding
■
Delayed Call Forwarding
■
Authorization Codes
■
Primary Cover Ring Delay
■
Secondary Cover Ring Delay
■
Group Cover Ring Delay
■
HotLine (single-line telephone only)
3
Extension Language
Use this procedure to change the language for an MLX telephone. It applies to
Releases 1.1 and later only.
Summary: Extension Language
3
Programmable by
Users and system manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital Data
Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Page 3-81
Console Procedure To program a single extension:
More→Language→Extensions→Single→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select a language→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of extensions:
More→Language→Extensions→Block→Dial starting ext.
no.→Enter→Dial ending ext. no.→Enter→Select a
language→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single extension:
U → → → →Type ext. no.→ →Select a
language→→→
To program a block of extensions:
U → → → →Type starting ext. no.→ →Type ending ext. no.→Select a language→→
→
3
Procedure: Extension Language
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select More.
U
Select Language.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-82
Additional Information
PC
Select Extensions.
Language:
Make a selection
SystemLang
Extensions
_
SMDR
Printer
Exit
●◆
Select an option.
Extension Language:
Make a selection
Single
_
For a single extension, select
Single and go to
● Single Extension Procedure.
Block
_
For a block of extensions, select
Block and go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Exit
● Single Extension Procedure
Enter the extension number.
Extension Language:
Enter extension number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = extension language is French
Off = extension language is English
Flashing = extension language is Spanish
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the language for the extension.
Extension xxxx Language:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 1
Select one
English
_
French
_
Spanish
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select English,
French, or
Spanish.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-83
Continue to assign the language to additional extensions
or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
◆ Block Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the starting extension number.
Extension Language:
Enter starting extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the ending extension number.
Lang for ext xxxx to:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 1
Enter ending extension
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-84
Additional Information
PC
Specify the language for the extensions.
xxxx to xxxx = range of extensions
entered in Steps 1 and 3
Lang Exts xxxx to xxxx:
Select one
English
French
Select English,
French, or
Spanish.
Spanish
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Pool Dial-Out Code
Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and the placing
of calls on specific line/trunk pools. Beginning with Release 3.1, the default
settings restrict all telephones from dialing any line/trunk pool dial-out code.
NOTE:
Prior to Release 3.1, the default settings allow all telephones to dial any
line/trunk pool dial-out code. Entering a pool dial-out code and then deleting
that code restricts the user from using the pool associated with the entered
code.
Summary: Pool Dial-Out Code
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct (DLC): Digital
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Main pool: 70; All other pools: 890 to 899. All telephones are
restricted from dialing any pool dial-out code.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-85
Valid Entries
Pool numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Dial OutCd→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Dial
pool dial-out code→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Type pool dial-out
code→→→
PC Procedure
Procedure: Pool Dial-Out Code
3
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Dial-Out Code.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
_
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial Outcd
Restriction
BIS/HFAI
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Specify the extension.
Assign Pool DialOut Cd:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 5.
On = pool dial-code is assigned
Off = pool dial-code is not assigned
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 3-86
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Enter the pool dial-out code.
xxxx = extension entered in Step 3
Extension xxxx:
Enter pool dialout code
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Allow or restrict the extension from using the pool dial-out code.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to allow or restrict
additional pool dial-out codes from this
extension by repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Continue to program pool dial-out codes for another extension
or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 5 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Call Restrictions
3
Use this procedure to change individual telephone calling restrictions to one of the
following:
■
Unrestricted
■
Restricted from making all outgoing calls
■
Restricted from making toll calls
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-87
3
Summary: Call Restrictions
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Unrestricted
Valid Entries
Unrestricted, Outward restricted, Toll restricted
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Extensions→Restriction→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select restriction→Enter→Exit
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Select
restriction→→
PC Procedure
Procedure: Call Restrictions
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Restrictions.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
_
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Exit
Call Pickup
VoiceSignl
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-88
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
Call Restriction:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Select the appropriate restriction.
xxxx = number entered in Step 3
Extension xxxx:
Select one
Unrestricted
_
_
_
Outward Restrict
Toll Restrict
Next
Exit
Enter
Unrestricted = remove all restrictions.
Outward Restrict = restrict telephone
from making outside calls (local and toll).
Toll Restrict = restrict telephone from
making toll calls.
Ã
Press the button or function key next
to your selection.
Continue to assign or remove restrictions from another extension or go to
Step 7.
Select Next.
Return to Step 5 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-89
3
Copy Call Restrictions
Use this procedure to copy calling restrictions, allowed lists, and disallowed lists.
Feature assignment must be completed for the “copy from” extension. These
features can then be copied to an individual extension or block of extensions with
identical calling restriction requirements.
If you are copying restrictions to a block of extensions and one of the extensions
in the block is in use, the display shows the Station Busy - Pls Wait message.
Copying for the rest of the extensions in the block is delayed until the busy
extension becomes idle. The number of the busy extension is not shown. If a DSS
is attached, the LED associated with the busy extension is on. If you exit instead
of waiting for the busy extension to become idle, copying for the rest of the
extensions in the block is canceled; however, the restrictions that have already
been copied are not canceled.
If you are copying restrictions to a block of extensions, they must be sequentially
numbered.
The extensions you are copying to and from can be both operator and
nonoperator positions.
NOTE:
Dial-out code restrictions are not copied.
Summary: Copy Call Restrictions
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
“Copy to” telephone(s) idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Not applicable
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
3
Page 3-90
Console Procedure To copy to a single exte‘nsion:
Extensions→RestrctCopy→Single→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To copy to a block of extensions:
Extensions→RestrctCopy→Block→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial first no. in copy to block→Enter→Dial
last no. in copy to block→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To copy to a single extension:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext. no.→→→→
To copy to a block of extensions:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type first
copy no. in copy to block→→→→
Procedure: Copy Call Restrictions
Console/Display Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
_
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Restrict Copy.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
_
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether to copy calling restrictions to l u
an individual extension or to a block of extensions.
Copy Restrictions:
Make a selection
Single
_
If you select Single, go to
l Single Extension Procedure.
Block
_
If you selected Block, go to
u Block Procedure.
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-91
● Single Extension Procedure
Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions.
Ã
Restriction Copy:
Enter extension to copy
SP: “Entering an Extension”
from
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension to which you want to copy call restrictions.
Copy extension xxxx to:
Enter extension
xxxx = extension number entered
in Step 4
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Continue to copy calling restrictions from another extension
to an individual extension or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-92
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the extension from which you want to copy calling restrictions.
Restriction Copy:
Enter extension to copy
from
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter the logical ID of the first extension in the block to which you want to copy
call restrictions (nnn = 1 to 144).
Save your entry.
Copy extension xxxx To:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4
Enter starting extension
Logical id (1 - 144)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type # [nnn].
Select Enter.
Enter the logical ID of the last extension in the block (nnn = 1 to 144).
Start at extension xxxx:
xxxx = extension entered in Step 1
Enter ending extension
Logical id (1 - 144)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type # [nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
ARS Restriction Level For Extensions
Page 3-93
3
Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Outgoing
calls can be made only to routes that have a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) lower
than or equal to that of the extension for which the call is being made. Only
outgoing calls are affected; users can receive inside, local, and toll calls on
restricted telephones and can join any type of call in progress.
The restriction level assigned to extensions is opposite to the FRL assigned to
routes, where 0 is the most and 6 is the least restrictive.
Summary: Assigning ARS Restriction Level For
an Extension
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX only
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
3
Valid Entries
0-6, (0 is most restrictive and 6 is least restrictive)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→ARS Restrict→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial restriction level→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type ext. no.→ →! + P →Type
restriction level→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-94
Procedure: Assigning ARS Restriction Level For
an Extension
3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
_
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select ARS Restrict.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
_
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Specify the extension.
ARS Restrict:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-95
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current Restriction Level (x).
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4
Extension xxxx:
Enter ARS restrict level
(0-6)
x
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6).
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4
Extension xxxx:
Enter ARS restrict level
(0-6)
x
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Continue to assign restriction levels to additional extensions or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Forced Account Code Entry
3
Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this
feature is programmed on individual telephones, the user must enter a 1- to
16-digit account code before making an outside call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-96
Summary: Forced Account Code Entry
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Not assigned
Valid Entries
Assigned, not assigned
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Account→Toggle LED On/Off or Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
Procedure: Forced Account Code Entry
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Forced Account Code Entry.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Forced Account Code:
Enter extensions
Backspace
Exit
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 5.
On = forced account code entry is
assigned to extension.
Off = forced account code entry is not
assigned to extension.
Delete
Page 3-97
Enter
Assign or remove the forced account code entry from the extension entered in
Step 3.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
forced account code entry from additional extensions by repeating Steps 3
and 4.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Microphone Operation
Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except
QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the
speakerphone to conduct conversations.
NOTE:
The microphone cannot be disabled on analog multiline telephones or on
MLX telephones used as QCC operator positions.
Summary: Microphone Operation
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Factory Setting
Enabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Page 3-98
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Mic Disable→Toggle LED On/Off or
Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
3
Procedure: Microphone Operation
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Microphone Disable.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
Microphone Disable:
Enter extension
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Page 3-99
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = microphone operation is
assigned to extension.
Off = microphone operation is not
assigned to extension.
Assign or remove microphone operation from the extension
entered in Step 4.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
microphone operation from additional
extensions by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Authorization Codes
3
The Authorization Code feature allows you to pick up someone else’s telephone,
enter your authorization code, and complete a call with the restrictions that apply
to your own telephone (home extension). This includes toll restrictions, outward
restriction, FRL, Allowed Lists, Disallowed Lists, Forced Account Code Entry
(FACE), Night Service Exclusion List, and Dial Access to Pools.
Use this procedure to assign or remove an authorization code to an extension.
The authorization code can range from 2 to 11 characters (0 - 9, *) and must be
unique for each extension. An authorization code cannot begin with an “ *.”
If you are assigning authorization codes for a group of sequential extensions,
begin programming the lowest extension number to take advantage of the Next
screen key (see “Standard Procedures”).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-100
3
Summary: Authorization Codes
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6h, Authorization Codes
Factory Setting
Not assigned
Valid Entries
2–11 characters (0–9, *)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Auth Code→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Dial authorization
code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type ext. no. → →Type authorization
code→→→
3
Procedure: Authorization Codes
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Select Authorization Code.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Exit
Page 3-101
Delay Frwd
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension.
Authorization Code:
Enter extension
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current authorization code (xxxxxxxxxxx)
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4
Extension xxxx:
Enter Authorization Code
(2-11 digits, 0-9, *)
xxxxxxxxxxx
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!P
Dial or type the authorization code:
Enter the Authorization Code.
Extension xxxx:
Enter Authorization Code
(2-11 digits, 0-9, *)
xxxxxxxxxxx
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Use backspace to delete the last digit
entered.
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Select Next to save your entry and assign an authorization code
to the next extension in a sequence. Return to Step 6.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-102
3
Remote Call Forwarding
Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability,
which allows users to forward calls to an outside number.
If a telephone with Remote Call Forwarding has one or more personal lines
assigned, that telephone can be assigned as the principal user, and calls received
on that line are forwarded to outside numbers. See “Principal User of Personal
Line.”
NOTE:
This feature is not recommended unless you have ground-start trunks. See
“Disconnect Signaling Reliability” and “Hold Disconnect Interval.”
Summary: Remote Call Forwarding
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Disallowed
Valid Entries
Disallowed, allowed
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Remote Frwd→Toggle LED On/Off or
Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-103
3
Procedure: Remote Call Forwarding
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Remote Call Forward.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Specify the extension.
Remote Call Forward:
Enter extension
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = remote call forwarding is
assigned to extension
Off = remote call forwarding is not
assigned to extension
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-104
Assign or remove remote call forwarding from the extension entered in Step 4.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may assign or remove remote call
forwarding from additional extensions
by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Delayed Call Forwarding
Delayed Call Forwarding allows a user to answer or screen a call arriving at an
extension before the call is forwarded through Call Forwarding, Remote Call
Forwarding, or Follow Me. The forwarding delay is the number of rings before the
call is forwarded. This delay can range from 0 to 9 rings. If the forwarding delay is
set to 0, the call is forwarded immediately. Delayed Call Forwarding is available
only in Release 4.0 and later.
NOTE:
When Do Not Disturb is activated at an extension, it overrides Delayed Call
Forwarding and the call is forwarded immediately.
Use this procedure to assign or remove Delayed Call Forwarding from an
extension. If you are assigning Delayed Call Forwarding to a group of sequential
extensions, begin by programming the lowest extension number to take
advantage of the Next screen key (see “Standard Procedures”).
Summary: Delayed Call Forwarding
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
0 rings
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Valid Entries
0 - 9 rings
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-105
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Delay Frwd→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of delay
rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type ext. no. → →! +P →Type no.
of delay rings→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-106
3
Procedure: Delayed Call Forwarding
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Authorization Code.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Specify the extension.
Delay Frwd:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-107
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of delay rings (x).
xxxx = extension entered in Step 4
Extension xxxx:
Enter Delay Rings (0-9)
x
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop or
Backspace.
!P
Enter the number of delay rings.
Extension xxxx:
Enter Delay Rings (0-9)
Ã
Dial or type the number of delay rings:
x
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
You may use backspace to delete
the last digit entered.
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
If you select Next to assign a forwarding
delay to the next extension in a
sequence, repeat Steps 6 and 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Use this procedure to enable or disable trunk-to-trunk transfer at an extension.
When trunk-to-trunk transfer is disabled, users cannot transfer an outside call to
an outside line.
NOTE:
A single-line set can never perform a trunk-to-trunk transfer.
Summary: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-108
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→TrkTransfer→Toggle LED
On/Off or Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→U→→Toggle letter R On/Off or Type
ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More twice.
UU
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
3
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-109
Additional Information
PC
Select Trunk to Trunk Transfer.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
TrkTransfer
_
HotLine
Exit
Specify the extension.
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Trunk to Trunk Transfer:
Enter extension
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = trunk-to-trunk transfer is enabled.
Off = trunk-to-trunk transfer is disabled.
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Assign or remove trunk-to-trunk transfer from the extension entered in Step 4.
Select Enter to allow trunk-to-trunk transfer or
Delete to disallow trunk-to-trunk transfer.
You may continue to assign or remove
trunk-to-trunk transfer from additional
extensions by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
HotLine
Use this procedure to enable or disable the HotLine feature on a single-line
telephone set or device.
3
Summary: HotLine
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Yes, No
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Copy Option
Page 3-110
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→HotLine→Enter HotLine
extension→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → U → →Type HotLine
extension→→→
3
Procedure: HotLine
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the third screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More twice.
UU
Select HotLine.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
TrkTransfer
HotLine
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-111
Additional Information
Specify the extension.
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
HotLine Extensions:
Enter extensions
Backspace
Exit
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = HotLine is enabled.
Off = HotLine is disabled.
Delete
PC
Enter
Assign or remove HotLine from the extension entered in Step 4.
Select Enter to allow HotLine operation or
Delete to disallow HotLine operation.
You may continue to assign or remove
HotLine operation from additional extensions by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Primary Cover Ring Delay
The Primary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval
programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Use this procedure to specify the following:
■
The delay before a Primary Cover button programmed for Delay Ring
begins to ring audibly
■
The delay in addition to the Group Coverage Ring Delay before sending
calls to Group Coverage when the sender has Primary or Secondary
Coverage and any receiver is available
The Primary Cover Ring Delay is programmed for each sender’s extension.
Summary: Primary Cover Ring Delay
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-112
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
2 rings
Valid Entries
1-6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→Cover
Delay→Primary→Dial sender’s extension→Enter
→Dial no. of rings (1-6)→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → U → → →Type sender’s
extension→→Type no. of rings (1-6)→→
Secondary Cover Ring Delay
3
The Primary Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval
programmed on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Use this procedure to specify the delay in addition to the fixed Secondary
Coverage Delay Interval (two rings) before a Secondary Cover button
programmed for Delay Ring begins to ring audibly.
The Secondary Cover Ring Delay is programmed for each sender’s extension.
Summary: Primary Cover Ring Delay
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
2 rings
Valid Entries
1–6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Telephone Features
Page 3-113
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→Cover
Delay→Secondary→Dial sender’s extension→Enter
→Dial no. of rings (1–6)→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → U → → →Type sender’s
extension→→Type no. of rings (1–6)→→
Group Coverage Ring Delay
3
The Group Cover Ring Delay option replaces the Delay Ring Interval programmed
on a systemwide basis in releases prior to Release 4.1.
Use this procedure to specify the following
■
The number of rings before sending calls to Group Coverage when the
sender does not have Primary or Secondary Coverage or the receivers are
not available, and the Group Coverage receiver is either a Calling Group
only or the QCC queue only (no Group Cover buttons on multiline
telephones).
■
The number of rings in addition to the Primary Cover Ring delay before
sending calls to Group Coverage when the sender has Primary or
Secondary Coverage and the receivers are available.
The Group Coverage Ring Delay is programmed for each sender’s extension.
Summary: Group Coverage Ring Delay
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
3 rings
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Valid Entries
1–9 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Page 3-114
3
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→Cover Delay→Group→Dial
sender’s extension→Enter
→Dial no. of rings (1–9)→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → U → → →Type sender’s
extension→→Type no. of rings (1–9)→→
Optional Group Features
3
The procedures in this section describe how to program the following optional
features:
■
All Pickup Groups
■
Group Paging
■
Group Coverage Member Assignments
■
Group Coverage Delay Interval (Release 4.0 and earlier)
■
Group Calling Member Assignments
■
Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments
3
Call Pickup Groups
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a call pickup group. A
call pickup group consists of telephone users who can answer each others’ calls
by pressing a button or by dialing a code.
NOTE:
A maximum of 30 call pickup groups, with a maximum of 15 extensions per
group, are allowed.
An extension can belong to only one group.
Before reassigning an extension to a new group, you must remove it from
its current group.
Summary: Call Pickup Groups
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7a, Call Pickup Groups
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 3-115
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Call pickup group number, extension number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Call Pickup→Dial pickup group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type pickup group no. → →Type ext.
no.→→→
Procedure: Call Pickup Groups
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Call Pickup.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoicesSignl
Enter the number of the call pickup group (nn = 1 to 30).
Call Pickup Groups:
Enter group number (1-30)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-116
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension.
Call Pickup Group
xx:
xx = number entered in Step 3
Enter extensions
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 7.
On = extension is included in pickup group
Off = extension is not included in pickup
group
Assign or remove the extension from the call pickup group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
extensions from the call pickup group by
repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Assign or remove extensions for another call pickup group or go to Step 8.
Select Next
Return to Step 5 to continue programming. The next extension will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Paging
3
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a paging group. A
paging group consists of telephone users who hear common announcements
over the telephone speakerphone. Only MLX telephones and analog multiline
telephones with speakerphones can be members of a paging group.
A maximum of six paging groups with a maximum of 10 extensions per group is
allowed. A seventh paging group, called the Page All group, is not limited and
includes all telephones connected to the system. Extensions cannot be added to
or removed from the Page All group.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 3-117
3
Summary: Group Paging
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7b, Group Paging
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Group Page→Dial paging group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type paging group no. → →Type ext.
no.→→→
3
Procedure: Group Paging
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoicesSignl
Press More.
U
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-118
Additional Information
PC
Select Group Page.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Group Cover
Mic Disable
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Enter the extension number of the paging group.
Group Page:
Enter extension number
of group
See “System Renumbering” in Chapter
5 for the factory setting for extension
numbers assigned to paging groups.
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the extension.
Group Page xxxx:
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
Enter extensions
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 9.
On = extension is included in paging group
Off = extension is not included in paging group
Assign or remove the extension from the paging group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
extensions from the paging group by
repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-119
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the extension to another paging group
or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6 to continue programming. The next paging group will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Coverage Member Assignments
3
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a coverage group. A
coverage group is a group of senders. Coverage is an arrangement by which calls
from a group of senders are redirected to one or more receivers.
NOTE:
This procedure assigns senders. Before you begin, make certain that the
receivers for the coverage group are also programmed. Receivers can be
assigned through individual or centralized telephone programming. You
can also use the Integrated Solution II/III feature, Integrated Administration,
to assign coverage receivers. See Chapter , ‘‘Centralized Telephone
Programming’’ for information about the appropriate centralized
programming procedure.
A maximum of 30 coverage groups are allowed, each with an unlimited number of
members. Up to eight receivers can be assigned per coverage group.
An extension can be a sender in only one group; it can be a receiver for more than
one coverage group. A calling group can be assigned as a receiver for a coverage
group (see ‘‘Group Coverage Receiver’’). In Hybrid/PBX mode only, the QCC
queue can be a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups. See “QCC Operator to
Receive Calls.”
If the sender’s extension has one or more personal lines assigned, the sender can
be assigned as the principal user so that calls received on the personal line are
sent to receivers programmed for Individual or Group Coverage. See “Principal
User for Personal Line.”
To reassign an extension to a new coverage group, just make the assignment; the
extension is automatically removed from its old group.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 3-120
Summary: Group Coverage Member
Assignments
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Group Cover→Dial group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type group no. →→ Type ext.
no.→→→
Procedure: Group Coverage Member
Assignments
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoicesSignl
Press More.
U
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-121
Additional Information
PC
Select Group Coverage.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Grp Calling
Remote Frwd
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Enter the number of the coverage group (nn = 1 to 30).
Group Coverage:
Enter group number(1-30)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the extension.
Group Cover xx Senders
xx = number entered in Step 4
Enter extensions
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 8.
On = extension is sender in coverage
group
Off = extension is not sender in coverage
group
Assign or remove the extension from the coverage group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
extensions from the coverage group by
repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-122
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the extension to another coverage group or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6 to continue programming. The next coverage group will be
displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Coverage Delay Interval
3
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before a call is sent to group
coverage receivers.
NOTE:
This setting is for Release 4.0 and earlier systems. Use Group Coverage
Ring Delay for Release 4.1 and later systems.
Summary: Group Coverage Delay Interval
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→Cover Delay→Drop→Enter→Dial the
number of rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→! + 0→Type the number of
rings→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 3-123
Procedure: Group Coverage Delay Interval
Console/Display Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Press More.
U
Select Coverage Delay.
Options:
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecNT Timer
Exit
Erase the current number of rings (x).
Coverage Delay:
Enter number rings (1-9)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter the number of rings (n = 1 to 9).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
!0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Group Calling Member Assignments
Page 3-124
3
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension to or from a calling group. A
calling group is used to direct calls to a group of people who all handle the same
type of call. A single extension number is assigned to the group and is used by
both inside and outside callers to reach the group.
To reassign an extension to a new calling group, you must remove it from its old
group before programming the new assignment.
NOTE:
If a linear hunting pattern is indicated on the back of the system planning
form (6d), be sure to assign extensions to the group in the exact order that
they are shown on the form. The system searches for an available member
in the order in which you assign the extensions to the group.
A maximum of 32 calling groups with a maximum of 20 extensions per
group is allowed.
An extension can belong to only one calling group. A QCC cannot be a
member of a calling group. A delay announcement device should not be
programmed as a calling group member.The extension status feature must
be set to the Calling Group or CMS mode before you assign members to
the group. See “Extension Status.”
Summary: Group Calling Member Assignments 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Members→Dial calling
group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type ext. no.→→→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-125
Procedure: Group Calling Member Assignments 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoicesSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Members.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-126
Additional Information
PC
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
See “System Renumbering” in Chapter
for the factory setting for extension
numbers assigned to calling groups.
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension.
Group Calling xxxx:
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Enter group members
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 9.
On = extension is a member of the calling group.
Off = extension is not a member of the calling
group.
Assign or remove the extension from the calling group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
extensions from the calling group by
repeating Steps 7 and 8.
Continue to assign the extension to another calling group or go to Step 10.
Select Next
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 3-127
Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments 3
Use this procedure to assign or remove lines, trunks, or pools (Hybrid/PBX only)
that ring directly into a calling group.
Incoming calls on each line/trunk or pool can be directed to only one calling group.
To reassign a line/trunk or pool to a new calling group, you must remove it from its
old group before making the new assignment.
Summary: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool
Assignments
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Line, trunk, or pool number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Line/Pool→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type line/trunk no.→→→→
Procedure: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool
Assignments
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-128
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Line/Pool.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Enter the extension of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-129
Additional Information
PC
Enter the line/trunk or pool number.
Group Calling xxxx:
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Enter line/pool number
nnnn
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Pool number [nn]
Line/Trunk number [nnnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Assign or remove the line/trunk or pool from the calling group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
lines/trunks or pools from the calling
group by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
Continue to assign the line/trunk or pool to another calling group
or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Optional Group Calling Features
3
This section includes programming procedures for the following optional group
calling features:
■
Hunt Type
■
Group Calling Delay Announcements
■
Group Coverage Receiver
■
Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds
■
Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator
■
Group Calling Calls-in-Queue Alarm Thresholds
■
Group Calling External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm
■
Group Type
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-130
3
Hunt Type
Use this procedure to assign one of the following hunt-type patterns to calling
groups:
■
Circular Hunting Pattern. The system distributes calls to group members
by hunting in a circular pattern for the first available extension after the one
that received the last call to the group.
■
Linear Hunting Pattern. The system searches for an available group
member in the order in which the extensions were assigned to the calling
group.
■
Most Idle Hunting Pattern. The system searches for the available
member that is “most idle.” This distribution scheme can be more equitable
than the circular hunting pattern.
3
Summary: Hunt Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Circular hunting pattern
Valid Entries
Circular, Linear, Most Idle
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Hunt Type→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Circular, Linear, or Most
Idle→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext. no.
→→ or or →→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-131
3
Procedure: Hunt Type
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Hunt Type.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
DelayAnnce
Queue Alarm
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-132
Additional Information
PC
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the hunt pattern.
Group Calling xxxx:
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
Circular
Linear
Next
Select Circular or
Linear or.
Enter
Most Idle
Most Idle
Exit
Continue to assign a hunt pattern to another calling group
or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-133
Group Calling Delay Announcements
3
Use this procedure to designate the announcement devices used to play
messages to callers while they are waiting in the queue.
As of Release 5.0, 10 primary and one secondary announcement devices can be
designated for each calling group; however, more than one calling group can use
the same announcement device. The extensions to which the delay
announcement devices are connected should not be programmed as calling
group members.
If the extension jack or MFM was previously programmed as a regular extension,
you must remove all line/trunk button assignments before you designate the
extension jack as a delay announcement device.
Summary: Group Calling Delay Announcements 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
No delay announcement devices are assigned
Valid Entries
Primary Announcements, Secondary Announcement
Inspect
Yes (for primary announcements)
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Primary Announcements
or Secondary Announcement→Enter Extension number of
Announcent device→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→ or →Type ext. no. of announcement
device→→→
Procedure: Group Calling Delay Announcements 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-134
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Delay Announcement.
Group Calling:
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
GrpCoverage
Xtnl Alert
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
GrpCall Delay Announce:
Enter extension number
of Group
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Enter an extension.”
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-135
Additional Information
PC
Select Primary Announcements or Secondary Announcement.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one
Primary Announcements
Secondary Announcement
Announcement Interval
Repeat Announcement
Exit
Enter the extension number of the announcement device.
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter extension numbers
of XXXXXXX Announcements
announcement device
XXXXXXX = Primary or Second
nnnn
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
SP: “Enter an extension.”
Ã
Assign or remove a delay announcement device extension
from the calling group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
delay announcement device extensions
from the calling group by repeating
Steps 5 through 8.
Continue to assign the delay announcement device extension
to another calling group or go to Step 11.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The next calling group will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Calling Announcement Interval
3
Use this procedure to set the delay before the secondary announcement is played
and/or repeated.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-136
Summary: Group Calling Announcement Interval3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
0-900 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial
Calling Group ext. no.→Announcement Interval→Enter
the Announcement Interval →Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type the Calling Group ext.
no.→→Type the Announcement Interval→
→→
Procedure: Group Calling Announcement
Interval
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-137
Additional Information
PC
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Delay Announcement.
Group Calling:
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
GrpCoverage
Xtnl Alert
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
GrpCall Delay Announce:
Enter extension number
of Group
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
SP: ‘Enter an extension.”
Select Announcement Interval.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one:
Primary Announcements
Secondary Announcement
Announcement Interval
Repeat Announcement
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-138
Additional Information
PC
Enter the Announcement delay interval.
nnn =announcement delay interval
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter interval between
Announcements (0-900 sec)
nnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
Enter the announcement delay interval.
Assign announcement delay interval to the calling group.
Select Enter
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Calling Repeat Announcement
3
Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the
Announcement Interval.
Summary: Group Calling Repeat Announcement 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
No repeat
Valid Entries
Yes, No
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Repeat
Announcement→Yes or No→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → → →Type calling group ext. no.
→ or →→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-139
Procedure: Group Calling Repeat Announcement 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Delay Announcement.
Group Calling:
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
GrpCoverage
Xtnl Alert
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-140
Additional Information
PC
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
GrpCall Delay Announce:
Enter extension number
of Group
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
SP: ‘Enter an extension.”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Repeat annoucement.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one:
Primary Announcements
Secondary Announcement
Announcement Interval
Repeat Announcement
Exit
Enter the Yes or No.
Group Calling xxxx:
xxxx =Calling Group.
Repeat Secondary
Announcement
Yes
No
Exit
Next
Enter
Assign repeat announcement option for the calling group.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Group Coverage Receiver
3
Use this procedure to assign or remove a calling group as a receiver for a
coverage group.
Calling group member assignments must be made before you assign the group as
a receiver for a coverage group.
NOTE:
Integrated Administration uses calling group 30 as the default group to
cover AUDIX Voice Power.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-141
3
Summary: Group Coverage Receiver
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Group numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Grp Coverage→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial coverage group
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext. no. →Type
coverage group no.→→→→
3
Procedure: Group Coverage Receiver
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
_
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-142
Additional Information
PC
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Exit
Auth Code
Delay Frwd
Select Group Coverage.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
Enter the extension number of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter the coverage group for which you want to assign the calling group as
receiver (nn = 1 to 30).
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter coverage group
number (1-30)
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
xxx = number entered in Step 5
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-143
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the coverage group as the receiver for the calling group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
coverage groups as the receiver for the calling
group by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
Continue to assign the coverage group as the receiver for another
calling group or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7 to continue programming. The
next calling group will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds
3
Use this procedure to designate either another calling group or the QCC queue
(Hybrid/PBX only) to receive overflow calls. Call overflow occurs either when the
number of calls waiting in the queue for a calling group is equal to or greater than
the programmed threshold (overflow threshold) or when the time that a call has
spent in the queue exceeds the programmed timeout value (overflow threshold
time).
If the overflow threshold time is set to 0 seconds (factory setting), then overflow by
time is turned off.
Overflow coverage can be provided only by calling groups or the QCC queue
(Hybrid/PBX only), not by individual extensions.
A calling group or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only) can provide overflow
coverage for more than one calling group; however, which group’s calls go to an
available member in the overflow calling group is unpredictable.
The factory-set extension number for the QCC Listed Directory Number is 800.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-144
Summary: Group Calling Overflow and
Thresholds
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Overflow coverage: none
Threshold: 1 call
Timeout: 0 sec
Valid Entries
Overflow coverage: Backup extension number
Threshold: 1 to 99 calls
Timeout: 0 to 900 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Overflow→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Number Based Overflow→Drop→Dial no. of
calls→Enter→Time Based Overflow→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type backup ext. no.→→→! +
0 →Type no. of call→ → → ! + 0→ Type no. of
seconds→→→→
Procedure: Group Calling Overflow and
Thresholds
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-145
Additional Information
Press More.
Select Overflow.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow_
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the extension of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
PC
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the extension of the calling group or the QCC Listed Directory Number
you want to assign for overflow and/or timeout backup coverage.
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter cover overflow
group number or QCC LDN
nnnn
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Additional Information
Erase the current extension of the calling group or the
QCC Listed Directory Number ( xxxx) providing coverage, if assigned.
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter cover overflow
group number or QCC LDN
nnnn
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Page 3-146
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Assign or remove the group or directory as overflow backup coverage.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
groups or directories as overflow backup coverage by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
If you do not want to change the current number
of calls or timeout value, you have finished this
procedure.
Go to Step 18.
If you do not want to change the current number
of calls, but want to change the timeout value, go
to Step 14.
Select Number Based Overflow.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one
Number Based Overflow
Time Based Overflow
Exit
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-147
Additional Information
Backspace
Exit
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Press Drop.
Save your entry.
Select Time Based Overflow.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one
Number Based Overflow
Time Based Overflow
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Exit
Erase the current timeout (xxx).
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter max timeout (sec)
before overflow (0-900)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the maximum time (in seconds) in the queue before coverage
(xxx = 0 to 900).
Dial or type [xxx].
+0
Ã
Select Enter.
!
Enter the number of calls in the queue before coverage (nn = 1 to 99).
Dial or type [nn].
PC
Erase the current number of calls (nn).
Group Calling xxxx:
Assign number of calls
before overflow (1-99)
nn
Issue 1
June 1997
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-148
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator
3
Use this procedure to designate the extension that will receive message-waiting
indications (MWIs) for the calling group.
Only one extension can be designated as a message-waiting receiver for each
calling group; however, more than one calling group can use the same
message-waiting receiver. The extension assigned as a message-waiting receiver
does not have to be a member of the calling group.
Message-waiting indications cannot be sent to the extension assigned to the
group unless this option is programmed. The message-waiting receiver cannot
distinguish between messages left for the calling group and personal messages.
Summary: Group Calling Message-Waiting
Indicator
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
No message-waiting receiver assigned
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Message→Dial calling
group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext. no. for MWI
receiver→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type ext. no. for MWI receiver→
→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-149
Procedure: Group Calling Message-Waiting
Indicator
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
PC
Select Message-Waiting Receiver.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-150
Additional Information
PC
Enter the extension of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current extension (nnnn).
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter message waiting
extension
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Press Drop.
!
+0
Specify the extension.
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Assign the extension as the receiver for the calling group.
Select Enter or
Next
Use Next to assign an extension as receiver for
the next calling group. Return to Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds 3
Use this procedure to specify the number of calls that wait in the calling group
queue before group members are notified with either an external alert (an external
alert is turned on when the third threshold is met) or a light on the telephone.
Group members are notified when the number of calls waiting in the queue is
equal to or greater than the programmed thresholds as follows:
■
First Threshold, flashing light
■
Second Threshold, winking light
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-151
Third Threshold, solid light
NOTE:
To configure only one threshold, set all thresholds to the same number.
The LED states will be off and on. To configure only two thresholds, set two
of the thresholds to be the same number, which will have LED states off,
flash, and on.
Summary: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Thresholds
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Settings
1 call, for all Thresholds
Valid Entries
1 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Queue Alarm→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Alarm Threshold 1 or
Alarm Threshold 2 or Alarm Threshold 3→Drop→Dial
no. of calls→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→→Type calling group ext.
no.→→! + 0→ or or →Type no. of
calls→→→
Procedure: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Thresholds
3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-152
Additional Information
Press More.
Select Queue Alarm.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the extension of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-153
Additional Information
PC
Select the Threshold number.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select one:
Alarm Threshold 1
Alarm Threshold 2
Alarm Threshold 3
Exit
Erase the current number of calls (nn).
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter number calls
before alarm n (1-99)
nn
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
n = number of alarm threshold (1, 2, or 3)
nn = calls in queue before alarm is
triggered.
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Next
Enter
+0
Enter the number of calls to be in the queue before
the alarm threshold notification (nn = 1 to 99).
Ã
Dial or type[nn].
!
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
Use Next program the next calling group. Return
to Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Group Calling External Alert for Calls-In-Queue
Alarm
3
Use this procedure to designate the external alert device used to notify calling
group members when the number of calls in the queue reaches the programmed
Threshold 3.
Only one external alert device can be designated for each calling group. Since the
external alert signal is continuous, it is recommended that only light-type external
alert devices be designated for the Calls-in-Queue alarm.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-154
Summary: Group Calling External Alert for
Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode.
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
3
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Xtnl Alert→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Drop→Dial ext. no. for
alert→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→! + 0→Type ext. no. for
alert→→→
Procedure: Group Calling External Alert for
Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions_
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-155
Additional Information
Select External Alert.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert_
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
PC
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the extension of the calling group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current external alert extension (nnnn) if assigned.
Group Calling xxxx:
Enter external alert
extension
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Ã
Next
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
Press Drop.
!
+0
Specify the extension.
If no DSS is attached: SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-156
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
or
Next.
Use Next to program the next calling group.
Return to Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Group Type
Use this procedure to determine whether or not the system automatically logs in
members of a calling group after a power failure. This setting also determines the
type of voice messaging interface when the calling group is used to connect voice
messaging or automated attendant applications. The settings are listed below.
■
Automatic Log Out. Used for calling groups to specify that the system
does not automatically log in calling group members after a power failure.
Calling group members must manually log themselves into the group.
■
Automatic Log In. Used for calling groups that consist of fax machines or
data stations (also called data hunt groups) to specify that the system
automatically logs in calling group members after a power failure. This
setting can also be used for calling groups consisting of telephones.
■
Integrated VMI. Used when a voice messaging system that requires
special signaling for integrated operation (for example, AUDIX Voice
Power, IS II/III, or MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System) is connected
to one or more extension jacks assigned to a calling group. The system
automatically logs in the group members after a power failure.
■
Generic VM. Used when a voice messaging system that does not need
special signaling is connected to one or more extension jacks assigned to a
calling group. The system automatically logs in the group members after a
power failure.
NOTE:
In Release 3.1 and later, any port programmed as a VMI port is
programmed with:
■
outward restriction on
■
a default FRL of 0 (the most restrictive)
■
a default Disallowed List (List 7) that includes the numbers frequently
associated with fraud
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Page 3-157
If the system manager changes a VMI port to non-VMI port, the restrictions are
not turned off. To remove restrictions, the system manager must change them
thorough system programming.
3
Summary: Group Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Automatic Log Out
Valid Entries
Automatic log in, Automatic log out, Integrated VMI, Generic
VMI
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→More→Group→Type Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Specify login
type→Enter→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →U →Type calling group ext.
no→Specify login type→→→→
3
Procedure: Group Type
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Extensions menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Optional Group Calling Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-158
Additional Information
Press More.
Go to the second screen of the Group Calling menu.
Group Calling:
>
Make a selection
Hunt Type
Queue Alarm
DelayAnnce
Xtnl Alert
GrpCoverage
Overflow
Message
Members
Exit
Line/Pool
U
Select Group Calling.
Extensions:
Make a selection
Ext Status
ARS Restrct
Group Page
Mic Disable
Group Cover
Remote Frwd
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Exit
Delay Frwd
PC
Go to the second screen of the Extensions menu.
Extensions:
>
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
RestrctCopy
Line Copy
Account
Dial OutCd
BIS/HFAI
Restriction
Call Pickup
Exit
VoiceSignl
Issue 1
June 1997
Press More.
U
Select Group Type.
Group Calling:
Make a selection
Group Type
Exit
Enter the extension of the group.
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-159
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the type of login for the group that occurs after a power failure.
Group Calling xxxx:
Select One
Auto Login
Auto Logout
Integ VMI
Generic VMI
Next
Exit
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 6
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
Use Next program the next calling group. Return
to Step 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
System Features
3
This section contains programming instructions for the optional system features
that affect all or most system users and includes the following:
■
Transfer Return Time
■
One-Touch Transfer/Hold
■
Transfer Audible
■
Type of Transfer
■
Camp-On Return Time
■
Call Park Return Time
■
Delay Ring Interval
■
Automatic Callback Interval
■
Extension Status
■
SMDR Language
■
SMDR Call Report Format
■
SMDR Call Length
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-160
■
SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report
■
SMDR Account Code Format
■
Inside Dial Tone
■
Reminder Service Cancel
■
Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers
■
Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode
■
Recall Timer
■
Allowed Lists
■
Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
■
Disallowed Lists
■
Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones
3
Transfer Return Time
Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a
call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting
of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
NOTE:
The transfer return time should not be set to 0 in a system with single-line
telephones.
The transfer return time should not be set to 0 in a system with single-line
telephones.
Summary: Transfer Return Time
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
4 rings (Integrated Administration: 6 rings)
Valid Entries
0 to9 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Return Time→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
rings→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-161
Procedure: Transfer Return Time
Console Display/Instructions
PC
_
Select Transfer.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Additional Information
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
Select Return Time.
Transfer
Make a selection
Return Time
One Touch
Audible
Type
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-162
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of rings (x).
Transfer Return:
Enter number rings (0-9)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the number of rings before a transferred call is returned to the originator
(n = 0 to 9).
Use 0 to indicate that calls are not returned.
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold
3
Use this procedure to assign the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold feature.
One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by
pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension. If the One-Touch Transfer
feature is assigned, you must also specify whether the transfer completion is
manual (the user has to press another button to complete the transfer) or
automatic (the transfer is completed automatically).
The One-Touch Transfer feature is not available on single-line telephones.
One-Touch Hold applies to incoming central office calls only. When the user
presses an Auto Dial or DSS button to initiate a transfer, the outside caller is put
on hold. The system automatically selects an intercom facility and dials the
transfer destination. There is no transfer return function with this method.
Consequently, if the transfer destination does not answer or is busy, the user who
initiates the transfer must notify the outside caller, or the outside caller will remain
on hold.
One-Touch Hold is the factory setting in Behind Switch mode only.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-163
3
Summary: One-Touch Transfer/Hold
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
One-Touch Transfer, automatic completion (One-Touch Hold
is the factory setting in Behind Switch mode.)
Valid Entries
Transfer, Hold
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program One-Touch Transfer:
Options→Transfer→One
Touch→Transfer→Enter→Manual or
Automatic→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program One-Touch Hold:
Options→Transfer→One
Touch→Hold→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program One-Touch Transfer:
→→→→→ or →→→
To program One-Touch Hold:
→→→→→→
Procedure: One-Touch Transfer/Hold
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-164
Additional Information
Select One Touch.
Transfer
Make a selection
Return Time
One Touch
Audible
Type
Exit
PC
Select Transfer.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
Specify transfer or hold.
One Touch Call Handling:
Select One
Transfer
Hold
Exit
Enter
Select Transfer or
Hold.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you selected Transfer, continue with Step 6.
If you selected Hold, you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 8.
Specify manual or automatic transfer completion.
Transfer Completion:
Select one
Manual
Automatic
Exit
Enter
Select Manual or
Automatic.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-165
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Transfer Audible
Use this procedure to specify whether an outside caller hears ringing (also called
ringback) or Music on Hold while being transferred. Inside callers always hear
ringback during a transfer.
NOTE:
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay
license fees to a third party (such as the American Society of Composers,
Artists, and Producers or Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold
requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies.
3
Summary: Transfer Audible
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Music on Hold
Valid Entries
Music on Hold, Ringback
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Audible→Music on Hold or
Ringback→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-166
3
Procedure: Transfer Audible
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select Transfer.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Select Transfer Audible.
Transfer
Make a selection
Return Time
One Touch
Audible
Type
Exit
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Specify whether the outside caller hears music or
ringing while being transferred.
Transfer Audible:
Select one
Music On Hold
Ringback
Exit
Enter
Select Music On Hold or
Ringback.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-167
3
Type of Transfer
Use this procedure to specify whether the system automatically selects an
Intercom or System Access Ring or Voice button when the Transfer button or an
Auto Dial or DSS button (for One-Touch Transfer) is pressed.
3
Summary: Type of Transfer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Ring button (Intercom or System Access) is automatically
selected
Valid Entries
Voice Announce, Ring
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Type→Voice Announce or
Ring→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
3
Procedure: Type of Transfer
Console Display/Instructions
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Select Transfer.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-168
Additional Information
Select Transfer Type.
Transfer
Make a selection
Return Time
One Touch
Audible
Type
Exit
PC
Specify whether a voice or ring button is automatically selected.
Type of Transfer:
Select one
Voice Announce
Ring
Exit
Select Voice Announce or
Ring.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Camp-On Return Time
Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a camped-on call (a
call transferred to a busy telephone with the Camp-On feature) is returned to the
originator.
Summary Camp-On Return Time:
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6f, System Features
Factory Setting
90 seconds
Valid Entries
30 to 300 seconds, in 10-second increments
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→CampOn→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
PC Procedure
Page 3-169
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
3
Procedure: Camp-On Return Time
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select Camp-On.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Erase the current number of seconds (xxx).
Camp On:
Enter number of seconds
(30-300), increments 10)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the number of seconds before a camped-on call returns
to the originator (nnn = 30 to 300).
Ã
Dial or type [nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Call Park Return Time
3
Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with
the Park feature is returned to the originator.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-170
3
Summary: Call Park Return Time
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
180 seconds
Valid Entries
30 to 300 seconds, in 10-second increments
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→CallParkRtn→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
Procedure: Call Park Return Time
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
_
Select Call Park Return.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-171
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of seconds (xxx).
Call Park Return Time:
Enter time before return
(30-300 sec increment 10)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
!
Enter the number of seconds before a parked call returns to the originator
(nnn = 30 to 300).
Ã
Dial or type [nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
3
Delay Ring Interval
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings for the delay ring interval. The
delay ring interval is applied when a primary, secondary, or group cover button is
set to delayed ring.
NOTE:
This setting is for Release 4.0 and earlier systems. Use Primary Cover Ring
Delay and Secondary Cover Ring Delay for Release 4.1 and later systems.
Summary: Delay Ring Interval
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
2 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-172
Console Procedure Options→Delay Ring→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of rings→→
3
Procedure: Delay Ring Interval
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select Delay Ring.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Erase the current number of rings (x).
Delay Ring:
Enter number rings (1-6)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the number of rings for the delay ring interval (n = 1 to 6).
Dial or type [n].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-173
3
Automatic Callback Interval
Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the
originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request.
Summary: Automatic Callback Interval
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
3 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Callback→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of rings→→
Procedure: Automatic Callback Interval
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
_
Select Automatic Callback Interval.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
_
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-174
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of rings (x).
Automatic Callback:
Enter number callback
rings (1-6)
x
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
!
Enter the number of rings before the system cancels the automatic callback
request (n = 1 to 6).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
3
Extension Status
Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in
Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode.
The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or
DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
In Hotel mode, telephones are restricted from making calls in Extension Status
states 1 and 2 (ES1 and ES2). In Group Calling/CMS mode, ES states reflect
member or agent status without restricting the telephones. In the Group
Calling/CMS mode, the Extension Status feature is used by the agents to log in
and out, and by the supervisor to see agent status.
3
Summary: Extension Status
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Group Calling/CMS mode
Valid Entries
Group Calling/CMS mode, Hotel mode
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Copy Option
Page 3-175
No
Console Procedure Options→Ext Status→Hotel or
GrpCall/CMS→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
3
Procedure: Extension Status
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select Extension Status.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Specify the extension status mode.
Ext Status Button Type:
Select one
Hotel
GrpCall/CMS
Exit
Enter
Select Hotel or
GrpCall/CMS.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
SMDR Language
3
Use this procedure to change the language of the SMDR reports. It applies to
Releases 1.1, 2.0, 2.1 and 3.0 only. The default report language is the same as
that set for the system language. See “System Language.”
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
3
Page 3-176
3
Summary: SMDR Language
Programmable by. System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English (matches System Language setting)
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→SMDR→Select language→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
U
→→→Select language →→
3
Procedure: SMDR Language
Console Display/Instructions
_
Press More.
U
Select Language.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Select SMDR.
Language:
Make a selection
SystemLang
Extensions
SMDR
Printer
Exit
Program the system language first.
See “System Language.”
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
3
_
_
Specify the SMDR language.
SMDR Language:
Select one
English
French
Spanish
Select English,
French, or
Spanish.
_
Exit
Page 3-177
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
3
SMDR Call Report Format
Use this procedure to specify whether the SMDR call reports are printed in Basic
format or ISDN format. In ISDN format, automatic number identification (ANI) or
Caller ID information appears in the Calling Number field in place of IN (which
appears in the Basic report format). The call recording type for these calls is I in
ISDN format and C in Basic format.
ISDN format should be used only in conjunction with automatic number
identification (ANI) or Caller ID service subscription.
Summary: SMDR Call Report Format
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Basic format
Valid Entries
Basic, ISDN
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Format→Basic SMDR or
ISDNSMDR→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-178
3
Procedure: SMDR Call Report Format
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select SMDR.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
_
Select Call Report Format.
Station Message Record:
Make a selection
Format
Auth Code
Call Length
Talk Time
Call Report
New Page
Exit
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Specify a format for the SMDR reports.
SMDR Format:
Select one
Basic SMDR
ISDN SMDR
Exit
Enter
Select Basic SMDR or
ISDN SMDR.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-179
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
SMDR Call Length
Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded
on SMDR call reports.
NOTE:
If the majority of lines/trunks are PRI, the recommended call length is 1.
See Feature Reference for more information.
3
Summary: SMDR Call Length
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
40 seconds
Valid Entries
0 to 255 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Call Length→Drop →Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
seconds→→→
Procedure: SMDR Call Length
Console Display/Instructions
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
3
Additional Information
PC
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
_
Select Call Length.
Station Message Record:
Make a selection
Format
Auth Code
Call Length
Talk Time
Call Report
New Page
Exit
Page 3-180
Select SMDR.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
New Page inserts a page break in
the report.
Erase the current number of seconds (xxx).
SMDR Minimum Time:
Enter minimum call time
(0-255)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
+0
Enter the minimum number of seconds to elapse before calls are recorded on
the SMDR reports (nnn = 0 to 255).
Dial or type [nnn].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-181
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report
3
Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for
both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only.
Summary: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Incoming and outgoing
Valid Entries
In/Out, Out Only
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Call Report→In/Out or Out
Only→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Procedure: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-182
Console/Display Instructions
_
Select Call Report.
New Page inserts a page break in
Station Message Record:
Make a selection
Format
Auth Code
Call Length
Talk Time
Call Report
New Page
Exit
PC
Select SMDR.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Additional Information
the report.
Specify whether SMDR information is recorded for both incoming
and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only.
SMDR Call Report:
Select one
In/Out
Out Only
Exit
Select In/Out or
Out Only.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
SMDR Account Code Format
3
For calls made using an authorization code, SMDR can be programmed to have
either the “home extension” or the actual authorization codes recorded in the
Account Code field if no Account Code is entered. Account Code overrides the
Authorization Code entry in the SMDR record when both features are used.
Summary: SMDR Account Code Format
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-183
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6h, Authorization Codes
Factory Setting
Home Extension Number
Valid Entries
Home Extension Number, Authorization Code
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Auth Code→Home Extension Number or
Authorization Code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Procedure: SMDR Account Code Format
Console Display/Instructions
PC
_
Select SMDR.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Additional Information
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
_
Select Authorization Code.
Station Message Record:
Make a selection
Format
Auth Code
Call Length
Talk Time
Call Report
New Page
Exit
New Page inserts a page break in
the report.
_
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-184
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether the home extension number or the authorization code will be
recorded.
Account Code Format:
Select One
Home Extension Number
Auth Code
Authorization Code
Exit
Enter
Select Home Extension Number or
Authorization Code
Save your entry.
Press Enter.
3
SMDR Talk Time
In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call
record. The talk field is designed for the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter application
that is used to capture detailed information on incoming and outgoing voice and
data calls with a special emphasis on calling groups. The talk field contains the
talk-time duration—the amount of time (59:59 maximum) that a calling group
agent spends on an incoming call including any actions that the agent takes while
handling the call.
If your system includes a MERLIN LEGEND Reporter, the Talk Time option must
be enabled. All other configurations must have the Talk Time option disabled.
Summary: SMDR Talk Time
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
3
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Talk Time→Enable or Disable
PC Procedure
→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →→ or → → →
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-185
3
Procedure: SMDR Talk Time
Console Display/Instructions
_
Select SMDR.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Select Talk Time.
Station Message Record:
Make a selection
Format
Auth Code
Call Length
Call Report
New Page
Exit
Talk Time
Specify whether you want Talk Time enabled or disabled.
Enable Talk Time?:
Enabled
Disabled
Exit
Enter
Select Enabled or
Disabled
Save your entry.
Press Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-186
3
Inside Dial Tone
Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from,
or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone.
NOTE:
The inside dial tone must be the same as the outside dial tone when the
internal dial tone is not recognized by software applications or modems.
3
Summary: Inside Dial Tone
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Inside dial tone is different from outside dial tone
Valid Entries
Inside, Outside
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→InsideDial→Inside or
Outside→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-187
3
Procedure: Inside Dial Tone
Console/Display Instructions
_
Select Inside Dial Tone.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Specify which dial tone you want for inside.
Intercom Dial Tone:
Select One
Inside
Outside
Exit
Enter
Select Inside or
Outside.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Reminder Service Cancel
3
Use this procedure to set the time of day when all programmed Reminder Service
calls are automatically canceled.
To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, erase the currently programmed time
and do not enter a new time.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-188
3
Summary: Reminder Service Cancel
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel:
Options→Reminder Srv→Drop→Enter→Exit
To set Reminder Service Cancel time:
Options→Reminder Srv→Drop→Dial
time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel:
→ →! + 0 →→ To set Reminder Service Cancel time:
→ →! + 0 →Type time→ →
Procedure: Reminder Service Cancel
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
_
Select Reminder Service Cancel.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-189
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current reminder service time (xxxx) if assigned.
Reminder Service Cancel:
Enter hour (00-23) and
minute (00-59)
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!0
Enter the time of day when all reminders are to be canceled
(hh = 00 to 23 and mm = 00 to 59).
To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, do not
enter a time. Go to Step 5.
Dial or type [hhmm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension
Numbers
3
Use this procedure to specify the extension number to receive redirected calls.
Redirected calls include calls made to unassigned numbers by remote access
users, by users on DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX only), or by users on dial-in tie trunks.
Calls can be redirected to the following locations:
■
The QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only)
■
Another extension number
■
A calling group
Hybrid/PBX Mode Only
This setting does not affect calls received on DID trunks if you have specified that
calls to unassigned DID extensions are to receive a fast busy signal. See “Invalid
Destination.”
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-190
Summary: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned
Extension Numbers
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Extension number of primary operator
Valid Entries
QCC queue extension number, other extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To select QCC queue:
Options→More→Unassigned→QCC Queue→Enter→Exit
To select extension or calling group:
Options→More→Unassigned→Extension or Grp
Calling→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Dial group
no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To select QCC queue:
→U→→→→→
To select extension or calling group:
→U → → or → → Procedure: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned
Extension Numbers
3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-191
Additional Information
Press More.
Specify where to redirect calls made to unassigned extension numbers.
Call Unassigned Ext:
Select one
QCC Queue
Extension
Grp Calling
Exit
U
Select Redirect Unassigned Extension Numbers.
Options:
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecNT Timer
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter
Save your entry.
Select QCC Queue,
Extension, or
Grp Calling.
●◆
Select Enter.
If you selected QCC Queue, you have
finished this procedure. Go to Step 7.
If you selected Extension, go to
● Extension Procedure.
If you selected Grp Calling, go to
◆ Group Calling Procedure.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-192
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
● Extension Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the extension to which calls are to be redirected.
Unassign Calls Ext:
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
◆ Group Calling Procedure
Enter the extension of the calling group to which calls are to be redirected.
Unassign Calls Grp Call:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-193
Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode 3
Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the Transfer,
Conference, and Drop features.
When multiline telephone users press the Transfer, Conference, or Drop button,
a signal is sent to the host service and the communications system features are
not accessed. Assigning dial codes to these features ensures that users can take
advantage of them through the host system.
NOTE:
This procedure applies to Behind Switch mode only.
Summary: Host System Dial Codes for Behind
Switch Mode
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Behind Switch
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
No host dial codes are assigned
Valid Entries
Host system dial code of up to six digits
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→BehndSwitch→Select
feature→Drop→Dial host system dial
code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Select feature→ ! + 0→ Type host
system dial code→→→
Procedure: Host System Dial Codes for Behind
Switch Mode
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-194
Additional Information
Press More.
Exit
Backspace
Exit
Enter
**** = option name selected in Step 4
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the host system dial code (up to 6 digits).
Dial or type [n].
Select Transfer,
Conference, or
Drop.
Erase the current host system dial code (xxxxxx).
Program ****:
Enter host system dial
code
xxxxxx
Specify the feature to which you want to assign a dial code.
Behind Switch:
Make a selection
Transfer
Conference
Drop
U
Select Behind Switch.
Options:
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecNT Timer
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Issue 1
June 1997
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-195
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Recall Timer
Use this procedure to designate the length of the timed flash that is sent when
Recall is used to disconnect a call and to get a new dial tone without hanging up.
Both the interval of the timed flash and the way that Recall works depend on the
type of telephone and system operating mode.
The recall timer should be reset if multiline telephone users experience either of
the following problems:
■
Nothing happens when the user presses the Recall button on an outside
call. This indicates that the interval is too short and should be increased to
650 milliseconds or one second.
■
In a system operating in Behind Switch mode, the call is disconnected
when the user presses the Recall button on an outside call. This indicates
that the interval is too long and should be decreased to 350 milliseconds.
3
Summary: Recall Timer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
450 ms
Valid Entries
350 ms, 450 ms, 650 ms, 1 second
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→RecallTimer→Select
time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→Select time→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-196
3
Procedure: Recall Timer
Console Display/Instructions
_
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Press More.
Specify a timer setting.
Recall Timer:
Select one
350 ms
450 ms
650 ms
1 sec
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
U
Select Recall Timer.
Options:
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecNT Timer
Exit
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-197
3
Inter-digit Timers
This procedure to program inter-digit timers has not yet been implemented. If
situations occur where a caller is attempting to make an outside call and becomes
connected to an incoming call, the caller may not be able to put the incoming call
on hold or transfer the call. Setting inter-digit timers to shorter times will permit the
call to be put on hold or transfered. If you are experiencing these types of
problems, call the Lucent Technologies Helpline at 1 800 628-2888.
3
Allowed Lists
Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers
that can be dialed from specified telephones, regardless of any calling restrictions
assigned to the telephones.
A maximum of eight lists (numbered 0 through 7), with a maximum of 10 numbers
each (numbered 0 through 9) allowed. Each allowed number can be no more than
six digits (an area code plus an exchange) or six digits with a leading 1, where
required.
If you program 0 as the first digit of a list entry, any toll restriction assigned to the
extension is removed for calls that can be placed by a toll operator.
Special characters (such as Pause) are not permitted in Allowed List entries.
3
Summary: Allowed Lists
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Area code/exchange (1- to 6-digits with leading 1, if
necessary)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→AllowList→Dial list no. and entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
!
→→Type list no. and entry no.→→
+ 0→Type no.→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-198
3
Procedure: Allowed Lists
Console Display/Instructions
>
Enter the list (I = 0 to 7) and entry (e = 0 to 9) numbers.
Allowed List:
Enter list (0-7) and
entry (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
_
Select Allowed List.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Enter
If you do not enter a list number, List 0
is assigned.
Dial or type [le].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Erase the current area code/exchange (nnnnnn).
Allowed List l Entry e :
Enter list item
l = list number entered in Step 3
e = entry number entered in Step 3
nnnnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
Press Drop.
!0
Enter the allowed area code/exchange (up to 6 digits).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-199
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter or
Next.
Use Next to enter the next number on the list displayed on Line 1. Return to Step 7.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
3
Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
Use this procedure to assign individual telephones access to established Allowed
Lists. More than one Allowed List can be assigned to a telephone.
Summary: Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0 to 7
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Tables→AllowTo→Dial list no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type list no.→ → Type ext.
no.→→→
Procedure: Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Page 3-200
Select Allowed To List.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
>
Enter the number of the list (n = 0 to 7).
Allowed To List:
Enter list number (0-7)
If you do not enter a list number, List 0
is assigned.
Backspace
Exit
Dial or type [n].
Enter
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
Specify the extension to assign to the allowed list.
Allow To List x:
Enter extensions to list
x = list number entered in Step 3
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 7.
On = allowed list is assigned.
Off = allowed list is not assigned.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-201
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the extension from the allowed list.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove the
allowed list from additional extensions by repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Continue to assign extensions to the next allowed list or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 5. The next allowed list will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
3
Disallowed Lists
Use this procedure to establish Disallowed Lists. These lists are telephone
numbers that cannot be dialed from specified telephones (including unrestricted
telephones).
A maximum of eight lists (numbered 0 through 7), with 10 entries each (numbered
0 through 9) is allowed. Each number can have a maximum of 11 digits, including
wildcards. The Pause character (entered by pressing the Hold button) is used to
designate a wildcard character, for example, to indicate that calls to a given
exchange are restricted in every area code.
!
SecurityAlert:
Create a Disallowed List or use the pre-prepared Disallowed List
number 7 (Release 3.1 and later systems only) to disallow dialing 0,
11, 10, 1700, 1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1
and later systems, Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800
and 1800 and 411 and 1411, but Lucent recommends that you add
them. Assign all voice mail port extensions to this Disallowed
List. Lucent recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7.
This is an added layer of security, in case outward restriction is
inadvertently removed. (In Release 3.1 and later systems, voice
messaging ports are assigned by default to Disallowed List
number 7.)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
3
Page 3-202
3
Summary: Disallowed Lists
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
List #7 containing the following:
0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976,
1ppp976 (p = wildcard), *
Valid Entries
1- to 11-digits (including wildcards)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→Disallow→Dial list no. and entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type list no. and entry no.→→! +
→Type no.→→
0
3
Procedure: Disallowed Lists
Console Display/Instructions
_
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
_
Select Disallowed List.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-203
Additional Information
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If you do not enter a list number, List 0
is assigned.
Dial or type [le].
Erase the current telephone (n).
Disallow List l Entry e
Enter list item
(12 digits maximum)
nnnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
l = list number entered in Step 3
e = entry number entered in Step 3
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the disallowed telephone number (n = up to 12 digits).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Specify the list (I = 0 to 7) and entry (e = 0 to 9) numbers.
Disallow List:
Enter list (0-7) and
entry (0-9)
Issue 1
June 1997
Continue to assign the next telephone number to the disallowed list or go to
Step 8.
Select Next.
Use Next to assign the next entry to the disallowed list displayed on Line 1. Return to Step 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
3
Page 3-204
Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones
3
Use this procedure to assign established Disallowed Lists to individual
telephones. Each restricted telephone can be assigned to more than one list.
Summary: Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones3
Programmable by. System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0 to 7
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Tables→DisallowTo→Dial list no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type list no.→ → Type ext.
no.→→→
Procedure: Assign Disallowed Lists to
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
_
Select Disallow To Lists.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
System Features
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-205
Additional Information
PC
Enter the list number (n = 0 to 7).
Disallow To List:
Enter list number (0-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the extension to which you want to assign the disallowed list.
Disallow To List x:
Enter extensions to list
x = list number entered in Step 3
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 7.
On = disallowed list is assigned
Off = disallowed list is not assigned
Assign or remove the disallowed list from the extension.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove the disallowed list from additional extensions by repeating Steps 5 and 6.
Continue to assign extensions to the next disallowed list or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 5. The next disallowed list will be
displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Page 3-206
3
Night Service
The procedures in this section cover how to program the following optional Night
Service features:
■
Night Service Group Assignment
■
Night Service with Outward Restriction
■
Night Service with Time Set
■
Night Service with Coverage Control
Night Service Group Assignment
3
Use this procedure to assign extensions and calling groups to a Night Service
group for coverage after hours.
A maximum of eight Night Service groups can be assigned (no more than one for
each operator position assigned). Any number of extensions can be assigned to a
Night Service group, and an extension can belong to more than one group.
A calling group can also be assigned to a Night Service group. This applies only to
Release 2.0 or later.
Beginning with Release 4.1 this option allows the system manager to assign
outside lines to Night Service groups in addition to extensions and calling groups
for coverage after hours.
Any number of outside lines can be assigned to a Night Service group. Each
outside line can belong to more than one group.
Summary: Night Service Group Assignment
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9a, Night Service: Group Assignment
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes (extensions only)
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Page 3-207
Console Procedure To assign a calling group to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Calling Group→Dial ext.
no. of Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial calling group
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To assign an extension to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Extensions→Dial ext. no. of
Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial ext. no. of
telephone→Enter→Exit→Exit
To assign an outside line to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Extensions→Dial ext. no. of
Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial outside line number
(801-880)→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To assign a calling group to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service attendant
→→Type calling group no.→→→
To assign an extension to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service
attendant→→Type ext. no. of
telephone→→→
To assign an outside line to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service
attendant→→Type outside line number
(801–880)→→→
Procedure: Night Service Group Assignment
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Night Service menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
3
Select Group Assignment.
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
ExcludeList
Cover Control
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-208
Additional Information
PC
Select an option.
Night Serv Group Assign:
Make a selection
Extensions
Calling Grp
Lines
Select Extensions to add an extension
to a Night Service group.
Exit
Select Cover Control to add outside lines
to a Night Service group.
Select Calling Grp to add a calling
group to a Night Service group.
Enter the operator number.
Night Serv Group Assign:
Enter NS Attendnt number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
●◆
Select Enter.
If you selected Extensions in Step 3, go to
● Extensions Procedure.
If you selected Calling Grp in Step 3, go to
◆ Calling Group Procedure.
● Extensions Procedure
Specify the extension you want to assign to the Night Service group.
Night Serv Group xxxx:
Enter extension
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Then, go to Step 3.
On = extension assigned to group
Off = extension not assigned to group
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the extension(s) from the Night Service group.
Night Serv Group xxxx:
Enter extension
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Page 3-209
Delete
Next
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
Select Enter to assign or
Delete to remove your entry and
continue adding or removing extensions
from the Night Service group by
repeating Steps 1 and 2.
Select Next to save your entry and begin assigning extensions to the next
Night Service group (operator position).
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Calling Group Procedure.
Console Display/Instructions
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
Assign or remove the calling group(s) from the Night Service group.
Night Serv Group xxxx:
Enter group call ext
xxx
Backspace
Exit
PC
Enter the extension of the calling group to be added.
Night Serv Group xxxx:
Enter group call ext
Additional Information
Delete
Next
Enter
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
Select Enter to assign or
Delete to remove your entry and
continue adding or removing calling
groups from the Night Service group by
repeating Steps 1 and 2.
Select Next to save your entry and begin
assigning calling groups to the next Night
Service group (operator position).
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Night Service with Outward Restriction
Page 3-210
3
Use this procedure to prevent unauthorized use of telephones after hours. This
feature requires the user to enter a password to make a call when Night Service is
activated, unless one of the lists below applies. It also requires an operator to
enter a password in order to activate Night Service manually.
To remove the password requirement follow the procedure below and delete the
current password (press the Drop button).
This procedure is also used to establish the following lists:
■
Emergency Allowed List. A list of telephone numbers that can be dialed
without a password.
■
Exclusion List. A list of extensions that are exempt from password
requirements.
NOTE:
A maximum of 10 telephone numbers can be included on the Emergency
Allowed List, each number with a maximum of 12 digits.
Extensions included in the Exclusion List keep normal call restrictions (if
any are assigned); however, they are not protected in any other way from
unauthorized use after hours.
AUDIX Voice Power jacks are automatically included on the Exclusion List.
Summary: Night Service with Outward
Restriction
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9b, Night Service: Outward Restrictions
Factory Setting
No password
Valid Entries
Four digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
Yes (Exclusion List)
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Page 3-211
Console Procedure NightSrvce→OutRestrict→Drop→Dial
password→Enter→Emergency→Dial item
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial telephone
no.→Enter→ExcludeList→Dial ext. no.
PC Procedure
→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →! + 0 →Type password→ → →Type
item no.→→! + 0→Type telephone
no.→→→Type ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Night Service with Outward
Restriction
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
Select the Night Service menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select Outward Restriction.
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
ExcludeList
Cover Control
Exit
PC
Erase the current password (xxxx) if assigned.
Night Serv OutRestrict:
Enter 4-digit password
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter a four-digit password (n = any combination of 0 to 9).
Night Serv OutRestrict:
Enter 4-digit password
To remove the password requirement,
leave the screen blank and go to Step 5.
Backspace
Exit
Dial or type [nnnn].
Enter
+0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-212
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you removed the password requirement, you
have completed this procedure.
Select Emergency Allowed List.
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
Exclude List
Cover Control
Exit
If you do not wish to enter an Emergency
Allowed List, skip this step and go to
Step 13
Enter the item number you want to add or change (n = 0 to 9).
Night Serv Emergency:
Enter item number (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current telephone number (n) if assigned.
Night Serv Emergency x:
Enter telephone number
x = list item number entered in Step 7
n
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the telephone number (up to 12 digits).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-213
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign a telephone number to the next emergency list item
or go to Step 12.
Select Next.
Return to Step 9. The next emergency list item
number will display on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Exclusion List.
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
ExcludeList
Cover Control
Exit
Specify the extension.
Night Serv Exclusion:
Enter extensions
excluded
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Then, go to Step 16.
On = extension is excluded from list
Off = extension is not excluded from list
Assign or remove the extension(s) from the exclusion list.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Continue to add or delete extensions by repeating Steps 14 and 15.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Night Service with Time Set
3
Use this procedure to specify the time of day and the days of the week when Night
Service is to be activated and deactivated.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Page 3-214
Enter the time of day as four digits, using 24-hour notation. Enter the day of the
week as a single digit (0 to 6), with 0 being Sunday. If you enter an invalid
number, the system truncates the number.
If you change the system time while Night Service is active, Night Service is
deactivated automatically and you must manually reactivate it.
Operators can override the timer and turn Night Service on and off manually. This
feature can be deactivated when extraordinary situations occur (for example, a
midweek holiday).
NOTE:
For Release 2.1 and earlier, after setting Start and Stop time for Night
Service you must use the following procedure to set the current day of the
week for Night Service.
NightSrvce→Day of Week→Dial the current day of the week→Enter→Exit
If system programming information is being loaded into memory from a backup
diskette, the current day of the week must be reset.
Night Service can be turned off by using the following procedure:
NightSrvce→Day of Week→Dial 9→Enter→Exit
Summary: Night Service with Time Set
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9c, Night Service: Time Set
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Day: 0 to 6; Time: 0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To add or change start/stop time:
NightSrvce→Start→Drop→Dial start day and
time→Enter→Stop→Drop→Dial stop day and
time→Enter→Exit
To activate/deactivate:
NightSrvce→Time Control→Off or On→Enter→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
PC Procedure
Page 3-215
To add or change start/stop time:
→ →! + 0 →Type start day and
time→→→! + 0→Type stop day and
time→→
To activate/deactivate:
→ → or → →
Procedure: Night Service with Time Set
Console Display/Instructions
3
Additional Information
Select the Night Service menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
PC
Select Night Service option.
●◆■
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
ExcludeList
Cover Control
Exit
To add or change start time, select
Start and go to
● Add or Change Start Time Procedure.
_
_
_
To add or change stop time, select
Stop and go to
◆ Add or Change Stop Time Procedure.
To Activate/deactivate Night Service with Time Control, select Time Control and go
to ■ Activate/Deactivate Night Service
Procedure.
● Add or Change Start Time Procedure
Erase the current start day and time (xxxxx) if assigned.
Night Serv Start:
Enter day(0-6), hr(00-23)
and min(00-59)
xxxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter a one-digit day of the week (Sunday = 0, Monday = 1, and so on),
followed by a four-digit time of day (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59).
Dial or type [dhhmm].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Page 3-216
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
◆ Add or Change Stop Time Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current stop day and time (xxxxx) if assigned.
Night Serv Stop:
Enter day(0-6),hr(00-23)
and min(00-59)
xxxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
+0
Enter a one-digit day of the week (Sunday = 0, Monday = 1, and so on),
followed by a four-digit time of day (hh = 00 to 23 , mm = 00 to 59).
Dial or type [dhhmm].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-217
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
■ Activate/Deactivate Night Service Procedure
Turn Night Service On or Off.
Night Serv Time Control:
Select one
On
Off
Exit
Select On to turn Night Service on.
Select Off to turn Night Service off.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Night Service with Coverage Control
3
Use this procedure to enable or disable the Night Service Coverage Control
option to automatically control the status of programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons.
When the Coverage Control option is enabled, a transition into Night Service
(either by pressing a Night Service button or automatically by the Time Set
option) automatically deactivates the VMS Coverage Off (Release 2.0 or later)
buttons (LED is off) and allows outside calls to go to VMS Coverage at night.
When the system is taken out of Night Service (either by pressing a Night
Service button or automatically by the Time Set option), programmed VMS
Coverage Off buttons are activated (LED is on) and outside calls are prevented
from going to VMS Coverage during the day.
When the Coverage Control option is disabled, Night Service status has no effect
on programmed VMS Coverage Off buttons.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Night Service
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-218
Summary: Night Service with Coverage Control 3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9c, Night Service: Options
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enable or Disable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure NightSrvce→CoverContrl→Enable or
Disable→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
Procedure: Night Service with Coverage Control 3
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Select the Night Service menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select Night Service Cover Control option.
Night Service:
Make a selection
GroupAssign
Start
OutRestrict
Stop
Emergency
Time Control
ExcludeList
Cover Control
Exit
PC
Enable or disable Cover Control.
NightServ Cover Control
Select one
Enable
Disable
Exit
Enter
Enable cover control
Disable cover control.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-219
3
Labeling
The procedures in this section cover how to add or change labels for the following:
■
Extension Directory
■
Lines or Trunks
■
Posted Message
■
Group Calling
■
System Speed Dial Directory
These procedures can be done using Integrated Administration.
Programming on the system programming console:
Use the buttons next to the display to specify the letters A through I and
punctuation. Use the line/feature buttons to specify additional alphanumeric
characters for labels. Use the template provided with the MLX-20L telephone to
see which line buttons correspond to which alphanumeric characters.
Programming with SPM:
Use the PC keyboard for labels. All letters appear on the screen in uppercase.
NOTE:
See the MLX-20L User’s Guide for instructions on creating or editing a
personal directory.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-220
3
Extension Directory
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display set
telephone users to identify the person calling or leaving a message. This
procedure is also used to program the Extension Directory feature for MLX
telephones.
A label can have a maximum of seven characters.
3
Summary: Extension Directory
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Directory→Extension→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter
label→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type ext. no.→→! +
→Type label→→→→
U
0
3
Procedure: Extension Directory
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-221
Additional Information
Select Directory.
Labeling
Make a selection
Directory
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Exit
PC
Select the Labeling menu.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
Select Extension.
Directory:
Make a selection
System
Extension
Personal
Exit
Specify the extension you want to label.
Extension Directory
Enter extension
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned.
Ext xxxx:Enter
AAAAAAA
Punctuation
Backspace
A
’
C
E
.
Page 3-222
xxxx = number entered in Step 5
new name
Enter
Exit
,
&
Space
B
D
F
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter a label for the extension.
Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and
punctuation.
Ã
Dial or type the label.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Continue to label additional extensions by
repeating Steps 5 through 9.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Lines or Trunks
3
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display set
telephone users to identify the line or trunk being used.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-223
3
Summary: Lines or Trunks
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→LinesTrunks→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial label→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type line/trunk no.→→! +
→Type label→→→
U
0
3
Procedure: Lines or Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Press More.
U
Select the Labeling menu.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Select Lines/Trunks.
Labeling
Make a selection
Directory
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-224
Additional Information
PC
Enter the line or trunk number.
Label Lines/Trunks:
Enter the line/trunk
number
Backspace
Exit
Ã
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned.
L xxx Enter new label
AAAAAAA
Punctuation
Enter
Backspace
Exit
A
’
,
C
&
E
.
Space
xxx = number entered in Step 4
B
D
F
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter a label for the line or trunk.
Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and
punctuation.
Ã
Dial or type the label.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Continue to label additional lines/trunks by
repeating Steps 4 through 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-225
3
Posted Message
Use this procedure to add or change existing posted messages. The posted
messages allow callers with display telephones to know why the called extension
does not answer.
Each posted message can have a maximum of 16 characters. Messages 2
through 20 can be changed through programming. Message 1, Do Not Disturb,
cannot be changed.
3
Summary: Posted Message
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message
Factory Setting
First 10 messages
Valid Entries
1 to 20
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→PostMessage→Dial message
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter
message→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type message no.→→! +
→Type message→→→
U
0
3
Procedure: Posted Message
Console Display/Instructions
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Select the Labeling menu.
System Programming:
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-226
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Select Posted Message.
Labeling
Make a selection
Directory
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the posted message number (nn = 1 to 20).
Posted Message:
Enter the message number
(01-20)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current message (AAAAAAA) if assigned.
Msg xx:Enter new message
AAAAAAA
Punctuation
Enter
Backspace
Exit
A
’
,
B
C
&
D
E
.
Space
F
Ã
xx = number entered in Step 4
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the new message.
Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and
punctuation.
Dial or type the message.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-227
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Change additional messages by repeating Steps
4 through 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
3
Group Calling
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display telephone
users to identify calling groups.
A label can have a maximum of seven characters.
3
Summary: Group Calling
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6e, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Grp Calling→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter label→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type calling group ext. no.→→
+ 0→Type label→→→
U
!
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-228
3
Procedure: Group Calling
Console Display/Instructions
Press More.
Select Group Calling.
Labeling
Make a selection
Directory
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Exit
U
Select the Labeling menu.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Enter the calling group extension number (nnnn).
Group Calling:
Enter extension number
of group
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned.
GrpCl xxxx:Enter new label
AAAAAAA
Punctuation
Enter
Backspace
Exit
A
’
,
B
C
&
D
E
.
Space
F
Page 3-229
xxxx = number entered in Step 4
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter a label for the calling group.
Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and
punctuation.
Ã
Dial or type the label.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Continue to label additional calling groups by
repeating Steps 4 through 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
System Speed Dial Directory
3
Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users.
You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on
display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
A total of 130 numbers (System Speed Dial plus System Directory) can be
entered, with a maximum of 11 characters per label.
Speed dial code assignments are 600 through 729.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Page 3-230
Summary: System Speed Dial Directory
3
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8b, System Speed Dial
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
600 to 729
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Directory→System→Dial dial code
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter label Enter→Backspace→Dial
telephone no.→Enter→Yes or
No→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type dial code no.→→
+ 0→Type label→→→Type telephone no.
→→ or →→→→
U
!
Procedure: System Speed Dial Directory
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
3
Press More.
U
Select the Labeling menu.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-231
Additional Information
PC
Select Directory.
Labeling
Make a selection
Directory
LinesTrunks
PostMessage
Grp Calling
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
Select System.
Directory:
Make a selection
System
Extension
Personal
Exit
Enter the speed dial code number you want to add or
change (nnn = 600 to 729).
System Directory:
Enter the entry number
(600-729)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current label (AAAAAAA) if assigned.
Entry xxx:Enter new name
AAAAAAA
Punctuation
Enter
Backspace
Exit
A
’
,
B
C
&
D
E
.
Space
F
Ã
xxx = code entered in Step 4
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter a label for the speed dial code.
Use Punctuation to toggle between letters and
punctuation.
Dial or type the label.
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Labeling
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-232
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Erase the currently assigned telephone number (x).
Enter Tel. No., and Enter
x
Punctuation
Enter
Backspace
Exit
A
’
,
B
C
&
D
E
.
Space
F
Note: Do not press Drop.
Press Backspace.
Enter a telephone number for the speed dial code
entered in Step 5 (n = up to 20 digits).
Include any special characters shown on
the planning form:
■ Hold (A+H) = Pause
■ Drop (A+P) = Stop
■ Conference (A+F) = switchhook flash
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Select a display option.
Displ no. while dialing?
Yes
No
Enter
Exit
If you want the dialed telephone number
to display when using the System
Directory feature, select Yes.
If you do not want the dialed telephone
number to display when using the System
Directory feature, select No.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Page 3-233
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Continue to assign additional Speed Dial numbers by repeating Steps 4 through 14.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
3
Print Reports
Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and
to print the system reports.
3
Report Language
Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports. It applies to
Release 1.1 and higher. Unless you change the report language, reports are
printed in the language chosen as the system language.
3
Summary: Report Language
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→Printer→English or French or
Spanish→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
U
→→→ or or →→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Page 3-234
3
Procedure: Report Language
Console/Display Instructions
Press More.
_
Select Printer.
Language
Make a selection
SystemLang
Extensions
SMDR
Printer
Exit
Specify a language for the reports.
Printer Language:
Select one
English
French
Spanish
Exit
Enter
Select English,
French, or
Spanish.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
U
Select Language.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Printing System Reports
Page 3-235
3
The communications system can be used to print a variety of reports. You can
print individual reports or use the All option to print the entire set of available
reports, including all report sections and options. See Appendix F for samples of
the print reports.
Use this procedure to print the reports listed below. With the exception of Trunk
Information, the dash lists under the bullets show the sections of each report that
automatically print when the report option is selected.
■
All
— Each report
— All report options
■
System Set Up
■
System Dial Plan
— Pools
— Telephone Paging Zones
— Direct Group Calling
— Lines/Trunks
— Stations (Extensions)
■
Label Information
— Telephone Personal Directory
— Message Numbers and Posted Messages
■
Trunk Information1
— TIE
— DID
— Loop/Ground
— General
— Switched 56 Data
■
T1 Information
■
PRI Information
■
Remote Access
— General Options
— Non-TIE Restrictions
— TIE Restrictions
1.
— Barrier Code Restrictions
Trunk option must be specified
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-236
Operator Information
— Position
— General Options
— DSS Options
— QCC Operators
— Operator Information
■
Allowed Lists
■
Allowed Lists Assigned to Extensions
■
Disallowed Lists
■
Disallowed Lists Assigned to Extensions
■
Automatic Route Selection
■
Tables
■
Extension Directory
■
System Directory
■
Group Page
■
Extension Information
■
Group Coverage
■
Group Calling
■
Night Service
■
Call Pickup Groups
■
Error Logs
■
Authorization Codes
■
BRI Information Report
NOTE:
If you select the All option, keep in mind that the reports take several
minutes to print. You may want to schedule use of the printer during
off-peak hours.
If you select a report for which there is no information, the report header still
prints.
Print reports if you cannot back up your system programming information.
Do not print reports if your system must handle more than 100 calls per
hour.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Page 3-237
If you are printing from the console, your printer must be connected to the
SMDR port. If you are programming on a PC with SPM, you have the
following choices:
■
Print reports on the SMDR printer (if available)
■
Print reports on the PC printer
■
Save reports (on hard disk or floppy)
■
View reports (browse)
See Chapter , ‘‘Programming with SPM’’ for details.
Summary: Printing System Reports
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Not applicable
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Any saved report
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
3
Console Procedure To print trunk information:
More→Print→Trunk Info→Select trunk type→Exit
To print extension information:
More→Print→More→Ext Info→Dial extension
number→Enter→Exit
To print all other reports:
More→Print→Select report→Exit
PC Procedure
To print trunk information:
U → → →Select trunk type →
To print extension information:
U → → U → →Type extension
number→→
To print all other reports:
U → → Select report →
To save report on disk:
U → → Select report → →Select GOTO
FLOPPY→
To view report:
# + Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Page 3-238
3
Procedure: Printing System Reports
Console Display/Instructions
Press More.
U
Select Print.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Additional Information
Select the report you want to print. ● ◆
Print (xxxx):
>
Make a selection
All
Trunk Info
SysSet-up
T1 Info
Dial Plan
PRI Info
Labels
RmoteAccess
Exit
Oper Info
xxxx = previously selected language
Print More
Make a selection
GrpCoverage
Error Log
Grp Calling
Auth Code
Night Servce
BRI Info
Call Pickup
The All option prints each of the
available reports and takes several
minutes to complete.
Exit
For additional selections press More.
D
If you select Trunk Info go to
● Trunk Information Procedure.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Print Reports
Page 3-239
Console/Display Instructions
PC
Observe the print progress screen.
If you select Ext Info go to
◆ Extension Information Procedure.
Print More:
>
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowListTo
Ext Direct
DisallowLst
Sys Direct
DisallowTo
Group Page
Exit
Ext Info
Additional Information
Return to the System Programming menu.
Press Exit () to interrupt printing
and display the print menu.
Print in Progress . . .
Exit
Select Exit.
● Trunk Information Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
PC
Specify a trunk type.
Trunk Info
Enter line/trunk type
TIE
S56 Data
DID
Loop/Ground
General
_
Exit
Additional Information
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Return to Step 4 of the main procedure.
◆ Extension Information Procedure
Enter the number of the extension for which you want a report (nnnn).
Extension Info
Enter extension number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-240
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to Step 4 of the main procedure.
Memory Card
3
A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface
slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through
which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory
card. The PCMCIA interface slot accepts one memory card at a time.
This section covers the following memory card functions:
■
Backup
■
Automatic Backup
For information on the Restore procedure and additional information about
memory cards, see Chapter , ‘‘Programming Procedures’’.
Card Types
3
There a four different types of memory cards that are identified by a preprinted,
color-coded label. Backups are always performed using the Translation Card
and the new Backup/Restore option on the System menu. A new automatic
backup feature permits you to set the system to perform automatic backups to the
memory card on a daily or weekly basis. See ‘‘Backup’’ for more information.
This card is identified by a white label with black lettering.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED
EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS.
Figure 3-4.
Inserting the Card
MEMO
CAUTION
• Do not drop, bend or crush
• Keep away from moisture
• Keep connector clean
• Avoid high temperatures and direct
sunlight
Release 3.5
Write protect
COPYRIGHT© 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Four (4) Megabytes
INSERT
COM code 123456789 MFR 00DR 00
Page 3-241
MERLIN Legend® Translation Card
3
PCMCIA Memory Card
3
To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow
pointing toward the slot. See Figure 3-5 for the proper way to insert the memory
card into the slot on the processor module.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Page 3-242
PROCESSOR
MODULE
Error/Status Code
Display
MERLIN Legend
Forced Installation
SN 00DR 00000004
123456789
Four (4) Megabytes
…PROPERTY OF AT&T…
PCMCIA
Interface Slot
INSER
T
THIS
®
MEM
AT&T ORY C AT&T
PR
AR
TH
IN AC AT IS D CON OPRIETA
COR NOT TO TAINS
R
DAN
PR Y
CE W BE DIS OPRIE
C
TA
ITH
APPLLOSED RY IN
ICAB OR U FORM
LE AG SED
AT
REE EXCEPION OF
COP
MEN
T
Y
TS.
ALL RIGHT©
RIG
HTS 1993 A
RES
T&T
ERV
ED
Push in
to remove
Memory
Card
Memory
Card
Alarm Status
LED
Figure 3-5.
Backup
Inserting the Memory Card
3
Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should
create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that
programmed information is not lost) and once after each system upgrade, service
technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
The Inspect feature (Inspct or D) is available to view the attributes of the
backup files on the memory card prior to initiating the backup procedure. The
attributes included on the Inspect screen are the filename, the time and date of
the file creation/update, the location of the system programming port, and
information about the system software release from which the backup was made.
The list of backup files contains three manual backup filenames and two
automatic backup filenames. The default names of the manual backup files are
BACK1.*****, BACK2.*****, and BACK3.*****. When you select one of the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Page 3-243
backup filenames, the system automatically replaces the stars in the filename with
the current month and day (mmdd). For example, BACK1.0116 would appear if you
selected BACK1.***** and performed the backup procedure on January 16. You
can rename any of the three default files during the backup procedure. The
automatic backup filenames are AUTO.BACK1 and AUTO.BACK2. You cannot
change the names of these files.
If you enter a filename that currently exists, the message File already exists
appears. You must enter another filename.
While the backup is in progress, you cannot access system programming
functions, your Personal Directory, or alarm clock functions (any programmed
alarms are temporarily deactivated). You may terminate the backup procedure at
any point prior to receiving confirmation of a successful backup.
If any type of programming is taking place at another extension when you begin
the backup procedure, the backup is canceled and the number of the first busy
extension appears on the screen. Attempt the backup procedure again when the
busy extension becomes idle.
If the system is turned off during a backup procedure, the backup is terminated.
The system performs a System Reset (cold start), after which you may repeat the
backup procedure.
If Home or Menu is pressed during a backup procedure, the backup is
terminated. This may result in the deletion of an old backup file. See Chapter ,
‘‘Programming Basics’’ for details about these keys.
NOTE:
If the system performs a System Erase (frigid start), all programming is set
to the default values. If a previous backup file is available, perform a
restore. If not, the system must be reprogrammed. See ‘‘Restore’’ in
Chapter for information about the system restore procedure. Also see
‘‘Backup Messages’’ for information about errors that may occur during the
backup procedure.
3
Summary: Backup
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required (No extensions are allowed to be in
programming mode except system programming console)
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
1- to 11-character filename
Inspect
Yes
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Copy Option
Page 3-244
No
Console Procedure Insert memory
card→System→Back/Restore→Backup→Select backup
file→Dial the new backup
filename→Enter→Yes→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Insert memory card→→→→Select backup
file→Type the new backup
filename→→→→→
3
Procedure: Backup
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the
processor module.
See Figure 3-5, “Inserting the Memory Card.”
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Back/Restore.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
_
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-245
Additional Information
PC
Select Backup.
Memory Card:
Make a selection
Backup
Restore
Auto Backup
Exit
Select the backup filename.
Memory Card Backup:
Make a selection
BACK1.****
AUTO1.****
BACK2.****
AUTO2.****
BACK3.****
Exit
If you select AUTO.BACK1 or AUTO.BACK2,
go to Step 8. You cannot rename either
of these two files.
If you select BACK1., BACK2., or BACK3.
and do not want to rename the file,
go to Step 8.
Press the button or function key next to your selection.
Rename the backup file (n = 1 to 11 characters).
Backup File:
BACKx.mmdd
Punctuation
Backspace
A
’
C
E
.
Ã
Enter name
Enter
Exit
,
B
&
D
F
Space
x = backup file selected in Step 5
mm/dd = current month and day
Use Punctuation to toggle between
the letters and punctuation.
Enter or type [filename].
Use the buttons next to the display to
specify the letters A through I and
punctuation. Use the line/feature buttons to
specify additional alphanumeric characters
for labels. Use the template provided with
the MLX-20L telephone to see which line
buttons correspond to which alphanumeric
characters.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
NOTE:
, not .
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Respond to the prompt.
Backup filename:
Page 3-246
filename = file selected in Step 5 or
entered in Step 6
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
Select No to terminate the backup.
Go to Step 11.
Exit
Select Yes to continue the backup.
Observe the backup progress screen.
Backup filename:
Backup in Progress,
Please Wait.
filename = file selected in Step 5 or
entered in Step 6
xx% = percentage of backup completed
xx% completed
Ã
Exit
Observe the backup completion screen.
Backup nnnnnnnnnnn:
Backup Successfully
Completed.
nnnnnnnnnnn = backup filename
Exit
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Automatic Backup
3
To preserve the most recent copy of your customized system data, you can
program the system to automatically backup programming information onto the
translation memory card. Automatic backups may be set for daily or weekly
operation. If automatic backup is activated, the time may be set for daily backup
(factory setting is 2:00 am) or the time and day may be set for weekly backup
(factory setting is 2:00 am Sunday).
The system places the automatic backup into one of two designated files:
AUTO.BACK1 and AUTO.BACK2. If both files are empty, the system places the
backup in AUTO.BACK1. If both files already contain backups, the system selects
the older of the two files and overwrites it. The system performs this file “toggle”
each time it performs an automatic backup.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Page 3-247
While the backup is in progress, you cannot access system programming
functions, your Personal Directory, or alarm clock functions (any programmed
alarms are temporarily deactivated).
If any type of programming is taking place at an extension during the automatic
backup procedure, the backup is canceled. The system does not re-attempt the
backup.
If an automatic backup fails for any reason (including a system-busy condition), all
of the programmed alarm buttons on system operator consoles light and the
information is recorded in both the permanent error log and the last 10 error logs.
The system does not re-attempt the backup.
Also see ‘‘Backup Messages’’ for information about errors that may occur during
the automatic backup procedure.
NOTE:
If an automatic backup fails for any reason (except when the failure results
because the memory card is write-protected) the automatic backup feature
is turned off. Follow the procedure below to reprogram automatic backups.
Summary: Automatic Backup
3
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required (No extensions are allowed to be in
programming mode including the system programming
console)
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
Weekly backup: Sunday at 2:00 am
(if daily backup is selected, time is factory set for 2:00 am)
Valid Entries
Daily: hhmm (00 to 23; 00 to 59)
Weekly: dhhmm (0 to 6; 00 to 23; 00 to 59)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program daily backup:
Insert memory card→System→Back/Restore→
Auto Backup→Daily→Drop→Dial time→Enter
→Exit→Exit
To program weekly backup:
Insert memory card→System→Back/Restore→
Auto Backup→Weekly→Drop→Dial day and time
→Enter→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
PC Procedure
Page 3-248
To program daily backup:
Insert memory card→→→→→
! + P →Type time→ → →
To program weekly backup:
Insert memory card→→→→→
! + P →Type day and time → →→ 3
Procedure: Automatic Backup
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Insert the memory card into the PCMCIA interface slot on the processor
module.
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Back/Restore.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
PC
_
Select Auto Backup.
Memory Card:
Make a selection
Backup
Restore
Auto Backup
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-249
Additional Information
PC
Make a selection.
Auto MemCard Backup:
Select one
Off
Daily
Weekly
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Off,
Daily, or
Weekly
●◆
Select Enter.
If you selected Off you have finished this
procedure. Go to Step 7.
If you selected Daily go to ● Daily Backup
Procedure.
If you selected Weekly go to ◆ Weekly
Backup Procedure.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
● Daily Backup Procedure
Erase the current daily backup time (xxxx).
Daily MemCard Backup:
Enter hour (00-23) and
minutes (00-59) hhmm
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the time when you want the automatic backup to run every day
(hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59).
Daily MemCard Backup:
Enter hour (00-23) and
minutes (00-59) hhmm
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [hhmm].
Ã
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Console/Display Instructions
Page 3-250
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Weekly Backup Procedure
Erase the current weekly backup day and time (xxxxx).
Weekly MemCard Backup:
Enter day (0-6) hr (00-23)
and min (00-59) dhhmm
xxxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
Backspace
Exit
Enter
0 = Sunday, 1 = Monday, and so on.
Dial or type [dhhmm].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the day (d = 0 to 6) and time (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59)
when you want the automatic backup to run each week.
Weekly MemCard Backup:
Enter day (0-6), hr (00-23)
and min (00-59) dhhmm
Press Drop.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Backup Messages
3
During manual or automatic backup procedures, additional screens may appear
to alert you to problems with the translation memory card, the backup file, or the
backup procedure. This section contains displays of each screen and information
about what to do if the screen appears.
NOTE:
The screens shown in this section are from the manual backup procedure;
however, the screens that may appear in both the manual and automatic
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Page 3-251
backup procedures are similar. The screens in both procedures differ only
in the appearance of the first line. On the automatic backup screens, Auto
MemoryCard Backup replaces Memory Card Backup shown on the screens
below.
3
Backup Canceled
If the system detects an error, either on the memory card or with the backup file,
or if you terminate the backup, this screen appears.
Backup x:
BACKUP IS CANCELED.
File has been DELETED.
x = backup filename
Exit
The backup file being created is deleted and the backup is terminated. You must
repeat the backup procedure.
Card Removed While Backup Is in Progress
3
The memory card is not inserted or is inserted incorrectly while a backup is in
progress. The backup file that was being created is deleted and the backup is
terminated. You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the backup procedure.
Backup x:
x = backup filename
BACKUP IS CANCELED.
Verify that Memory Card
has been inserted
correctly.
File has been DELETED.
Exit
Card Missing or Card Not Inserted Correctly
3
The memory card is either not inserted or is inserted incorrectly. The backup is
terminated. You must reinsert the memory card and repeat the backup procedure.
This screen may also appear if the wrong type of memory card is inserted and a
backup or automatic backup is requested within one minute of insertion. Verify
that the card is a translation memory card.
Memory Card Backup:
Verify that Memory Card
has been inserted
correctly.
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Card Is Write-Protected
Page 3-252
3
The memory card is write-protected. You must remove the memory card, flip the
write-protect tab, reinsert the memory card, and repeat the backup procedure.
Memory Card Backup:
Memory Card is WriteProtected.
Reset Write-Protect Tab
on Memory Card.
Exit
!
CAUTION:
The memory card may be write-protected to avoid the accidental
erasure of the backup files. Make certain this is not the case before
you change the write-protect tab.
Card Failure
3
If the card is damaged, repeat the backup with a different card. If a backup is in
progress and fails, the system makes two additional attempts at the backup. At
the start of each attempt, a message appears with the percentage of the backup
that is completed. If the backup fails after three attempts, the screen shown below
appears. Repeat the backup procedure using a different file and/or memory card.
Memory Card Backup:
Backup Failure
Try a different file or
a new Memory Card.
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
3
Common Administrative Procedures
Memory Card
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 3-253
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
0
Programming Procedures
Introduction
Page 4-1
Programming Procedures
Introduction
4
4
This chapter contains procedures for all of the advanced programming features
and options available on the System Programming menu, where each of the
procedures begins. It also contains summary information for all of the common
programming features described in detail in Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative
Procedures’’. Use one of the methods shown below to display the System
Programming menu.
■
At the console: Menu→Sys Program→Exit
■
At the PC or with SPM: Type spm→Press any key→→
Before you begin any of the procedures in this chapter, you should read and
understand all of the information presented in Chapter 1, ‘‘Programming Basics’’ .
Basic System Operating Conditions
4
The procedures in this section are all related to the system rather than to the
operation of telephones, operator positions, lines, or trunks. These are operating
conditions that must be set only once, when the system is new, or when you reset
the system defaults.
NOTE:
You must reset the system time when Daylight Savings Time begins and
ends.
This section contains the following programming procedures:
■
System Restart
■
Board Renumbering
■
Mode of Operation
■
Automatic Maintenance Busy
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-2
Programming summaries are included for the following procedures:
■
System Programming Position Assignment
■
System Language
■
System Date
■
System Time
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
4
System Restart
!
CAUTION:
This procedure is to be performed by qualified support personnel
only.
Use this procedure to perform a System Restart (cold start). All calls are dropped
when you perform this procedure. System programming is saved. Telephones
with the Extension Status feature may lose toll restrictions as a result of a System
Restart.
4
Summary: System Restart
Programmable by
Qualified support personnel
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Not applicable
Factory Setting
None
Valid Entries
None
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Restart→Yes
PC Procedure
→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
4
Procedure: System Restart
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-3
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select System Restart.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
Respond to the query.
System Restart:
System will be down ...
To restart the system select Yes. The
system restart screen appears.
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
To terminate the restart and return to the
System menu select No, then select
Exit.
Exit
Restart
System is restarting
The session is finished, and the system
restarts. You must enter system
programming again to continue.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
System Programming Position Assignment
Page 4-4
4
Use this procedure to reassign the extension used for system programming. This
extension should not be the same extension as that used for the operator position.
The system programming position can be reassigned only to one of the first five
extension jacks on the first MLX module. Only one system programming console
is allowed per system.
If you are programming on the console, be aware of the following:
■
The console must be connected to the extension currently assigned for
system programming.
■
As soon as you change the system programming extension, the system
programming session is terminated. To proceed with system programming,
you must connect the system programming console to the newly assigned
extension and enter system programming again.
NOTE:
The telephone used for system programming must be an MLX-20L.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed information.
Summary: System Programming Position
Assignment
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
First extension jack on the first MLX module (also set as an
operator position)
Valid Entries
Extension number of one of the first five extension jacks on
the first MLX module
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→SProg Port→Drop→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type ext. no.→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-5
4
System Language
Use this procedure to set the system language (English, French, or Spanish) for
the following options:
■
System language
■
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) reports. See “System
Features.”
■
Print reports. See “Printing Reports.”
■
Extensions. See “Optional Telephone Features.”
NOTE:
MERLIN LEGEND Communication System Release 1.0 does not offer a
choice of languages.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed information.
4
Summary: System Language
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→SystemLang→Yes→Select a
language→Enter
PC Procedure
U
4
Board Renumbering
!
→→→→Select a language→
CAUTION:
This procedure is to be performed by qualified support personnel
only.
Use this procedure to renumber boards that have already been installed. This
procedure restarts the system (system programming is not lost). Note that this is
not the same procedure used with the Boards option, which is available to
qualified service personnel with SPM only.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-6
Board Renumber is a system programming procedure that is required only when
an existing module is replaced by a different type of module. When a Board
Renumber is performed, the system reassigns the logical ID numbers to the
station and line ports sequentially from left to right in the control unit and from
bottom to top of each module.
4
Summary: Board Renumbering
Programmable by
Qualified support personnel only
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Not applicable
Factory Setting
None
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Not applicable
Copy Option
Not applicable
Console Procedure System→Board Renum→Yes
PC Procedure
→→
Procedure: Board Renumbering
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-7
Additional Information
PC
Select Board Renumbering.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
Respond to the prompt.
Board Renumber:
System will be down ....
Do you want to continue?
To continue the Board Renumbering
procedure, select Yes. The renumbering
information screen appears.
Yes
To terminate this procedure and return to the
System menu select No, then select
Exit.
No
Exit
Board Renumber:
System is Renumbering
When renumbering completes,
the system returns to the
screen shown in Step 1.
Mode of Operation
4
The system modeKey, Behind Switch, or Hybrid/PBXdetermines how the
system operates and directly affects the following operations:
■
How lines and/or trunks are provided to users
■
Types of operator consoles allowed
■
Features available
Changing this option causes a system restart and terminates the programming
session. You must enter system programming again to program other features.
NOTE:
The Hybrid/PBX option is not available if the control unit processor module
has been modified to operate in Permanent Key mode only. See the
Equipment and Operations Reference.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-8
The following options cannot be programmed for Behind Switch or Key systems:
■
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
■
Pools
■
Queued Call Consoles (QCCs) and associated features
■
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunks
■
System Access buttons
■
Dial Plan Routing (PRI)
■
Call by Call Services (PRI)
The Ground-Start lines/trunks option cannot be programmed if the processor
module has been modified for Permanent Key mode operation only.
4
Summary: Mode of Operation
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
Hybrid/PBX
Valid Entries
Key, Behind Switch, Hybrid/PBX
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Mode→Select mode→Enter
PC Procedure
→→Select mode→
Procedure: Mode of Operation
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-9
Select Mode.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
Select the mode.
Mode:
Select one
Key
Hybrid/PBX
BehndSwtch
Exit
Enter
Select Key,
Hybrid/PBX,
or BehndSwtch.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
The session is terminated and the system
restarts. You must enter system programming
again to continue.
Automatic Maintenance Busy
4
Automatic Maintenance Busy allows the system to take a malfunctioning trunk out
of service for outgoing calls (incoming calls are never blocked). This prevents
faulty outside facilities from causing disruptions in outgoing calling patterns.
For optimal performance, enable Automatic Maintenance Busy for Hybrid/PBX
systems with pooled trunks.
NOTE:
No more than half of the trunks in a trunk pool are allowed to be placed in
the maintenance busy state at one time unless the central office has failed
to disconnect a trunk (which prevents anyone from using that trunk) or an
entire trunk module is manually taken out of use (a maintenance-busy state
deliberately caused by the user).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Page 4-10
Summary: Automatic Maintenance Busy
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To disable Automatic Maintenance Busy:
System→MaintenBusy→Disable→Enter→Exit
To enable Automatic Maintenance Busy excluding
tie trunks:
System→MaintenBusy→Enable→Enter→Exit
To enable/disable with tie trunks:
System→MaintenBusy→Enable→Enter→
Enable or Disable→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To disable Automatic Maintenance Busy:
→→→→
To enable Automatic Maintenance Busy excluding
tie trunks:
→→→→
To enable/disable with tie trunks:
→ →→ → or → →
Procedure: Automatic Maintenance Busy
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the System menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-11
Select Automatic Maintenance Busy.
System:
Make a selection
Restart
MaintenBusy
SProg Port
Date
Mode
Time
Board Renum
Back/Restore
Exit
Enable or disable Automatic Maintenance Busy.
Auto-Maintenance Busy:
Select one
Enable
Disable leaves malfunctioning trunks
Disable
available for outgoing calls.
Exit
Enter
Select Enable or
Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you selected Enable or Disable and your system has no tie trunks, you have finished this procedure. Go to Step 7.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Basic System Operating Conditions
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-12
Additional Information
PC
Select the malfunctioning tie trunk service.
Auto Busy TIE Trunks:
If you selected Enable and your system
has tie trunks, specify whether to take
malfunctioning tie trunks out of service
automatically or leave malfunctioning tie
trunks available for outgoing calls.
Select one
Enable
Disable
Exit
Enter
Select Enable or Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
4
Set System Date
The System Date feature allows you to set the month, day, and year that appear
on MLX display telephones and on Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
reports. See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed
information.
NOTE:
If you are planning to use the SMDR feature, make sure the current date is
set.
4
Summary: Set System Date
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
01-01-00
Valid Entries
Month: 01 to 12
Day: 01 to 31
Year: 00 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Date→Drop→Dial current date→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type current date→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 4-13
4
Set System Time
The System Time feature allows you to set the time that appears on MLX display
telephones and on SMDR reports. See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative
Procedures’’ for detailed information.
4
Summary: Set System Time
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not Required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
0000
Valid Entries
0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure System→Time→Drop→Dial current time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type current time→→
System Renumbering
4
The procedures in this section are used to assign the two-digit, three-digit, and
Set Up Space numbering plans.
NOTE:
System Renumbering is called Flexible Numbering in the MERLIN II
Communications System. This is not the same as Board Renumbering, an
option used when modules in the control unit are changed.
Do not attempt to assign a numbering plan without Planning Forms 2a, System
Numbering: Extension Jacks; 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts; and 2d,
System Numbering: Special Renumbers. Form 6a, Optional Operator Features, is
needed to assign a DSS Page button.
This section contains the following programming procedures:
■
Select System Numbering Plan
■
Direct Station Selector (DSS) Page Button Assignment
This section contains summaries of the following procedures which are described
in detail in Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’:
■
Single 4Renumbering
■
Block Renumbering
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-14
You select only one of the numbering plans (two-digit numbering, three-digit
numbering, or Set Up Space numbering). In addition, you may need to perform
single and/or block renumbering. You do not need to assign DSS Page buttons
unless the system programming console or one of the operator positions is
connected to a DSS. No matter which procedures you need to perform, assign the
numbering plan first, then do single and/or block renumbering, and finally, assign
DSS Page buttons (if necessary).
Use the single renumbering procedure whenever the extension numbers you are
changing from or to are not sequential.
Block renumbering is quicker, but you can use block renumbering only when the
extension numbers you are changing from and to are sequential.
When trunk or extension modules are removed from the control unit, the
remaining modules must be rearranged so that no empty slots remain. The
system does not acknowledge any modules installed after an empty slot;
therefore, if the system is renumbered, extensions are not assigned to extension
jacks after the empty slots.
NOTE:
Figures 4-1, 4-2, and 4-3 show the default settings in the gray spaces.
Extensions can be renumbered to any number shown in the white spaces.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
Extensions 10−19
Extensions 20−29
Extensions 30−39
Extensions 40−49
Extensions 50−59
Extensions 60−66
Extra
6843− Extra MFMs/
6993−
Extensions
Terminal Adapters 6999
6849
6700−6842
6850−6992
Main Pool
MFMs/
767− Calling Groups
Paging
70
Terminal Adapters 769
770–791,7920−7929
Groups
710−766
793−799
800*
Trunks 801−880
Park
889†
Pools
881−888
890−899
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX Mode) / Idle Line Access 9
*
Listed Directory Number (QCC Queue)
Remote Access
NOTE: “0” and “10” are the same station.
†
Figure 4-1.
2-Digit Numbering
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
Extensions 100−199
Extensions 200−299
MFMs/Terminal Adapters 300–399
MFMs/Terminal Adapters 400−499
500−599
600−699
Calling Groups
71−76
770−791, 7920−7929
Main Pool
70
800*
9
*
Page 4-15
Trunks
Park
889†
801−880
881−888
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX mode)/Idle Line Access
Paging
Groups
793−799
Pools
890−899
Listed Directory Number (QCC)
† Remote Access
NOTE: “0” and “100” are the same station.
Figure 4-2.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3-Digit Numbering
Operator Console (not flexible) 0
100−
−199
200−
−299
300−
−399
400−
−499
500−
−599
600−
−699
Main Pool Extensions MFMs/Terminal 7500−
−7699 Calling Group
70
Adapters
7100−
−7299
770−
−791,
7300−
−7499
7920−
−7929
800*
Trunks
Park
889†
801−
−880
881−
−888
ARS Access (Hybrid/PBX mode)/Idle Line Access 9
* Listed Directory Number (QCC).
† Remote Access
NOTE: “ 0” and “7001” are the same station.
Figure 4-3.
Set Up Space Numbering
Paging
Groups
793−
−799
Pools
890−
−899
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Select System Numbering Plan
!
Page 4-16
4
WARNING:
To avoid possible loss of system programming information, renumber the
system before you program the rest of the options described in this chapter.
The three available system numbering plans listed below appear on System
Planning Form 2a.
■
Two-Digit. This plan is for systems with fewer than 50 extensions and no
plans to exceed that number in the foreseeable future. Each of the first 58
extension jacks is assigned a two-digit extension number, beginning with
10 and ending with 67. Any remaining extensions are assigned four-digit
numbers, starting with 6700 and ending with 6842.
■
Three-Digit. This plan is for systems with 50 or more extensions or plans
to grow to that number in the foreseeable future. All extensions are
assigned a three-digit number, starting with 100 and ending with 299.
■
Set Up Space. This plan is for systems with a need to customize extension
numbers or use extension numbers of varying lengths (one to four digits).
All extensions are assigned four-digit numbers in the 7000 range.
Extension numbers 1000 through 6999 are also available for use when you
renumber.
In all three numbering plans, the system assigns three-digit extension numbers to
pools (Hybrid/PBX only), calling groups, paging groups, remote access codes, the
Listed Directory Number, park codes, and Idle Line Access (Key and Behind
Switch modes). In addition, the system assigns 9 for Automatic Route Selection
(Hybrid/PBX only) and Idle Line Access (Key and Behind Switch only). Zero (0)
represents a special extension numberactually a fixed dial codefor the
primary operator or QCC queue. Any extension number except 0 can be
renumbered.
Extension numbers can be composed of any combination of digits; however, no
number can begin with 0. Trunk numbers (801 to 880) are considered to be
extensions and can be renumbered.
The system does not provide a message to indicate a successful renumber when
either the two-digit or three-digit numbering plan is selected. For the Set Up
Space numbering plan, the system provides a message indicating that all
extensions are in the 7000 range.
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC when you have finished
selecting the numbering plan. If you press Home, extensions may
remain in the forced idle condition (indicated when the LED next to
each DSS button is on). To restore extensions to their normal
operating state, restart the system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 4-17
Summary: Select System Numbering Plan
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Two-digit
Valid Entries
Two-digit, Three-digit, Set Up Space
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Default Numbering→Select numbering
plan→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Select numbering plan→→
Procedure: Select System Numbering Plan
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the System Renumbering menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Default Numbering.
System:
Make a selection
Default Numbering
If you get the System Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit system
programming and try again later.
Single
Block
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-18
Select the appropriate system numbering plan.
Default Numbering:
Make a selection
2-Digit
3-Digit
SetUp Space
Exit
Select 2-Digit and go to Step 5.
Select 3-Digit and go to Step 5.
Select SetUp Space and continue with
Step 4.
Observe the initialize space screen.
Initialize Space:
AllExtensions 7000 range
If you selected SetUp Space
you have finished this procedure.
Select Exit and go to Step 6.
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 4-19
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the type of extension to renumber.
System Renumber:
Make a selection
Default Numbering
To change individual extension numbers,
select Single and go to “Single
Renumbering.”
To change a block of extension numbers,
select Block and go to “Block
Renumbering.”
Single
Block
Exit
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Single Renumbering
Use this procedure to assign a specified extension number to a telephone,
accessory, line, pool (Hybrid/PBX only), calling group, paging group, or Listed
Directory Number. Single renumbering is also used for Remote Access, Park, Idle
Line Access (Key and Behind Switch only), and Automatic Route Selection
(Hybrid/PBX only).
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed information.
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC after renumbering
extensions. If you press Home, extensions may remain in the forced
idle condition (indicated when the LED next to each DSS button is
on). To restore extensions to their normal operating state, restart the
system.
When required, this procedure should be performed immediately following the
selection of a system numbering plan.
Summary: Single Renumbering
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts
Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Old and new extension numbers
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Page 4-20
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Single→Select item→Dial old ext.
no.→Enter→Dial new ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Select item →Type old ext. no.→ →Type
new ext. no.→→→
4
Block Renumbering
Use this procedure to assign extension numbers to a group of extensions,
accessories, or lines. Both the original numbers and the numbers they are being
changed to must be sequentially numbered.
When required, this procedure should be performed immediately following the
selection of a system numbering plan.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed information.
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC when you have finished
renumbering extensions. If you press Home, extensions may remain
in the forced idle condition (indicated when the LED next to each DSS
button is on). To restore extensions to their normal operating state,
restart the system.
Summary: Block Renumbering
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Form 2b, System Numbering: Digital Adjuncts
Form 2d, System Numbering: Special Renumbers
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Old and new extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Block→Select type of group →Dial no. of
first group member→Enter→Dial no. of last group
member→Enter→Dial new beginning
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
PC Procedure
Page 4-21
→ →Select type of group→ Type no. of first group
member→→Type no. of last group
member→→Type new beginning
no.→→→→
Direct Station Selector (DSS) Page Buttons
4
Use this procedure to set the three Page buttons on the DSS to correspond to the
system numbering plan. This procedure assigns extension numbers to DSS
buttons. You cannot program individual buttons on a DSS; this is the only method
for programming DSS buttons.
Page button assignment should be sequential. If only one DSS is attached, each
Page button assignment sets the console for a range of 50 extension numbers:
Page 1: 0 to 49; Page 2: 50 to 99; Page 3: 100 to 149.
If two DSSs are attached, each Page button assignment sets the console for a
range of 100 extension numbers. If two DSSs are attached to the console, change
the factory setting so that the difference between extension numbers assigned to
the range is at least 100. For example, assign Page 1 to begin with extension 10,
Page 2 to begin with extension 110, and Page 3 to begin with extension 210.
Operator Park Zone codes must be included in the extension number range
specified for one of the Page buttons.
!
CAUTION:
Select Exit on the console or on the PC when you have finished
this procedure. If you press Home, extensions may remain in the
forced idle condition (the LED next to each DSS button is on), and the
system may have to be restarted.
Summary: Assign Direct Station Selector Page
Buttons
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Page 1=0; Page 2=50; Page 3=100
Valid Entries
1, 2, 3
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure SysRenumber→Single→More→DSS Buttons→Dial page
no.→Enter→Dial first ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
PC Procedure
Page 4-22
→ →U → →Type page no.→ →Type first
ext. no.→→→
Procedure: Assign Direct Station Selector Page
Buttons
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the System Renumber menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Single renumbering.
System Renumber:
Make a selection
Default Numbering
Single
Block
Exit
Go to the second screen of the System Renumber menu.
System Renumber:
>
Make a selection
Lines
GrpCalling
Extensions
Adjuncts
Pools
Park
Group Page
ARS DialOut
Exit
RemoteAccs
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Renumbering
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-23
Additional Information
PC
Select DSS Buttons.
System Renumber:
Make a selection
DSS Buttons
ListDirctNo
Exit
Enter the number of the Page button you want to program (n =1 to 3).
DSS Page Buttons:
Enter button number(1-3)
n
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current dial code (nnnn).
DSS Page Button n:
n = page button entered in Step 5
Enter first dial code of
group (multiple of 50)
nnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+P
Enter the first extension of the group of 50 or 100 extension numbers.
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
If you reassign an extension from one page to
another, you must repeat Steps 4 through 7 for
each page before you return to the System Programming menu.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Operator Positions
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-24
Additional Information
PC
Continue with additional entries or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next DSS Page
Button will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
System Operator Positions
4
A system operator position, for a Queued Call Console (QCC) operator or a
Direct-Line Console (DLC) operator, should be programmed before you program
lines or trunks.
QCC Operator Position
4
The QCC operator position is available only for Hybrid/PBX systems. The DLC
operator position is available in any mode and must be programmed if you have
Call Management Systems connected to any operator extension jacks. For
detailed programming procedures see Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative
Procedures’’.
This procedure applies to Hybrid/PBX systems only.
NOTE:
If you want to add or remove QCC operator positions, the following
conditions apply:
■
If other QCC positions remain in your system, the primary QCC
operator position cannot be removed.
■
When QCC operator positions are added, the primary QCC operator
position should be the first one added.
■
If QCC operator positions are being removed, the primary QCC
operator position must be the last one removed.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Operator Positions
Page 4-25
Summary: QCC Operator Positions
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Type: DLC
Valid Entries
First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two
per module; maximum: four QCCs per system)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Positions→Queued Call→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Store All
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→
4
DLC Operator Positions
DLC operator positions can be assigned to the first and fifth extension jacks on
the first modules with digital or analog multiline extension jacks. A maximum of
eight DLC operator positions can be assigned. For detailed programming
procedures see Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’.
Summary: Identify or Remove DLC Operator
Positions
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Type: DLC
Valid Entries
First or fifth extension jack on MLX module (maximum: two
per module; maximum: eight DLCs per system)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Positions→Direct Line→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Store All
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no. →
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-26
4
The procedures in this section are used to assign optional features to individual
lines and trunks. The following optional features can be assigned:
■
Type of Trunk
■
Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start Trunks
■
Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer
■
Disconnect Signaling Reliability
■
Toll Type
■
Hold Disconnect Interval
■
Principal User for Personal Line
■
QCC Queue Priority
■
QCC Operator to Receive Calls
■
Incoming Call Line Identification Delay
■
Trunks to Pools Assignment
The Copy Options feature (described at the end of this section) allows you to copy
several optional features from an idle trunk. This option eliminates the need to
individually enter each feature.
Separate sections cover “DS1 Facilities,” “Tie Trunks,” “DID Trunks,” “PRI
Facilities,” and “BRI Facilities.”
A slot is the physical location of the individual module on the control unit. There is
a maximum of 17 slots which are numbered as follows:
■
Basic carrier: slots 1 through 5
■
First expansion carrier: slots 6 through 11
■
Second expansion carrier: slots 12 through 17
A port is a line or trunk jack on the module. Individual modules support different
numbers of ports. On any module, port 1 is the lowest physical jack position. Lines
connect equipment to the switch and trunks connect a switch to a switch. Lines
and trunks have logical IDs, unique numeric identifiers for each extension and
trunk jack in the communications system control unit. Lines are numbered from 1
to 144, while trunks are numbered from 801 to 880. An MLX extension port has 2
logical IDs for each physical jack.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-27
4
Type of Trunk
Use this procedure to specify the type of trunk, loop-start (LS) or ground-start
(GS), for each outside trunk connected to one of the following modules:
■
400 GS/LS
■
408 GS/LS
■
800 GS/LS
■
408 GS/LS-MLX
■
800 GS/LS-ID (loop-start trunks only)
Any combination of trunk types (all loop-start, all ground-start, or some of each) is
permissible.
This procedure is not used for a system registered with a KF registration number
(Key or Behind Switch). Ground-start trunks are allowed only for systems with an
MF (Hybrid) or PF (PBX) registration number.
4
Summary: Type of Trunk
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
All loop-start
Valid Entries
All Ground, All Loop, Ground-Start, Loop-Start
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot no.→Enter→Select
trunk type→Dial port no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type slot no.→ → Select trunk type→Type
port no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-28
4
Procedure: Type of Trunk
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Tool Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number (1-17)
Module is: 400, 408, 408GS/LS-MLX,
800 GS/LS, or 800 GS/LS-ID.
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the type of trunks connected to the module.
**** GS/LS Slot xx:
**** = 400, 408, 408-MLX, or 800 modules
Select one
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
GroundStart
All Ground
Loop Start
All Loop
Exit
Select GroundStart or
Loop Start and go to Step 6.
Or, select All Ground or
All Loop and go to Step 9.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-29
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the port numbers that have ground-start or loop-start trunks connected.
400 and 408 ports: n = 1 to 4; 800 ports: n = 1 to 8.
**** Start Slot xx:
**** = option name selected in Step 5
Enter port no. (1-8)
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
NOTE:
If you get the Trunk Busy message,
wait for an idle condition or exit
system programming and try again
later.
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Continue to assign trunk types or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next slot number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Outmode Signaling for Loop- or Ground-Start
Trunks
4
Use this procedure to identify either touch-tone signaling or rotary-dial signaling
for outgoing calls placed by using the specified loop- or ground-start trunk.
NOTE:
Since the factory setting is touch-tone, this procedure is not required if your
system has only touch-tone lines/trunks.
Summary: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or
Ground-Start Trunks
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Loop-Start: All; Ground-Start: Hybrid/PBX only
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Touch-tone
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-30
Valid Entries
Touch-tone, Rotary
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→TT/LS Disc→Outmode→Select entry
mode→Dial no. of the
line/trunk→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→TT/LS Disc→OutMode→Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →→ → Type no. of the line/trunk→
→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →→ Select block of lines/trunks→Toggle letter
G On/Off→→→→
Procedure: Outmode Signaling for Loop- or
Ground-Start Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Touch-Tone/Loop-Start Disconnect.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Tool Type
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-31
Additional Information
PC
Select Outward Dialing Mode.
TouchTone/LS Disconnect:
Make a selection
Outmode
LS Disconnect
Exit
Enter
Select the outward trunk dial line(s).
OutTrunk Dial:
Enter Trunks w/TouchTone
Lines 01-20
●◆
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Entry Mode
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
.
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the number of the line/trunk with touch-tone dialing.
OutTrunk Dial:
Enter Trunks w/TouchTone
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove touch tone signaling from the line/trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove touch
tone signaling from additional lines/trunks by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-32
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each block.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = touch-tone
Off = rotary
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer
Use this procedure to designate whether dialed digits on rotary-dial lines/trunks
are sent one by one as they are dialed (no delay), or are stored and sent when
dialing is completed (delay). Contact your service provider for more information
about the appropriate setting.
Summary: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
No Delay
Valid Entries
Delay, No Delay
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More →Rotary→Select option→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→Select option→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-33
Procedure: Rotary Trunk Digit Transfer
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Press More.
U
Select Rotary.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecDT Timer
Exit
Specify a delay or no delay.
Rotary Operation:
Select one
Delay
No Delay
Exit
Enter
Select Delay or
No Delay.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-34
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
4
Ringing Frequency
Use this procedure to program the ringing frequency on an 016 module. Contact
your service provider for more information about the appropriate setting. The 016
module is available only in Release 4.0 and later.
4
Summary: Ringing Frequency
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
20 Hz
Valid Entries
20 Hz, 25 Hz.
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→Ringing Freq→dial slot no.→Select
20Hz or 25Hz→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→type slot no.→ or →→
Procedure: Ringing Frequency
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-35
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Press More.
U
Select Ringing Frequency.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecDT Timer
Exit
Enter the slot number of the 016 module.
Ringing Frequency
Enter slot number (1-17)
xx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [xx].
Ã
Specify 20 Hz or 25 Hz.
Slot xx:
Ringing Freq:
xx = slot number entered in Step 4
Select one
20Hz
25Hz
Exit
Enter
Select 20Hz or
25Hz.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-36
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
4
Second Dial Tone Timer
Use this procedure to program the second dial tone timer. The second dial tone
timer sets a delay in providing a dial tone after a star code is dialed to obtain
special services from the central office. See the Feature Reference for information
about programming the second dial tone timer to prevent toll fraud. The second
dial tone timer is available only in Release 3.1 and later.
4
Summary: Second Dial Tone Timer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
0 ms.
Valid Entries
0–5000 ms, increments of 200 ms.
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More →SecDT→Drop→dial second dial tone
timer value→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→!+P→type second dial tone timer
value→→
Procedure: Second Dial Tone Timer
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Options menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-37
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the Options menu.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Transfer
Callback
CampOn
Ext Status
CallParkRtn
SMDR
Delay Ring
InsideDial
Exit
ReminderSrv
Press More.
U
Select Ringing Frequency.
Options:
>
Make a selection
Unassigned
Cover Delay
BehndSwitch
Inter-Digit
RecallTimer
Ringing Freq
Rotary
SecTD Timer
Exit
Erase the current second dial tone timer.
Second Dialtone Timer:
Enter timeout (0-5000
ms, increments 200)
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop or
Backspace.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+P
Enter the second dial tone timer
(nnnn = 0 to 5000 ms, in increments of 200 ms).
Dial or type [nnnn].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-38
Disconnect Signaling Reliability
4
Use this procedure to classify the disconnect signal sent by the central office on
loop-start trunks as one of the following:
■
Reliable. Signal sent within a short time.
■
Unreliable. Signal may not be provided.
!
SecurityAlert:
Toll fraud can occur if you have loop-start trunks with unreliable disconnect.
In this situation, if someone calls you and you hang up, the CO could send
dial tone before the caller hangs up, allowing the caller to place another call
as if it originated at your company.
The setting selected applies to all trunks in the system because trunks cannot be
programmed individually. The reliable/unreliable setting does not apply to
loop-start trunks emulated on a T1 facility. If you specify a reliable disconnect for
trunks programmed with a short hold disconnect interval (see ‘‘Hold Disconnect
Interval’’), active calls as well as trunks on hold may be disconnected. For more
information about reliable and unreliable disconnect and its implications, see the
Feature Reference.
NOTE:
Certain features (Remote Call Forwarding and Transfer to outside
numbers) and applications (CMS, AUDIX Voice Power, and MERLIN MAIL)
are not recommended with loop-start trunks. See ‘‘Hold Disconnect
Interval’’.
Summary: Disconnect Signaling Reliability
4
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Unreliable
Valid Entries
Unreliable, Reliable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TT/LS Disc→LS Disconnect→Yes or
No→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-39
Procedure: Disconnect Signaling Reliability
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a Selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Touch-Tone/Loop-Start Disconnect.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Loop-Start Disconnect.
TouchTone/LS Disconnect:
Make a selection
Outmode
LS Disconnect
Exit
Specify the disconnect signal as reliable or unreliable.
LS Reliable Disconnect:
Select one
Yes
No
Exit
Enter
Select Yes or
No.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-40
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
4
Toll Type
Use this procedure to specify whether users have to dial a toll prefix (1 or 0)
before dialing an area code and telephone number. (Your local telephone
company should verify toll prefix requirements for each line/trunk.)
This setting is used by the system to classify calls as local or long distance so that
appropriate toll restrictions can be applied.
NOTE:
This option applies only to loop- and ground-start trunks; it does not apply
to tie trunks or DID trunks.
4
Summary: Toll Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Toll prefix required
Valid Entries
Required, Not required
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→Toll Type→Select entry mode→Dial no. of
the line/trunk→ Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→Toll Type→Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
PC Procedure
Page 4-41
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →→ Type no. of the line/trunk→ → →
→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →Select block of lines/trunk→Toggle letter G
On/Off→→→→
4
Procedure: Toll Type
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Toll Type.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Specify the toll type line(s).
Toll Type:
Enter toll prefix lines
Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Exit
●◆
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Entry Mode
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-42
● Single Line Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
PC
Enter the number of the line/trunk that requires a toll prefix (1 or 0)
before the area code.
Toll:
Enter toll prefix lines
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Assign or remove the toll prefix requirement from the line/trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove the toll
prefix requirement from additional lines/trunks by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Specify whether or not a toll prefix is needed.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = toll prefix needed
Off = toll prefix not needed
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-43
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Hold Disconnect Interval
Use this procedure to specify the number of milliseconds before a loop-start
line/trunk is released when a caller on hold hangs up and abandons the call. This
can be specified as either a long interval (450 ms) or a short interval (50 ms). The
hold disconnect interval applies to loop-start trunks connected to 400, 408, or 800
modules; it does not apply to emulated loop-start trunks (T1 facility).
NOTES:
1. If the disconnect interval is longer than the telephone company setting,
the line is not released when a caller on hold hangs up.
2. Do not program a short interval unless the local telephone company’s
central office is the crossbar type.
3. Do not program a reliable disconnect for lines/trunks with a short hold
disconnect interval. This can cause active calls as well as lines/trunks on
hold to be disconnected. See ‘‘Disconnect Signaling Reliability’’.
For more information on Hold Interval Disconnect and Reliable and Unreliable
Disconnect, see the Feature Reference.
Summary: Hold Disconnect Interval
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Long interval (450 ms)
Valid Entries
Long interval, Short interval
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→More→HoldDiscnct→Select entry
mode→Dial no. of the line/trunk→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→More→HoldDiscnct→Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle LED On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
PC Procedure
Page 4-44
To program a single line/trunk:
→U → → →Type no. of the
line/trunk→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→U → →Select block of lines/trunks→ Toggle
letter G On/Off→→→
4
Procedure: Hold Disconnect Interval
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
Select Hold Disconnect Interval.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-45
Additional Information
PC
Specify the hold disconnect line(s). ● ◆
Hold Disconnect:
Lines w/long interval
Lines 01-20
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Entry Mode
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the number of the line or trunk with a long disconnect interval.
Hold Disconnect:
Enter lines/trunks with
long interval
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove the line/trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove a long
disconnect interval from additional lines/trunks
by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-46
◆ Block Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each block.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = long hold disconnect interval
Off = short hold disconnect interval
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Principal User for Personal Line
4
Use this procedure to assign or remove one telephone as principal user for a
personal line. When a telephone with Remote Call Forwarding activated is
assigned as principal user, calls received on the personal line are forwarded to an
outside telephone number. In addition, calls received on that line are sent to that
telephone’s individual and/or Group Coverage receivers unless the personal line
button is set to No Ring.
The principal user assignment must be removed before the trunk can be removed
from a button on the telephone.
When no principal user is assigned for a personal line, calls received on the
personal line are not forwarded to outside telephone numbers; calls received on
the personal line follow the coverage patterns for all users who share the line.
Summary: Principal User for Personal Line
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
4
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Planning Form
Page 4-47
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
No principal user
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→More→PrncipalUsr→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→Type line/trunk no.→→Type ext.
Procedure: Principal User for Personal Line
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-48
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select Principal User.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
Enter the line or trunk number to which you are assigning a principal user.
Principal User:
Enter line/trunk number
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter the extension assigned as principal user for the specified line.
xxx = line/trunk number entered in Step 4
Line/Trunk xxx:
Enter principal ext for
Remote Forward/Coverage
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Assign or remove the extension as principal user.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Ã
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Continue to assign a principal user to another line or trunk, or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next line/trunk
will be displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-49
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
QCC Queue Priority Level
Use this procedure to assign QCC queue priority level values (1 to 7) to each
loop-start, ground-start, and automatic-in tie trunk in your system. The value
assigned determines the order in which calls are sent to the QCC operator
positions. Call priority 1 is the highest priority, and 7 is the lowest priority.
NOTE:
This procedure applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only in a system that includes
QCC operator positions.
Summary: QCC Queue Priority Level
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
4
Valid Entries
1 to 7
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→More→QCC Prior→Dial priority
level→Enter→Select entry mode→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→More→QCC Prior→Dial priority
level→Enter→Select block of lines→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
PC Procedure
Page 4-50
To program a single line/trunk:
→U → →Type priority level →Select entry
mode→Type trunk no.→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→U → →Type priority level→ →Select block of
lines→Toggle letter G On/Off→→→
4
Procedure: QCC Queue Priority Level
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
Select QCC Queue Priority.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
Enter the QCC priority level (n = 1 to 7).
QCC Priority:
Enter queue priority
(1-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-51
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
●◆
Specify the QCC priority lines.
QCC Priority x :
x = QCC queue priority entered in Step 4
Enter line/trunk number
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the line or trunk with the specified queue priority.
QCC Priority x:
Enter line/trunk number
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Assign or remove the line/trunk from the specified QCC priority level.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove the QCC
priority level from additional lines/trunks by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Continue to assign or remove lines or trunks, or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 2. The next QCC priority level will
be displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-52
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Block Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system
programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Assign the queue priority specified.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = to assign the queue priority
Off = not to assign the queue priority
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
QCC Operator to Receive Calls
4
Use this procedure to specify whether or not incoming calls on each line/trunk ring
into the QCC queue and to identify the QCC system operator positions that
receive incoming calls on each line/trunk.
NOTES:
1. This procedure applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only in a system that
includes QCC operator positions.
2. Each ground-start, loop-start, or automatic-in tie trunk programmed to
ring into the QCC queue can be associated with one or more QCC
operator positions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-53
3. If a trunk assigned to ring into the QCC queue is also used for shared
remote access, see “Remote Access Trunk Assignment.” You must
assign remote access before you assign a QCC system operator to
receive calls (see ‘‘QCC Operator to Receive Calls’’).
4. Do not change the factory setting of No QCC Operator Assigned to
Receive Calls for trunks dedicated to incoming calls for calling groups,
trunks used as personal lines, DID trunks, unequipped DS1 trunks, or
dial-in tie trunks.
Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Calls
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
No QCC operator is assigned to receive calls.
Valid Entries
Extension number of first or fifth extension jack
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→More→QCC Oper→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select entry mode →Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Enter→Enter
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→More→QCC Oper→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select block of lines/trunks→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→U → →Type ext. no.→ → →Type
line/trunk no.→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→U → →Type ext. no.→ → Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle letter G On/Off→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-54
Procedure: QCC Operator to Receive Calls
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
Select QCC Operator.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
PrncipalUsr
QCC Prior
QCC Oper
Exit
Specify the QCC operator extension.
QCC Operator:
Enter QCC operator
If no DSS is attached:
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
extension number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If DSS is attached:
Toggle the red LED on or
off as required. Go to Step 6.
On = operator receiving calls
Off = operator not receiving calls
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-55
Additional Information
PC
Specify the line(s) associated
with the QCC operator.● ◆
QCC Operator xxxx:
xxxx = extension number entered in Step 4
Enter line/trunk number
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
For a single line/trunk, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
For a block of lines/trunks, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the line/trunk assigned to ring into the QCC queue.
QCC Operator xxxx:
Enter line/trunk number
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
xxxx = extension number entered in
Step 4
Ã
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Assign or remove the line/trunk from the specified QCC operator.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
lines/trunks from the QCC operator by repeating
Steps 2 and 3.
Continue to assign line/trunk to another QCC operator or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 2. The next QCC operator
will be displayed on Line 1.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-56
◆ Block Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons
on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Assign or remove the lines for the specified QCC operator.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = operator receiving calls
Off = operator not receiving calls
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Loop-Start Identification Delay
4
Use this procedure to delay the alerting (ringing) of calls arriving on loop-start
lines/trunks connected to an 800 GS/LS-ID module at all extensions until
approximately six seconds have elapsed since the port module informed the
system software that the line was ringing, or the system software has been
informed that Caller ID information is available, whichever comes first.
This option can be programmed on a per-trunk basis. It gives the appearance to
the users that the Caller-ID information is available the moment the call arrives at
the extension, and prevents applications or adjuncts from answering the call too
soon.
The LS-ID Delay setting appears on the Ground-Start/Loop-Start Trunk
Information report.
Any extension or adjunct that answers an incoming CO line on the first ring
causes the Caller ID information associated with the call to be lost. The adjunct
must be programmed to either answer the call on the second (or later) ring, or
delay the call. The call can be delayed either by setting the ring option on the
buttons associated with the adjunct or by using the LS-ID Delay option.
NOTE:
Caller-ID information is not available on ground-start lines/trunks.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-57
Summary: Loop-Start Identification Delay
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
No delay
Valid Entries
Loop-start line/trunk numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes, but only to the same trunk type
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→More→LS-ID Delay→Select entry
mode→Dial no. of the line/trunk→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→More→LS-ID Delay→Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle LED On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→U → → →Type no. of the
line/trunk→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→U → →Select block of lines/trunks→ Toggle
letter G On/Off→→→
Procedure: Loop-Start Identification Delay
Console/Display Instructions
_
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-58
Console/Display Instructions
_
_
_
_
Press More.
U
Select Loop-Start Identification Delay.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
PC
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Additional Information
_
Specify the line(s) for LS-ID Delay.
LS-ID
Enter
Lines
Lines
Lines
Lines
Exit
Delay :
Trks w/LS-ID Delay
01-20
Entry Mode
21-40
41-60
61-80
lu
For a single line/trunk, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
_
or a block of lines/trunks, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
● Single Line Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
PC
Enter the line/trunk number for LS-ID Delay.
LS-ID Delay:
Enter Trunk Number for
Alert Delay
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-59
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the LS-ID Delay.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove the
LS-ID delay from additional lines/trunks by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons
on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Assign the LS-ID Delay to the appropriate lines/trunks.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = assign the LS-ID Delay
Off = remove the LS-ID Delay
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Clock Synchronization
4
Use this procedure to specify the primary, secondary, and tertiary clock source. A
clock source may be either a 100D module or a port on an 800 NI-BRI module.
See Feature Reference for more information about the appropriate setting. If the
clock is taken from a 100D module, you can also specify whether the clock is
synchronized to the external endpoint (loop) or to the clock reference source
(local).
NOTE:
This procedure is necessary only if your system includes an 800 NI-BRI
module or more than one 100D module.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-60
4
Summary: Clock Synchronization
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
100D module
Form 3i, Incoming Trunks: BRI Options
Factory Setting
Primary clock: the first 100D module in the control unit
carrier;
Valid Entries
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary, Loop/Local
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→More→ClockSync→Primary→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter→Secondary→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter→Tertiary→dial slot
no.→Enter→Dial port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type slot no.→ → Type port no.
OR Select source of synchronization→→→Type slot
no.→→Type port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→→→Type slot no.→→Type
port no. OR Select source of
synchronization→→→
4
Procedure: Clock Synchronization
Console Display/Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-61
Console/Display Instructions
_
Press More.
U
_
Select Primary.
Clock Syncronization:
Make a selection
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
Exit
PC
Select Clock Synchronization.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
Additional Information
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the slot number of the module to contain the primary system clock.
Primary System Clock
Enter slot number (1-17)
xx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [xx].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If the slot selected in Step 5 contains a
100D module, continue with Step 7.
If the slot selected in Step 5 contains an
800 NI-BRI, go to Step 8.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-62
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether the clock is to be synchronized to an external endpoint (loop)
or is to be free running (local), then go to Step 9.
Primry ClkSource Slot xx:
Select one
Loop
Local
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter
xx = slot number entered in Step x
Select Loop or
Local.
Select the 800 NI-BRI module port to be the primary clock source.
Primary Loop Clk Slot xx:
Enter port number (1-8)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [x].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
_
Select Secondary.
Clock Syncronization:
Make a selection
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
Exit
Ã
Enter the slot number of the module to contain the secondary
system clock.
Secondary System Clock
Enter slot number (1-17)
xx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [xx].
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-63
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If the slot selected in Step 11 contains a
100D module, continue with Step 13.
If the slot selected in Step 11 contains an
800 NI-BRI, go to Step 14.
_
Specify whether the clock is to be synchronized to an external
endpoint (loop) or is to be free running (local), then go to Step 15.
SecondaryClkSource Slotxx:
Select one
Loop
Local
xx = slot number entered in Step x
_
Exit
Enter
Select Loop or
Local.
Select the 800 NI-BRI module port to be the secondary clock source.
Secondary Loop ClkSlot xx:
Enter port number (1-8)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Dial or type [x].
Select Tertiary.
Clock Syncronization:
Make a selection
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
_
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-64
Additional Information
PC
Enter the slot number of the module to contain the tertiary system clock.
Tertiary System Clock
Enter slot number (1-17)
xx
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [xx].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If the slot selected in Step 17 contains a
100D module, continue with Step 19.
If the slot selected in Step 17 contains an
800 NI-BRI, go to Step 20.
_
Specify whether the clock is to be synchronized to an external
endpoint (loop) or is to be free running (local), then go to Step 21.
Tertry ClkSource Slot xx:
Select one
Loop
Local
Exit
Enter
xx = slot number entered in Step 5
Select Loop or
Local.
Select the port on the 800 NI-BRI module to be the tertiary clock source.
Tertiary LoopClk Slot xx:
Enter port number (1-8)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [x].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-65
Trunks to Pools Assignment
4
Use this procedure to create trunk pools (groups of outside lines/trunks connected
to the system). Trunk pools are used to specify preferred routes for Automatic
Route Selection (ARS). In addition, trunk pools enable users to select a line/trunk
by dialing a pool dial-out code or by pressing a single button on the telephone. (A
separate button for each line/trunk is not needed.) Each pool should contain
trunks of the same type (for example, loop- or ground-start or WATS); however,
ground- and loop-start trunks of the same type can be included in the same pool.
Ground-start trunks must be manually assigned. A maximum of 11 trunk pools is
allowed. A trunk can be assigned to only one pool.
Do not mix different service areas of WATS (Wide Area Telecommunications
Service) trunks or FX (Foreign Exchange) lines to different cities. Do not include
both incoming only and outgoing only lines/trunks in the same pool.
If you want to reassign a line/trunk to a different pool, you must remove it from the
current pool before you assign it to the new pool. Once you assign a line/trunk to a
pool, it can be assigned to a button only on a direct-line console operator position;
individual lines intended for personal use on telephones other than the DLC
console should not be assigned to pools.
DID trunks cannot be grouped in pools. Loop-start trunks are automatically placed
in pools and must be removed manually if used for paging loudspeakers, Music
on Hold, or maintenance alarms.
Dial-in tie trunks should not be grouped in pools if you intend to assign Pool
buttons on telephones.
If you are using Automatic Route Selection, the main pool (factory-set dial-out
code 70) must contain loop- or ground-start trunks.
The system provides an error tone when a line/trunk is in use or if a loudspeaker
paging system, Music on Hold, or maintenance alarm is already assigned;
however, the system does not indicate the reason for the error tone.
NOTE:
This procedure applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
Summary: Trunks to Pools Assignment
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-66
Factory Setting
All loop-start trunks are assigned to the main trunk pool
(factory-set extension number 70); all tie trunks are assigned
to the trunk pool with the factory-set extension
number 891; no factory-set extensions numbers are assigned
to ground-start trunks.
Valid Entries
Line numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→Pools→Dial pool dial-out code→Select
entry mode→Dial no. of the
line/trunk→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→Pools→Dial pool dial-out code→Select
block of lines/trunks→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →Type pool dial-out code→ → →Type no.
of the line/trunk→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →Type pool dial-out code→ →Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle letter R On/Off→→→
Procedure: Trunks to Pools Assignment
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
4
Select Pools.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
_
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-67
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the pool number.
Pools:
Enter pool number
Backspace
Exit
Dial or type [nnn].
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
_
_
_
_
Ã
●◆
Specify the pool line(s).
Pool xxx:
Assign lines to pool
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Exit
xxx = pool dial-out code entered in Step 3
_
For a single line/trunk, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
For a block of lines/trunks go to
◆ Block Procedure.
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the line/trunk number for the pool.
Pool xxx:
Enter line/trunk number
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
xxx = pool dial-out code entered in Step 3
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Assign or remove the line/trunk from the pool.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
additional lines/trunks from the pool by
repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-68
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Block Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons
on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Assign the appropriate lines/trunks to the pool.
Toggle the red LED on or off as required.
On = trunk is assigned to specified pool
Off = trunk is not assigned to specified pool
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Copy Options for Lines/Trunks
4
Use this procedure to copy options assigned to loop-start or ground-start trunks,
Tie trunks, or DID trunks. Note that many of these options apply to Hybrid/PBX
systems only. The following information is copied for each line/trunk type:
■
Loop-Start or Ground-Start Trunks (including those emulated on T1
facilities). Toll type, signaling type, and trunk pool assignment (Hybrid/PBX
only).
■
Tie Trunks. Direction, Tie trunk type, E&M signal, dial mode, dial tone,
answer supervision time, disconnect time, and trunk pool assignment
(Hybrid/PBX only).
■
DID Trunks (Hybrid/PBX only). Block assignment and disconnect time.
To find out whether there is an optional feature assigned that you would like to
copy, use Inspct from the system programming console or D on a PC.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Page 4-69
NOTES:
1.You can copy options to a block of lines/trunks only if they are all the
same type (loop-start, ground-start, Tie, or DID). If you attempt to copy
assignments and there is a mismatch in line/trunk type, information is
copied to that point only. You receive no error message.
2.If you are copying options to a block of lines/trunks, they must be
sequentially numbered.
3.If the block you are copying to includes an invalid line/trunk type, the
copying process stops at the invalid type. Only the lines/trunks that were
copied to before the invalid type was found are copied successfully.
4.If you are copying assignments to a block of lines/trunks and one of the
lines or trunks is in use, you see the message Trunk Busy - Pls wait
on your display. The copying for the rest of the lines/trunks in the block is
delayed until the busy line/trunk becomes idle. If you exit without waiting
for the copying to complete, the copying done up to that point is not
canceled.
Summary: Copy Options for Lines/Trunks
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All (but note differences)
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: TIE
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Not applicable
Console Procedure To copy individual lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→Copy→Single→Dial copy from trunk
no.→Enter→Dial copy to trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To copy blocks of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→Copy→Block→Dial copy from trunk
no.→Enter→Dial first copy to trunk no. in
block→Enter→Dial last copy to trunk no. in
block→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
4
Page 4-70
PC Procedure
To copy individual lines/trunks:
→ →→ Type copy to trunk no. → →Type copy
from trunk no.→→→→
To copy blocks of lines/trunks:
→ →→ Type copy from trunk no. →Type first copy
to trunk no. in block→→→Type last copy to trunk no.
in block→→→→
Procedure: Copy Options for Lines and Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Copy.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
4
Specify trunk(s).
_
●◆
Copy Trunks:
Make a selection
Single
Block
_
Exit
● Single Trunk Procedure
To copy a single trunk,
select Single and go to
● Single Trunk Procedure.
To copy a block of trunks,
select Block and go to
◆ Block of Trunks Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-71
Additional Information
PC
Enter the trunk number to copy from.
Copy Trunk Info From:
Enter trunk number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message, wait
for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
Enter the trunk number to copy to.
COPY Trunk xxx To:
Enter trunk number
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Continue to copy options from this trunk or to another trunk or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next QCC operator
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Lines and Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-72
◆ Block of Trunks Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
Enter the trunk number to copy from.
Copy Trunk:
Enter copy from trunk
number
Backspace
Exit
PC
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message, wait
for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
Enter the first trunk number to copy to.
COPY Trunk xxx To:
Enter starting trunk
number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
xxx = “copy from” trunk entered in Step 1
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Station Busy message, wait
for an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
Enter the last trunk number in the block to copy to.
START at Trunk xxx To:
Enter ending trunk
number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
xxx = “start copy to” trunk entered
in Step 3
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number [nnn]
¤
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-73
Additional Information
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
DS1 Facilities
Use the procedures in this section to program the following options for DS1
(digital signal level 1) facilities (T1 or PRI) connected to a 100D (DS1) module:
■
Type of DS1 facility
— T1
— ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) Primary Rate Interface
(PRI)
■
Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing
■
Frame Format
■
Zero Code Suppression
■
Signaling Mode
■
Line Compensation
■
Channel Service Unit
Type of DS1 Facility
4
Use this procedure to specify the type of facility (T1 or PRI) connected to a 100D
(DS1) module. If T1 type is programmed, and the channels are used for emulation
and/or AT&T Switched Network (ASN), you must specify the type of channel
emulation.
If the type is T1 and the type of channel emulation is tie trunk, you must specify
whether the lines/trunks are TIE-PBX, Toll, or Switched 56 Data service. The valid
settings are as follows:
■
TIE-PBX. Select when emulated tie trunks are used to connect to another
communications system (such as PBX or Centrex). The transmit/receive
parameter is set to 0/4.
■
Toll. Select when emulated tie trunks are used for ASN services (such as
Megacom, Megacom 800, or Software Defined Network). The
transmit/receive parameter is set to 0/6.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
■
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-74
TIE - S56 Data. Select when emulated tie trunks are used for Switched 56
Data Service. Switched 56 Data Service is available only in Release 4.0
and later.
If the type is T1 and S56 Data Network Service is selected, you must specify the
following parameters (Switched 56 Data Service is available only in Release 4.0
and later):
■
Direction. Specifies whether the trunk operates in one- or two-way
direction. For one-way trunks, Outgoing Only or Incoming Only must also
be specified.
■
Trunk Seizure Type. Trunk seizure type is administered independently for
incoming or outgoing directions. Select one of the following: Wink Start,
Delay Start, or Automatic Start.
■
Answer Supervision Time. The time in milliseconds the answer
supervision signal must be present to be considered valid.
■
Disconnect Time. The time in milliseconds the disconnect signal must be
present to be considered valid.
■
Dial Mode. Select either Rotary or Touch-Tone. Dial mode is set
independently for incoming or outgoing directions (Inmode or Outmode).
NOTE:
Touch-Tone receivers are required on the far-end switch when the
setting is Touch-Tone.
Table 4-1 shows the factory setting for each S56 Data Network Service option and
the valid range for each threshold.
If you select T1, channels can emulate ground- or loop-start trunks, tie trunks, or
DID trunks in any combination. Note that unused channels must be specified as
unequipped.
If either T1 or PRI is selected, channels can be used for ASN services. When T1
channels are used for ASN services, each channel must be programmed for tie
trunk emulation.
If you select PRI, you must also perform additional procedures. At a minimum, the
Framing Mode and Zero Code Suppression procedures must be performed. See
‘‘PRI Facilities’’ for more information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Page 4-75
Summary: Type of DS1 Facility
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
T1, See Table 4-1 for options
Valid Entries
T1, PRI
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To select PRI:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→PRI→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→
Exit
To select T1: All Ground, All Loop, or All Unequip:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→Select type of
emulation→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1: Ground-Start, Loop-Start, All Tie, or Unequip:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→Select type of
emulation→Enter→Dial channel
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1: All DID:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→All
DID→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1: DID:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→DID→Enter→D
ial channel no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-76
To select T1- All Tie:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→All
TIE→Enter→TIE-PBX, Toll, or S56→Enter→Dial channel
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1- Tie:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→TIE→Enter→TIE-PBX,
Toll, or S56→Enter→Dial channel
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1: All Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→ALL S56
Data→Enter→Select Direction, Intype, Outtype,
AnsSupv, Disconnect, Inmode, or Outmode→Program
options→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To select T1: Switched 56 Data:
LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Type→T1→Enter→More→S56
Data→Enter→Dial channel no.→Enter→Select
Direction, Intype, Outtype, AnsSupv, Disconnect,
Inmode, or Outmode→Program
options→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To select PRI:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → →
→ → → To select T1: All Ground, All Loop, All Unequip:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → →
U →Select type of emulation → → → → → To select T1: Ground-Start, Loop-Start, All Tie, or Unequip:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → →Select type
of emulation→→Type channel no.→→→
→ → To select T1: All DID:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → → U →
→ → → → → To select T1: DID:
→ →Type slot
no.→→→→→U→→
→Type channel no.→ → → → → To select T1- All Tie:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → → ,
or →→→→→
,
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-77
To select T1- Tie:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → → , ,
or →→Type channel no.→→→→→
To select T1: ALL Switched 56 Data:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → →U →
→ →Select , , , , , , or
→Program options→ → → → →
To select T1: Switched 56 Data:
→ →Type slot no.→ → → → →U →
→ →Type channel no.→ → Select , , ,
, , , or → Program options→ → → →
Table 4-1.
→
Switched 56 Data Signaling Options
Option
Direction
Intype
Outtype
Answer Supervision
Disconnect
Inmode
Outmode
Factory Setting
Range
Two-Way
Two-Way, Outgoing, Incoming
Wink-Route by Dial Plan Wink-Route by Dial Plan,
Delay-Route by Dial Plan
Auto-Route by Line Appearance
Wink
Wink, Delay, Auto
300 ms.
200-4800 ms. (increments of 20 ms)
300 ms.
200-4800 ms. (increments of 20 ms)
Touch Tone
Touch Tone, Rotary
Touch Tone
Touch Tone, Rotary
4
Procedure: Type of DS1 Facility
Console Display/Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
_
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-78
Additional Information
PC
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the System Busy message, wait
for an idle condition and try again or exit
system programming and try again later.
_
_
Select Type.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Select a facility type.
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
DS1 Slot xx:
Select one
T1
PRI
_
Exit
Enter
Select T1 or
PRI.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Page 4-79
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you selected PRI, you have finished this
procedure. Go to ‘‘Frame Format’’.
Select a trunk type.
Port Type Slot
Select One
GroundStart
Loop Start
TIE
Unequipped
Exit
>
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
All Ground
All Loop
All TIE
All Unequip
Enter
If the trunk type you want is not
displayed, go to the second screen
of the Port Type Slot menu.
xx:
Press More to view second screen.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
U
Port Type Slot xx:
Select one
DID
All DID
S56 Data
All S56 Data
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Console/Display Instructions
Save your entry.
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-80
Additional Information
PC
▲❃●◆
Select Enter.
If you selected All Ground, All Loop, All
Unequipped, or All DID, you have finished
this procedure.
If you selected Ground Start, Loop
Start, DID, or Unequipped trunks,
continue with Step 10.
If you selected TIE trunks, go to
▲ Tie Trunk Procedure.
If you selected All TIE trunks, go to
❃ All Tie Trunk Procedure.
If you selected S56 Data, go to
◆ S56 Data Procedure.
If you selected ALL S56 Data, go to
● All S56 Data Procedure.
Enter the channel number (nn = 1 to 24).
**** slot xx:
Enter channel num (1 to 24)
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
**** = option name selected in Step 8
xx = slot entered in Step 3
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Assign or remove the channel.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
additional channels by repeating the last
two steps.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-81
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 13.
Select Next.
Return to Step 10. The next slot will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
▲ Tie Trunk Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
Specify the emulated trunks as TIE-PBX, Toll or S56 Data.
Tie Type slot xx:
Select one
TIE-PBX
Toll
S56 Data
_
Exit
xx = slot entered in Step 3
TIE-PBX: Transmit-receive loss set to 0/4.
Toll: Channels used for network services
transmit receive loss set to 0/6.
S56 Data: Channels used for data.
Enter
Select TIE-PBX,
Toll
S56 Data
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Enter the channel number (nn = 1 to 24).
TIE Lines Slot xx:
Enter channel num (1-24)
Backspace
Exit
Delete
Next
Enter
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-82
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the channel.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
additional channels by repeating Steps 3
and 4.
Continue to assign the channel to another slot or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 11. The next slot will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✚ All Tie Trunk Procedure
_
_
Specify the emulated trunks as TIE-PBX, Toll or S56 Data.
All TIE Type Slot xx:
Select one
TIE-PBX
Toll
S56 Data
_
Exit
xx = slot entered in Step 3
TIE-PBX: Transmit-receive loss set to 0/4.
Toll: Channels used for network services
transmit receive loss set to 0/6.
S56 Data: Channels used for data.
Enter
Select TIE-PBX,
Toll
S56 Data
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-83
◆ S56 Data Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the channel number (nn = 1 to 24).
S56 Data Lines Slot xx:
Enter channel num (1-24)
xx = slot number entered in Step x.
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
¤
Assign or remove the channel.
Select Enter or
Delete.
If you select Enter, continue with Step 3. If you select Delete, return to Step 1.
▲✚‹✱Œ
Select an option.
S56 Data Signaling:
Make a selection
Direction
Disconnect
Intype
Inmode
Outtype
Outmode
AnsSupvr
Exit
If you select Direction, go to
▲ Direction procedure.
If you select Intype or Outtype, go to
✚ Trunk Seizure Type procedure.
If you select AnsSupvr, go to
‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure.
If you select Disconnect, go to
✱ Disconnect Timing Procedure.
If you select Inmode or Outmode, go to
ΠDial Mode Procedure.
▲ Direction Procedure
_
_
Select Direction.
S56 Data:
Ch xx:
Enter channel direction
Two Way
Outgoing
Incoming
Next
Exit
Enter
xx = channel selected in Step x.
Select Two Way,
Outgoing, or
Incoming
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-84
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign direction to the next channel or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next channel will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✚ Trunk Seizure Type Procedure
_
_
Select Trunk Seizure Type.
S56 Data:
Select **type
Wink
Delay
Auto
Ch xx:
_
Exit
Next
Enter
xx = channel selected in Step x.
** = In or Out
Select Wink,
Delay, or
Auto
If Intype was selected in Step 3 of the
main procedure, the following screen
options will appear:
Wink-Route by Dial Plan
Delay-Route by Dial Plan
Auto-Route by LineAprnce
Continue to assign Intype or Outtype to the next channel or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next channel will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-85
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
PC
Erase the current answer supervision time (nnnn).
S56 Data
Ch xx:
Enter AnsSupervisionTime
(20-4800, increment 20)
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Additional Information
Next
Enter
xx = number entered in Step 1
Press Drop.
!
Enter the new answer supervision time
(nnnn = 20 to 4800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
+0
Continue to assign answer supervision time to another channel or go to Step 4.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next channel will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✱ Disconnect Timing Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn).
S56 Data
Ch xx:
Enter Disconnect time
(140-4800)
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
xx = number entered in Step 1
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-86
Enter the new disconnect time
(nnnn = 140 to 4800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
Continue to assign disconnect time to another channel or go to Step 4.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next channel will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
ΠDial Mode Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Choose an option.
S56 Data:
Select **mode
Rotary
Touch Tone
Ch xx:
xx = channel selected in Step x
** = In or Out
Next
Enter
Select Rotary or
Touch Tone
_
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-87
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign Dial Mode type to the next channel or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 13. The next channel will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
● All S56 Data Procedure
_
▲✚‹✱Œ
Select an option.
S56 Data Signaling:
Make a selection
Direction
Disconnect
Intype
Inmode
Outtype
Outmode
AnsSupvr
Exit
If you select Direction, go to
▲ Direction Procedure.
If you select Intype or Outtype, go to
✚ Trunk Seizure Type procedure.
If you select AnsSupvr, go to
‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure.
If you select Disconnect, go to
✱ Disconnect Timing Procedure.
If you select Inmode or Outmode, go to
ΠDial Mode Procedure.
▲ Direction Procedure
_
_
_
Select Direction.
S56 Data:
Enter channel direction
Two Way
Outgoing
Incoming
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Two Way,
Outgoing, or
Incoming
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-88
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✚ Trunk Seizure Type Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select Trunk Seizure Type.
S56 Data:
Select **type
Wink
Delay
Auto
** = In or Out
_
Exit
Next
Enter
Select Wink,
Delay, or
Auto
If Intype was selected in Step 3 of the
main procedure, the following screen
options will appear:
Wink-Route by Dial Plan
Delay-Route by Dial Plan
Auto-Route by LineAprnce
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
‹ Answer Supervision Timing Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current answer supervision time (nnnn).
S56 Data
Enter AnsSupervisionTime
(20-4800, increment 20)
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-89
Additional Information
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
PC
Enter the new answer supervision time
(nnnn = 20 to 4800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
Dial or type [nnnn].
Issue 1
June 1997
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✱ Disconnect Timing Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn).
All S56 Data
Enter Disconnect time
(140-4800)
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Next
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the new disconnect time
(nnnn = 140 to 4800 ms, in increments of 20 ms).
Dial or type [nnnn].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-90
ΠDial Mode Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Choose an option.
All S56 Data:
Select **mode
Rotary
Touch Tone
** = In or Out
_
Exit
Next
Enter
Select Rotary or
Touch Tone
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing
4
Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls received on a Switched 56
Network line. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number and
then optionally deleting and/or adding digits to direct the call to a specific
endpoint. The expected digits are the number of incoming digits outpulsed from
the central office.
Summary: Switched 56 Dial Plan Routing
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
D4 compatible
Valid Entries
D4, ESF
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To specify Expected Digits:
LinesTrunks→More→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Expected Digits→Drop→Dial expected
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-91
To specify Delete Digits:
LinesTrunks→More→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Delete Digits→Drop→Dial delete
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Add Digits:
LinesTrunks→More→T1 Data NW→S56 Dial Plan
Routing→Add Digits→Drop→Dial add
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To specify Expected Digits:
→U→→→→! + 0→Type expected
digits→→→→
To specify Delete Digits:
→U→→→→! + 0→Type delete
digits→→→→
To specify Add Digits:
→U→→→→! + 0→Type add
digits→→→→
4
Switched 56 Data Dial Plan Routing
Console Display/Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-92
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select T1 Data NW.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
_
Select T1 Data NW.
T1 Data Network:
Make a selection
S56 Dial Plan Routing
>
_
Exit
Select an option.
S56 Data Dial Plan Rtng:
_
_
Expected Digits
Add Digits
Delete Digits
If you select Expected Digits, go to
▲ Expected Digits Procedure.
If you select Add Digits, go to
✚ Add Digits procedure.
_
Exit
▲✚‹
Disconnect
If you select Delete Digits, go to
‹ Delete Digits Procedure.
▲ Expected Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of expected digits (n).
S56 Data Expected Digits:
Enter number of expected
digits (1-3)
n
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the new number of expected digits (n = 0 to 3).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Console/Display Instructions
Page 4-93
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✚ Add Digits Procedure
Erase the current number of digits to add (nnnn = 0 to 9999).
S56 Data Add Digits:
Enter digits to add
nnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the new number of digits to add (n = 0 to 3).
Dial or type [n].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
‹ Delete Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of digits to delete (n).
S56 Data Delete Digits:
Enter number of digits
to delete (0-4)
n
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Page 4-94
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the new number of digits to delete (n = 0 to 4).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
4
Frame Format
Use this procedure to specify the framing format for the 100D module as
D4-compatible or Extended Superframe. Your selection must match the framing
mode at the far end of the DS1 facility.
4
Summary: Frame Format
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
D4 compatible
Valid Entries
D4, ESF
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→FrameFormat→Select format
type→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type slot no.→ → →Select format
type→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-95
4
Procedure: Frame Format
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
_
Ã
Select Frame Format.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-96
Console/Display Instructions
_
Additional Information
PC
Select a format type.
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
DS1 Slot xx:
Select one
D4 Compatible
Extended Super Frame
_
Select D4 Compatible or
Extended Super Frame.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
If you are using PRI Facilities, go to
‘‘Zero Code Suppression’’.
4
Zero Code Suppression
Use this procedure to specify zero code suppression for the 100D module as AMI
zero code suppression (AMI-ZCS) or bipolar eight zero suppression (B8ZS). Your
selection must match the suppression at the far end of the DS1 facility.
Summary: Zero Code Suppression
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
AMI-ZCS
Valid Entries
AMI-ZCS, B8ZS
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Suppression→AMI-ZCS or
B8ZS→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type slot no.→→→ or
→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-97
4
Procedure: Zero Code Suppression
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-98
Console/Display Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select Suppression.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Select AMI zero code suppression or bipolar 8 zero substitution.
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
DS1 Slot xx:
Select one
AMI-ZCS
B8ZS
_
Exit
Select AMI-ZCS or
B8ZS.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Signaling Mode
Use this procedure to specify the signaling for the 100D module as robbed-bit or
common-channel signaling.
NOTE:
This procedure is needed only for T1 facilities; common-channel signaling
is set automatically for PRI facilities.
4
Summary: Signaling Mode
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Robbed bit
Valid Entries
Robbed Bit, Common Channel
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Signaling→Select type of
signaling→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type slot no.→ → →Select type of
signaling→→→
4
Procedure: Signaling Mode
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-100
Console/Display Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select Signaling.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Select the type of signaling.
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Signaling DS1 Slot xx:
Select one
Robbed Bit
Common Channel
_
Exit
Select Robbed Bit or
Common Channel.
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Line Compensation
Use this procedure to specify the amount of cable loss in decibels. Cable loss is
based on the length of cable between the 100D module and the Channel Service
Unit, as shown below:
■
1 = 0.6 dB loss
■
2 = 1.2 dB loss
■
3 = 1.8 dB loss
■
4 = 2.4 dB loss
■
5 = 3.0 dB loss
Summary: Line Compensation
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-101
Factory Setting
1 (0.6 dB loss)
Valid Entries
1 to 5
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot no.→Enter→Line
Comp→Drop→Dial line compensation
value→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type slot no.→ → → ! + 0→ Type line
compensation value→→→
4
Procedure: Line Compensation
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Page 4-102
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Line Compensation.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
_
Erase the current line compensation value (n).
Line Comp DS1 Slot xx:
Enter line compensation
value (1-5)
n
Backspace
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Enter
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Press Drop.
!
Enter a value for the line compensation (n = 1 to 5).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Channel Service Unit
4
Use this procedure to specify the type of equipment provided by the local
telephone company as foreign exchange or special access.
NOTE:
You do not need to use this procedure unless your system emulates
loop-start or ground-start with the T1 type of DS1 facility.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
4
Page 4-103
4
Summary: Channel Service Unit
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
100D module idle
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Foreign Exchange
Valid Entries
Foreign Exchange, Special Access
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→LS/GS/DS1→Dial slot
no.→Enter→ChannelUnit→Foreign Exchange or
Special Access→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type slot no.→→→ or
→→→
4
Procedure: Channel Service Unit
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Loop-Start/Ground-Start/DS1.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DS1 Facilities
Page 4-104
Console/Display Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
Loop/Ground/DS1:
Enter slot number(1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Dial or type [nn].
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Channel Unit.
DS1 Slot xx:
Make a selection
Type
Line Comp
FrameFormat
ChannelUnit
Suppression
Signaling
Exit
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
_
Select the type of channel unit.
ChannelUnit DS1 Slot xx:
Select one
Foreign Exchange
Special Access
Exit
Enter
xx = slot number entered in Step 3
Select Foreign Exchange or
Special Access.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-105
4
Tie Trunks
This section covers programming procedures for the following tie trunk options:
■
Direction
■
Tie Trunk Seizure Type
■
E&M Signal
■
Dial Mode
■
Tie Trunk Dial Tone
■
Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time
■
Disconnect Time
See “Equipment and Operations Reference” for additional information on tie
trunks.
4
Direction
Use this procedure to specify whether tie trunks operate in a one- or two-way
direction. For one-way tie trunks, you must also specify whether the direction is
out or in.
4
Summary: Direction
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Tie trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
Two-way
Valid Entries
Two-way, Outgoing, Incoming
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Direction→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Specify direction→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk no. → →Specify
direction→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
4
Page 4-106
4
Procedure: Direction
Console Display/Instructions
_
_
_
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select TIE Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Direction.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Enter the tie trunk number.
Direction:
Enter trunk for assignmt
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
If you get the Trunk Busy message, wait for
an idle condition or exit system programming and try again later.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
4
_
_
_
Page 4-107
Specify the trunk direction.
Trunk xxxx:
Select trunk direction
Two Way
OutGoing
InComing
Next
Exit
Enter
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Select Two Way,
OutGoing, or
InComing.
Continue to assign the direction to another trunk or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Tie Trunk Seizure Type
4
Use this procedure to specify whether the seizure type of incoming or outgoing tie
trunk is wink, delay, immediate, or automatic.
The following settings are recommended when T1 facilities are programmed for
tie-trunk emulation to provide special network services [such as Megacom,
Megacom 800, or Software Defined Network (SDN)]:
■
If Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is used for all outgoing calls and no
personal line or Pool buttons are used, assign the wink signaling type. Set
the network to wink.
■
If personal line or Pool buttons (pool or dial-out codes) are used for
outgoing calls, assign the immediate signaling type. Set the network to dial.
Contact your service provider for more information about the dial setting.
■
If Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) is used for incoming calls,
assign the wink signaling type. The network is also set to wink. (Setting
both ends to immediate also works.) Contact your service provider for more
information about the appropriate setting.
■
When DNIS is not used for incoming calls, assign the automatic signaling
type. The network is set to automatic.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-108
4
Summary: Tie Trunk Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Tie trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
Wink
Valid Entries
Wink, Delay, Immediate, Automatic
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Intype or Outtype→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Specify seizure type →Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ → or → Type trunk no. → →Specify
seizure type →→→
4
Procedure: Tie Trunk Type
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Console Display/Instructions
PC
Additional Information
PC
Select Intype (incoming) or Outtype (outgoing).
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Select Intype or
Outtype.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-109
Enter the tie trunk number.
**** = option name selected in Step 3
**** Trunk Tyoe:
Enter trunk for assignmt
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the tie trunk type.
Trunk xxxx:
Select ****
Trk type
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Wink
Delay
Immmed
Auto
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Wink,
Delay,
Immed, or
Auto.
Continue to assign a type to another trunk or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-110
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming Menu.
Select Exit two times.
4
E&M Signal
Use this procedure to specify the type of tie trunk signal, as follows:
■
E&M Mode:
— 1S. Type 1 Standard. Tie trunks that are connected through the
local telephone company.
— 1C. Type 1 Compatible. Tie trunks that are connected directly to a
system that uses 1S signaling.
■
Simplex Mode:
— 5. Type 5 Simplex. Tie trunks that are connected to a system using
Type 5 signaling.
4
Summary: E&M Signal
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Tie trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
1S
Valid Entries
1S, 1C, 5
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→E&M Signal→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Specify signaling type→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk no. → →Specify signaling
type→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-111
4
Procedure: E&M Signal
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select E&M Signal.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Enter a tie trunk number.
E&M Signal:
Enter trunk for assignmt
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-112
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the type of signaling for the trunk.
xxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Trunk xxx:
Select E&M Trk Signaling
Type1S
Type1C
Type5
Select Type1S,
Type1C, or
Type5.
Next
Exit
Enter
Continue to assign E&M signaling to another trunk or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Dial Mode
Use this procedure to specify whether an incoming or outgoing tie trunk is
touch-tone or rotary.
Touch-tone cannot be programmed for incoming immediate signaling tie trunks.
Users of touch-tone single-line telephone cannot make calls by using individual
trunks programmed for rotary operation. The touch-tone signals generated from
the telephone while the user is dialing are transmitted to the central office at the
same time the rotary signals are sent to the system. The central office receives
both signals and cannot process the call.
4
Summary: Dial Mode
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
Rotary
Valid Entries
Rotary, Touch-tone
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-113
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Inmode or Outmode→Entry
Mode→Dial line/trunk no.→Enter or
Delete→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Inmode or Outmode→Select
block of lines→Toggle LED On/Off→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ → or → →Type line/trunk no. → or
→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ → or →Select block of lines→ Toggle letter
G On/Off→→→
4
Procedure: Dial Mode
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-114
Additional Information
PC
Select Inmode signaling or Outmode signaling.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Select Inmode or
Outmode.
●◆
Specify the line(s).
**** Trunk Dial:
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Enter trunk w/TouchTone
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the number of the line/trunk.
**** Trunk dial:
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Enter Trunks w/TouchTone
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove touch-tone dial mode from the line/trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
touch-tone dial mode from additional
lines/trunks by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-115
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Block Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 line buttons on the system
programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Specify touch-tone or rotary signaling for each line/trunk.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = touch-tone
Off = rotary
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Tie Trunk Dial Tone
Use this procedure to specify whether the system provides dial tone for people
calling in on a tie trunk. Settings are remote (system provides dial tone) and local
(system does not provide dial tone).
Summary: Tie Trunk Dial Tone
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
Remote
Valid Entries
Remote, Local
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-116
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Dialtone→Entry Mode→Dial
trunk no.→Enter or Delete→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Dialtone→Select block of
lines/trunks→Toggle LED On/Off→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →→ → Type trunk no. → or
→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →→ Select block of lines→Toggle letter G
On/Off→→→
4
Procedure: Tie Trunk Dial Tone
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Dial Tone.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-117
Additional Information
PC
Specify the line(s). ● ◆
**** = option name selected in Step 3
**** Dial Tone:
Enter trunk w/Remote Dial
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
Enter the number of the trunk (nnn).
OutTrunk Dial :
Enter Trunks w/TouchTone
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove remote dial tone.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
remote dial tone from additional lines/trunks
by repeating Steps 2 and 3.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-118
◆ Block Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with the 20 buttons
on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Specify remote or local dial signaling for each block.
Toggle the green LED on or off as required.
On = remote dial tone
Off = local dial tone
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time
4
Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk answer supervision time in
milliseconds. This is the time limit for the called system to respond.
Summary: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Factory Setting
300 ms
Valid Entries
20 to 4800 ms, in increments of 20 ms
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→AnsSupvr→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of ms→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type trunk no.→→! + 0→Type no. of
ms→→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-119
Procedure: Tie Trunk Answer Supervision Time 4
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Answer Supervision.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Enter a tie trunk number.
Answer Supv:
Enter trunk for assigmt
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-120
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of milliseconds (nnnn).
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Trunk xxxx:
Enter AnsSupervisionTime
(20-4800, increment 20)
nnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the answer supervision time (nnnn = 0 to 4800 ms, increments of 20).
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Trunk xxxx:
Enter AnsSupervisionTime
(20-4800, increment 20)
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
Continue to assign the supervision time to another trunk or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Disconnect Time
Use this procedure to specify the tie trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds.
Summary: Disconnect Time
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3c, Incoming Trunks: Tie
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Page 4-121
Factory Setting
300 ms
Valid Entries
140 to 2400 ms
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→TIE Lines→Disconnect→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of ms→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk no. → →! + 0 →Type
no. of ms→→→
4
Procedure: Disconnect Time
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Tie Lines.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Disconnect.
TIE Trunks:
Make a selection
Direction
Inmode
Intype
Outmode
Outtype
Dialtone
E&M Signal
AnsSupvr
Exit
Disconnect
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Tie Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-122
Additional Information
PC
Enter the trunk number.
Disconnect:
Enter trunk for assignmt
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current disconnect time (nnnn).
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Trunk xxxx:
Enter Disconnect Time
(140-2400)
nnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the disconnect time (nnnn = 140 to 2400 ms).
xxxx = trunk entered in Step 4
Trunk xxxx:
Enter Disconnect Time
(140-2400)
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Continue to assign the disconnect time to another trunk or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-123
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
DID Trunks
This section covers programming DID trunks and includes procedures for the
following:
■
Block Assignment
■
DID Trunk Type
■
Disconnect Time
■
Expected Digits
■
Delete Digits
■
Add Digits
■
Signaling
■
Invalid Destination
NOTE:
These procedures apply to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
4
Block Assignment
Use this procedure to assign each DID trunk connected to the system to either
Block 1 or Block 2.
Summary: Block Assignment
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
Block 1
Valid Entries
Block 1, Block 2
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-124
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→DID→Block→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Entry Mode→Type the line/trunk no.→Enter
or Delete→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→DID→Block→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Select trunk lines→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →→ Type trunk block no.→ →Type
the line/trunk no.→ or →→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →→ Type trunk block no.→ →
Select trunk lines→Toggle letter G On/Off→→
→→
4
Procedure: Block Assignment
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-125
Additional Information
PC
Select Block Assignment.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Block Assignment:
Enter the block number
(1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the line(s).
Direct Inward Dialing:
Assign lines to blocks
Lines 01-20
For a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
For a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-126
Enter the trunk number.
x = block entered in Step 4
Block x:
Enter line/trunk number
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove the trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove DID
trunks from the block by repeating Steps 2
and 3.
Continue to enter trunks for the other trunk block or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 2. The block will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the DID trunks associated with 20 buttons on the system programming
console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-127
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the trunk.
Toggle the green LED on or
off as required.
On = assign DID trunk to block
Off = remove DID trunk from block
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
DID Trunk Type
Use this procedure to specify the DID trunk type as either immediate-start or
wink-start. Wink-start is more reliable if the local telephone company supports it.
4
Summary: DID Trunk Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
DID trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
Wink-start
Valid Entries
Immediate-start, Wink-start
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→Type→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Immed or Wink→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type trunk block no.→→ or
→→→
4
Procedure: DID Trunk Type
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-128
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Type.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Trunk Type:
Enter block number (1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-129
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify immediate-start or wink-start.
x = block number entered in Step 4
DID Block x:
Select type
Immed
Wink
Select Immed or
Wink.
Next
Exit
Enter
Continue to specify trunk type for the other trunk block or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Disconnect Time
Use this procedure to specify the DID trunk disconnect time limit in milliseconds.
Summary: Disconnect Time
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
500 ms
Valid Entries
10 to 2400 ms, in increments of 10 ms
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→Disconnect→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of ms→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk no. → →! + P →Type
no. of ms→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-130
4
Procedure:Disconnect Time
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Disconnect.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-131
Additional Information
PC
Enter the DID trunk.
DID Disconnect Time:
Enter the trunk number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current disconnect time (nnn).
xxx = trunk entered in Step 4
DID Trunk xxx:
Enter disconnect time
(10-2400,incrmnts 10)
nnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the disconnect time in milliseconds (nnn = 10 to 2400 ms, in increments
of 10).
Ã
Dial or type [nnn].
+P
Continue to specify the disconnect time for another DID trunk or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next DID trunk will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-132
4
Expected Digits
Use this procedure to tell the system how many digits are sent by the local
telephone company.
4
Summary: Expected Digits
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
3 digits
Valid Entries
1 to 4 digits
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→ExpectDigit→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type trunk block no.→→! +
→Type no. of digits →→
P
4
Procedure: Expected Digits
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-133
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Expected Digits.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Expected Digits:
Enter block number (1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current number of expected digits (n).
x = block entered in Step 4
DID Block x:
Enter number of expected
digits (1-4)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-134
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the number of expected digits (n = 1 to 4).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Continue to specify expected digits for the other trunk block or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next block will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Delete Digits
Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits to be deleted from the
digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the number
of digits sent by the telephone company is greater than the number in the system
numbering plan.
4
Summary: Delete Digits
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
0 digits
Valid Entries
0 to 4 digits
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→DeleteDigit→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk block no.→ ! + P→ Type
no. of digits→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-135
4
Procedure: Delete Digits
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Delete Digit.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Delete Digits:
Enter block number (1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-136
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of delete digits (n).
x = block entered in Step 4
DID Block x:
Enter number of digits
to delete (0-4)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the number of digits to delete (n = 0 to 4).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
+0
Continue to specify delete digits for the other trunk block or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next block will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
4
Add Digits
Use this procedure to specify the number of leading digits that must be added to
the digits sent by the local telephone company. Use this procedure when the
number of digits sent by the telephone company is fewer than the number in the
system numbering plan.
4
Summary: Add Digits
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
1 to 9999
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Copy Option
Page 4-137
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→Add Digits→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial added
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit
4
Procedure: Add Digits
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Add Digits.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-138
Additional Information
PC
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Add Digits:
Enter block number (1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current number of added digits (nnn).
x = block entered in Step 4
DID Block x:
Enter digits to add
nnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the number of digits to add (n = 1 to 9999).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
+0
Continue to specify added digits for the other trunk block or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next block will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-139
4
Signaling
Use this procedure to specify whether the type of dialing signal from the local
telephone company is touch-tone or rotary. Touch-tone dial mode cannot be
programmed for immediate-start DID trunks.
Touch-tone single-line telephone users cannot make calls by using individual
trunks programmed for rotary operation. The touch-tone signals generated from
the telephone while dialing are transmitted to the central office at the same time
the rotary signals are sent to the system. The central office receives both signals
and cannot process the call.
4
Summary: Signaling
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not Required
Planning Form
Form 3d, Incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
Rotary
Valid Entries
Rotary, Touch-tone
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→Signaling→Dial trunk block
no.→Enter→Rotary or TouchTone→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type trunk block no.→→ or
→→→
4
Procedure: Signaling
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-140
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Signaling.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Enter the trunk block (n = 1 or 2).
DID Signaling
Enter Block number (1-2)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify Rotary or Touch Tone.
x = block entered in Step 4
DID Block x:
Select one
Rotary
Touch Tone
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Rotary or
TouchTone.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-141
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Continue to specify type for the other trunk block or go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next block will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Invalid Destination
Use this procedure to specify where to direct outside calls (received on DID
trunks) for unassigned extension numbers. Calls can be either directed to a
backup position (normally the primary system operator) or given a fast busy
signal. See ‘‘QCC Operator to Receive Call Types’’ in Chapter 3 for information on
assigning a backup position.
4
Summary: Invalid Destination
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3d, incoming Trunks: DID
Factory Setting
Backup (calls are sent to the primary system operator)
Valid Entries
Backup, Fast Busy
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→DID→InvalDstn→Send to Backup
Extension or Return Fast Busy→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
DID Trunks
Page 4-142
4
Procedure: Invalid Destination
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select DID.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Invalid Destination.
Direct Inward Dial:
Make a selection
Block
DeleteDigit
Type
Add Digits
Disconnect
Signaling
ExpectDigit
InvalDstn
Exit
Specify how to handle calls directed to an invalid destination.
Invalid Destination DID:
Select one
Send to Backup Extension
Return Fast Busy
Exit
Enter
Select Send to Backup Extension or
Return Fast Busy.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-143
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
PRI Facilities
4
The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following
options for Primary Rate Interface (PRI) facilities connected to a 100D (DS1)
module:
■
Switch Type
■
Telephone Number
■
B-Channel Groups
■
Network Service
■
Copy Telephone Number to Send
■
Incoming Routing
■
Telephone Number to Send
■
Test Telephone Number
■
Timers and Counters
■
Terminal Equipment Identifier
■
Dial Plan Routing
■
Outgoing Tables
■
Network Selection Tables
■
Special Services Tables
■
Call-by-Call Service Table
NOTE:
If you are adding PRI facilities to an existing system, certain values must be
set correctly. To inspect or change these values, see ‘‘DS1 Facilities’’. Do
not start these procedures until you have checked the following:
■
Type of DS1 Facility must be set to PRI.
■
Frame format must be specified correctly.
■
Zero code suppression must be specified correctly.
■
Clock synchronization source must be set to loop (derived from the
T1 line).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-144
The settings for frame format and zero code suppression must be consistent with
the options selected when the PRI connection was ordered.
If you are using ARS in connection with PRI, make sure you select voice, data, or
voice and data, as appropriate, when you perform the ARS “Voice and/or Data
Routing” procedure found in “Automatic Route Selection.”
4
Switch Type
Beginning with Release 4.2, use this procedure to specify the PRI connection
through the following switch types:
■
4ESS
■
5ESS
■
Nortel DMS-100 BCS 36 for local exchange carrier services
■
Nortel DMS-250 serving the MCI network
■
Digital Switch Corporation DEX600E serving the MCI network
4
Summary: Switch Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
4ESS
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→SwitchType→Dial slot
number→Enter→Specify switch type→Enter
PC Procedure
→→→Type slot number→→! + 0→Type
slot no.→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-145
4
Telephone Number
Use this procedure to assign a string of up to 12 digits to each PRI channel. This
string must match the number sent by the network (that is, the number provided
by the PRI service provider) to indicate the number dialed by an outside caller.
The system uses this number to route the call to the correct destination, which
means that the number assigned to each channel in the same B-channel group
must be unique. Note also that the number cannot be the same as the associated
test telephone number.
4
Summary: Telephone Number
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX, Key
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
No digits
Valid Entries
Up to 12 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→PhoneNumber→Dial trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial telephone
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type trunk no. → →! + 0 →Type
telephone no.→→→
4
Procedure: Telephone Number
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-146
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Phone Number.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
Exit
Enter the line number.
PRI Phone Number:
Enter line number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current telephone number (N) if one is assigned.
xxxx = line number entered in Step 4
Line xxxx:
Enter phone number
N
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-147
Additional Information
PC
Enter a telephone number of up to 12 digits to be assigned
to the channel (N = any combination of 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [N].
Continue to assign the telephone number to another PRI channel
or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next PRI Channel
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
B-Channel Groups
4
Use this procedure to perform the following:
■
Assign B-channels to a group.
■
Associate individual ISDN channels (that can place and receive calls) on
the B-channels in each group.
B-channels are partitioned into trunk groups when PRI service is ordered. The
trunk groups defined when service is ordered must match the B-channel groups
defined when MERLIN LEGEND is programmed.
Each B-channel can be assigned to only one group, and each ISDN channel can
be associated with only one group. Up to 80 B-channel groups can be
established.
Each group can contain up to 23 channels; however, all channels assigned must
signal through the same D-channel (that is, must be connected to the same 100D
module).
B-channels must be assigned in the order of system search (through the group)
for an available channel. To minimize call attempts on the same line or trunk,
arrange B-channels in the opposite order of the hunting arrangement provided by
the network service provider.
B-channels must be identified by control unit slot and port numbers since they are
not associated with a line/trunk number or a logical ID.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-148
PRI B-channel groups programmed for line routing perform similarly to loop-start
trunks. PRI B-channel groups programmed for dial plan routing perform similarly
to DID trunks.
NOTE:
If more lines than B-channels are assigned to a B-channel group, users
may experience situations where a line that is idle is not able to seize a
B-channel. The user receives a fast busy tone.
Summary: B-Channel Groups
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX, Key
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Group numbers (1 to 80)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→B Channels→Dial
group no.→Enter→Dial B-channel slot and port
nos.→Enter→Lines→Dial group no.→Enter→Entry
Mode→Dial line/trunk no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→B Channels→Dial
group no.→Enter→Dial B-channel slot and port
no.→Enter→Lines→Dial group no.→Enter→Select
specific lines/trunks→Toggle LED
On/Off→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →→ → Type group no. →Type B-channel
slot and port nos.→→Type group
no.→→→Type line/trunk
no.→→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →→ → Type group no. →Type B-channel
slot and port nos.→→Type group no.→→Select
specific lines/trunks→Toggle letter G
On/Off→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-149
4
Procedure: B-Channel Groups
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select B-Channel Groups.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-150
Additional Information
PC
Select B-Channels.
B-Channel Groups:
Make a selection
B Channels
IncomingRtg
Lines
NetworkServ
Copy Number
Exit
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80).
B-Channel Groups:
Enter group number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter the B-channel slot and port number.
B Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Enter B-Channel
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type *[sspp].
Ã
Assign or remove the B-channel from the group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
additional B-channels from the group by
repeating Steps 7 and 8.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-151
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign B-channels to another group or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next group will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Lines.
B-Channel Groups:
Make a selection
B Channels IncomingRtg
Lines
NetworkServ
Copy Number
Exit
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80).
B-Channel Groups:
Enter group number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Specify the line(s).
B-Channel Group xx:
Page 4-152
Additional Information
PC
●◆
xx = number entered in Step 12
Assign lines
Lines 01-20
Entry Mode
Lines 21-40
To select a single line, go to
● Single Line Procedure.
Lines 41-60
To select a block of lines, go to
◆ Block Procedure.
Lines 61-80
Exit
● Single Line Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Specify entry mode.
Select Entry Mode.
PC
Enter a line number.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 12
Enter line number
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Assign or remove the line number from the B-channel group.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove
additional lines from the B-Channel group
by repeating Steps 7 and 8.
Continue to assign the line number to another B-channel group or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 2. The next group will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-153
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Block Procedure
Specify the block of 20 lines associated with 20 buttons on the system programming console.
Select Lines 01-20
Lines 21-40
Lines 41-60
Lines 61-80
Assign the line(s) to the B-channel group.
Toggle the green LED on or
off as required.
On = lines are assigned to B-channel
Off = lines are not assigned to B-channel
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Network Service
Use this procedure to specify the type of outgoing service provided by each
B-channel group [Megacom WATS and 800, MultiQuest Service, ACCUNET
Switched Digital Service (SDS), or Software Defined Network (SDN)].
NOTE:
You can enter a service not shown on the Network Service screen by using
the five-digit binary code that represents the service in the Network
Facilities Information Element of ISDN PRI signaling protocol. For
information on these codes, contact your service provider. See
“Miscellaneous Procedure.”
Summary: Network Service
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX, Key
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-154
Valid Entries
AT&T Toll, Local, Miscellaneous
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→NetworkServ→Dial
group no.→Enter→Specify network
service→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ → Type group no. → →Specify
network service→→→→→
4
Procedure: Network Service
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select B-Channel Groups.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-155
Additional Information
PC
Select Network Service.
B-Channel Groups:
Make a selection
B Channels IncomingRtg
Lines
NetworkServ
Copy Number
Exit
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80).
B-Channel Groups:
Enter group number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify a network service.
Network Services:
Make a selection
●◆■
If you select AT&T Toll, go to
● AT&T Toll Procedure.
If you select Local, go to
◆ Local Procedure.
If you select Misc, go to
■ Miscellaneous Procedure.
AT&T Toll
Local
Misc
Exit
● AT&T Toll Procedure
Specify a service.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
MegacomWATS
MULTIQUEST
ACCUNET SDS
LongDistnce
SoftDefNetw
Megacom 800
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-156
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Repeat Step 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each toll group number.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
◆ Local Procedure
Specify a service.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
OUTWATS
56/64 Digtl
VirtPrivNet
INWATS
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Repeat Steps 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each local group number.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
■ Miscellaneous Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify a service.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
If you select CallByCall, you have
finished this procedure. Go to Step 7.
Other
CallByCall
Exit
Enter
Select Other or
CallByCall.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-157
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current network service code.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = group number entered in Step 5
Enter Network Service
(5 digit code of 0,1)
nnnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Select Drop.
!
Enter the five-digit network code that corresponds to the selected service.
Ã
Dial or type [nnnnn].
+0
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Repeat Steps 5 through 7 of the main procedure for each
miscellaneous service group number.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Copy Telephone Number to Send
4
Use this procedure to indicate whether or not the telephone number to send to the
network (for calls going out over ISDN lines assigned to a B-channel group) is
copied from the number assigned to that channel.
Select Do Not Copy Phone Number either when a telephone number to send is
assigned to each channel in the B-channel group or when no telephone number is
to be sent to the network. In the latter case, make sure that no telephone numbers
are assigned to any channels in the B-channel group by using the “Telephone
Number to Send” procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-158
Summary: Copy Telephone Number to Send
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX, Key
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
Factory Setting
Do not copy
Valid Entries
Do not copy, Copy
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→B ChannlGrp→Copy Number→Dial
group no.→Enter→Specify copy or no
copy→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ → Type group no. → →Specify
copy or no copy→→→→
Procedure: Copy Telephone Number to Send
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-159
Additional Information
PC
Select B-Channel Groups.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
Exit
Select Copy Number.
B-Channel Groups:
Make a selection
B Channels
IncomingRtg
Lines
NetworkServ
Copy Number
Exit
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80).
B-Channel Groups:
Enter group number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify whether or not the telephone number assigned to the
channel is copied as the number to send to the network.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
Copy PhnNum to NumToSend
Do not Copy Phone Number
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Copy PhnNum to NumToSend or
Do not Copy Phone Number.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-160
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the copy option to another B-channel group or go to
Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next group will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Incoming Routing
Use this procedure to specify whether incoming routing is either by line
appearance or according to dial plan. Dial Plan Routing is available in Hybrid/PBX
mode only.
Summary: Incoming Routing
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Line appearance: Hybrid/PBX, Key; Dial Plan Routing:
Hybrid/PBX only
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Line appearance
Valid Entries
Dial Plan Routing, Routing by Line Appearance
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→B-ChannlGrp→Incoming Rtg→Dial
B-channel group no.→Enter→Specify method of
routing→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ → Type B-channel group
no.→→Specify method of
routing→→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-161
4
Procedure: Incoming Routing
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select B-Channel Groups.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
Exit
Select Incoming Routing.
B-Channel Groups:
Make a selection
B Channels
IncomingRtg
Lines
NetworkServ
Copy Number
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-162
Additional Information
PC
Enter the B-channel group number (nn = 1 to 80).
PRI Incoming Routing:
Enter group number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify the routing method to use for incoming calls.
B-Channel Group xx:
xx = group number entered in Step 5
Select one
Routing by Dial Plan
Route by Line Appearance
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Routing by Dial Plan or
Route by Line Appearance.
Continue to assign the routing method to another B-channel group or go
to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next group will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-163
Telephone Number to Send
4
Use this procedure to assign the telephone number to send to the network when
outgoing calls are made on an ISDN line. If the person being called subscribes to
an automatic number identification service, the number indicates who is calling.
The number assigned to each channel does not have to be unique because it is
not used for routing.
The telephone number sent to the network can be the one of the following:
■
The extension number assigned to the calling telephone (Select
Extension Only in Step 4)
■
The extension number substituted into the lower order digits of a
systemwide base number (Select Base Number with Ext in Step 4)
■
The facility-based line telephone number (Select Line Telephone Number
in Step 4)
NOTE:
Only one base number is supported per system. In systems having
non-uniform extension numbers, for example, where there are some
three-digit extension numbers and some four-digit extension numbers, one
base number may not be sufficient to represent all the external telephone
numbers of all extensions.
Summary: Telephone Number to Send
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
No digits are assigned
Valid Entries
Up to 12 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→NumbrToSend→Specify type of
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial base no.→Enter→Dial line
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial telephone
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Specify type of no.→→! +
→Type base no.→→! + 0→Type telephone
no.→→→
0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-164
Procedure: Telephone Number to Send
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Number to Send.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
Specify the type of number to send.
Phone Number to Send:
Make a selection
●◆
If you select Extension Only,
continue with Step 5.
(for entire system)
Extension Only
_
Base Number with Ext.
_
Line Telephone Number
_
Exit
Enter
If you select Base Number with Ext.,
go to
● Base Number with Extension
Procedure.
If you select Line Telephone Number,
go to ◆ Line Telephone Number Procedure.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-165
● Base Number with Extension Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current base number (N).
Base Number with Ext.:
Enter max of 12 digit
base telephone number
N
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter a base telephone number of up to 12 digits
(N = any combination of 0 to 9).
Dial or type [N].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
● Line Telephone Number Procedure
Enter the line number (nnn).
Phone Number to Send:
Enter line number
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-166
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current telephone number (n).
xxx = line entered in Step 1
Line xxx:
Enter phone number to
send on outgoing calls
N
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter a telephone number of up to 12 digits to send
(N = any combination of 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [N].
+0
Continue to assign the telephone number to another line or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next line will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Test Telephone Number
Use this procedure to assign a test line or trunk telephone number for each 100D
module installed in the control unit.
The number assigned to the test line/trunk must be different from the numbers
assigned to other channels in the same B-channel group. It must be identical to
the number provided by the PRI service provider.
Summary: Test Telephone Number
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX, Key
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-167
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Telephone number of up to 12 digits
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→Test TelNum→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial telephone
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type slot no.→ →! + 0→Type
telephone no.→→→
4
Procedure: Test Telephone Number
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Test Telephone Number.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
Test TelNum
_
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-168
Additional Information
PC
Enter the slot number in the control unit that contains the 100D module
(nn = 1 to 17).
PRI Test Telephone Num:
Enter slot number (1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current test telephone number (N).
Slot xx Test Tel Number:
xx = number entered in Step 4
Enter test number
N
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
+0
Enter a telephone number of up to 12 digits to be assigned as
the test number to the 100D module ( N = any combination of 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [N].
!
Continue to assign the test telephone number to another
100D module or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next slot will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Timers and Counters
Page 4-169
4
Use this procedure to set timer and counter thresholds.
!
CAUTION:
The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely
need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and
threshold settings for your PRI lines and trunks, check with your
Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change.
Incorrect settings can cause your PRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
If the network does not respond before the programmed time or count, the system
takes the appropriate corrective action.
The timers and counters are listed below.
■
T200 Timer. Times the delay in the link layer acknowledgement of a
message sent from the system to the network over a D-channel.
■
T203 Timer. Times the interval between each exchange of messages
between the system and the network on the D-channel.
■
N200 Counter. Counts the number of times the system has transmitted a
message on a D-channel because no link layer acknowledgement is
received from the network.
■
N201 Counter. Counts the maximum number of layer three octets the
system can send or receive in a single D-channel message.
■
K Counter. Counts the number of layer three unacknowledged messages
sent from the system to the network on a D-channel.
■
T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends
a setup message to initiate an outgoing call.
■
T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends
a disconnect message to clear a call.
■
T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends
a release message to clear a call.
■
T309 Timer. Times the duration of a D-channel data link failure (a loss of
signaling for the entire PRI connection).
■
T310 Timer. Times the network delay following the receipt of a call
preceding message on an outgoing call.
■
T313 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends
a connect message that indicates the completion of an incoming call.
■
T316 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the system sends
a restart message to clear a B-channel.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-170
NOTE:
If you enter an invalid timer value, the number you enter is truncated to the
closest valid value. For example, if you enter 45 for a counter that ranges
from 0 to 30, 4 is recorded as the counter value.
Table 4-2 shows the factory setting for each timer and counter and the valid range
for each threshold.
Summary: Timers and Counters
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
See Table 4-2
Valid Entries
See Table 4-2
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→Protocol→Timers→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Select timer/counter→Drop→Dial no. of
ms/octets/and so on→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Table 4-2.
→ →→ → Type slot no.→ →Select
timer/counter→! + 0→Type no. of ms/octets/and so
on→→→→→
Timers and Counters
Timer/Counter
Purpose
Factory Setting
Valid Range
T200 Timer
Maximum response time
1 second
1000 to 3000 ms
T203 Timer
Maximum time
30 seconds
1 to 60 seconds
N200 Counter
Maximum transmissions
3 transmissions
1 to 5 transmissions
N201 Counter
Maximum octets
260 octets
16 to 260 octets
K Counter
Maximum outstanding
7 frames
1 to 15 frames
4 seconds
4 to 12 seconds
I-frames
T303 Timer
Set up timeout
Continued on next page
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Table 4-2.
Page 4-171
Timers and Counters–Continued
Timer/Counter
Purpose
Factory Setting
Valid Range
T305 Timer
Disconnect timeout
4 seconds
4 to 30 seconds
T308 Timer
Release timeout
4 seconds
4 to 12 seconds
T309 Timer
Signal loss
90 seconds
30 to 120 seconds
T310 Timer
Call Proc. timeout
60 seconds
2 to 120 seconds
T313 Timer
Connect timeout
4 seconds
4 to 60 seconds
T316 Timer
Restart timeout
120 seconds
30 to 120 seconds
4
Procedure: Timers and Counters
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Protocol.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-172
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select Timers.
PRI Protocol Options:
Make a selection
Timers
_
TEI
Exit
Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains
the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17).
PRI Timers:
Enter slot number (1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Dial or type [nn].
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Select the timer/counter to change.
Slot xx PRI Settings:
>
xx = number entered in Step 5
Make a selection
T200 Timer
K Counter
T203 Timer
T303 Timer
N200Counter
T305 Timer
N201Counter
T308 Timer
Exit
T309 Timer
To select other timers, press More to go
to the second PRI Settings screen.
D
Slot xx PRI Settings:
Make a selection
T310 Timer
T313 Timer
T316 Timer
Exit
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-173
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current setting.
(Display depends on
timer/counter
selected).
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the new setting (see Table 4-2).
Ã
Dial or type [nnnn].
+0
Continue to assign the setting to another slot or go to Step 11.
Select Next.
Return to Step 8. The next slot will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Terminal Equipment Identifier
4
Use this procedure to assign the link layer address of a piece of equipment
connected to each D-channel. Normally, only one piece is connected and the
system assumes that the Terminal Equipment Identifier (TEI) is 0.
!
CAUTION:
The value of the TEI rarely has to be changed. Check with your
Lucent Technologies representative before changing this value.
Summary: Terminal Equipment Identifier
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
4
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-174
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
0 to 63
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→Protocol→TEI→Dial slot
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial new ID
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type slot no.→→! +
→Type new ID no.→→→→
0
Procedure: Terminal Equipment Identifier
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Protocol.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-175
Additional Information
PC
Select TEI.
PRI Protocol Options:
Make a selection
Timers
TEI
Exit
Enter the number of the slot in the control unit that contains
the 100D module (nn = 1 to 17).
PRI TEI:
Enter slot number (1-17)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current identification number (nn).
xx = number entered in Step 5
Slot xx TEI:
Enter terminal equipment
id number (0-63)
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
+0
Enter the new identification number (n = 0 to 63).
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
!
Continue to assign the identification number to another slot
or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next slot will be
displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-176
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Dial Plan Routing
4
Dial plan routing provides a way to route incoming calls on a “per B-channel
group” basis. An incoming call is routed by matching the incoming number (by
service, number of digits, and pattern) and then optionally deleting and/or adding
digits to direct the call to a specific endpoint. A service must be specified; the
number of digits and pattern are optional. For example, you can specify that calls
received from a particular area code should be routed to the specific individual or
group responsible for accounts in that area.
Dial plan routing is available in Hybrid/PBX mode only. Key systems route
incoming calls on a per-line basis.
In Release 4.2 and later, you can specify the following additional services:
■
MCI Toll Services available for a DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type:
— MCI PRISM
— MCI Vnet
— MCI 800
— MCI 900
■
Local exchange carrier services available for a DMS-100 switch type:
— DMS Private
— DMS INWATS
— DMS OUTWATS
— DMS FX (foreign exchage)
— DMS Tie Trunk
NOTES:
1.You can enter a service not shown on the Network Service screen by
using the five-digit binary code that represents the service in the Network
Facilities Information Element of ISDN PRI layer three signaling protocol.
( Contact your service provider for more information about the codes.)
See “Miscellaneous Procedures.”
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-177
2.You must program a service before you program any other Dial Plan
Routing function. If you have not programmed a service, complete the
procedure below for the Service option and then repeat the procedure
for each optional function that you want to program.
Summary: Dial Plan Routing
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Service: empty; Patterns: blank; Total Digits: 0;
Delete Digits: 0; Add Digits: 0
Valid Entries
Service: Toll, Local, Miscellaneous
Entries: 0–15
Digits per Pattern: 0–8
Total Digits: 1–14
Delete Digits: 0–14, 0=wildcard
Add Digits: 0–4 (valid digits: 0–9)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To specify Service:
LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg→Service→Dial entry
no.→Enter→Select service→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Patterns:
LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg→Patterns→Dial entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
pattern→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Total Digits:
LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg→Total Digits→Dial
entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Delete Digits:
LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg→Delete Digits→Dial
entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial delete
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Add Digits:
LinesTrunks→PRI→DialPlanRtg→Add Digits→Dial
entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial add
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
PC Procedure
Page 4-178
To specify Service:
→ →→ → Type entry no.→ →Select
service→→→→
To specify Patterns:
→→→ Type entry no.→→! +
→Type pattern→→→→
0
To specify Total Digits:
→→→ Type entry no.→→! +
→Type digits→→→→
0
To specify Delete Digits:
→ →→ Type entry no.→ →! +
0 →Type delete digits→ → → →
To specify Add Digits:
→→→ Type entry no.→→! +
→Type add digits→→→→
0
4
Procedure: Dial Plan Routing
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-179
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select Dial Plan Routing.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
Select Service.
❍❖■▲
PRI Dial Plan Routing:
Service must be programmed. Continue
Make a selection
with Step 5. Then program other options.
Service
Add Digits
_
_
❍ If you select Patterns, go to
Patterns Procedure.
Patterns
_
TotalDigits
_
DeleteDigit
_
❖ If you select TotalDigits, go to
Total Digits Procedure.
■ If you select DeleteDigit, go to Delete
Digits Procedure.
▲ If you select Add Digits, go to Add
Digits Procedure.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Exit
Ã
Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15).
DialPlanRouting Service:
Enter entry number (0-15)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Select a service.
DialPlanRouting Service:
Make a selection
AT&T Toll
Page 4-180
Additional Information
PC
✚✖✱lu
If you select AT&T Toll, go to
✚ AT&T Toll Procedure.
If you select 5ESS Local, go to
✖ Local Procedure.
If you select MCI Toll, go to
✱ MCI Toll Procedure.
DMS-100 Local
_
5ESS Local
MCI Toll
_
Misc
Exit
If you select Misc, go to
l Miscellaneous Procedure.
If you select DMS-100 Local, go to
u DMS-100 Local Procedure.
✚ AT&T Toll Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select an AT&T service for the B-channel group.
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
Megacom 800
MegacomWATS
ACCUNET SDS
LongDistnce
SoftDefNetw
MULTIQUEST
Next
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go
to Step 5.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-181
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
✖ Local Procedure
Select a service for the B-channel group.
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
INWATS
56/64 Digtl
VirtPrivNet
OUTWATS
Next
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main
procedure or go to Step 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
✱ MCI Toll Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select a miscellaneous service.
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
_
_
MCI PRISM
MCI VNET
MCI 800
Next
Select MCI PRISM,
MCI VNET, or
Enter
MCI 800
_
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-182
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main
procedure or go to Step 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
l Miscellaneous Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select a miscellaneous service.
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
_
_
Other
Any Service
No Service
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Other,
Any Service, or
No Service.
Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
Select Next
Return to Step 1. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-183
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current network service (nnnnn).
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Enter Network Service
(5 digit code of 0,1)
nnnnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Select Drop.
!
Enter the five-digit code that corresponds to the service selected.
Ã
Dial or type [nnnnn].
+0
Continue to assign the code to another routing entry or go to Step 7.
Select Next.
Return to Step 4. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main
procedure or go to Step 9.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
u DMS-100 Local Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select a miscellaneous service.
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 5
Select one
_
_
_
DMS-Private
DMS-INWATS
DMS-OUTWATS
DMS-FX
Exit
DMS-TieTrk
Select DMS-Private
Next
Enter
DMS-INWATS
DMS-OUTWATS
DMS-FX, or
DMS-TieTrk
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-184
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the service to another routing entry or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure
or go to Step 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
❍ Patterns Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15).
DialPlanRoutingPatterns:
Leave field blank to match any pattern.
Enter entry no. (0-15)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
¤
Erase the current number of digits to match entry (n).
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 1
Enter digits to match
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-185
Additional Information
PC
Enter the new number of digits to match (n = 0 to 8; use 0 to match any
number of digits.).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Continue to assign the digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main
procedure or go to Step 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
❖ Total Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15).
DialPlanRtg TotalDigits:
Use 0 to match any number of digits.
Enter entry no. (0-15)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-186
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current number of total digits (nn).
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 1
Enter number of digits
in dialed number
(0-14)
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the new total number of digits (nn = 0 to 14).
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
+0
Continue to assign the digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure or go
to Step 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
■ Delete Digit Procedure
Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15).
DialPlanRtg DeleteDigits:
Enter entry no. (0-15)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-187
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current number of delete digits (nn).
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 1
Enter number of digits
to delete
(0-14)
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the new number of digits to delete (n = 0 to 14).
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
+0
Continue to assign the delete digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main
procedure or go to Step 8.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-188
▲ Add Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the entry number (nn = 0 to 15).
DialPlanRtg AddDigits:
Enter entry no. (0-15)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current number of add digits (nn).
Dial Plan Rtg Entry xx:
xx = number entered in Step 1
Enter digits to add
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
+0
Enter the new number of digits to add (nn).
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
!
Continue to assign the add digits to another routing entry or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next dial plan
routing entry will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Program additional options by returning to Step 4 of the main procedure
or go to Step 8.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-189
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Outgoing Tables
PRI provides tables that work in conjunction with personal lines, pools, and ARS
tables to route calls. The following tables specify services for outgoing calls:
■
Call-by-Call. Selects an outgoing service, based on routing digits and the
bearer capability (voice, data, or both) of the calling extension. It allows a
single group of B-channels to carry a variety of services, such as
ACCUNET, SDN, and Megacom WATS.
■
Network Selection. Selects a long-distance carrier. Calls that match
Network Selection tables can be routed to a specific service by the
Call-by-Call tables.
■
Special Services. Selects services such as international dialing and
operator assistance. Calls that match these tables are not routed by the
Call-by-Call tables.
NOTE:
PRI tables that work with pools and ARS apply to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
4
Network Selection Tables
Dialed prefixes for selecting long-distance carriers are matched to entries in the
four Network Selection tables. Eight default tables are provided, specifying 10***
and 101****. The asterisks are wildcards that represent the various long-distance
carrier codes. (10*** is the current U.S. standard for specifying long-distance
carriers; 101**** is provided for future use.)
NOTE:
U.S. customers rarely need to program additional Network Selection tables
because long-distance carrier codes match 10*** or 101****.
Summary: Network Selection Tables
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key and Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1
Connectivity (100D module)
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-190
Valid Entries
Prefix for long distance carrier
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→NetwkSelect→Dial
entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
prefix→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type entry no.→→! +
→Type prefix→→→→
P
4
Procedure: Network Selection Tables
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Outgoing Tables.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-191
Additional Information
PC
Select Network Selection tables.
PRI Outgoing Tables:
Make a selection
NetwkSelect
_
SpecialServ
CBC Service
Exit
Enter the table number (n = 0 to 3).
Network Selection Table:
Enter entry number (0-3)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current dial prefix (n).
Netwk SelectTbl Entry x:
x = number entered in Step 5
Enter dial prefix
(use * for wild card)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the dial prefix.
Ã
Dial or type [n].
+P
Continue to assign the dial prefix to another table or go to Step 10.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next table will be displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-192
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Special Services Tables
Eight tables provide for international calling and for operator-assisted calls.
Default tables include the special prefixes 0 and 00 for operator-assisted calls.
Dialed numbers are matched against entries in these tables for patterns (011,
010, 01, 00, 0, and 1); for operator assistance (operator-assisted, presubscribed
common carrier operator, and none); and for type of number (national or
international). Up to four digits can be deleted.
Summary: Special Services Tables
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key and Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
See Table 4-3
Valid Entries
Prefix for international or operator-assisted calls
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To specify Pattern:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→SpecialServ→Patte
rn→Dial entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
pattern→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Operator:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→SpecialServ→
Operator→Dial entry no.→Enter→Select type of
operator→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Type of Number:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→SpecialServ→
TypeOfNumbr→Dial entry no.→Enter→Select
type→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-193
To specify Delete Digits:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→SpecialServ→
DeleteDigit→Dial entry no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
pattern→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To specify Pattern:
!
→→→→→Type entry no.→→
+ P→Type pattern→→→→→
To specify Operator:
→ →→ → → Type entry
no.→→Select type of
operator→→→→→
To specify Type of Number:
→ →→ → → Type entry no.→ →
Type number type→→→→→
To specify Delete Digits:
→→→→→Type entry no.→→
+ P→Type digits to be deleted→→→
→→
!
Table 4-3.
Special Services Table
Table
Pattern
(up to 4
digits)
0
011
none
3
1
010
Local Operator
3
2
01
Local Operator
2
3
00
Local Operator/
Presubscribed
Carrier
2
4
0
Local Operator
1
5
1
none
1
Operator
Delete Digits
(0 to 4)
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-194
4
Procedure: Special Services Tables
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Outgoing Tables.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
Select the Special Services tables.
PRI Outgoing Tables:
Make a selection
NetwkSelect
SpecialServ
_
CBC Service
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-195
Additional Information
●◆■▲
Select an option.
Special Services Table:
Make a selection
PC
If you select Pattern, go to
● Pattern Procedure.
If you select Operator, go to
◆ Operator Procedure.
If you select TypeOfNumber, go to
■ Type Of Number Procedure.
Pattern
_
Operator
_
TypeOfNumber
_
DeleteDigit
_
Exit
If you select DeleteDigit, go to
▲ Delete Digits Procedure.
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
● Pattern Procedure
Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7).
Special Services Table:
Enter entry number (0-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current pattern (nnnn).
SpecialServ Tbl Entry x:
x = number entered in Step 1
Enter pattern
nnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+P
Enter the pattern to be matched.
Dial or type [nnnn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-196
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the pattern to another table or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next table will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
◆ Operator Procedure
Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7).
Special Services Table:
Enter entry number (0-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the type of operator.
SpecialServ Tbl Entry x:
x = number entered in Step 1
Choose type of operator
Local Operator
_
Presubscribed Carrier
_
No Operator
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Local Operator,
Presubscribed Carrier, or
No Operator.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-197
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the operator type to another table or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next table will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
■ Type Of Number Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7).
Special Services Table:
Enter entry number (0-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify the type of operator.
SpecialServ Tbl Entry x:
x = number entered in Step 1
Choose type of number
National
_
International
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select National or
International.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-198
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the number type to another table or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next table will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
▲ Delete Digits Procedure
Enter the table number (n = 0 to 7).
Special Services Table:
Enter entry number (0-7)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current number of digits (n).
SpecialServ Tbl Entry x:
x = number entered in Step 1
Enter number of digits
to delete (0-4)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Enter the number of digits to be deleted (n = 0 to 4).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-199
Additional Information
PC
Continue to assign the delete digits to another table or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next table will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Call-by-Call Service Table
4
When a call is placed on a Call-by-Call B-channel group, a specific service is
selected. The selected service depends on the match between the dialed digits
and the table entries. A service must be specified; otherwise the entry is ignored.
The Call-by-Call table can contain up to 10 entries. Each entry can contain up to
10 patterns, each with a maximum of eight digits. If a dialed number matches two
patterns, the longer pattern takes precedence. For example, 212555 matches
both 212555 and 212, but the system will match the longer pattern. In addition to
patterns, the Call-by-Call table can be used to specify from 0 through 8 digits to be
deleted (the default is 0).
If the last entry in the table is empty (that is, if no pattern is specified), this entry is
used as a default and matches any pattern and type of call.
If ARS (Hybrid/PBX only) is used, ARS selects the route. If the route points to a
Call-by-Call B-Channel group, Call-by-Call service selects the network service.
ARS Call-by-Call service is integrated according to the specified bearer capability
(voice, data, or both) for each feature. In addition, ARS digit deletion/addition may
help specify the service selected by the Call-by-Call feature. See “Automatic
Route Selection” for more information.
Beginning with Release 4.2, the following additional services are available:
■
MCI Toll Services for a DMS-250 or DEX600E switch type
— MCI PRISM
— MCI VNET
■
Local exchange carier services available for a DMS-100 switch type:
— DMS Private
— DMS OUTWATS
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-200
— DMS FX (foreign exchange)
— DMS Tie Trunk
Summary: Call-by-Call Service Table
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key and Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3b, Incoming Trunks: DS1 Connectivity
(100D module)
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Pattern: up to eight digits
Call Type: voice, data, both
Service: AT&T Toll, 5ESS Local, MCI Toll, DMS-100 Local,
Miscellaneous
Delete Digits: 0 to 8
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To specify Patterns:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→CBC
Service→Patterns→Dial list no.→Enter→Drop→Dial
pattern→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Voice/Data:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→CBC
Service→Voice/Data→Dial list no.→Enter→Select
voice, data, or both→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Network Service:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→CBC
Service→NetwkServ→Dial list no.→Enter→Select
service→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To specify Delete Digits:
LinesTrunks→PRI→OutgoingTbl→CBC
Service→DeleteDigit→Dial list
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of
digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
PC Procedure
Page 4-201
To specify Patterns:
!
→→→→→Type list no.→→
+ P→Type pattern→→→→→
To specify Voice/Data:
→ →→ → → Type list no.→ →Select
voice, data, or both→→→→→
To specify Network Service:
→ →→ → → Type list no.→ →Select
service→→→→
To specify Delete Digits:
!
→→→→→Dial list no.→→
+ P→Dial no. of digits→→→→→
4
Procedure: Call-by-Call Service
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Select PRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
_
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Outgoing Tables.
PRI Lines:
Make a selection
PhoneNumber
Protocol
B-ChannlGrp
DialPlanRtg
NumbrToSend
OutgoingTbl
_
Test TelNum
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-202
Additional Information
PC
Select Call-by-Call Service.
PRI Outgoing Tables:
Make a selection
NetwkSelect
SpecialServ
CBC Service
_
Exit
Select an option.
CallByCall Service Table:
Make a selection
●◆■▲
If you select Patterns, go to
● Patterns Procedure.
If you select Voice/Data, go to
◆ Voice/Data Procedure.
If you select NetworkServ, go to
■ Network Service Procedure.
If you select DeleteDigit, go to
▲ Delete Digits Procedure.
Patterns
_
Voice/Data
_
NetworkServ
_
DeleteDigit
_
Exit
● Patterns Procedure
Enter the list (l = 0 to 9) and the table entry (e = 0 to 9) numbers.
CBC Services - Patterns:
Enter list (0-9) and
entry (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [le].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-203
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current pattern (nnn).
CBC Serv list l Entry e:
Enter pattern
l = list number entered in Step 1
e = entry number entered in Step 1
nnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter a pattern of up to eight digits (n = 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
+P
Assign a pattern to the next table or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next table will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
◆ Voice/Data Procedure
Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9).
CBC Services Voice/Data:
Enter list number (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-204
Additional Information
PC
Specify voice, data, or both.
CBC Services List x:
x = number entered in Step 1
Make a selection
Voice Only
_
Data Only
_
Voice/Data
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Voice Only,
Data Only, or
Voice/Data.
Assign to another CBC services list or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
■ Network Service Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9).
CBC Network Service:
Enter list number (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-205
Additional Information
✚‹✱▲◆
Specify a Network Service.
CBC Network Service:
Make a selection
AT&T Toll
PC
If you select AT&T Toll, go to
✚ AT&T Toll Procedure.
DMS-100Local
_
If you select Local, go to.
‹ 5ESS Local Procedure.
5ESS Local
_
MCI Toll
_
Misc
Exit
If you select MCI Toll, go to
✱ MCI Toll Procedure.
If you select Misc, go to
▲ Miscellaneous Procedure.
If you select DMS-100, go to
◆ DMS-100 Procedure.
✚ AT&T Toll Procedure
Specify an AT&T Toll service.
CBC Services List x:
Select One
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
MegacomWATS
_
ACCUNET SDS
_
SoftDefNetw
_
LongDistance
Next
Exit
Enter
_
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Continue to specify AT&T Toll service for another list number or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Page 4-206
‹ 5ESS Local Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify a local service.
CBC Services List x :
Select One
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
OUTWATS
_
56/64 Digtl
_
VirtPrivNet
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Select OUTWATS,
56/64 Digtl, or
VirtPrivNet.
Continue to specify local service for another list number or return to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
▲ MCI Toll Procedure
Specify an MCI Toll service.
CBC/ISA Services List x:
Select One
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
MCI PRISM
_
MCI VNET
_
Next
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Continue to specify MCI Toll service for another list number or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next CBC/ISA services list will be displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-207
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
✱ Miscellaneous Procedure
Specify a service.
CBC Service List x:
Select one
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
Other
_
Select Other or
No Service.
No Service
_
Next
Exit
Enter
If you select No Service, you have
completed this procedure. Return to Step 6
of the main procedure.
Continue to specify the service for another service list number or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current code (nnnnn).
CBC Services List x:
Enter Network Service
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
(5 digit code of 0, 1)
nnnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+P
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-208
Additional Information
PC
Enter the five-digit code for the other service.
Ã
Dial or type [nnnnn].
Continue to assign the code to another service list or return to Step 7.
Select Next.
Return to Step 4. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
◆ DMS-100 Local Procedure
Specify an DMS-100 Local service.
CBC/ISA Services List x:
Select One
x = number entered in Step 1 of the
■ Network Service Procedure.
DMS-Private
_
DMS-OUTWATS
_
DMS-FX
DMS-TieTrk
Next
Exit
Enter
Press the button or function key next to
your selection.
Ã
Continue to specify MCI Toll service for another list number or go to Step 3.
Select Next.
Return to Step 1. The next CBC/ISA services list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
PRI Facilities
Page 4-209
▲ Delete Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the list number (n = 0 to 9).
CBC Serv--Delete Digits:
Enter list number (0-9)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current number of delete digits (n).
CBC Services List x :
x = number entered in Step 1
Enter number of digits
to delete (0-9)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the number of digits to be deleted (n = 0 to 8).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
+0
Continue to assign delete digits to another service list or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next CBC services
list will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit four times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
Page 4-210
4
BRI Facilities
The procedures in this section provide the steps for programming the following
options for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) facilities connected to an 800 NI-BRI
module:
■
Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN)
■
Timers
NOTES:
1.The 800 NI-BRI module is only available in Release 4.0 and later.
2.If you are adding BRI facilities to an existing system, clock
synchronization must be set correctly. To inspect or change these values,
see ‘‘Clock Synchronization’’ in ‘‘Lines and Trunks’’.
Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and
Directory Number (DN)
4
Use this procedure to program the Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory
Number (DN) for each BRI line in the system. Until these values are programmed
for each line, the system considers the BRI line inactive and the line will not
initialize.
NOTE:
The system will not be forced idle when SPIDs are entered. However, if for
some reason a SPID changes, the line must be idle (no active call on the
line) in order to change the SPID.
Summary: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and
Directory Number (DN)
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key, Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
4
Planning Form
Factory Setting
none
Valid Entries
SPID: up to 20 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
DN: up to 10 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
4
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-211
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→More→BRI→SPID/DN.→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Dial SPID→Enter→Dial
DN→Enter→Exit→Exit
→U → → →Type line/trunk no.→ →Type
SPID→→Type DN→→→
PC Procedure
Procedure: Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and
Directory Number (DN)
4
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
Select BRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
QCC Oper
T1 Data NW
_
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
4
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-212
Additional Information
PC
Select Service Profile Identifier (SPID) and Directory Number (DN).
BRI Lines:
Make a selection
SPID/DN
_
Timers
Select SPID/DN.
Exit
Enter the line/trunk number (nnn = 1 to 80).
SPID/DN:
Enter line number
nnn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Erase the current SPID.
Line number xxx:
xxx = line number selected in Step x.
Enter SPID
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
+P
Enter the new SPID.
Dial or type [xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx].
!
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-213
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current DN.
xxx = line number selected in Step x.
Line xxx:
Enter DN
xxxxxxxxxx
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the new DN.
Ã
Dial or type [xxxxxxxxxx].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+P
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Timers
Use this procedure to set timer thresholds.
!
CAUTION:
The factory settings for these thresholds are standard and rarely
need to be changed. If you are not sure of the correct timer and
threshold settings for your BRI lines and trunks, check with your
Lucent Technologies representative before you make a change.
Incorrect settings can cause your BRI lines and trunks to malfunction.
If the network does not respond before the programmed time, the system takes
the appropriate corrective action.
The timers are listed below.
■
T200 Timer. Minimum time that the link layer waits for an
acknowledgement of a message sent from the communications system to
the network.
■
T203 Timer. Maximum time that the link layer can remain inactive.
■
T303 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a setup message to initiate an outgoing
call.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
Page 4-214
■
T305 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a disconnect message to clear a call.
■
T308 Timer. Times the delay in network response when the
communications system sends a release message to clear a call.
NOTE:
If you enter an invalid timer value, you hear an error beep and the value that
was previously stored is displayed on the screen.
Table 4-4 shows the factory setting for each timer and the valid range for each
threshold.
4
Summary: Timers
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key, Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Factory Setting
See Table 4-4
Valid Entries
See Table 4-4
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→More→BRI→Timers→Select
timer→Drop→Dial no. of seconds or
ms→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Select timer→ ! + 0→ Type no.
of seconds or ms→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
4
Page 4-215
4
Procedure: Timers
Table 4-4.
Timers
Timer/Count
er
Purpose
Factory
Setting
Valid Range
Increments
T200 Timer
maximum response
time
1000 ms
500 to 5000 ms
500 ms
T203 Timer
maximum time
33 seconds
10 to 255 sec
1 sec
T303 Timer
Set up timeout
4 seconds
2 to 10 sec
1 sec
T305 Timer
Disconnect timeout
30 seconds
2 to 60 sec
1 sec
T308 Timer
Release timeout
4 seconds
2 to 10 sec
1 sec
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
_
Go to the second screen of the Lines and Trunks menu.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Press More.
U
Select BRI.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
HoldDiscnct
LS-ID Delay
PrncipalUsr
ClockSync
QCC Prior
BRI
_
QCC Oper
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
Programming Procedures
BRI Facilities
4
Page 4-216
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Select Timers.
BRI Lines:
Make a selection
SPID/DN
Timers
_
Exit
Select the timer to change.
BRI Timer Settings:
>
Make a selection
T200 Timer
T308 Timer
_
_
T203 Timer
_
T303 Timer
_
T305 Timer
_
Exit
Erase the current setting.
(Display depends on
timer/counter
selected).
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter the new setting (see Table 4-4).
Dial or type [nnnn].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-217
4
Telephones
This section contains the following summaries:
■
Assigning outside lines or trunks to the buttons on a telephone (including
lines and trunks used for loudspeaker paging).
■
Copying line button assignments from one telephone to either an individual
telephone or a block of telephones.
■
Assigning the following buttons on telephones (for Hybrid/PBX systems
only):
— System Access or Intercom Voice
— System Access or Intercom Ring
— System Access or Intercom Originate Only
— Shared System or Intercom Access
■
Identifying analog multiline telephones that do not have built-in
speakerphones (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on Intercom (HFAI) capability.
■
Identifying analog multiline telephones that require pairing of extension
jacks to provide either the Voice Announce to Busy or voice and data
features.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’ for detailed information.
Assign Trunks or Pools to Telephones
4
Use this procedure to assign outside lines/trunks (connected to the control unit) to
specific buttons on each telephone. The lines/trunks assigned to a button on a
telephone are called personal lines.
This procedure is used only to change or add personal lines, Loudspeaker
Paging, or Pool buttons (Hybrid/PBX only) to telephones. See ‘‘Assign Intercom
or System Access Buttons’’ procedures to add or change Intercom (Icom) or
System Access (SA) buttons.
Individual lines/trunks can be assigned to a maximum of 64 telephones. Individual
pools can be assigned as a Pool button on a maximum of 64 telephones.
The following lines/trunks cannot be assigned to a button on a telephone:
■
Lines/trunks used for Music On Hold
■
Lines/trunks used for maintenance alarms
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted materials, you
may be required to obtain a copyright license from, and pay license fees to, a third
party (such as the American Society of Composers, Artists, and Producers or
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-218
Broadcast Music Incorporated). Magic on Hold requires no such license and can
be purchased from Lucent Technologies.
Pool buttons cannot be assigned to or removed from extensions unless the pool
has trunks assigned. If all trunks are to be removed from a pool, all Pool button
assignments must first be removed from telephones. Another way of handling this
situation is to program another trunk into the pool and then remove the Pool
button assignments from the extensions.
■
Hybrid/PBX only. Individual lines/trunks assigned to a pool can be
assigned to a button only on a DLC operator position. If one of the
lines/trunks in a pool is assigned to a button on a non-DLC telephone, the
result is a Pool button assignment.
■
Key only. The system assigns the first eight line numbers to buttons on
multiline telephones whether or not an outside line is physically connected.
If a line is not connected, the button assignment must be removed so the
user can assign a feature to the button.
■
For the MDC 9000 and MLC-5 cordless multiline telephones and the
MDW 9000 wireless multiline telephone, the system assigns the first eight
lines connected to the control unit even though the telephone has fewer
than eight buttons available. Remove the extra lines in system
programming so that the appropriate number of lines is assigned to buttons
on these telephones.
Lines and trunks are assigned to buttons in the order in which you press each line
button on the system programming console or keyboard. Existing line
assignments can be rearranged by removing all current assignments and then
pressing the line buttons on the console or keyboard in the order in which they
should appear on the buttons. For information on the order of the programmed
buttons, refer to the button numbers on the applicable planning form for each
telephone.
If you want to reserve some blank buttons for features between line buttons, a line
must be assigned as a placeholder for each blank button. After all lines are
assigned, remove the lines used as placeholders on the buttons reserved for
features.
Summary: Assign Trunks or Pools to Telephones 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but note differences in factory settings
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-219
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Key Mode. An Intercom Ring (ICOM Ring) button, an
Intercom Voice (ICOM Voice) button, and the first eight lines
connected to the control unit are assigned to all analog
multiline telephones, MLX telephones (excluding operator
positions), and MFMs connected to MLX telephones. Two
Intercom Ring buttons are assigned to single-line telephones;
no outside lines are assigned.
Behind Switch Mode. Intercom Ring, Intercom Voice, and
prime line buttons are assigned to all analog multiline
telephones, MLX telephones (excluding operator positions),
and MFMs connected to MLX telephones. Two Intercom Ring
buttons are assigned to single-line telephones; no outside
lines are assigned. When prime lines are assigned to MLX
extensions, lines are not assigned to MFMs used to connect
adjuncts. Lines for MFMs must be assigned separately.
Hybrid/PBX Mode. System Access Ring (SA Ring), System
Access Voice (SA Voice), and System Access Originate
Only (SA Orig Only) buttons are assigned to all analog
multiline telephones and MLX telephones (excluding operator
positions). Five Call buttons are assigned to QCC operator
positions. Two System Access Ring buttons and one System
Access Originate Only button are assigned to single-line
telephones. No personal line or Pool buttons are assigned.
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure To program a single line/trunk:
Extensions→Lines/Trunks→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Entry Mode→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of lines/trunks:
Extensions→Lines/Trunks→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select trunk range→Toggle LED
On/Off→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single line/trunk:
→ →Type ext. no.→ →→ Type line/trunk
no.→→→
To program a block of lines/trunks:
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Select trunk
range →Toggle letter G On/Off→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-220
Copy Line/Trunk Assignments
4
Use this procedure to copy outside line/trunk button assignments, pool dial-out
code restrictions (Hybrid/PBX only), and (for operator positions only) Night
Service information from one extension to another extension or block of
extensions with identical requirements.
If you are copying assignments to a block of extensions and one of the extensions
in the block is in use, the display shows the Station Busy - Pls Wait message.
Copying for the rest of the extensions in the block is delayed until the busy
extension becomes idle. The number of the busy extension is not shown. If a
DSS is attached, the LED associated with the busy extension is on. If you exit
instead of waiting for the busy extension to become idle, copying for the rest of the
extensions is canceled; however, the assignments that have already been copied
are not canceled.
If you are copying assignments from an operator position to a block of extensions
that includes both operator and nonoperator extensions, the information is copied
to only the operator positions; the nonoperator positions are not affected.
Similarly, if you are copying assignments from a nonoperator position to a block of
extensions that includes both operator and nonoperator extensions, the
information is copied to only the nonoperator positions; the operator positions are
not affected. The system does not provide an error tone to signal that the copy did
not work for all of the extensions in the block.
Summary: Copy Line/Trunk Assignments
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
4a, Extension Copy: Analog Multiline Telephone Template
4c, Extension Copy: MLX Telephone Template
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes: lines/pools assigned to an extension
Copy Option
Not applicable
Console Procedure To copy to a single extension:
Extensions→Line Copy→Single→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To copy to a block of extensions:
Extensions→Line Copy→Block→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no of first telephone in
block→Enter→Dial ext. no of last telephone in
block→Enter→Exit→Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
PC Procedure
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-221
To copy to a single extension:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext. no.→→→
To copy to a block of extensions:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type ext.
no. of first telephone in block→→Type ext. no. of last
telephone in block→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Assign Intercom or System Access Buttons
Page 4-222
4
Use this procedure to assign or change the assignments for Intercom (ICOM)
buttons used to make and receive inside calls. This includes the following types of
Intercom buttons:
■
Ring
■
Voice
■
Originate Only (Ring or Voice)
In Hybrid/PBX mode only, use this procedure to assign or change assignments for
System Access (SA) buttons used to make or receive inside and outside calls.
This procedure includes the following types of System Access buttons:
■
Ring
■
Voice
■
Originate Only (Ring or Voice)
■
Shared (Ring or Voice)
NOTES:
1.You cannot change the factory setting for Call buttons assigned to QCC
operator positions, and you cannot assign Ring, Voice, Originate Only, or
Shared buttons to QCC operator positions.
2.System Access or Intercom buttons can be assigned to only the first 10
buttons on a telephone.
3.You can assign a combination of up to 10 System Access or Intercom
buttons to each telephone (excluding QCC operator positions).
4.You can remove System Access or Intercom buttons, but at least one
must remain on the telephone.
5.Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be
assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 16 other
telephones.
Release 3.0 and later
Each System Access Ring or Voice on an individual telephone can be
assigned as a Shared System Access (SSA) button on up to 27 other
telephones.
6.System Access and Intercom buttons are centrally programmed and
cannot be programmed by individual telephone users.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-223
Summary: Assign Intercom or System Access
Buttons
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but note differences in factory settings
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjuncts: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct (DLC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Key Mode. An Intercom Ring (ICOM Ring), an Intercom
Voice (ICOM Voice), and the first eight lines connected to the
system are assigned to all analog multiline and MLX
telephones, excluding operator positions. Two Intercom Ring
buttons are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected on an
012 module. An Intercom Ring and an Intercom Originate
Only (ICOM Orig Only) button are assigned to tip/ring
equipment connected by an MFM. No outside lines are
assigned.
Behind Switch Mode. An Intercom Ring, an Intercom Voice,
and a prime line button are assigned to all analog multiline
and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions. Two
Intercom Ring buttons and a prime line button are assigned
to tip/ring equipment connected to an 012 module. An
Intercom Ring and an Intercom Originate Only Ring button
are assigned to tip/ring equipment connected by an MFM. No
outside lines are assigned.
Hybrid/PBX Mode. System Access Ring (SA Ring), System
Access Voice (SA Voice), and System Access Originate
Only Ring (SA Orig Only) buttons are assigned to all analog
multiline and MLX telephones, excluding operator positions.
Two System Access Ring buttons and a System Access
Originate Only Ring button are assigned to tip/ring equipment
(for example, single-line telephones or fax machines
connected to an 012 module). No personal line or pool
buttons are assigned.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-224
All Modes. System Access Ring (Hybrid/PBX mode) or
Intercom Ring (Key and Behind Switch modes), System
Access Voice (Hybrid/PBX mode) or Intercom Voice (Key
and Behind Switch modes), and the first 18 through 29 lines
connected to the control unit are assigned to all DLC operator
positions. The number of lines assigned depends on the type
of telephone used as a DLC operator position. Refer to the
appropriate telephone planning form for details.
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes: specific button options
Copy Option
Yes. (You can copy additional SA buttons to another
extension, but you cannot overwrite SA buttons that are
already assigned.)
Conole Procedure To program extension:
More→Cntr-Prg→Program Ext.→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Start→Program
extension→Enter→Exit→Exit
To copy extension programming:
More→Cntr-Prg→Copy ext.→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program extension:
U → → →Type ext. no.→ →Program
extension→→→
To copy extension programming:
U → → →Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext. no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-225
Analog Multiline Telephone Without Built-in
Speakerphone (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on
Intercom (HFAI) Capability
4
Use this procedure to identify analog multiline telephones with flat membrane
buttons that do not have built-in speakerphones (BIS) or Hands Free Answer on
Intercom (HFAI) capability. The models that must be identified are 5-Button,
10-Button, 34-Button, and 34-Button Deluxe analog multiline models with flat
membrane buttons.
Keep the factory setting for analog multiline models with raised plastic buttons,
including the following models: 10-Button HFAI, 34-Button with speakerphone
(SP-34), 34-Button with speakerphone and display (SP-34D), BIS-10, BIS-22,
BIS-34, BIS-22D, and BIS-34D.
This procedure is not necessary for MLX or single-line telephones.
Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones Without
BIS or HFAI Capability
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Stations
Factory Setting
All models of analog multiline telephones (except the
analog multiline display console) have BIS/HFAI capability.
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→BIS/HFAI→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type ext. no.→→→
Analog Multiline Telephones with Voice
Announce to Busy
4
Use this procedure to dedicate a voice or voice pair to provide the Voice
Announce to Busy feature on an analog multiline telephone.
The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in
the pair is the telephone’s extension number. The extension number for the
second (even-numbered) extension jack is dedicated to the Voice Announce to
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-226
Busy feature. Calls cannot be placed to the extension jack reserved for the Voice
Announce to Busy feature.
Voice Announce to Busy must be disabled at data stations.
NOTE:
This procedure does not apply to MLX telephones (Voice Announce to
Busy is automatically provided) and cannot be programmed for single-line
telephones.
Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones with
Voice Announce to Busy
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC)
Analog Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Extensions→VoiceSignl→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type ext. no.→→→
Analog Multiline Telephones in Data Stations
4
See ‘‘Data Features’’.
Auxiliary Equipment
4
The procedures in this section describe the steps needed to perform the following:
■
Identify the line/trunk jacks used for Music on Hold, loudspeaker paging,
and maintenance alarms
■
Identify the extension jacks used for fax, MERLIN MAIL, Voice Messaging
System, Automated Attendant, and AUDIX Voice Power
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-227
4
Music On Hold
Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack reserved for connection of a
music source, such as a radio, tape player, or stereo system.
NOTES:
1. If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and
pay license fees to a third party [such as the American Society of
Composers, Artists, and Producers (ASCAP) or Broadcast Music
Incorporated (BMI)]. Magic on Hold requires no such license and can be
purchased from your Lucent Technologies dealer.
2. Only one Music on Hold line/trunk jack is allowed per system.
3. You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for Music on Hold to a
line/trunk pool. If the line/trunk is currently assigned to a pool, you must
remove it before you program this option.
4. You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for use with Music on Hold to
a button on any telephone or as a Remote Access trunk, and you cannot
use the line/trunk jack identified for Music on Hold for a loudspeaker
paging system or maintenance alarm.
4
Summary: Music on Hold
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode the line/trunk designated for
Music on Hold cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool.
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Not Applicable
Valid Entries
Line/trunk number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→MusicOnHold→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type line/trunk no.→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-228
4
Procedure: Music on Hold
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Music on Hold.
Auxiliary Equipment:
>
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
CTI Link
Fax
MaintAlarms
Exit
Enter the line/trunk.
Music on Hold
Enter music on hold line
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If the line/trunk appears on the screen
and you want to remove the Music on
Hold assignment, go to Step 4.
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Assign or remove the line/trunk assignment.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Console Display/Instructions
Ã
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-229
4
Loudspeaker Paging
Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack reserved for connection of
loudspeaker paging equipment.
NOTES:
1. If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and
pay license fees to a third party (such as ASCAP or BMI). Magic on
Hold requires no such license and can be purchased from your Lucent
Technologies dealer.
2. A maximum of three single-zone or multizone loudspeaker paging
systems can be connected to the system.
3. You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for loudspeaker paging
equipment use to a line/trunk pool. If the line/trunk is currently assigned
to a pool, you must remove it before you program this option.
4. You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for loudspeaker paging
equipment use as a Remote Access line/trunk, and you cannot use its
jack for Music on Hold or maintenance alarm.
Summary: Loudspeaker Paging
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode the line/trunk designated for
loudspeaker paging cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool.
Idle Condition
Line/trunk idle
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Not Applicable
Valid Entries
Line/trunk numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→Ldspkr Pg→Dial line/trunk no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type line/trunk no.→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-230
4
Procedure: Loudspeaker Paging
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
9
Select Loudspeaker Page.
Auxiliary Equipment:
>
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
CTI Link
Fax
MaintAlarms
Exit
Enter the line/trunk.
Loudspeaker Page:
Enter loudspeaker pg line
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
If the line/trunk appears on the screen and
you want to remove the loudspeaker
assignment, go to Step 4.
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Assign or remove the line/trunk assignment.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-231
4
Fax
Use this procedure to identify the extension jacks used to connect fax machines.
In addition, you can specify the extensions to receive a message-waiting
indication (MWI) when a fax transmission is received, and specify the length of
time before the system registers that a fax has arrived and sends the
message-waiting indication.
NOTE:
Do not use this procedure for fax machines connected to analog multiline
telephones with a General Purpose Adapter (GPA). In a GPA configuration,
features cannot be assigned to the fax independently of the telephone.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
procedures.
4
Summary: Fax
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Factory Setting
10 seconds
Valid Entries
0 to 30 seconds
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→Fax→Extension→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Msg Waiting→
Dial fax machine ext. no.→Enter→Dial MWI ext.
no.→Enter→Threshold→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type ext. no.→→ → → Type
fax machine ext. no.→→Type MWI ext.
no.→→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds
→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-232
4
Maintenance Alarms
Use this procedure to identify the line/trunk jack that connects an external alerting
device that sounds or flashes when major maintenance problems occur.
You cannot assign the line/trunk identified for the maintenance alarm to a button
on any telephone or as a Remote Access trunk, and you cannot use its line/trunk
jack to connect a loudspeaker paging system or Music on Hold.
4
Summary: Maintenance Alarms
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All, but in Hybrid/PBX mode, the line/trunk designated for the
maintenance alarm cannot be assigned to a line/trunk pool.
Idle ConditionSystem idle
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Not Applicable
Valid Entries
Line/trunk number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→MaintAlarms→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type line/trunk no.→→→
4
Procedure: Maintenance Alarms
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
9
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-233
Additional Information
PC
Select Maintenance Alarms.
Auxiliary Equipment:
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
CTI Link
Fax
MaintAlarms
Exit
Enter the line/trunk jack to which the maintenance alarm is connected.
Maintenance Alarms:
Enter maintenance alarm
line number
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Slot and port number *[sspp]
Logical ID number #[nnn]
Assign or remove the line/trunk.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Voice Messaging System and Automated
Attendant
4
Use this procedure to specify the touch-tone duration and the interval between
digits in codes sent between a voice messaging system and the communications
system. The touch-tone duration and interval between digit assignment must be
the same as those programmed on the voice messaging system.
This procedure specifies the integrated voice messaging ports (line/trunk jacks)
used to connect voice messaging systems such as MERLIN MAIL Voice
Messaging System or the AUDIX Voice Power-Integrated Solution II/III
application. It also specifies the generic VMI ports (line/trunk jacks) used for
automated attendants, such as Integrated Voice Power Automated Attendant IS
II/III.
In addition, this procedure can be used to specify the number of rings before a call
transferred by the voice messaging system is sent to the backup position for both
integrated and generic VMI ports. The number of rings cannot be programmed for
individual voice messaging systems; the single setting applies for all. Use the
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-234
Group Type procedure in “Optional Group Features” to assign VMI ports as either
integrated or generic.
!
SecurityAlert:
See ‘‘Security Risks Associated with the Automated Attendant Feature of
Voice Messaging Systems’’ and ‘‘Security Risks Associated with
Transferring through Voice Messaging Systems’’ in Appendix A, ‘‘Customer
Support Information’’ for details on preventing toll fraud.
Summary: Voice Messaging System and
Automated Attendant
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
(See forms packaged with application.)
Factory Setting
Touch-tone duration: 100 ms
Interval between digits: 50 ms
Number of rings before transfer: 4
Valid Entries
Touch-tone duration: 50 to 200 ms, in increments of 25 ms
Interval between digits: 50 to 200 ms, in increments of 25 ms
Number of rings before transfer: 0 to 9
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure AuxEquip→VMS/AA→TransferRtn→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→TT Duration→Drop→Dial no. of
ms→Enter→TT Interval→Drop→Dial no. of
ms→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
rings→→→! + 0→Type no. of
ms→→→! + 0→Type no. of
ms→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-235
Procedure: Voice Messaging System and
Automated Attendant
Console Display/Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Voice Messaging/Automated Attendant.
Auxiliary Equipment:
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
CTI Link
Fax
MaintAlarms
Exit
Select Transfer Return.
VMS/AA:
Make a selection
TransferRtn
If you do not want to change the current
setting for number of rings before transfer,
go to Step 7.
TT Duration
TT Interval
Exit
Erase the current interval setting (x).
VMS TransferRtn Invervl:
Enter return interval
(0-9)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-236
Additional Information
PC
Enter the number of rings before calls are transferred to the backup position
(n = 0 to 9).
Use 0 to specify that calls are not transferred to backup position.
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select Touch-Tone Duration.
VMS/AA:
Make a selection
TransferRtn
If you do not want to change the current
setting for touch-tone duration, go to
Step 11.
TT Duration
TT Interval
Exit
Erase the current touch-tone duration setting (xxx).
Touch-Tone Duration:
Enter duration length
(50-200 ms, increment 25)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
+0
Enter the touch-tone duration in milliseconds (nnn = 50 to 200).
Dial or type [nnn].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-237
Additional Information
PC
Select Touch-Tone Interval.
VMS/AA:
Make a selection
TransferRtn
If you do not want to change the setting
for touch-tone interval, you have finished
this procedure. Go to Step 15.
TT Duration
TT Interval
Exit
Erase the current touch-tone interval setting (xxx).
Touch-Tone Interval:
Enter interval length
(50-200 ms)
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the touch-tone interval in milliseconds (nnn = 50 to 200).
Ã
Dial or type [nnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Link
4
Release 5.0 and later supports the use of an MLX port as a Computer Telephony
Integration (CTI) link.The CTI link allows applications residing on client PCs on a
LAN to communicate more easily with the MERLIN LEGEND Communications
System over a network that has a PassageWay Telephony Server for NetWare.
The following constraints apply to programming an MLX port as a CTI link:
■
CTI Links cannot be used with communications systems operating in Key
mode or Behind Switch mode.
■
CTI Link extensions cannot be programmed on tip/ring or analog multiline
telephone module ports. You must chose an extension that is on an MLX
port module (008 MLX or 408 MLX).
■
You cannot use a port programmed as a potential Operator position as the
CTI Link extension.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-238
■
You cannot use a system programming port as the CTI Link extension.
■
You cannot program a port as a CTI Link if it has a telephone
connected to it.
■
MLX modules with firmware vintage 29 do not work correctly with the CTI
Link. You must either choose a port on a board with firmware vintage that is
not 29 or replace the module with a module that has a firmware vintage
other than 29.
NOTES:
1. You should choose a module other than the one that has the system
programming port so that you can still perform maintenance and system
programming when the board with the CTI Link extension is busied-out.
2. Be sure to busy-out the board with the CTI link before starting any
programming activities.
When you add a TSAPI CTI link, the system performs the following actions:
■
The programmed buttons for that extension revert to the default for a
non-operator MLX telephone.
■
Forwarding is deactivated to the extension.
■
The extension is removed form membership in Calling Groups.
■
The extension is removed from membership in Coverage groups.
■
The Extension Directory label for the extension is changed to CTILINK.
■
The default for alarms is active on this link.
■
Dial access to pools is removed from the station.
NOTES:
1. Be sure to restore the board after finishing any programming activfities.
2. If the primary and secondary cover buttons are not removed, the
following message appears on the programming device (SPM or
MLX-20L).
CTI Link Extension xxxx
added, but it has
primary or secondary
cover buttons at other
extensions.
Please remove them.
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-239
4
Summary: CTI Link
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
(See Form 2b)
Factory Setting
No port programmed as CTI link
Valid Entries
Any extension on an MLX port board except the System Programming console port and the first and fifth ports.
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure
Busy out the board first:*
Menu→Maintenance→Slot→Dial the slot
no.→Enter→Busy-Out→Yes
* This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the
main menu, not the System Programming screen.
Program the CTI Link:
AuxEquip→CTI Link→Dial extension num-
ber→Enter→Exit→Exit
Restore the slot:*
Menu→Maintenance→Slot→Dial the slot
no.→Enter→Restore→Yes
* This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the
main menu, not the System Programming screen.
PC Procedure
Busy out the board first:
→ →Type the slot no.→ → →
Program the CTI Link:
→ →Type extension number→ →
→
Restore the slot:*
→ →Dial the slot no.→ → →
* This is a Maintenance step. Start the procedure from the
main menu, not the System Programming screen.
Procedure: CTI Link
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-240
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Auxiliary Equipment menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select CTI Link.
Auxiliary Equipment:
Make a selection
MusicOnHold
VMS/AA
Ldspkr Pg
CTI Link
Fax
MaintAlarms
Exit
Enter Extension Number.
CTI Link:
Enter extension number
If you enter an invalid extension number
you will see an error screen as shown in
“CTI Link Programming Errors.”
nnnn
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnnn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
CTI Link Programming Errors
4
During the programming of the CTI Link, entering an inappropriate extension
number can give you an error message. This section contains displays of each
screen and information about what to do if the screen appears.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-241
System Not in Hybrid/PBX Mode
4
CTI Link Extensions:
Extension xxxx Failed.
System Not in
Hybrid/PBX Mode.
Exit
This message appears if the communications system is not in Hybrid/PBX mode.
CTI Links cannot be used with communications systems operating in Key mode or
Behind Switch mode.
Not on MLX Port Module
4
CTI Link Extensions:
Extension xxxx Failed.
Not on MLX Port Module.
Exit
This message appears if you have chosen an extension that is not on an MLX
Port Module. CTI Link extensions cannot be programmed on tip/ring or analog
multiline telephone module ports. You must chose an extension that is on an MLX
port module (008 MLX or 408 MLX).
Extension Selected is System Programming Port
CTI Link Extensions:
Extension xxxx Failed.
Extension Selected is
System Programming Port.
Exit
This message appears if you have chosen an extension that has been
programmed as a system programming port, which is not permitted as the CTI link
port. You must choose another port for the CTI Link extension.
NOTE:
You should choose a module other than the one that has the system
programming port so that you can still perform maintenance and system
programming when the board with the CTI Link extension is busied-out.
4
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-242
MLX Port Module Contains Firmware Vintage 29
4
CTI Link Extensions:
Extension xxxx Failed.
MLX Port Module Contains
Firmware Vintage 29.
Exit
This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI Link is
on an MLX module with firmware vintage 29. Modules with this firmware vintage
do not work correctly with the CTI Link. You must either choose a port on a board
with firmware vintage other than 29 or replace the module with a module that has
a firmware vintage other than 29.
Port Reserved for Operator Positions
4
CTI Link Extensions:
Extension xxxx Failed.
This Port is Reserved
For Operator Positions.
Exit
This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI Link is
on the Operator Position list (as a QCC or DLC). Check your printout of the
Operator Infomation Report for programmed operator positions.
Extensions Covered by Extension
CTI Link Extension: xxxx
added, but it has.
primary or secondary
cover buttons at other
extensions.
Please remove them.
Exit
This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI Link is
covered by other extensions. You should remove the cover buttons on these
extensions.
4
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-243
4
Slot not Busied-Out
CTI Link Extension: xxxx
not added. Please
busy out slot xx first.
If this is the only MLX
port module, use SPM for
CTI link administration
Exit
This message appears when the port that you are programming as the CTI Link is
on a board that has not been busied-out. Busy-out the board.
Optional Telephone Features
4
The summaries in this section detail the steps in programming the following
optional features:
■
Extension Language
■
Pool Dial-Out Code
■
Call Restrictions
■
Copy Call Restrictions
■
ARS Restriction Level for Extensions
■
Forced Account Code Entry
■
Microphone Operation
■
Remote Call Forwarding
■
Delayed Call Forwarding
■
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed information.
4
Extension Language
Use this procedure to change the language for an MLX telephone. It applies to
Releases 1.1 and later only.
Summary: Extension Language
4
Programmable by
Users and system manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital Data
Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-244
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program a single extension:
More→Language→Extensions→Single→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select a language→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program a block of extensions:
More→Language→Extensions→Block→Dial starting ext.
no.→Enter→Dial ending ext. no.→Enter→Select a
language→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program a single extension:
U → → → →Type ext. no. → →Select
a language→→[→
To program a block of extensions:
U → → → →Type starting ext. no.→ →Type ending ext. no.→Select a language→→
→
4
Pool Dial-Out Code
Use this procedure to allow or restrict dialing pool dial-out codes and to allow or
restrict placing calls on specific line/trunk pools. Entering a pool dial-out code and
then deleting that code restricts the user from using the pool associated with the
entered code.
Summary: Pool Dial-Out Code
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct (DLC): Digital
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Main pool: 70; All other pools: 890 to 899. All telephones can
dial any line/trunk pool dial-out code.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-245
Valid Entries
Pool numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Dial OutCd→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Dial
pool dial-out code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Type pool dial-out
code→→→
4
Call Restrictions
Use this procedure to change individual telephone calling restrictions to one of the
following:
■
Unrestricted
■
Restricted from making all outgoing calls
■
Restricted from making toll calls
!
SecurityAlert:
Toll fraud can occur if telephones are not properly restricted. See ‘‘Security
of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud’’ in Appendix A for more information
and security procedures.
4
Summary: Call Restrictions
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Telephone idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Unrestricted
Valid Entries
Unrestricted, Outward restricted, Toll restricted
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Yes
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-246
Console Procedure Extensions→Restriction→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Select restriction→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type ext. no.→ →Select
restriction→→
4
Copy Call Restrictions
Use this procedure to copy calling restrictions, allowed lists, and disallowed lists.
Feature assignment must be completed for the “copy from” extension. These
features can then be copied to an individual extension or block of extensions with
identical calling restriction requirements.
NOTE:
Dial-out code restrictions are not copied.
Summary: Copy Call Restrictions
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
"Copy to” telephone(s) idle
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
Not applicable
Console Procedure To copy to a single extension:
Extensions→RestrctCopy→Single→Dial copy from
ext.no.→Enter→Dial copy to ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To copy to a block of extensions:
Extensions→RestrctCopy→Block→Dial copy from ext.
no.→Enter→Dial first no. in copy to block→Enter→Dial
last no.in copy to block→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
PC Procedure
Page 4-247
To copy to a single extension:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type
copy to ext. no.→→→→
To copy to a block of extensions:
→ →→ Type copy from ext. no. → →Type first
copy no. in copy to block→→→→
ARS Restriction Level For Extensions
4
Use this procedure to assign an ARS restriction level to an extension. Only
outgoing calls are affected; users can receive inside, local, and toll calls on
restricted telephones and can join any type of call in progress. In order to use a
route, a caller at an extension must have a Restriction Level that is equal to or
greater than the Facility Restriction Level (FRL) for the route. The restriction level
assigned to extensions is opposite to the FRL assigned to routes, where 0 is the
most and 6 is the least restrictive.
Summary: Assigning ARS Restriction Level
for an Extension
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX only
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
3 (ports assigned as VMI Generic or VMI Integrated are
maximally restricted with an FRL of 0)
Valid Entries
0-6, (0 is most restrictive and 6 is least restrictive)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→ARS Restrict→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial restriction level→Enter→Exit
PC Procdure
→U → →Type ext. no.→ →! + P →Type
restriction level→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-248
4
Forced Account Code Entry
Use this procedure to assign or remove Forced Account Code Entry. When this
feature is programmed on individual telephones, the user must enter a 1- to
16-digit account code before making an outside call.
Summary: Forced Account Code Entry
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Not assigned
Valid Entries
Assigned, not assigned
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Account→Toggle LED On/Off or Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Microphone Operation
→ →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
4
Use this procedure to enable or disable microphones on MLX telephones (except
QCC operator positions). When the microphone is disabled, users cannot use the
speakerphone to conduct conversations.
NOTE:
The microphone cannot be disabled on analog multiline telephones or on
MLX telephones used as QCC operator positions.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-249
Summary: Microphone Operation
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Factory Setting
Enabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Mic Disable→Toggle LED On/Off or
Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
4
Authorization Code
Use this procedure to assign an authorization code to an extension. The
authorization code can range from 2 to 11 characters and must be unique for each
extension.
Summary: Authorization Codes
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6h, Authorization Codes
Factory Setting
Not assigned
Valid Entries
2 - 11 characters (0 - 9, *)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Auth Code→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Dial Authorization
Code →Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type ext. no. → →Type authorization
code→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-250
4
Remote Call Forwarding
Use this procedure to allow or disallow the Remote Call Forwarding capability,
which allows users to forward calls to an outside number.
NOTE:
This feature is not recommended unless you have ground-start trunks. See
“Disconnect Signaling Reliability” and “Hold Disconnect Interval.”
!
SecurityAlert:
See ‘‘Security of Your System: Preventing Toll Fraud’’ in Appendix A for
more information and security procedures on preventing toll fraud with
Remote Call Forwarding.
Summary: Remote Call Forwarding
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Disallowed
Valid Entries
Disallowed, allowed
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Remote Frwd→Toggle LED On/Off or
Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→[ U → →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-251
4
Delayed Call Forwarding
Delayed Call Forwarding allows users to answer or screen a call arriving at their
extension before the call is forwarded through Call Forwarding, Remote Call
Forwarding, or Follow Me. The forwarding delay is the amount of time between
the arrival of the call at an extension and the time the call is forwarded. This delay
is measured in rings and can range from 0 to 9 rings. With the delay ring set to 0,
the call is forwarded immediately. Delayed Call Forwarding is only available in
Release 4.0 and later.
NOTE:
When Do Not Disturb is activated at an extension it overrides Delayed Call
Forwarding and the call is forwarded immediately.
Use this procedure to assign or remove Delayed Call Forwarding from an
extension. If you are assigning Delayed Call Forwarding to a group of sequential
extensions, begin programming the lowest extension number to take advantage of
the Next screen key (see “Standard Procedures”).
Summary: Delayed Call Forwarding
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
0 rings
Valid Entries
0 - 9 rings
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Delay Frwd→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Dial no. of delay rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type ext. no.→ →Type no. of delay
rings→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Telephones
Page 4-252
4
Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
Use this procedure to enable or disable trunk-to-trunk transfer at an extension.
When trunk-to-trunk transfer is disabled, users cannot transfer an outside call to
an outside line.
NOTE:
A single-line set can never perform a trunk-to-trunk transfer.
Summary: Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 4d, MLX Telephone
Form 4e, MFM Adjunct: MLX Telephone
Form 4f, Tip/Ring Equipment
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog
Form 5b, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Digital
Form 5c, MFM Adjunct: DLC
Form 5d, Queued Call Console (QCC)
Data Form 1a, Modem Data Station
Data Form 1b, 7500B Data Station
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→More→TrkTransfer→Toggle LED
On/Off or Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Toggle letter R On/Off or Type ext.
no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Operator Features
Page 4-253
Optional Operator Features
4
The summaries in this section affect feature programming for both DLC and QCC
operator positions and include the following:
■
Operator Hold Timer
■
DLC Operator Automatic Hold
QCC operator features are covered in the next section.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
4
Operator Hold Timer
Use this procedure to set the length of the operator hold timer for all DLCs and
QCCs. If the system operator does not pick up the call within the time
programmed, an abbreviated ring reminds the operator that a call is being held.
This option cannot be programmed for individual operator positions.
Summary: Operator Hold Timer
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
60 seconds
Valid Entries
10 to 255 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Hold Timer→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
DLC Operator Automatic Hold
4
Use this procedure to enable or disable the DLC Operator Automatic Hold feature
for DLC operator positions. When this feature is enabled, it prevents accidental
call disconnection.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-254
Summary: DLC Operator Automatic Hold
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Disabled, Enabled
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→DLC Hold→Automatic Hold Enable or
Automatic Hold Disable→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
QCC Optional Features
4
This section contains programming summaries for the following options for QCC
operator positions:
■
Hold Return
■
Automatic Hold or Release
■
Queue over Threshold
■
Elevate Priority
■
Calls-in-Queue Alert
■
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
■
Call Type Queue Priority Level
■
Message Center Operation
■
Automatic or Manual Extended Call Completion
■
Return Ring
■
Position Busy Backup
■
Voice Announce
NOTE:
These options are available in Hybrid/PBX mode only.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-255
4
Hold Return
Use this procedure to determine whether calls on hold are returned to the QCC
queue or remain on hold, on the QCC operator console, after the hold timer has
expired twice. After the hold timer expires the first time, the operator hears an
abbreviated ring as a call-on-hold reminder. If another call is received at the same
time that the hold timer expires, 10 seconds are added to the programmed
operator hold timer interval for the first call. If the QCC operator does not pick up a
call by the time the hold timer expires twice, the call can be programmed to either
remain on hold or return to the QCC queue.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
single setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
4
Summary: Hold Return
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Calls remain on hold
Valid Entries
Remain on hold, Return to QCC queue
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Hold Rtrn→Return to Queue
or Remain on Hold→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
4
Automatic Hold or Release
Use this procedure to specify whether a call in progress (on a call button) is
automatically put on hold (Automatic Hold) or disconnected (Automatic Release)
when the operator presses another button.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
single setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
Summary: Automatic Hold or Release
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-256
Factory Setting
Automatic Release
Valid Entries
Auto Hold, Auto Release
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→HoldRelease→Auto Hold or
Auto Release→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
4
Queue over Threshold
Use this procedure to specify the maximum number of calls (threshold) in the
QCC queue before system operators are notified with a tone that the threshold
has been reached or exceeded. If the threshold is set to 0, operators are not
notified.
Summary: Queue over Threshold
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
0 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Threshold→Drop→Dial no. of
calls→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Elevate Priority
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
calls→→→
4
Use this procedure to specify the length of time before calls waiting in the QCC
queue are automatically reprioritized to a higher level. If priority is set to 0, calls
are not prioritized.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-257
4
Summary: Elevate Priority
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
0 seconds
Valid Entries
0 and 5 to 30 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→ElvatePrior→Drop→Dial no.
of seconds→ Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
seconds→→→
4
Calls-In-Queue Alert
Use this procedure to specify whether each QCC operator is notified (with a single
beep) when a new call enters the QCC queue.
Summary: Calls-In-Queue Alert
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Disable
Valid Entries
Enable, Disable
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→InQue Alert→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→InQue Alert Enable or InQue Alert
Disable→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→ or
→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-258
QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
4
Use this procedure to specify which QCC operators receive the following types of
calls:
■
Dial 0 calls (internal calls to the system operator)
■
DID calls to invalid destinations (unassigned extension numbers)
■
Calls to the Listed Directory Number (extension for the QCC queue)
■
Calls programmed to return to the QCC queue (returning from directing,
camped-on, held calls, and operator parked calls)
■
Group Coverage calls
■
Forward/Follow Me calls
The QCC queue can be a receiver for the maximum number of coverage
groups (30).
Summary: QCC Operator to Receive Call Types
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
QCC operator receives the following calls:
Dial 0
Unassigned DID
Listed Directory Number
Returning
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→Select a call
type→Operator→Dial coverage group no.→Enter→Dial
ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Select a call type → →Type coverage
group no.→→Type ext.
no.→→→→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-259
Call Type Queue Priority Level
4
Use this procedure to assign a priority value (1 to 7) that determines the order in
which calls programmed to ring into the QCC queue are sent to QCC system
operator positions. A value of 1 is the highest priority.
Summary: Call Type Queue Priority Level
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
4
Valid Entries
1 to 7
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Call Types→Select call
type→Priority→Drop→Dial priority
level→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Message Center Operation
→ →→ Select call type→ →! + 0 →Type
priority level→→→→→
4
Use this procedure to designate one or more QCC operator positions to operate
as a message center. The following options are automatically set for the message
center position:
■
Incoming calls are not directed to this position.
■
Returning calls are directed to this position (return from extending and
operator parked calls).
■
All group coverage calls are directed to this position.
■
All DID calls to invalid destinations are directed to this position.
Designating message center operation does not change any call type option
programming, except that the call types mentioned above are added to the calls
received at the QCC Message Center.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-260
Summary: Message Center Operation
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
QCC extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Msg Center→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type ext. no.→→→
Extended (Directed) Call Completion
4
Use this procedure to specify one of the two basic options shown below for QCC
operator positions with a DSS only:
■
Automatic Completion. Allows one-touch call transfer; that is, calls are
transferred by touching only an extension button on the DSS. The operator
does not have to press the Release button.
■
Manual Completion. QCC operators must press the Release button to
direct a call using a DSS.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
Summary: Extended Call Completion
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Automatic Extended Completion
Valid Entries
Automatic, Manual
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→ExtndComplt→Automatic
Complete or Manual Complete→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-261
4
Return Ring
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before an unanswered directed
call is returned to the QCC queue or QCC Message Center position.
This option cannot be programmed for individual QCC operator positions. The
setting applies to all QCC operator positions.
NOTE:
If you want unanswered calls to proceed to voice mail, lengthen the return
ring setting.
4
Summary: Return Ring
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
4 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 15 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→Return Ring→Drop→
Dial no. of rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Position Busy Backup
→ →→ ! + 0→
Type no. of rings→→→
4
Use this procedure to designate the calling group to provide the backup position
for the QCC queue. The specified calling group will receive incoming calls when
all QCC operator positions are in position-busy mode.
Position Busy Backup is programmed for the QCC queue rather than for individual
QCC operator positions. The calling group designated as the QCC queue backup
serves as the backup for the Remote Access feature and as backup when the
QCC is being used as the system programming console.
Only one Position Busy Backup can be programmed per system.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
QCC Optional Features
Page 4-262
Summary: Position Busy Backup
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
No backup
Valid Entries
Calling group number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→More→QCC
Backup→Drop→Dial ext. number→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→U→→! + 0→Type ext.
number→→→
4
Voice Announce
Use this procedure to enable or disable Voice Announce for the QCC. Voice
Announce is available only on a QCC in Release 4.0 and later.
When Voice Announce is enabled, every QCC in the system has one Voice
Announce Call button, the Call 5 (Ring/Voice) button. All Intercom calls that
originate from a QCC Call 5 (Ring/Voice) button are delivered as Voice Announce
calls.
When Voice Announce is disabled, all Intercom calls originating at the QCC Call
buttons are Intercom Ringing calls.
4
Summary: Voice Announce
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6a, Optional Operator Features
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Disabled, Enabled
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Operator→Queued Call→More→Voice Annc→Enabled
or Disabled→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→U→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-263
Optional Group Features
4
This section contains programming summaries for the following optional features:
■
Call Pickup Groups
■
Group Paging
■
Group Coverage Member Assignments
■
Group Coverage Delay Interval
■
Group Calling Member Assignments
■
Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
4
Call Pickup Groups
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a call pickup group. A
call pickup group consists of telephone users who can answer each other’s calls
either by pressing a button or by dialing a code.
NOTES:
1.A maximum of 30 call pickup groups, with a maximum of 15 extensions
per group, is allowed.
2. An extension can belong to only one group.
3. Before reassigning an extension to a new group, you must remove it
from its current group.
Summary: Call Pickup Groups
4
Programmable by. System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7a, Call Pickup Groups
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Call pickup group number, extension number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→Call Pickup→Dial pickup group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type pickup group no. → →Type ext.
no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-264
4
Group Paging
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a paging group. A
paging group consists of telephone users who hear common announcements
over the telephone speakerphone. Only MLX telephones and analog multiline
telephones with speakerphones can be members of a paging group.
A maximum of six paging groups with a maximum of 10 extensions per group is
allowed. A seventh paging group, called the Page All group, is not limited and
includes all telephones connected to the system. Extensions cannot be added to
or removed from the Page All group.
To reassign an extension to a new paging group, just assign it; the extension is
automatically removed from its old paging group.
4
Summary: Group Paging
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7b, Group Paging
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Group Page→Dial paging group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type paging group no. → →Type ext.
no.→→→
Group Coverage Member Assignments
4
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a coverage group. A
coverage group is a group of senders. Coverage is an arrangement in which calls
from a group of senders are redirected to one or more receivers.
NOTE:
This procedure assigns senders. Before you begin, make certain that the
receivers for the coverage group are also programmed. Receivers can be
assigned through individual or centralized telephone programming. You
can also use the Integrated Solution III/IV feature, Integrated
Administration, to assign coverage receivers. See Chapter 4, “Centralized
Telephone Programming,” for information about the appropriate centralized
programming procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-265
A maximum of 30 coverage groups are allowed, each with an unlimited number of
members. Up to eight receivers can be assigned per coverage group.
An extension can be a sender in only one group; it can be a receiver for more than
one coverage group. A calling group can be assigned as a receiver for a coverage
group (see “Group Coverage Receiver”). In Hybrid/PBX mode only, the QCC
queue can be a receiver for up to 30 coverage groups. See ‘‘QCC Operator to
Receive Call Types’’.
If the sender’s extension has one or more personal lines assigned, the sender can
be assigned as the principal user so that calls received on the personal line are
sent to receivers programmed for Individual or Group Coverage. See “Principal
User for Personal Line.”
To reassign an extension to a new coverage group, just make the assignment; the
extension is automatically removed from its old group.
Summary: Group Coverage Member Assignments4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Group Cover→Dial group
no.→Enter→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Type group no. →→ Type ext.
no.→→→
Group Coverage Delay Interval
4
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings before a call is sent to group
coverage receivers.
Summary: Group Coverage Delay Interval
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-266
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→Cover Delay→Drop→Enter→Dial the
number of rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→! + 0→Type the number of
rings→→
Group Calling Member Assignments
4
Use this procedure to assign or remove an extension from a calling group. A
calling group is used to direct calls to a group of people who all handle the same
type of call. A single extension number is assigned to the group and is used by
both inside and outside callers to reach the group.
To reassign an extension to a new calling group, you must remove it from its old
group before programming the new assignment.
NOTES:
1. If a linear hunting pattern is indicated on the back of the system planning
form (6d), be sure to assign extensions to the group in the exact order
that they are shown on the form. The system searches for an available
member in the order in which you assign the extensions to the group.
2. A maximum of 32 calling groups with a maximum of 20 extensions per
group is allowed.
3. An extension can belong to only one calling group. A QCC cannot be a
member of a calling group. The delay announcement device should not
be programmed as a calling group member.
4. The extension status feature must be set to the Calling Group or CMS
mode before you assign members to the group. See “Extension Status.”
Summary: Group Calling Member Assignments 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-267
Valid Entries
Extension numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Members→Dial calling
group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→→Type calling group ext. no.→
→Type ext. no.→→→→
Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool Assignments 4
Use this procedure to assign or remove lines, trunks, or pools (Hybrid/PBX only)
that ring directly into a calling group.
Incoming calls on each line/trunk or pool can be directed to only one calling group.
To reassign a line/trunk or pool to a new calling group, you must remove it from its
old group before making the new assignment.
Summary: Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool
Assignments
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Line, trunk, or pool number
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Line/Pool→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type line/trunk no.→→→→
Optional Group Calling Features
4
This section includes programming summaries for the following optional group
calling features:
■
Hunt Type
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-268
■
Group Calling Delay Announcement
■
Group Coverage Receiver
■
Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds
■
Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator
■
Group Calling Calls-in-Queue Alarm Threshold
■
Group Calling External Alert for Calls-in-Queue Alarm
■
Group Type
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
4
Hunt Type
Use this procedure to assign one of the following hunt-type patterns to calling
groups:
■
Circular Hunting Pattern. The system distributes calls to group members
by hunting in a circular pattern for the first available extension after the one
that received the last call to the group.
■
Linear Hunting Pattern. The system searches for an available group
member in the order in which the extensions were assigned to the calling
group.
■
Most Idle Hunting Pattern. The system searches for the available
member that is “most idle.” This distribution scheme can be more equitable
than the circular hunting pattern.
4
Summary: Hunt Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Circular hunting pattern
Valid Entries
Circular, Linear
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Hunt Type→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Circular, Linear, or Most
Idle→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext. no.
→→ or or →→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-269
Group Calling Delay Announcements
4
Use this procedure to designate the announcement devices used to play
messages to callers while they are waiting in the queue.
Two announcement devices can be designated for each calling group; however,
more than one calling group can use the same announcement device. The
extensions to which the delay announcement devices are connected should not
be programmed as a calling group member.
If the extension jack or MFM was previously programmed as a regular extension,
you must remove all line/trunk button assignments before you designate the
extension jack as a delay announcement device.
Summary: Group Calling Delay Announcement 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
No delay announcement devices are assigned
Valid Entries
Primary Announcement, Secondary Announcement
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Primary Announcement or
Secondary Announcement→Enter Exstenion number of
Announcent device→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Group Coverage Receiver
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→ or →Type ext. no. of announcement
device→→→
4
Use this procedure to assign or remove a calling group as a receiver for a
coverage group.
Calling group member assignments must be made before you assign the group as
a receiver for a coverage group.
NOTE:
Integrated Administration uses calling group 30 as the default group to
cover AUDIX Voice Power.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-270
Summary: Group Coverage Receiver
4
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Group numbers
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Grp Coverage→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial coverage group
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext. no. →Type
coverage group no.→→→→
Group Calling Overflow and Thresholds
4
Use this procedure to designate either another calling group or the QCC queue
(Hybrid/PBX only) to receive calls when the number of calls waiting in the queue
for a calling group is equal to or greater than the programmed threshold or when
the time that a call has spent in the queue exceeds the programmed timeout
value.
Overflow coverage can be provided only by calling groups or the QCC queue
(Hybrid/PBX only), not by individual extensions. Group members can be notified
when the number of calls waiting in the queue reaches the threshold.
A calling group or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only) can provide overflow
coverage for more than one calling group; however, which group’s calls go to an
available member in the overflow calling group is unpredictable.
The factory-set extension number for the QCC Listed Directory Number is 800.
Summary: Group Calling Overflow and
Thresholds
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
4
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-271
Factory Setting
Overflow coverage: none
Threshold: 1 call
Timeout: 0 sec
Valid Entries
Overflow coverage: Backup extension number
Threshold: 1 to 99 calls
Timeout: 0 to 900 seconds
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Overflow→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Number Based Overflow→Drop→Dial no. of
calls→Enter→Time Based Overflow→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type backup ext. no.→→→! +
0 →Type no. of call→ → → ! + 0→ Type no. of
seconds→→→
Group Calling Message-Waiting Indicator
4
Use this procedure to designate the extension to receive message-waiting
indications (MWIs) for the calling group.
Only one extension can be designated as a message-waiting receiver for each
calling group; however, more than one calling group can use the same
message-waiting receiver. The extension assigned as a message-waiting receiver
does not have to be a member of the calling group.
Message-waiting indications cannot be sent to the extension assigned to the
group unless this option is programmed. The message-waiting receiver cannot
distinguish between messages left for the calling group and personal messages.
Summary: Group Calling Message-Waiting
Indicator
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
No message-waiting receiver assigned
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-272
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Message→Dial calling
group ext. no.→Enter→Dial ext. no. for MWI
receiver→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→Type ext. no. for MWI receiver→
→→
Group Calling Announcement Interval
4
Use this procedure to set the delay before the secondary announcement is played
and/or repeated after the Announcement Interval.
Summary: Group Calling Announcement Interval4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
??
Valid Entries
1-900 seconds
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→
Announcement Interval→Enter the Announcement Interval
PC Procedure
→Enter→Exit→Exit
→U → → → →Type the Announcement
Interval→→→
Group Calling Repeat Announcement
4
Use this procedure to set the secondary announcement to repeat after the
Announcement Interval.
Summary: Group Calling Repeatable
Announcement
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not repeatable
Valid Entries
Yes, No
4
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-273
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→DelayAnnce→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Repeatable
Announcement→Yes or No→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → → →Type calling group ext. no.
→ or →→→
Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm Thresholds 4
Use this procedure to specify the number of unanswered calls that wait in the
calling group queue before group members are notified with either an external
alert (an external alert is turned on when the third threshold is met) or a light on
the telephone. Group members are notified when the number of calls waiting in
the queue is equal to or greater than the programmed thresholds as follows:
■
First Threshold, flashing light
■
Second Threshold, winking light
■
Third Threshold, solid light
NOTE:
To configure only one threshold, set all thresholds to the same number. To
configure only two thresholds, set two of the thresholds to be the same
number.
Summary: Group Calling Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Threshold
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Settings
1 call, for all Thresholds
Valid Entries
1 to 99
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Queue Alarm→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Alarm Threshold 1 or
Alarm Threshold 2 or Alarm Threshold 3→Drop→Dial
no. of calls→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→! + 0→ or or →Type no. of
calls→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Optional Group Features
Page 4-274
Group Calling External Alert for
Calls-In-Queue Alarm
4
Use this procedure to designate the external alert device used to notify calling
group members when the number of calls in the queue reaches programmed
Threshold 3.
Only one external alert device can be designated for each calling group. Since the
external alert signal is continuous, it is recommended that only light-type external
alert devices be designated for the Calls-in-Queue alarm.
Summary: Group Calling External Alert for
Calls-In-Queue Alarm
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
4
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp Calling→Xtnl Alert→Dial
calling group ext. no.→Enter→Drop→Dial ext. no. for
alert→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Group Type
→U → → →Type calling group ext.
no.→→! + 0→Type ext. no. for
alert→→→
4
Use this procedure to determine whether or not the system automatically logs in
members of a calling group after a power failure. This setting also determines the
type of voice messaging interface when the calling group is used to connect voice
messaging or automated attendant applications. The settings are listed below.
■
Automatic Log Out. Used for calling groups to specify that the system
does not automatically log in calling group members after a power failure.
Calling group members must manually log themselves into the group.
■
Automatic Log In. Used for calling groups that consist of fax machines or
data stations (also called data hunt groups) to specify that the system
automatically logs in calling group members after a power failure. This
setting can also be used for calling groups consisting of telephones.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-275
■
Integrated VMI. Used when a voice messaging system that requires
special signaling for integrated operation (for example, AUDIX Voice
Power, IS II/III, or MERLIN MAIL Voice Messaging System) is connected to
one or more extension jacks assigned to a calling group. The system
automatically logs in the group members after a power failure.
■
Generic VM. Used when a voice messaging system that does not need
special signaling is connected to one or more extension jacks assigned to a
calling group. The system automatically logs in the group members after a
power failure.
4
Summary: Group Type
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7d, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Automatic Log Out
Valid Entries
Automatic log in, Automatic log out, Integrated VMI,Generic
VMI
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Extensions→More→Grp
Calling→More→Group→Type Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Specify login
type→Enter→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →U →Type calling group ext.
no→Specify login type→→→→
System Features
4
This section contains programming summaries for the optional system features
that affect all or most system users and includes the following:
■
Transfer Return Time
■
One-Touch Transfer/Hold
■
Transfer Audible
■
Type of Transfer
■
Camp-On Return Time
■
Call Park Return Time
■
Delay Ring Interval
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-276
■
Automatic Callback Interval
■
Extension Status
■
SMDR Language
■
SMDR Call Report Format
■
SMDR Call Length
■
SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report
■
SMDR Account Code Format
■
Inside Dial Tone
■
Reminder Service Cancel
■
Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension Numbers
■
Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode
■
Recall Timer
■
Allowed Lists
■
Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
■
Disallowed Lists
■
Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed programming
information.
4
Transfer Return Time
Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings before a
call transferred to another inside telephone is returned to the originator. A setting
of 0 means that transferred calls are never returned to the originator.
NOTE:
The transfer return time should not be set to 0 in a system with single-line
telephones.
Summary: Transfer Return Time
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
4 rings (Integrated Administration: 6 rings)
Valid Entries
0 to 9 rings
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Copy Option
Page 4-277
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Return Time→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ ! + 0→ Type no. of
rings→→→
One-Touch Transfer/One-Touch Hold
4
Use this procedure to assign either the One-Touch Transfer or One-Touch Hold
feature.
One-Touch Transfer allows users to initiate transfers to another extension by
pressing an Auto Dial or DSS button for that extension. If the One-Touch Transfer
feature is assigned, you must also specify whether the transfer completion is
manual (the user has to press another button to complete the transfer) or
automatic (the transfer is completed automatically).
The One-Touch Transfer feature is not available on single-line telephones.
One-Touch Hold applies to incoming central office calls only. When the user
presses an Auto Dial or DSS button to initiate a transfer, the outside caller is put
on hold. The system automatically selects an intercom facility and dials the
transfer destination. There is no transfer return function with this method.
Consequently, if the transfer destination does not answer or is busy, the user who
initiates the transfer must notify the outside caller, or the outside caller will remain
on hold.
One-Touch Hold is the factory setting in Behind Switch mode only.
Summary: One-Touch Transfer/Hold
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
One-Touch Transfer, automatic completion (One-Touch Hold
is the factory setting in Behind Switch mode.)
Valid Entries
Transfer, Hold
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-278
Console Procedure To program One-Touch Transfer:
Options→Transfer→One
Touch→Transfer→Enter→Manual or
Automatic→Enter→Exit→Exit
To program One-Touch Hold:
Options→Transfer→One
Touch→Hold→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To program One-Touch Transfer:
→→→→→ or →→→
To program One-Touch Hold:
→→→→→→
4
Transfer Audible
Use this procedure to specify whether an outside caller hears ringing (also called
ringback) or Music On Hold while being transferred. Inside callers always hear
ringback during a transfer.
NOTE:
If you use equipment that rebroadcasts music or other copyrighted
materials, you may be required to obtain a copyright license from and pay
license fees to a third party (such as ASCAP or BMI). Magic on Hold
requires no such license and can be purchased from Lucent Technologies.
4
Summary: Transfer Audible
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Music on Hold
Valid Entries
Music on Hold, Ringback
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Audible→Music on Hold or
Ringback→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
Type of Transfer
→→→ or →→→
4
Use this procedure to specify whether the system automatically selects an
Intercom or System Access Ring or Voice button when the Transfer button, or an
Auto Dial or DSS button (for One-Touch Transfer) is pressed.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-279
4
Summary: Type of Transfer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Ring button (Intercom or System Access) is automatically
selected
Valid Entries
Voice Announce, Ring
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Transfer→Type→Voice Announce or
Ring→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
4
Camp-On Return Time
Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a camped-on call (a
call transferred to a busy telephone with the Camp-On feature) is returned to the
originator.
Summary Camp-On Return Time:
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
90 seconds
Valid Entries
30 to 300 seconds, in 10-second increments
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→CampOn→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
Call Park Return Time
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
4
Use this procedure to specify the number of seconds before a call put on hold with
the Park feature is returned to the originator.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-280
Summary: Call Park Return Time
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
180 seconds
Valid Entries
30 to 300 seconds, in 10-second increments
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→CallParkRtn→Drop→Dial no. of
seconds→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of seconds→→
4
Delay Ring Interval
Use this procedure to specify the number of rings for the delay ring interval. The
delay ring interval is applied when a primary, secondary, or group cover button is
set to delayed ring.
Summary: Delay Ring Interval
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 7c, Group Coverage
Factory Setting
2 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Delay Ring→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
Automatic Callback Interval
→→! + 0→Type no. of rings→→
4
Use this procedure to specify the number of times the telephone rings at the
originator’s telephone before the system cancels a Callback request.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-281
Summary: Automatic Callback Interval
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
3 rings
Valid Entries
1 to 6 rings
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Callback→Drop→Dial no. of
rings→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→! + 0→Type no. of rings→→
4
Extension Status
Use this procedure to specify whether the Extension Status (ES) feature is used in
Hotel mode or Group Calling/Call Management System (CMS) mode.
The calling mode affects the meaning of the LEDs and the use of Auto Dial or
DSS buttons when the DLC operator position is in Extension Status mode.
In Hotel mode, telephones are restricted from making calls in Extension Status
states 1 and 2 (ES1 and ES2). In Group Calling/CMS mode, ES states reflect
member or agent status without restricting the telephones. In the Group
Calling/CMS mode, the Extension Status feature is used by the agents to log in
and out, and by the supervisor to see agent status.
4
Summary: Extension Status
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Group Calling/CMS mode
Valid Entries
Group Calling/CMS mode, Hotel mode
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→Ext Status→Hotel or
GrpCall/CMS→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-282
4
SMDR Language
Use this procedure to change the language of the SMDR reports. It applies to
Releases 1.1 and later only. The default report language is the same as that set
for the system language. See “System Language.”
4
Summary: SMDR Language
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English (matches System Language setting)
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→SMDR→Select language→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
U
→→→Select language →→
4
SMDR Call Report Format
Use this procedure to specify whether the SMDR call reports are printed in Basic
format or ISDN format. In ISDN format, automatic number identification (ANI)
information appears in the Calling Number field in place of IN (which appears in
the Basic report format). The call recording type for these calls is 1 in ISDN format
and V in Basic format.
ISDN format should be used only in conjunction with automatic number
identification (ANI) or Caller ID service subscription.
Summary: SMDR Call Report Format
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Basic format
Valid Entries
Basic, ISDN
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-283
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Format→Basic SMDR or ISDN
SMDR→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
4
SMDR Call Length
Use this procedure to set the minimum time length of a call before it is recorded
on SMDR call reports.
NOTE:
If the majority of lines/trunks are PRI, the recommended call length is 1.
See Feature Reference for more information.
4
Summary: SMDR Call Length
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory SettingBasic format
Valid Entries
Basic, ISDN
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Format→Basic SMDR or ISDN
SMDR→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report
4
Use this procedure to specify whether SMDR information should be recorded for
both incoming and outgoing calls or for outgoing calls only.
Summary: SMDR Calls Recorded on Call Report 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Incoming and outgoing
Valid Entries
In/Out, Out Only
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-284
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Call Report→In/Out or Out
Only→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
4
SMDR Account Code Format
For calls made using an authorization code, SMDR can be programmed to either
have the “home extension” or the actual authorization codes recorded in the
Account Code field if no Account Code is entered. Account Code overrides the
Authorization Code entry in the SMDR record when both features are used.
4
Summary: SMDR Account Code Format
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Home Extension Number
Valid Entries
Home Extension Number, Authorization Code
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Auth Code→Home Extesnion Number or
Authorization Code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
SMDR Talk Time
→→→ or →→→
4
In Release 4.2 and later systems, the Talk field was added to the SMDR call
record. The talk field is designed for the MERLIN LEGEND Reporter application
that is used to capture detailed information on incoming and outgoing voice and
data calls with a special emphasis on calling groups. The talk field contains the
talk-time duration—the amount of time (59:59 maximum) that a calling group
agent spends on an incoming call including any actions that the agent takes while
handling the call.
If your system includes a MERLIN LEGEND Reporter, the Talk Time option must
be enabled. All other configurations must have the Talk Time option disabled.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-285
4
Summary: SMDR Talk Time
Programmable by. System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enabled, Disabled
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→SMDR→Talk Time→Enable or Disable
PC Procedure
→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →→ or → → →
4
Inside Dial Tone
Use this procedure to set the inside (system) dial tone to be either different from,
or the same as, the outside line/trunk dial tone.
NOTE:
The inside dial tone must be the same as the outside dial tone when the
internal dial tone is not recognized by software applications or modems.
4
Summary: Inside Dial Tone
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Inside dial tone is different from outside dial tone
Valid Entries
Inside, Outside
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→InsideDial→Inside or
Outside→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-286
4
Reminder Service Cancel
Use this procedure to set the time of day when all programmed Reminder Service
calls are automatically canceled.
To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel, erase the currently programmed time
and do not enter a new time.
Summary: Reminder Service Cancel
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel:
Options→Reminder Srv→Drop→Enter→Exit
To set Reminder Service Cancel time:
Options→Reminder Srv→Drop→Dial
time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To deactivate Reminder Service Cancel:
→ →! + 0 →→ To set Reminder Service Cancel time:
→ →! + 0 →Type time→ →
Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned Extension
Numbers
4
Use this procedure to specify the extension number to receive redirected calls.
Redirected calls include calls made to unassigned numbers by remote access
users, by users on DID trunks (Hybrid/PBX only), or by users on dial-in tie trunks.
Calls can be redirected to the following locations:
■
The QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX only)
■
Another extension number
■
A calling group
Hybrid/PBX Mode Only
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-287
This setting does not affect calls received on DID trunks if you have specified that
calls to unassigned DID extensions are to receive a fast busy signal. See “Invalid
Destination.”
Summary: Redirect Outside Calls to Unassigned
Extension Numbers
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
Extension number of primary operator
Valid Entries
QCC queue extension number, other extension number
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To select QCC queue:
Options→More→Unassigned→QCC Queue→Enter→Exit
To select extension or calling group:
Options→More→Unassigned→Extension or Grp
Calling→Enter→Dial ext. no. or group no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To select QCC queue:
→U→→→→→
To select extension or calling group:
→U → → or →Type ext. no. or group
no.→→
Host System Dial Codes for Behind Switch Mode 4
Use this procedure to assign the host system dial codes for the
Transfer,Conference, and Drop features.
When multiline telephone users press the Transfer, Conference, or Drop button,
a signal is sent to the host service and the communications system features are
not accessed. Assigning dial codes to these features ensures that users can take
advantage of them through the host system.
NOTE:
This procedure applies to Behind Switch mode only.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-288
Summary: Host System Dial Codes for Behind
Switch Mode
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Behind Switch
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
No host dial codes are assigned
Valid Entries
Host system dial code of up to 6 digits
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→BehndSwitch→Select
feature→Drop→Dial host system dial
code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→U → →Select feature→ ! + 0→ Type host
system dial code→→→
4
Recall Timer
Use this procedure to designate the length of the timed flash that is sent when
Recall is used to disconnect a call and get a new dial tone without hanging up.
Both the interval of the timed flash and how Recall works depend on the type of
telephone and system operating mode.
The recall timer should be reset if multiline telephone users experience either of
the following problems:
■
Nothing happens when the user presses the Recall button on an outside
call. This indicates that the interval is too short and should be increased to
650 milliseconds or 1 second.
■
In a system operating in Behind Switch mode, the call is disconnected
when the user presses the Recall button on an outside call. This indicates
that the interval is too long and should be decreased to 350 milliseconds.
4
Summary: Recall Timer
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, System Features
Factory Setting
450 ms
Valid Entries
350 ms, 450 ms, 650 ms, 1 second
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-289
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Options→More→RecallTimer→Select
time→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→U→→Select time→→
4
Inter-digit Timers
This procedure to program inter-digit timers has not yet been implemented. If
situations occur where a caller is attempting to make an outside call and becomes
connected to an incoming call, the caller may not be able to put the incoming call
on hold or transfer the call. Setting inter-digit timers to shorter times will permit the
call to be put on hold or transfered. If you are experiencing these types of
problems, call the Lucent Technologies BCS Helpline at 1 800 628-2888.
4
Allowed Lists
Use this procedure to establish Allowed Lists. These lists are telephone numbers
that can be dialed from specified telephones, regardless of any calling restrictions
that are assigned to the telephones.
A maximum of eight lists (numbered 0 through 7) with a maximum of 10 numbers
each (numbered 0 through 9) are allowed. Each allowed number can be no more
than six digits (an area code plus an exchange) or six digits with a leading 1,
where required.
If you program 0 as the first digit of a list entry, any toll restriction assigned to the
extension is removed for calls that can be placed by a toll operator.
Special characters (such as Pause) are not permitted in Allowed List entries.
4
Summary: Allowed Lists
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Area code/exchange (1- to 6-digits with leading 1, if
necessary)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-290
Console Procedure Tables→AllowList→Dial list no. and entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type list no. and entry no.→→! +
→Type no.→→
0
Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
4
Use this procedure to assign individual telephones access to established Allowed
Lists. More than one Allowed List can be assigned to a telephone.
Summary: Assign Allowed Lists to Telephones
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0 to 7
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Tables→AllowTo→Dial list no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type list no.→→Type ext.
no.→→→
Disallowed Lists
4
Use this procedure to establish Disallowed Lists. These lists are telephone
numbers that cannot be dialed from specified telephones (including unrestricted
telephones).
A maximum of 8 lists (numbered 0 through 7) with 10 entries each (numbered 0
through 9) are allowed. Each number can have a maximum of 11 digits, including
wildcards. The Pause character (entered by pressing the Hold button) is used to
designate a wildcard character, for example, to indicate that calls to a given
exchange are restricted in every area code.
!
SecurityAlert:
Create a Disallowed List or use the pre-prepared Disallowed List number 7
(Release 3.1 and later systems only) to disallow dialing 0, 11, 10, 1700,
1809, 1900, and 976 or 1(wildcard)976. In Release 3.1 and later systems,
Disallowed List number 7 does not include 800 and 1800 and 411 and 1411,
but Lucent Technologies recommends that you add them. Assign all voice
mail port extensions to this Disallowed List. Lucent Technologies
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-291
recommends assigning Disallowed List number 7. This is an added
layer of security, in case outward restriction is inadvertently removed.
(In Release 3.1 and later systems, voice messaging ports are assigned by
default to Disallowed List number 7.)
4
Summary: Disallowed Lists
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
List #7 containing the following:
0, 10, 11, 1809, 1700, 1900, 976,
1ppp976 (p = wildcard), *
Valid Entries
1- to 11-digit number (including wildcards)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→Disallow→Dial list no. and entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→Type list no. and entry no.→→! +
→Type no.→→
0
Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones
4
Use this procedure to assign established Disallowed Lists to individual
telephones. Each restricted telephone can be assigned to more than one list.
Summary: Assign Disallowed Lists to Telephones4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6g, Call Restriction Assignments and Lists
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
0 to 7
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure Tables→DisallowTo→Dial list no.→Enter→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →Type list no.→ → Type ext.
no.→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Remote Access Features
Page 4-292
4
This section covers the following Remote Access features:
!
■
Remote Access Trunk Assignment
■
Remote Access Automatic Callback
■
Remote Access without Barrier Codes
■
Remote Access Barrier Codes
■
Remote Access with Barrier Codes
SecurityAlert:
As a customer of a new telephone system, you should be aware that there
exists an increasing problem of telephone toll fraud. Telephone toll fraud can
occur in many forms, despite the numerous efforts of telephone companies
and telephone equipment manufacturers to control it. Some individuals use
electronic devices to prevent or falsify records of these calls. Others charge
calls to someone else’s number by illegally using lost or stolen calling cards,
billing innocent parties, clipping on to someone else’s line, and breaking into
someone else’s telephone equipment physically or electronically. In certain
instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telephone
network through the use of remote access features.
The Remote Access feature of your system, if you choose to use it, permits
off-premises callers to access the system from a remote telephone by using
an 800 number or a 7- or 10-digit telephone number. The system returns an
acknowledgment signaling the user to key in his or her barrier code, which is
selected and administered by the system manager. After the barrier code is
accepted, the system returns dial tone to the user. If you do not program
specific restrictions, the user will be able to place any call normally dialed
from a telephone associated with the system. Such an off-premises network
call is originated at and will be billed from the system location.
The Remote Access feature helps the customer, through proper
administration, to minimize the ability of unauthorized persons to gain
access to the network. Most commonly, phone numbers and codes are
compromised when overheard in a public location, through theft of a wallet
or purse containing access information, or through carelessness (writing
codes on a piece of paper and improperly discarding it). Additionally,
hackers may use a computer to dial an access code and then publish the
information to other hackers. Enormous charges can be run up quickly. It is
the customer’s responsibility to take the appropriate steps to properly
implement the features, evaluate and administer the various restriction
levels, protect access codes, and distribute access codes only to individuals
who have been fully advised of the sensitive nature of the access
information.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-293
Common carriers are required by law to collect their tariffed charges. While
these charges are fraudulent charges made by persons with criminal intent,
applicable tariffs state that the customer of record is responsible for payment
of all long-distance or other network charges. Lucent Technologies cannot
be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give any
credit for charges that result from unauthorized access.
To minimize the risk of unauthorized access to your communications system
follow these basic rules:
■
Use a nonpublished remote access number.
■
Assign barrier codes randomly to users on a need-to-have
basis, keeping a log of ALL authorized users and assigning
one code to one person.
■
Use random sequence barrier codes, which are less likely to
be broken.
■
Deactivate all unassigned codes promptly.
■
Ensure that remote access users are aware of their
responsibility to keep the telephone number and any barrier
codes secure.
■
When possible, restrict the off-network capability of
off-premises callers using the Call Restrictions and
Disallowed List capabilities.
■
When possible, block out-of-hours calling.
■
Frequently monitor system call detail reports for quicker
detection of any unauthorized or abnormal calling patterns.
■
Limit remote call forward to persons on a need-to-have
basis.
■
Always use the longest length password allowed on the
system.
■
Passwords should consist of a random, non-repetitive,
hard-to-guess sequence of digits.
Remote Access Trunk Assignment
4
Use this procedure to assign or remove the trunks used for remote access. You
can also use this procedure to specify whether the Remote Access feature is
dedicated (always used for remote access) or shared (used for remote access
only when Night Service is activated).
Trunks used for dedicated remote access must not be assigned to ring into a
calling group or the QCC queue (Hybrid/PBX mode only).
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-294
In Hybrid/PBX mode, if a trunk assigned to ring into the QCC queue is also used
for shared remote access, perform the procedure below before you perform the
“QCC Operator to Receive Calls” procedure.
NOTE:
A loop start line/trunk must be programmed for Reliable Disconnect if it is to
be used for remote access (see “Disconnect Signaling Reliablility”).
Summary: Remote Access Trunk Assignment
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access
Factory Setting
Remote Access is not assigned
Valid Entries
Dedicated, Shared, No Remote
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→LinesTrunks→Dial
line/trunk no.→Enter→Specify how trunk is
used→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type line/trunk no.→ → Specify how
trunk is used→→→
Procedure: Remote Access Trunk Assignment
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-295
Select Remote Access.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Lines and Trunks.
Remote Access (DISA):
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
AutoQueuing
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
BarrierCode
Exit
Enter the line/trunk for remote access usage (nnnn).
Remote Access Usage:
Enter line/trunk port
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type:
Trunk number [nnn]
Logical ID number #[nnnn]
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console Display/Instructions
Ã
Additional Information
PC
Specify how the line/trunk is used with remote access.
Line/Trunk xxxx:
xxxx = line/trunk entered in Step 4
Select one
Dedicated
Shared
No Remote
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Dedicated,
Shared, or
No Remote.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-296
Continue to assign the remote access status to another line/trunk or
go to Step 8.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next line/trunk will
be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Remote Access Automatic Callback
4
Use this procedure either to allow remote access users to use the Automatic
Callback feature to request busy lines/trunks or pools or to prevent use of the
Automatic Callback feature.
NOTE:
This feature applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
Summary: Remote Access Automatic Callback
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access
Factory Setting
Disable
Valid Entries
Disable, Enable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→AutoQueuing→Enable or
Disable→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-297
Procedure: Remote Access Automatic Callback
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Remote Access.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Specify Automatic Callback (queuing).
Remote Access (DISA):
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
AutoQueuing
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
BarrierCode
Exit
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Allow or disallow use of automatic callback feature by remote access users.
Remote Access Auto Que:
Select one
Enable
Disable
Exit
Enter
Select Enable or
Disable.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Remote Access Without Barrier Codes
Page 4-298
4
Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for one of the following:
■
All non-tie lines/trunks
■
All tie trunks and DID trunks with Remote Access
■
DID remote access code
!
SecurityAlert:
Your system will be highly susceptible to toll fraud if you activate the Remote
Access feature without barrier codes. Lucent Technologies does not
recommend doing this.
NOTE:
If barrier code requirements have been established for remote access
users, use “Remote Access with Barrier Codes” and not this procedure.
The class of restriction assigned may be one of the following:
■
Restriction. Determines whether remote access users can make local
and/or toll calls and includes the following settings:
— Unrestricted
— Toll restricted
— Outward restricted
■
ARS Facility Restriction Level (Hybrid/PBX only). Allows or disallows use of
outgoing trunks by assigning a facility restriction level from 0 through 6.
The FRL ranges from 0 (most restrictive) to 6 (least restrictive). The FRL
value assigned here is the opposite of the FRL value assigned to the ARS
route, where a value of 0 is the least restrictive and a value of 6 is the most
restrictive.
■
Allowed Lists Assignment. Assigns Allowed Lists and is used when remote
access users are restricted from making local or toll calls.
■
Disallowed Lists Assignment. Assigns Disallowed Lists and is used when
remote access users are not restricted from making local or toll calls.
A maximum of eight Allowed or Disallowed Lists can be assigned to lines/trunks.
Class of restriction settings are assigned either to all non-tie trunks or to all tie
trunks and DID trunks. They cannot be assigned to each trunk on an individual
basis.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-299
Summary: Remote Access Without Barrier Codes 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access
Factory Setting
Call restriction: Outward restricted
ARS restriction level: 3
Valid Entries
Unrestricted, Toll Restricted, Outward Restricted; 0 to 6
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To change Call Restrictions:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE or TIE
Lines→Restriction→Select
restriction→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To change ARS Facility Restriction Level:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE or TIE Lines→ARS
Restrict→Drop→Dial FRL
value→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To assign/remove Allowed Lists:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE or TIE
Lines→Allow List→Dial list
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
To assign/remove Disallowed Lists:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-TIE or TIE
Lines→DisallowLst→Dial list
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To change Call Restrictions:
→ → or → → Select
restriction→→→→→
To change ARS Facility Restriction Level:
→ → or → → ! + P→Type FRL
value→→→→→
To assign/remove Allowed Lists:
→ → or → → Type list
no.→→→→
To assign/remove Disallowed Lists:
→ → or → → Type list
no.→→→→→
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-300
Procedure: Remote Access Without Barrier Codes 4
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Remote Access.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether you are establishing/removing a class of restrictions for
non-tie lines/trunks or for tie and DID trunks.
Remote Access (DISA):
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
AutoQueuing
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
BarrierCode
Exit
Select an option.
**** Remote Access:
Make a selection
Select Non-TIE or
TIE Lines.
●◆■
**** = option name selected in Step 3
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
BarrierCode
Restriction
ARS Restrct
DisallowLst
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-301
To change current call restrictions,
select Restriction and go to
● Restriction Procedure.
Allow List
Exit
To change ARS Facility Restriction level,
select ARS Restrct and go to
◆ ARS Restriction Procedure.
To change Allowed Lists,
select Allow List.
To change Disallowed Lists
select Disallow Lstand go to
■ Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-302
● Restriction Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify the restriction type.
**** Remote Access:
Select one
Unrestricted
Outward restrict
Toll Restrict
Exit
Enter
Select Unrestricted,
Outward Restrict, or
Toll Restrict.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ ARS Restriction Procedure
Erase the current ARS facility restriction level (n).
****
Remote Access:
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Enter ARS restriction
level (0-6)
n
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter a new ARS facility restriction level (n = 0 to 6).
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
+P
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-303
■ Allowed or Disallowed Lists Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the list you want to assign (n = 0 to 7).
*** Remote Access:
Enter **** List
*** = option name selected in Step 3
**** = option name selected in Step 5
access (0-7)
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Assign or remove the list.
Select Enter or
Delete.
Ã
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Remote Access Barrier Codes
4
Use this procedure to establish or remove barrier code requirements as well as to
establish or remove the barrier codes themselves.
Barrier codes are security passwords that restrict users from making unauthorized
remote access calls on tie and non-tie lines and trunks. Callers are allowed three
attempts per call to enter the correct remote access barrier code. If the caller
enters an incorrect barrier code or times out during code entry, the caller hears
the retry tone. The caller can erase an entered code by dialing ** (two asterisks).
Code erasure is counted as one of the three permitted attempts. After three
unsuccessful attempts, the caller hears a reorder tone and the call is
disconnected. If this happens, the SMDR will contain sixteen 0’s in the Account
Code field to flag the three failed attempts.
A maximum of 16 barrier codes are allowed for all lines/trunks. Each of the 16
barrier codes may be programmed with its own class of restriction (COR).
The systemwide barrier code length can range from a minimum of 4 characters to
a maximum of 11 characters. The default length is 7. If you enter a length that is
less than 4 or greater than 11, the entry is erased and the previous entry displays
on the screen. When the barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are
erased and must be reassigned. If the barrier code length is changed and barrier
codes are not reassigned, users can dial into remote access trunks and enter a
barrier code, but will be denied access into the remote access trunks no matter
what code is entered.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
!
Page 4-304
SecurityAlert:
Always use the longest length barrier code allowed on the system.
Barrier codes should consist of a random, non-repetitive, hard-to-guess
sequence of digits.
The time and date of the most recent change made to the systemwide barrier
code length is shown during the system programming procedure as well as on the
Remote Access DISA Information report. The SMDR record for incoming remote
access trunks includes the barrier code IDs established in this procedure.
Use numbers 0 through 9 and the asterisk ( *) to enter the barrier codes. The
codes cannot start with an asterisk and cannot contain two consecutive asterisks.
(The use of two consecutive asterisks is reserved for users to erase an incorrect
barrier code entry.)
See “Remote Access with Barrier Codes: Class of Restriction” to allow or deny
use of system features for each barrier code assigned.
Summary: Remote Access Barrier Codes
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access
Factory Setting
No barrier codes are established
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To establish or remove code requirements:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→Non-Tie or TIE
Lines→BarrierCode→Specify whether barrier codes are
required→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To change barrier code length:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Code
Info→Code Length→Drop→Dial code
length→Enter→Yes→Exit→Exit→Exit
To change barrier code:
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Code
Info→Code Entry→Dial code ID→Enter→Drop→Dial
code→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
PC Procedure
Page 4-305
To establish or remove code requirements:
→ → or → → Specify whether barrier
codes are required→→→→
To change barrier code length:
→ →→ → → ! + 0→ Type code
length→→→→→
To change barrier code:
!
→→→→→Type Code ID→→
+ 0→Dial code length→→→→
4
Procedure: Remote Access Barrier Codes
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Remote Access.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Console Display/Instructions
Select an option.
Remote Access (DISA):
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
AutoQueuing
Additional Information
PC
●
Select Non-TIE or TIE Lines to specify
whether barrier codes apply to non-tie
or tie trunks and go to
● Establish or Remove Barrier Code
Requirements Procedure.
BarrierCode
Exit
Select BarrierCode to change the barrier
code length or edit a barrier code, and
continue with Step 4.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-306
Select Code Information.
RemoteAccss BarrierCode:
Make a selection
SProg/Maint
Allow List
Code Info
DisallowLst
Restriction
ARS Restrct
Exit
◆n
Select an option.
To change the length of the barrier code,
select Code Length and go to
◆ Change Barrier Code Length
Procedure.
BarrierCode Info:
Make a selection
Code Length
Code Entry
To edit a specific barrier code,
select Code Entry and go to
n ChangeBarrier Code Procedure.
Exit
● Establish or Remove Barrier Code Requirements Procedure
Select Barrier Code.
**** = option name selected in Step 3
**** Remote Access:
Make a selection
BarrierCode
DisallowLst
Restriction
ARS Restrct
Allow List
Exit
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify barrier code requirement.
**** Remote Access:
**** = option name selected in Step 3
Select one
Barrier Code Required
Barrier Code Not Required
Exit
Enter
Select Barrier Code Required or
Barrier Code Not Required.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-307
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆Change Barrier Code Length Procedure
When the systemwide barrier code length is changed, all barrier codes are erased
and must be reassigned. Users will be denied access to remote access trunks
until new barrier codes are assigned.
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current code length (nn).
Barrier Code Length:
Changed: mm/dd/yy hh:mmAM
Enter code length (4-11)
The screen displays the date and time
of the most recent change to the barrier
code length.
nn
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
Enter the new length of the code (nn = 4 to 11).
Dial or type [nn].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-308
Additional Information
PC
Respond to the confirmation prompt.
Barrier Code Length:
If you select No, return to Step 5 of the
main procedure.
All Barrier Codes will
be erased.
Do you want
to continue?
Select Yes to continue.
Yes
No
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
◆ Change Barrier Code Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the barrier code ID number (nn = 1 to 16).
RemoteAccss BarrierCode:
Enter Barriercode number
(1-16)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current code (nnnn).
BarrierCode xx :
Enter yy digits (0-9, *)
code
xx = barrier code ID number entered in
Step 1
yy = barrier code length
nnnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+P
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-309
Additional Information
PC
Enter a code of up to 11 digits [N = any combination of 0 to 9 and an asterisk (*)].
Ã
Dial or type [N].
Continue to assign the code to another barrier code ID number or go to
Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next barrier code number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Remote Access with Barrier Codes
4
Use this procedure to change the class of restriction for individual remote access
barrier codes. The class of restriction assigned to each barrier code allows or
denies the use of the following system features:
■
Restriction. Determines whether remote access users can make local
and/or toll calls, and includes the following settings:
— Unrestricted
— Toll restricted
— Outward restricted
■
ARS Facility Restriction Level (Hybrid/PBX only). Allows or restricts use of
outgoing trunks by assigning a facility restriction level (FRL) from 0 through
6. The FRL ranges from 0 (most restrictive) to 6 (least restrictive). The FRL
value assigned here is the opposite of the FRL value assigned to the ARS
route, where a value of 0 is the least restrictive, and a value of 6 is the most
restrictive.
■
Allowed Lists Assignment. Assigns Allowed Lists and is used when remote
access users are restricted from making local or toll calls.
■
Disallowed Lists Assignment. Assigns Disallowed Lists and is used when
remote access users are not restricted from making local or toll calls.
A maximum of eight Allowed or Disallowed Lists can be assigned to each barrier
code. Class of restriction settings apply to individual barrier codes.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-310
NOTE:
If barrier code requirements have not been established or have been
removed for remote access users, do not use this procedure. See ‘‘Remote
Access Without Barrier Codes’’.
Summary: Remote Access with Barrier Codes
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3a, Incoming Trunks: Remote Access
Factory Setting
Call restrictions:
Barrier Code: outward restricted
All other barrier codes: unrestricted
ARS restriction level: 3
Valid Entries
Unrestricted, Toll Restricted, Outward Restricted; 0 to 6
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure
LinesTrunks→RemoteAccss→BarrierCode→Restrictio
n→Dial barrier code no.→Enter→Select
restriction→Enter→ARS Restrict→Dial barrier code
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial FRL value→Enter→Allow List
or Disallow List→Dial barrier code no.→Enter→Dial list
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ → Type barrier code
no.→→Select restriction→→→Type barrier
code no.→→! + P→Type FRL value→→ or
→Dial barrier code no.→ → → → →
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-311
Procedure: Remote Access with Barrier Codes
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Lines and Trunks menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Remote Access.
Lines and Trunks:
>
Make a selection
LS/GS/DS1
PRI
TIE Lines
Copy
TT/LS Disc
RemoteAccss
DID
Pools
Exit
Toll Type
Select Barrier Code Access.
Remote Access (DISA):
Make a selection
LinesTrunks
AutoQueuing
Non-TIE
TIE Lines
BarrierCode
Exit
Select an option.
RemoteAccss BarrierCode:
Make a selection
SProg/Maint
Allow List
Codes
DisallowLst
●◆■
To change current call restrictions,
select Restriction and go to
● Change Current Call
Restrictions Procedure.
Restriction
ARS Restrct
Exit
To change ARS Facility Restriction level,
select ARS Restrict and go to
◆ Change ARS Restriction Procedure.
To change Allowed/Disallowed lists, select
Allow List or Disallow Lst and go to
■ Change Allowed/Disallowed Lists
Procedure.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-312
● Change Current Call Restrictions Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the barrier code number (nn = 1 to 16).
Barrier Code:
Enter Barriercode number
(1-16)
Ã
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Specify a restriction.
Barrier Code xx:
Select one
xx = barrier code number entered in
Step 1
Unrestricted
Outward Restrict
Toll Restrict
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Unrestricted,
Outward Restrict, or
Toll Restrict.
Continue to assign the restriction to another barrier code number or go to
Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next barrier code
number will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-313
◆ Change ARS Restriction Procedure
Enter a barrier code number (nn = 1 to 16).
Barrier Code:
Enter Barriercode number
(1-16)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current ARS FRL (n).
Barrier Code xx:
xx = barrier code entered in Step 1
Enter ARS Restriction
level (0-6)
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
+P
Enter a new ARS FRL (n = 0 to 6).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
!
Continue to assign the level to another barrier code number or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next barrier code number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
System Features
Page 4-314
■ Change Allowed/Disallowed Lists Procedure
Enter a barrier code number (nn = 1 to 16).
Barrier Code:
Enter Barriercode number
(1-16)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter the number of the Allowed List or Disallowed List you want
to assign or remove (n = 0 to 7).
Barrier Code xx:
xx = barrier code entered in Step 1
Enter AllowedList access
(0-7)
Delete
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Assign or remove the Allowed List or Disallowed List from
the barrier code number.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
lists from the barrier code number by repeating
Steps 3 and 4.
Continue to assign or remove lists from the next barrier code number
or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next barrier code number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-315
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
Automatic Route Selection
4
This section contains programming procedures for the following Automatic Route
Selection (ARS) features:
■
1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements
■
ARS Tables
■
Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns
■
Pool Routing
■
Facility Restriction Level (FRL)
■
Digit Absorption
■
Other Digits
■
N11 Special Numbers Tables
■
Dial 0 Table
■
Voice and/or Data Routing
NOTE:
ARS applies to Hybrid/PBX mode only.
1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements
4
Use this procedure for calls placed within the same (home) area code as the
system. The procedure allows you to specify whether or not the local telephone
company requires a 1 to precede the 7-digit number. The two available settings
are:
■
Within Area Code. Requires that a 1 plus a 7-digit number must be dialed;
the system checks the 1 + 7-digit tables for routing.
■
Not Within Area Code. Does not require that a 1 precede the 7-digit
number (the system does this automatically).
Summary: 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-316
Factory Setting
Not within area code
Valid Entries
Not within area code, Within area code
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→ARS 1+7Dial→Within Area Code or Not
within Area Code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→ or →→→
Procedure: 1 + 7-Digit Dialing Requirements
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Select ARS 1+7 Digit Dial.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-317
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Specify whether 1+7-digit dialing is required within the home area code.
1+7 Digit Dialing:
Select one
Within Area Code
Not within Area Code
Exit
Enter
Select Within Area Code or
Not within Area Code.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
ARS Tables
Use this procedure for the following tasks:
■
To specify type of table (6-digit, area code, exchange,
or 1 + 7-digit number)
■
To add or change area codes to be included in each table
■
To add or change exchanges to be included in each table
A maximum of 16 tables can be established, numbered 1 through 16. Each table
can have a maximum of 100 entries, numbered 1 through 100. Tables 17 and 18,
the Default Toll and Default Local tables respectively, cannot be changed.
The first entry in a 6-digit table must be the area code. Subsequent entries consist
of exchanges within that area code.
Area code tables can contain only area codes.
Exchange and 1 + 7-digit tables can contain only exchanges.
The wildcard character (Pause) cannot be used to enter area codes or exchanges
in ARS tables.
4
Summary: ARS Tables
Programmable by. System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-318
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→ARS Input→Dial table
no.→Enter→Specify table type→Enter→Dial entry
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →→ Type table no.→ →Select table
type→→Type entry no.→→! + P→Type
no.→→→
4
Procedure: ARS Tables
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select ARS Table Input.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-319
Enter the table number (nn = 1 to 16).
ARS Table Type:
Enter table number (1-16)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Specify a table type.
xx = table number entered in Step 4
ARS Table xx:
Select one
6-Digit
Area Code
Exchange
1+7
Exit
Enter
Select 6-Digit,
Area Code,
Exchange, or
1+7.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the table entry number (nnn = 1 to 100).
xx = number entered in Step 4
Table xx:
Enter entry number
(1-100)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-320
Erase the current entry (nnn).
xx = table number entered in Step 4
xxx = entry number entered in Step 8
ARS Table xx, Entry xxx:
Enter area code or
exchange
nnn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter an area code or exchange of up to 3 digits (0 to 9) to include in the table.
Ã
Dial or type [nnn].
Continue to enter area code or exchange for another table entry number or go
to Step 13.
Select Next.
Return to Step 10. The next table will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns
4
Use this procedure to specify the time of day that calls are routed using
Subpattern B routing information.
Subpatterns are used to provide two different routing patterns according to the
time of day. This allows you to take advantage of lower rates that may apply to
some or all lines, or to change restrictions on some facilities during off hours.
The stop time for Subpattern B is the start time for Subpattern A.
Enter the time in 4-digit, 24-hour notation, and use leading zeros as necessary.
Summary: Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-321
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and
Special Numbers Tables
Factory Setting
No time is specified, thus all calls are routed according to
Subpattern A.
Valid Entries
0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→Sub B Start→Dial table
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial start time→Enter→Sub B
Stop→Dial table no.→Enter→Drop→Dial stop
time→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type table no.→→! +
→Typestart time→→→Type table no.→→
! + P →Type stop time→ → →
P
Procedure: Start and Stop Times for Subpatterns 4
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-322
Select Subpattern B Start.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Enter the table number (nn = 1 to 18).
Subpattern B Start Time:
Enter table number (1-18)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console Display/Instructions
Ã
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current start time (xxxx).
Subpattern B Start Time:
Enter start time hour
(00-23) and min (00-59)
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
Enter the start time for Subpattern B (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59).
Dial or type [hhmm].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-323
Select Subpattern B Stop Time.
ARS:
>
This is also the start time for Subpattern A.
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Enter the table number (nn = 1 to 18).
Subpattern B Stop Time:
Enter table number (1-18)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nn].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Console Display/Instructions
Ã
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current stop time (xxxx).
Subpattern B Stop Time:
Enter stop time hour
(00-23) and min (00-59)
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter the stop time for Subpattern B (hh = 00 to 23, mm = 00 to 59).
Dial or type [hhmm].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-324
4
Pool Routing
Use this procedure to identify the trunk pools on which to route calls to area codes
and/or exchanges included in ARS tables.
A maximum of six routes (numbered 1 through 6) can be specified for each
subpattern. Pool routing is programmed for Tables 1 through 16. Tables 17 and
18, the Default Toll and Default Local tables respectively, cannot be changed.
4
Summary: Pool Routing
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→Sub A Pools or Sub B Pool→Dial table no.
and pool route no.→Enter→Dial pool dial-out
code→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ → or → Type table no. and pool route
no.→→Type pool dial-out code →→→
4
Procedure: Pool Routing
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-325
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Select pool routing for Subpattern A or B.
ARS:
●◆
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Select Sub A Pools and go to
● Subpattern A Procedure.
Select Sub B Pool and go to
◆ Subpattern B Procedure.
● Subpattern A Procedure
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
SubPattern A Pools:
Enter table (1-18) and
route (1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls.
ARS Pool Tablexx Routex:
Enter pool dialout code
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-326
Continue to enter pool dial-out code(s) for another route or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next route will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Subpattern B Procedure
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
ARS Route Pattern:
Enter table (1-18) route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits on which to route calls.
ARS Pool (xx,x):
Enter pool dialout code
Ã
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Continue to enter pool dial-out code(s) for another route or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next route will be
displayed on Line 1.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-327
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Facility Restriction Level
Use this procedure to assign a Facility Restriction Level (FRL) to each route. The
FRL ranges from 0 (least restrictive) to 6 (most restrictive) and is used to restrict
user access to the route. The FRL assigned to telephones and remote access
users is the opposite of the FRL assigned to routes, where 0 is the most restrictive
and 6 is the least restrictive.
NOTE:
Pool routes must be programmed before you assign Facility Restriction
Levels.
Facility Restriction Levels are assigned to Tables 1 through 18. Tables 17 and 18,
the Default Toll and Default Local tables respectively, cannot be changed.
Summary: Facility Restriction Level
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables
Factory Setting
3 (beginning with Release 3.1, Table 18, the Default Local
table has a factory setting of 2)
Valid Entries
0 to 6
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→Sub A FRL or More and Sub B FRL→Dial
table no, and pool route no.→Enter→Dial restriction
level→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ → or U and →Type table no. and pool
route no.→→Type restriction level→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-328
4
Procedure: Facility Restriction Level
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
SysRenumber
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Select Facility Restriction Level for Subpattern A or B.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
●◆
Select Sub A FRL and go to
● Subpattern A Procedure.
Press More, select Sub B FRL, and go to
◆ Subpattern B Procedure.
U
● Subpattern A Procedure
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
Sub A Restriction Level:
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Ã
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-329
Additional Information
PC
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6).
ARS Table xx Route x:
Enter restriction level
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
(0-6)
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [n].
Ã
Continue to enter FRL for another pool route or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next pool route
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Subpattern B Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
Subpattern B Restriction:
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-330
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the restriction level (n = 0 to 6).
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
ARS Table xx Route x:
Enter restriction level
(0-6)
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Continue to enter FRL for another pool route or go to Step 5.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next route will be
displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Digit Absorption
Use this procedure to specify how many of the digits dialed (0 through 11) by the
caller should be absorbed (not sent to the telephone company’s central office) by
the system when a call is made on an identified route.
Entries of 1 through 11 indicate that the system should not send the specified
number of digits, starting with the first digit dialed by the user after the dial-out
code.
Digit absorption is assigned to Tables 1 through 18.
NOTE:
Pool routes must be programmed before you assign digit absorption.
Summary: Digit Absorption
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-331
Factory Setting
0
Valid Entries
0 to 11
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→SubA Absorb or More and SubB
Absorb→Dial table no. and pool route
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial no. of digits to
absorb→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ → or U and →Type table no. and pool
route no.→→! + P→Type no. of digits to
absorb→→→
4
Procedure: Digit Absorption
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-332
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
Select absorb digits for Subpattern A or B.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
PC
●◆
Select Sub A Absorb and go to
● Subpattern A Procedure.
Press More, select Sub B Absorb,
and go to
◆ Subpattern B Procedure.
U
● Subpattern A Procedure
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
Subpattern A Absorption:
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current number of absorbed digits (nn).
ARS Table xx Route x:
Enter table absorption
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
digits (0-11)
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter the number of digits to be absorbed (nn = 1 to 11).
Dial or type [nn].
Ã
+0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-333
Additional Information
PC
Continue to enter absorbed digits for another route number for Subpattern A or
go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next route number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Subpattern B Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the pool route (m = 1 to 6) numbers.
Sub B Absorption
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Dial or type [nnm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Ã
Erase the current number of absorbed digits (nn).
ARS Table xx Route x:
Enter number of digits
xx = table number entered in Step 1
x = route number entered in Step 1
to absorb (0-11)
nn
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-334
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Enter the number of digits to be absorbed (nn = 1 to 11).
Ã
Dial or type [nn].
Continue to enter absorbed digits for another route number for
Subpattern B or go to Step 6.
Select Next.
Return to Step 3. The next route number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Other Digits
Use this procedure to specify other (extra) digits that must be added by the
system to the beginning of the number dialed by the caller, when calls are placed
on an identified route.
NOTE:
Pool routes must be programmed before you assign other digits.
A maximum of 20 digits can be added, in any combination of the digits 0
through 9.
Special characters such as switchhook flash, Stop, and # cannot be
included as extra digits. Pause is allowed in every position but the first.
Other digits are assigned to Tables 1 through 18.
4
Summary: Other Digits
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3f, Automatic Route Selection Tables
Factory Setting
0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-335
Valid Entries
Up to 20 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→Sub A Digit or More and Sub
BDigit→Dial table no. and pool route
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial digits to be
added→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ → or U and →Type table no. and pool
route no.→→! + P Type digits to be
added→→→
4
Procedure: Other Digits
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Select other digits for Subpattern A or B.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Select Sub A Digit.
Press More and
select Sub B Digit.
U
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-336
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Additional Information
PC
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and the route (m = 1 to 6) number.
x = subpattern selected in Step 3
Sub x Other Digits:
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Ã
Dial or type [nnm].
Enter
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Erase the current number of other digits (n).
ARS Table xx, Route x:
Enter other digits
>
xx = table number entered in Step 4
x = route number entered in Step 4
n
Backspace
Next
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
!
Enter up to 20 other digits (n = any combination of 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Continue to specifiy other digits for another route in the specified subpattern or
go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 6. The next route number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+P
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-337
4
N11 Special Numbers Tables
Use this procedure to specify Facility Restriction Level (FRL) and/or digits that
must be added when emergency numbers in the N11 Special Numbers table are
dialed (for example, 411, 811, or 911).
Subpattern B, absorb, and pool routing cannot be programmed for the N11
Special Numbers tables.
Summary: N11 Special Numbers Tables
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and
SpecialNumbers Tables
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To change Facility Restriction Level:
Tables→ARS→More→SpeclNumber→ARS
FRL→Drop→Dial FRL value→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
To program other digits:
Tables→ARS→More→SpeclNumber→ARS
Digit→Drop→Dial digits→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
To change Facility Restriction Level:
→→U→→→! + P→Type FRL
value→→→
To program other digits:
→→U→→→! + P→Type
digits→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-338
Procedure: N11 Special Numbers Tables
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Go to the second screen of the ARS menu.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Press More.
U
Select N11 Special Numbers Table.
ARS:
Make a selection
Sub B FRL
Dial 0
SubB Absorb
Sub A Data
Sub B Digit
Sub B Data
SpeclNumber
Exit
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Console Display/Instructions
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-339
Additional Information
PC
●◆
Select an option.
To change the current Facility Restriction
Level, select ARS FRL and go to
● Change FRL Procedure.
ARS Specl Numbers Table:
Make a selection
ARS FRL
ARS Digit
To specify other digits to add, select
ARS Digit, and go to
◆ Other Digits Procedure.
● Change FRL Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current restriction level (x).
Special Numbers Pool:
Enter restriction level
(0-6)
x
Backspace
Exit
Press Drop.
Enter
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter an FRL value (n = 0 to 6).
Dial or type [n].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
◆ Other Digits Procedure
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current other digits (x).
xx = table number entered in Step 4
ARS Table xx:
Select one
6-Digit
Area Code
Exchange
1+7
Exit
Enter
Select 6-Digit,
Area Code,
Exchange, or
1+7.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-340
Enter up to 20 other digits (n = any combination of 0 to 9).
Ã
Dial or type [n].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
4
Dial 0 Table
Use this procedure to specify pool routing, Facility Restriction Level (FRL), and
Other Digits for the Dial 0 table.
Only one route can be specified. The Subpattern B route cannot be specified for
this table, and digit absorption cannot be specified.
4
Summary: Dial 0 Table
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables
Factory Setting
3
Valid Entries
0 to 6
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→More→Dial 0→ARS Pool or ARS FRL or ARS
Digits→Dial value→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →U → → or or
value→→→→
→Type
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-341
4
Procedure: Dial 0 Table
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Go to the second screen of the ARS menu.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Press More.
U
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-342
Additional Information
PC
Select Dial 0.
ARS:
Make a selection
Sub B FRL
Dial 0
SubB Absorb
Sub A Data
Sub Digit
Sub B Data
SpeclNumber
Exit
●◆■
Specify an option.
Operator Assist Calls:
Make a selection
ARS Pool
To program pool routing, select
ARS Pool and go to
● ARS Pool Procedure.
ARS FRL
To change the current FRL Level, select
ARS FRL and go to
◆ ARS FRL Procedure.
To change other digits, select ARS Digits
and go to
■ ARS Digits Procedure.
ARS Digits
Exit
● ARS Pool Procedure
Erase the current pool dial-out code (xxx).
Dial 0 Pool:
Enter pool dialout code
xxx
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Enter a pool dial-out code of up to 3 digits.
Dial or type [nnn].
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
+0
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-343
◆ ARS FRL Procedure
Console/Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Erase the current restriction level (x).
Dial 0 Restriction:
Enter restriction level
(0-6)
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Enter a restriction level (n = 0 to 6).
Dial or type [n].
!
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
■ ARS Digits Procedure
Erase the current other digits (x).
Dial 0 Other Digits
Enter other digits
x
Backspace
Exit
Enter
!
Enter up to 20 other digits (n = any combination of 0 to 9).
Dial or type [n].
Press Drop.
Ã
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
+0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-344
Console Display/Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit three times.
4
Voice and/or Data Routing
Use this procedure to route voice, data, or voice and data. The voice/data
specification is used mainly in conjunction with PRI. See ‘‘PRI Facilities’’,
especially its subtopic, ‘‘Outgoing Tables’’.
Voice/data routes can be associated with Subpattern A or Subpattern B.
Summary: Voice and/or Data Routing
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 3g, Automatic Route Selection Default and Special
Numbers Tables
Factory Setting
Voice
Valid Entries
Voice Only, Data Only, Voice/Data
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Tables→ARS→More→Sub A Data or Sub B Data→Dial
table no. and route no.→Enter→Select
capability→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →U → or →Type table no. and route
no.→→Select capability→→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Automatic Route Selection
Page 4-345
Procedure: Voice and/or Data Routing
Console/Display Instructions
4
Additional Information
PC
Select the Tables menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Select Automatic Route Selection.
Tables:
Make a selection
AllowList
ARS
AllowTo
Disallow
DisallowTo
Exit
Go to the second screen of the ARS menu.
ARS:
>
Make a selection
ARS 1+7Dial
SubA Absorb
ARS Input
Sub A Digit
Sub A Pools
Sub B Start
Sub A FRL
Sub B Stop
Exit
Sub B Pool
Press More.
U
Select Sub A Data or
Sub B Data.
Select Subpattern A or B.
Tables:
Make a selection
Sub B FRL
Dial 0
SubB Absorb
Sub A Data
Sub Digit
Sub B Data
SpeclNumber
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Night Service
Page 4-346
Enter the table (nn = 1 to 18) and route (m = 1 to 6) numbers for
Subpattern A or B.
Subpattern x Voice/Data:
x = option name selected in Step 4
Enter table (1-18), route
(1-6)
Backspace
Exit
Enter
Ã
Dial or type [nnm].
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Select the appropriate capability.
ARS Pool Tablexx Routex:
Select capability
xx = table number entered in Step 5
x = route number entered in Step 5
Voice Only
Data Only
Voice/Data
Next
Exit
Enter
Select Voice Only,
Data Only, or
Voice/Data.
Continue to specify other entries for another route or go to Step 9.
Select Next.
Return to Step 7. The next route number
will be displayed on Line 1.
Save your entry.
Select Enter.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit twice.
Night Service
4
This section contains summary information for the following optional Night Service
features:
■
Night Service Group Assignment
■
Night Service with Outward Restriction
■
Night Service with Time Set
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Night Service
Page 4-347
For detailed information see Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’.
Night Service Group Assignment
4
Use this procedure to assign extensions and calling groups to a Night Service
group for coverage after hours.
A maximum of eight Night Service groups can be assigned (no more than one for
each operator position assigned). Any number of extensions can be assigned to a
Night Service group, and an extension can belong to more than one group.
A calling group can also be assigned to a Night Service group. This applies only to
Release 2.0 or later.
Beginning with Release 4.1 this option allows the system manager to assign
outside lines to Night Service groups in addition to extensions and calling groups
for coverage after hours.
Any number of outside lines can be assigned to a Night Service group. Each
outside line can belong to more than one group.
Summary: Night Service Group Assignment
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9a, Night Service: Group Assignment
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To assign a calling group to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Calling Group→Dial ext.
no. of Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial calling group
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
To assign an extension to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Extensions→Dial ext. no. of
Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial ext. no. of
telephone→Enter→Exit→Exit
To assign an outside line to a Night Service group:
NightSrvce→GroupAssign→Extensions→Dial ext.
no. of Night Service attendant→Enter→Dial outside line
number (801-880)→Enter→Exit→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Night Service
PC Procedure
Page 4-348
To assign a calling group to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service attendant
→→Type calling group no.→→→
To assign an extension to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service
attendant→→Type ext. no. of
telephone→→→
To assign an outside line to a Night Service group:
→ →→ Type ext. no. of Night Service
attendant→→Type outside line number
(801–880)→→→
Night Service with Outward Restriction
4
Use this procedure to prevent unauthorized use of telephones after hours. This
feature requires the user to enter a password to make a call when Night Service is
activated, unless one of the lists below applies. It also requires an operator to
enter a password in order to manually activate Night Service.
To remove the password requirement follow the procedure below and delete the
current password (press the Drop button).
This procedure is also used to establish the following lists:
■
Emergency Allowed List. A list of telephone numbers that can be dialed
without a password.
■
Exclusion List. A list of extensions that are exempt from password
requirements.
NOTE:
A maximum of 10 telephone numbers can be included on the Emergency
Allowed List, each number with a maximum of 12 digits.
Extensions included in the Exclusion List keep normal call restrictions (if
any are assigned); however, they are not protected in any other way from
unauthorized use after hours.
AUDIX Voice Power jacks are automatically included on the Exclusion List.
Summary: Night Service with Outward
Restriction
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9b, Night Service: Outward Restrictions
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Night Service
Page 4-349
Factory Setting
No password
Valid Entries
4 digits (any combination of 0 to 9)
Inspect
Yes (Exclusion List)
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure NightSrvce→OutRestrict→Drop→Dial
password→Enter→Emergency→Dial item
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial telephone
no.→Enter→ExcludeList→Dial ext. no.
PC Procedure
→Enter→Exit→Exit
→ →! + 0 →Type password→ → →Type
item no.→→! + 0→Type telephone
no.→→→Type ext. no.→→→
Night Service with Time Set
4
Use this procedure to specify the time of day and the days of the week when Night
Service is to be activated and deactivated.
Enter the time of day as 4 digits, using 24-hour notation. Enter the day of the week
as a single digit (0 to 6), with 0 being Sunday. If you enter an invalid number, the
system truncates the number.
If you change the system time while Night Service is active, Night Service is
deactivated automatically and you must manually reactivate it.
Operators can override the timer and turn Night Service on and off manually. This
feature can be deactivated when out-of-the-ordinary situations occur (for
example, a midweek holiday).
NOTE:
For Release 2.1 and earlier, after setting Start and Stop time for Night
Service the current day of the week for Night Service must be set using the
following procedure.
NightSrvce→Day of Week→Dial the current day of the week→Enter→Exit
If system programming information is being loaded into memory from a backup
diskette, the current day of the week must be reset.
Night Service can be turned off by using the following procedure:
NightSrvce→Day of Week→Dial 9→Enter→Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Night Service
Page 4-350
NOTE:
The current day of the week for Night Service must be reset if system
programming information is being loaded into memory from a backup.
Summary: Night Service with Time Set
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9c, Night Service: Time Set
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Day: 0 to 6; Time: 0000 to 2359
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To add or change start/stop time:
NightSrvce→Start→Drop→Dial start day and
time→Enter→Stop→Drop→Dial stop day and
time→Enter→Exit
To activate/deactivate:
NightSrvce→Time Control→Off or On→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
To add or change start/stop time:
→ →! + 0 →Type start day and
time→→→! + 0→Type stop day and
time→→
To activate/deactivate:
→ → or → → Night Service with Coverage Control
4
Use this procedure to enable or disable the Night Service Coverage Control
option to automatically control the status of programmed Coverage VMS Off
buttons.
When the Coverage Control option is enabled, a transition into Night Service
(either by pressing a Night Service button or automatically by the Time Set
option) automatically deactivates the VMS Coverage Off (Release 2.0 or later)
buttons (LED is off) and allows outside calls to go to VMS Coverage at night.
When the system is taken out of Night Service (either by pressing a Night
Service button or automatically by the Time Set option), programmed VMS
Coverage Off buttons are activated (LED is on) and outside calls are prevented
from going to VMS Coverage during the day.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Labeling
Page 4-351
When the Coverage Control option is disabled, Night Service status has no effect
on programmed VMS Coverage Off buttons.
Summary: Night Service with Coverage Control 4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 9c, Night Service: Options
Factory Setting
Disabled
Valid Entries
Enable or Disable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure NightSrvce→CoverContrl→Enable or
Disable→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
→→ or →→
4
Labeling
This section contains summaries on adding or changing labels for the following:
■
Extension Directory
■
Lines or Trunks
■
Posted Message
■
Group Calling
■
System Speed Dial Directory
For detailed information see Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’.
Extension Directory
4
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display set
telephone users to identify the person calling or leaving a message. This
procedure is also used to program the Extension Directory feature for MLX
telephones.
A label can have a maximum of seven characters.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Labeling
Page 4-352
Summary: Extension Directory
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Directory→Extension→Dial ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter
label→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type ext. no.→→! +
→Type label→→→→
U
0
4
Lines or Trunks
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display set
telephone users to identify the line or trunk being used.
4
Summary: Lines or Trunks
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 2c, System Numbering: Line/Trunk Jacks
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→LinesTrunks→Dial line/trunk
no.→Enter→Drop→Dial label→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type line/trunk no.→→! +
→Type label→→→
U
0
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Labeling
Page 4-353
4
Posted Message
Use this procedure to add or change existing posted messages. The posted
messages allow callers with display telephones to know why the called extension
does not answer.
Each posted message can have a maximum of 16 characters. Messages 2
through 20 can be changed through programming. Message 1, Do Not Disturb,
cannot be changed.
4
Summary: Posted Message
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8a, Label Form: Posted Message
Factory Setting
First 10 messages
Valid Entries
1 to 20
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→PostMessage→Dial message
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter
message→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type message no.→→! +
→Type message→→→
U
0
4
Group Calling
Use this procedure to establish alphanumeric system labels for display telephone
users to identify calling groups.
A label can have a maximum of seven characters.
4
Summary: Group Calling
Programmable by. System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 6e, Group Calling
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Print Reports
Copy Option
Page 4-354
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Grp Calling→Dial calling group ext.
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter label→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→Type calling group ext. no.→→! +
→Type label→→→
U
0
System Speed Dial Directory
4
Use this procedure to establish System Speed Dial numbers for all system users.
You can also use this procedure to enter the alphanumeric labels shown on
display telephones (for the System Directory feature of the MLX telephone).
A total of 130 numbers (System Speed Dial plus System Directory) can be
entered, with a maximum of 11 characters per label.
Speed dial code assignments are 600 through 729.
Summary: System Speed Dial Directory
4
Programmable by
System Manager, Integrated Administration
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 8b, System Speed Dial
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
600 to 729
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Labeling→Directory→System→Dial dial code
no.→Enter→Drop→Enter label Enter→Backspace→Dial
telephone no.→Enter→Yes or
No→Enter→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→→Type dial code no.→→! +
→Type label→→→Type telephone
no.→→ or →→ →→
U
0
Print Reports
4
Use the procedures in this section to change the language for system reports and
to print the system reports.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Print Reports
Page 4-355
4
Report Language
Use this procedure to change the language of the system reports. It applies to
Release 1.1 and higher. Unless you change the report language, reports are
printed in the language chosen as the system language.
4
Summary: Report Language
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
English
Valid Entries
English, French, Spanish
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure More→Language→Printer→English or French or
Spanish→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
U
→
→→ →→
Printing System Reports
or
or
4
The communications system can be used to print a variety of reports. You can
print individual reports or use the All option to print the entire set of available
reports, including all report sections and options. See Appendix F for samples of
the print reports.
Use this procedure to print the reports listed below. With the exception of Trunk
Information, the dash lists under the bullets show the sections of each report that
automatically print when the report option is selected.
■
All
— Each report
— All report options
■
System Set Up
■
System Dial Plan
— Pools
— Telephone Paging Zones
— Direct Group Calling
— Lines/Trunks
— Stations (Extensions)
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Print Reports
■
Label Information
— Telephone Personal Directory
— Message Numbers and Posted Messages
■
Trunk Information1
— TIE
— DID
— Loop/Ground
— General
■
T1 Information
■
PRI Information
■
Remote Access
— General Options
— Non-TIE Restrictions
— TIE Restrictions
— Barrier Code Restrictions
■
Operator Information
— Position
— General Options
— DSS Options
— QCC Operators
— Operator Information
1.
■
Allowed Lists
■
Allowed Lists Assigned to Extensions
■
Disallowed Lists
■
Disallowed Lists Assigned to Extensions
■
Automatic Route Selection
■
Tables
■
Extension Directory
■
System Directory
■
Group Page
■
Extension information
■
Group Coverage
■
Group Calling
Trunk option must be specified
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-356
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Print Reports
Page 4-357
■
Night Service
■
Call Pickup Groups
■
Error Logs
■
Authorization Codes
■
BRI Information Report
■
Switch 56 Data Information Report
NOTE:
If you select the All option, keep in mind that the reports take several
minutes to print. You may want to schedule use of the printer during
off-peak hours.
If you select a report for which there is no information, the report header still
prints.
Print reports if you cannot back up your system programming information.
Do not print reports if your system must handle more than 100 calls per
hour.
If you are printing from the console, your printer must be connected to the
SMDR port. If you are programming on a PC with SPM, you have the
following choices:
■
Print reports on the SMDR printer (if available)
■
Print reports on the PC printer
■
Save reports (on hard disk or floppy)
■
View reports (browse)
See Chapter 2, ‘‘Programming with SPM’’, for details.
Summary: Printing System Reports
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required
Planning Form
Not applicable
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Any saved report
Inspect
No
Copy Option
No
4
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Print Reports
Page 4-358
Console Procedure To print trunk information:
More→Print→Trunk Info→Select trunk type→Exit
To print extension information:
More→Print→More→Ext Info→Dial extension
number→Enter→Exit
To print all other reports:
More→Print→Select report→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →
→→
→→
To print trunk information:
U→
→ →Select trunk type→
To print extension information:
U
U
Type extension
number
→ →
→→
→
To print all other reports:
U→
→Select report→
To save report on disk:
U
Select report
screen below simulated console
To view report:
# +
Select GOTO FLOPPY from
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Data Features
Page 4-359
4
Data Features
This section covers the programming procedure for analog multiline telephones
connected by a General-Purpose Adapter (GPA) to a data terminal and modem.
Other data programming procedures can be found in earlier sections of this book
(see Table 4-5), with the exception of Ringing options. See Chapter 5,
‘‘Centralized Telephone Programming’’, for information about Ringing options.
Table 4-5.
Data Features: Programming Procedures
Procedure
Section/Chapter
Assign Trunks or Pools to Data
Stations
Chapter 3, ‘‘Telephones’’
Copy Trunk Assignments
Chapter 3, ‘‘Telephones’’
Assign Intercom or System
Access Buttons
Chapter 3, ‘‘Telephones’’
Pool Dial-Out Code
(Hybrid/PBX only)
Chapter 3, ‘‘Optional Telephone Features’’
Call Restrictions
Chapter 3, ‘‘Optional Telephone Features’’
Copy Call Restrictions
Chapter 3, ‘‘Optional Telephone Features’’
Forced Account Code Entry
Chapter 3, ‘‘Optional Telephone Features’’
Ringing Options
Chapter 5, ‘‘Centralized Telephone
Programming’’
Assign Data Hunt Group
Members
Chapter 3, ‘‘Group Calling Member
Assignments’’
in ‘‘Optional Group Features’’
Assign Data Hunt Group Trunks Chapter 3, ‘‘Group Calling Line/Trunk or Pool
or Pools
Assignments’’ in ‘‘Optional Group Features’’
Group Type
Chapter 3, ‘‘Group Type’’ in ‘‘Optional Group
Calling Features’’ (choice restricted to
Automatic Log ln)
Analog Multiline Telephones at Data Stations
4
Use this procedure to dedicate a pair of extension jacks to provide the voice and
data to an analog data station.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Data Features
Page 4-360
The extension number associated with the first (odd-numbered) extension jack in
the pair is the telephone’s extension number. The extension number for the
second (even-numbered) extension jack is dedicated to Data.
NOTE:
Calls cannot be placed to the extension jack reserved for Data.
Voice Announce to Busy must be disabled at data stations.
When you select Enter after entering the voice extension number in the
data entry screen, the system automatically assigns the data extension.
Use the Inspect feature to verify extension pairs.
Summary: Analog Multiline Telephones at Data
Stations
4
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
System idle
Planning Form
Form 2a, System Numbering: Extension Jacks
Form 4b, Analog Multiline Telephone
Form 5a, Direct-Line Console (DLC): Analog Data
Form 2a, Analog Data Station
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Extension numbers of analog sets
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
Yes
Console Procedure More→Data→Voice/Data→Dial ext. no.→Enter→Exit
PC Procedure
U
→
→→
→
Type ext. no.→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Data Features
Page 4-361
Procedure: Analog Multiline Telephones at Data
Stations
4
Console Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the System Programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press More.
U
Select Data.
System Programming:
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
_
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Select Voice/Data.
Data:
Make a selection
Voice/Data
Enter the voice (odd-numbered) extension number of the pair (nnnn).
Data Voice/Data
Enter voice/data pair
The system automatically assigns the
data (even-numbered) extension. Use the
Inspect feature (Inspct or D)to view
the
pair.
Delete
Backspace
Exit
Enter
SP: “Entering an Extension”
Ã
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Data Features
Page 4-362
Assign or remove the voice/data pair.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
voice/data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit.
4
2B Data
Use this procedure to program an MLX port for 2B Data capability. Assigning a
port for 2B Data allows both B-Channels of a single MLX port to be used for up to
128 Kbps data calls. 2B Data capability is available on in Release 4.0 and later.
Consider the following when programming ports for 2B Data capability:
■
The extension number of the port cannot be the first or fifth port on an MLX
module. These ports are designated as potential operator ports and cannot
be used for 2B Data connections.
■
The extension number must correspond to the adjunct extension number of
an MLX port. By default these extensions begin with “7.”
■
Devices that are not intended for 2B Data should not be connected to a
port programmed for 2B Data. These devices probably will not work.
4
Summary: 2B Data
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
Key, Hybrid/PBX
Idle Condition
Required
Planning Form
Data Form 2b, Digital Data Station
Factory Setting
None
Valid Entries
Adjunct extension number up to four digits
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure Data→2B Data→Dial adjunct ext.
no.→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→
Type adjunct ext. no.→
→→
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Data Features
Page 4-363
4
Procedure: 2B Data
Console Display Instructions
Additional Information
PC
Go to the second screen of the system programming menu.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
System
Extensions
SysRenumber
Options
Operator
Tables
LinesTrunks
AuxEquip
Exit
NightSrvce
Press More.
U
Select Data.
System Programming:
>
Make a selection
Labeling
Language
Data
Print
Cntr-Prg
Exit
Select 2xB Data.
Data:
Please make a selection
Voice/Data
2xB Data
Exit
Enter the adjunct extension number of an MLX port [xxxx].
Delete
The adjunct extension number cannot
correspond to the 1st or 5th port of an
MLX module. Use the inspect feature
(Inspect or D) to view the 2B Data
pairs.
Enter
Dial or type [xxxx].
2xB Data/Video:
>
Enter adjunct extension
number of an MLX port
xxxx
Backspace
Exit
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Integrated Administration
Console Display/Instructions
Page 4-364
Additional Information
PC
Assign or remove the 2B data pair.
Select Enter or
Delete.
You may continue to assign or remove additional
2B Data pairs by repeating Steps 4 and 5.
Return to the System Programming menu.
Select Exit two times.
Integrated Administration
4
NOTE:
This feature applies only to Release 2.0 or later of the communications
system.
Integrated Administration is available in Hybrid/PBX and Key modes only.
4
Capabilities
The Integrated Administration capability of Integrated Solution III (IS III) simplifies
the programming of common information for the communications system (the
switch), AUDIX Voice Power and, if it is installed, the AT&T FAX Attendant
System. Since the AUDIX Voice Power and FAX Attendant applications use
some of the same information programmed on the switch, Integrated
Administration lets the installer or system manager make changes or additions to
this information just once, instead of on both sides of the connection. Using
Integrated Administration reduces programming time and effort and ensures that
the switch and the applications are in agreement.
Common Information
4
The switch and the applications share the following information:
■
System numbering of extensions, trunks, and pools
■
System labeling of the user (or other input name) associated with each
extension, trunk, and pool
■
The coverage Group that sends its calls to the applications
■
The calling group set up for each service of the applications
■
The Reliable Disconnect setting for loop-start trunk
■
The Delay Ring and Coverage Delay Interval settings
■
The Transfer Return Time and VMS Transfer Return Interval settings
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Integrated Administration
Page 4-365
4
Set Up
You cannot program the common information until you have completed basic
setup programming for the communications system. Use SPM or the system
programming console to program the following:
■
Mode of operation
■
System numbering
■
System operator positions
■
Phantom extensions
■
Lines/Trunks to pools assignment
NOTE:
If you do not want all lines to have the same application services, you must
assign lines with the same services to the same pools
4
Programmable Options
When you complete the system setup, you can use the information in Table 4-6 to
program through Integrated Administration.
Table 4-6.
Programming through Integrated Administration
Option
Factory Setting
Range
Automated Attendant Calling Group
770
Call Answer Calling Group
7926
FAX Response Calling Group
7924
Information Service Calling Group
7927
Message Drop Calling Group
7928
Voice Mail Calling Group
7925
Coverage Group
30
Reliable Disconnect
yes
Delay Ring
2 rings
1 to 6 rings
Coverage Delay Ring
3 rings
1 to 9 rings
VMS Transfer Return Interval
6 rings
0 to 9 rings
Transfer Return Time
6 rings
0 to 9 rings
1 to 30
The information programmed through Integrated Administration is shared with the
communications system control unit. The information does not have to be
programmed again when you program the communications system.
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Integrated Administration
Issue 1
June 1997
Page 4-366
If extension numbering is changed on the switch (using the MLX-20L console or
SPM), the switch and the application database will no longer be in agreement. To
reduce the chance that such changes will disrupt communication between the
switch and the application(s), Integrated Administration includes an automatic
reconciliation program that runs every day at 3:00 a.m. The program compares
the application database to the switch programming and brings the two into
agreement. The program makes changes, as necessary, only to the application
database, according to the rules listed in Table 4-7. The reconciliation program
does not change the switch programming.
In a Release 2.0 or earlier system with Integrated Solution III Version 1.0 or 1.1,
use the System Renumbering feature cautiously. When this feature is used, all
messages and greetings for users that have been renumbered are erased from
AUDIX Voice Power when the automatic reconciliation program runs at 3:00 a.m.
NOTE:
The reconciliation program is disabled in IS III Version 1.2.
Table 4-7.
Database Reconciliation Rules
Extension appears in ...
Switch
yes
yes
Application Database
yes
no
no
yes
(regular extension)
no
yes
yes
(special extension)
yes
(special extension)
Action
None
Extension is added to database. Can be
added as AUDIX Voice Power or AUDIX
Voice Power/FAX Attendant subscriber
through Extension Directory screen.
Extension is deleted from database and
removed as an AUDIX Voice Power or
AUDIX Voice Power/FAX Attendant
subscriber.
Extension is retained as
special-purpose extension in database.
Extension is converted from
special-purpose extension to regular
extension in database.
When you finish programming the common information, you can complete any
remaining system programming procedures. See the Feature Reference for
additional information on Integrated Administration.
Complete information on IS III can be found in the Integrated Solution III System
Manager’s Guide, Order No. 555-601-010 and the Integrated Solution III
Installation and Maintenance Guide, Order No. 555-601-011.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-367
4
Memory Card
A PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) interface
slot is present on the processor module. The slot is a standard interface through
which information can be added to or obtained from the system using a memory
card. The PCMCIA interface slot accepts one memory card at a time.
This section covers the following memory card functions:
■
Memory Card Formatting
■
Restore
Summary information is included for the following procedures:
■
Backup
■
Automatic Backup
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed information on
Backup and Automatic Backup.
4
Card Types
The types of memory cards are described below. The card type is identified by a
preprinted, color-coded label.
■
Upgrade Card. This card is used for MERLIN LEGEND Communication
System software upgrades. The upgrade can be performed by the system
manager using the memory card and the Maintenance option on the SPM
Main Menu. See Maintenance and Troubleshooting for information about
this feature.
■
■
This card is identified by an orange label with black lettering.
Translation Card. The backup and restore procedures previously
available to system managers through SPM (using the PC and floppy
disks) can now be performed using the memory card and the new
Backup/Restore option on the System menu. A new automatic backup
feature permits you to set the system to perform automatic backups to the
memory card on a daily or weekly basis. See ‘‘Backup’’ and ‘‘Restore’’ for
more information.
This card is identified by a white label with black lettering.
■
Forced Installation. For use by qualified service technicians only, this
card is used when the system software has been corrupted and a
re-installation must be done at the customer site. The use of the card for
forced installation is reserved for emergency situations in which the system
software on the processor module has been damaged.
This card is identified by an orange label with black lettering. In addition,
black stripes are present on the card to distinguish it from an upgrade card.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-368
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES PROPRIETARY
THIS MEMORY CARD CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF
LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES THAT IS NOT TO BE DISCLOSED OR USED
EXCEPT IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE AGREEMENTS.
Figure 4-4.
Inserting the Card
MEMO
CAUTION
• Do not drop, bend or crush
• Keep away from moisture
• Keep connector clean
• Avoid high temperatures and direct
sunlight
Release 3.5
Write protect
COPYRIGHT© 1993 LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Four (4) Megabytes
INSERT
COM code 123456789 MFR 00DR 00
MERLIN Legend® Translation Card
Figure 4-4 shows a sample Translation card.
PCMCIA Memory Card
4
To insert the card, hold the card with the Lucent logo facing up and the arrow
pointing toward the slot. See Figure 4-5 for the proper way to insert the memory
card into the slot on the processor module.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-369
PROCESSOR
MODULE
Error/Status Code
Display
MERLIN Legend
Forced Installation
SN 00DR 00000004
123456789
Four (4) Megabytes
…PROPERTY OF AT&T…
PCMCIA
Interface Slot
INSERT
THIS
®
MEM
AT&T ORY C AT&T
PR
AR
TH
IN AC AT IS D CON OPRIETA
COR NOT TO TAINS
R
DAN
PR Y
CE W BE DIS OPRIE
C
TA
ITH
APPLLOSED RY IN
ICAB OR U FORM
LE AG SED
AT
REE EXCEPION OF
COPY
MEN
T
TS.
ALL RIGHT©
RIG
HTS 1993 AT
RES
ERVE&T
D
Push in
to remove
Memory
Card
Memory
Card
Alarm Status
LED
Figure 4-5.
Inserting the Memory Card
Memory Card Formatting
4
The memory card may have to be formatted before you begin any manual or
automatic backup procedures. This section details the screens and messages
that appear during the format procedure.
!
CAUTION:
Formatting overwrites previous data on the memory card. Make
certain that there is no important information on the card before you
begin formatting.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Unformatted Card
Page 4-370
4
Memory Card Backup:
Inserted Memory Card is
not the correct type.
Do you want it formatted?
Yes
No
Exit
If you begin a backup procedure with an unformatted or incorrectly formatted card,
this screen appears.
The inserted memory card is not the correct type. You have the option of
formatting the memory card as a translation memory card or repeating the backup
procedure with a different memory card.
NOTE:
Only 4 MB Series I or Series II PCMCIA memory cards may be formatted,
except those already formatted as translation cards.
If a memory card cannot be formatted, a message appears on screen.
These messages are noted in the procedures as appropriate.
A memory card may need to be formatted if it is intended for use as a
translation card but is currently blank or contains data other than MERLIN
LEGEND Communication System backup files.
Format Warning
4
Format Memory Card:
All data on card will be
DELETED.
Do you want to continue?
Yes
No
Exit
This screen appears if you respond to the system prompt to format the memory
card.
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-371
Select Yes (or press ) to begin the memory card format. Table 4-8 lists the
screen messages that may appear while formatting is in progress.
Table 4-8.
Memory Card Formatting Messages
Message
What it Means
Formatting Memory Card
The format is in progress.
Formatting of Memory
Card Completed
The format was successful and has
completed.
Memory Card cannot be
formatted
The memory card cannot be formatted.
Remove the card and repeat the procedure
with another card.
Formatting of Memory
Card FAILED
The format was unsuccessful. Remove the
card and repeat the procedure with another
card.
Missing Card or Card Not
Inserted Correctly
Verify that the card is inserted correctly and
repeat the procedure.
If Home or Menu are pressed during a format procedure, the format is terminated.
The data on the memory card may be lost. See Chapter 1, ‘‘Programming Basics’’
for detail about these keys.
4
Backup
Use this procedure to make a copy of your customized system data. You should
create a backup at least three times during system installation (so that
programmed information is not lost), and once after each system upgrade, service
technician visit, or major system reconfiguration.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed information
and a list of errors that can occur during a backup procedure.
4
Summary: Backup
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required (No extensions are allowed to be in
programming mode except system programming console)
Planning Form
Not applicable
Factory Setting
Not applicable
Valid Entries
Not applicable
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-372
Console Procedure Insert memory
card→System→Back/Restore→Backup→Select backup
file→Dial the new backup
filename→Enter→Yes→Exit→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→ →
→
Insert memory card→ →
file→Type the new backup
filename→ → → →
Select backup
4
Automatic Backup
Use this procedure to schedule automatic daily or weekly backups of your
customized system data.
See Chapter 3, ‘‘Common Administrative Procedures’’, for detailed information
and a list of errors that can occur during a backup procedure.
4
Summary: Automatic Backup
Programmable by
System Manager
Mode
All
Idle Condition
Not required (No extensions are allowed to be in
programming mode, including the system programming
console)
Planning Form
Form 1, System Planning
Factory Setting
Weekly backup: Sunday at 2:00 am
(if daily backup is selected, time is factory set for 2:00 am)
Valid Entries
Daily: hhmm (00 to 23; 00 to 59)
Weekly: dhhmm (0 to 6; 00 to 23; 00 to 59)
Inspect
Yes
Copy Option
No
Console Procedure To program daily backup:
Insert memory card→System→Back/Restore→
Auto Backup→Daily→Drop→Dial time→Enter
→Exit→Exit
To program weekly backup:
Insert memory card→System→Back/Restore→
Auto Backup→Weekly→Drop→Dial day and time
→Enter→Exit→Exit
PC Procedure
→→→
To program daily backup:
Insert memory card→ →
P →Type time→
→ →
!
+
Issue 1
June 1997
MERLIN LEGEND Communications System Release 5.0
System Programming 555-650-111
4
Programming Procedures
Memory Card
Page 4-373
→→→→→
To program weekly backup:
Insert memory card→ →
P →Type day and time →
!
+
4
Restore
Use this procedure to restore system conditions that were backed up onto a
translation memory card. The information in a backup file on the translation card is
copied to the system.
The restore procedure is necessary under the following conditions:
■
System RAM is corrupt.
■
A previously stored set of system conditions is preferred over the current
set.
■
The processor module i